SAPBPM col10

SAP Business Process Management

PARTICIPANT HANDBOOK INSTRUCTOR-LED TRAINING Course Version: 10 Course Duration: 5 Day(s) Material Number: 50120640

SAP Copyrights and Trademarks

© 2014 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice. Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors. •

Microsoft, Windows, Excel. Outlook, and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

•

IBM, DB2, DB2 Universal Database, System i, System iS, System p, System pS, System x, System z, System zlO, System z9, zlO, z9, iSeries, pSeries, xSeries, zSeries, eServer. z/VM, z/OS, iS/OS, S/390, OS/390, OS/ 400, AS/400, S/390 Parallel Enterprise Server, PowerVM, Power Architecture, POWER6+, POWER6, POWERS+, POWERS, POWER, OpenPower, PowerPC, BatchPipes, BladeCenter, System Storage, GPFS, HACMP, RETAIN, DB2 Connect. RACF, Redbooks, OS/2. Parallel Sysplex, MVS/ESA, AIX, Intelligent Miner, WebSphere. Netfinity, Tivoli and lnformix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.

•

Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S. and other countries.

•

Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat. Postscript, and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

•

Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation

•

UN IX, X/Open. OSF /1. and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open Group.

•

Citrix, ICA, Program Neighborhood, MetaFrame, WinFrame, VideoFrame, and MultiWin are trademarks or registered trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc.

•

HTML, XML. XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C~ . World Wide Web Consortium. Massachusetts Institute of Technology.

•

Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.

•

JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technology invented and implemented by Netscape.

•

SAP. R/3, SAP NetWeaver, Duet. PartnerEdge, ByDesign, SAP BusinessObjects Explorer. Stream Work, and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countries.

•

Business Objects and the Business Objects logo. BusinessObjects, Crystal Reports. Crystal Decisions, Web Intelligence, Xcelsius, and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd. Business Objects is an SAP company.

•

Sybase and Adaptive Server, iAnywhere, Sybase 36S, SQL Anywhere, and other Sybase products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sybase, Inc. Sybase is an SAP company.

All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies. Data contained in this document serves informational purposes only. National product specifications may vary.

These materials are subject to change wit hout notice. These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies ("SAP Group") for informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of any kind. and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty.

© Copyright . All rights reserved.

111

IV

©Copyright. All rights reserved .

Typographic Conventions American English is the standard used in this handbook. The following typographic conventions are also used.

This information is displayed in the instructor's presentation

Demonstration

Procedure

Warning or Caution

Hint

Related or Additional Information

Facilitated Discussion

User interface control

Example text

Window title

Example text


v

VI


Contents xi

Course Overview

1

Unit 1:

2

Business Process Management

Lesson: Describing Business Process Management Components Unit 2:

Process Modeling Environment

Lesson: Building a Development Infrastructure Exercise 1: Build a Development Infrastructure Lesson: Selecting a Process Modeling Perspective Exercise 2: Create a Process with the Composite Designer

49

Unit 3:

51 61 70 76 83 91 94 103 107

Business Process Model

Lesson: Notating a Business Process Model with BPMN 2 .0 Exercise 3 : Notate a Business Process Model with BPMN 2.0 Lesson: Adding Activities to the Business Process Lesson: Adding Tasks to the Business Process Exercise 4: Create a Notification Activity Lesson: Adding report activities to a business process Lesson: Extending the Strategic Business Process with Events Exercise 5: Handle a Boundary Exception Lesson: Extending the Strategic Business Process with Gateways

111

Exercise 6: Create a Business Process with Events

121

Lesson: Adding activities to a business process

145

146 151 156 161 178 186 189

Unit 4:

Business Process Model Extension

Lesson: Managing Process Roles Exercise 7: Connect Process Roles to Pools and Lanes Lesson: Managing Process Context Exercise 8: Create an XSD File and Define Process Context Lesson: Creating Data Mappings Lesson: Applying data transformations using functions Exercise 9: Develop and Use Custom Mapping Functions


VII

217

Business Process Management User Interface

218

Lesson: Generating a User Interface with Visual Composer

227

Exercise 10: Create a Visual Composer User Interface Component

245

Lesson: Creating a User Interface with Web Dynpro

253

Exercise 11: Create a Web Dynpro User Interface Component

262

Lesson: Managing a User Interface with Adobe Offline Forms

269

Exercise 12: Manage a User Interface with Adobe Offline Forms

291

Lesson: Creating a User Interface with SAPUl5

299

Unit 6:

Business Rules Creation and Management

300

Lesson: Managing Business Rules

307

Lesson: Creating Rules with Rules Composer

313

Exercise 13: Integrate Business Rules Management into a Process

352

Lesson: Managing Business Rules with Rules Manager

359

Exercise 14: Modify Business Rules using Rules Manager

375

Unit 7:

Service Handling

376

Lesson: Calling a Web Service from an Automated Activity

385

Exercise 15: Import and Assign a Service Interface Definition

395

Lesson: Configuring App lication Communication

413

Exercise 16: Configure Inbound and Outbound Communication

429

VIII

Unit 5:

Unit 8:

Process Start

431

Lesson: Starting a Business Process

433

Exercise 17: Start a Business Process from the Process Repository

441

Lesson: Starting a Business Process as a Web Process

447

Exercise 18: Start a Business Process as a Web Service

455

Lesson: Administering Business Processes

463

Exercise 19: Test a Business Scenario

472

Lesson: Troubleshooting Running Processes

479

Exercise 20: Debug a Running Process

485

Lesson: Managing Process Desk Tasks

489

Exercise 21: Visualize a Business Process

©Copyright. All rights reserved.

503

Unit 9:

Process and Task Customization and Extension

505

Lesson: Managing Processes with AP ls

519

Exercise 22: Use Analytics to Check a Process

524

Lesson: Managing the Business Process Management In box

531

Exercise 23: Configure and Use the Business Process Management In box

537

Exercise 24: Use Business Process Management lnbox Custom Attributes

542

Lesson: Extending Processes with an SAPUl5 User Interface

543

Exercise 25: Create an SAPUl5 Start User Interface and Start a Process

565

Lesson: Solving Recurring Problems with Enterprise Integration Patterns

573

Exercise 26: Implement an Aggregator Pattern


IX

x


Course Overview TARGET AUDIENCE This course is intended for the following audiences:

•

Application Consultant

•

Development Consultant

•

Industry I Business Analyst Consultant

•

Developer

•

IT Support

•

Super I Key I Power User


XI

XII



Lesson 1

2

Describing Business Process Management Components

UNIT OBJECTIVES

•

Describe Business Process Management components


1

Unit 1 Lesson 1 Describing Business Process Management Components

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to describe the Business Process Management (BPM) components. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson , you will be able to:

•


BPM Introduction

liii

Business

Agility~-----i

+ Operational Efficiency

Business Process Reengineering

Business Network Transformation

Enterprise Resource Planning

Business Process Platform

1990s

2000s

2010s

Figure 1: From Operational Efficiency to Business Agility

During the 1990s, with ERP and business process re-engineering, SAP provided great operational excellence by harmonizing business processes within the company (for example, Finance (Fl) and Costing (CO) with Production Planning (PP) and Materials Management (MM)). This gave companies a set of best practices to standardize their business on. Today, customers use industry-specific market places to switch suppliers with a single mouse click. This increased market transparency has triggered a shift of power to the customer. In addition, the impact of globalization in some industries - especially services and manufactured goods - has created an extreme abundance of supply, which also is giving more power to the customer and results in intensified global competition. Increased customer power and intensified global competition have the following effects:

2


Lesson: Describing Business Process Management Components

•

Increased pressure to deliver innovative products and align business models to ever-changing environments

•

Customer expectations for complete solutions for total customer experiences

Companies join forces within business networks to meet these new market requirements of "business agility" in addition and operational excellence. The resulting transformation of these networks of collaborating suppliers, customers and partners enables co-innovation of solutions that go beyond company, industry, and geographic boundaries. SAP calls this paradigm Business Network Transformation--the process by which companies collaborate with partners and customers to improve efficiencies and deliver innovative solutions for competitive advantage. IT can bring new revenue and growth to the company by having both capabilities - applications for standard business processes and the technology to integrate and change business processes across the business network as part of an integrated business process platform. Since companies of all sizes are subject to the speed of change, establishing a business processes platform is important for all companies. SAP enables you to standardize and innovate on one platform You no longer have to choose to build or buy software. You can implement global best practices for standardized core processes while composing innovative processes for competitive advantage. SAP is the worlds leading supplier of process automation technology involving 12 million users in 120 countries that touch one of 140,000 SAP systems. SAP has been delivering standardization of core processes for more than 35 years. SAP Business Suite The SAP Business Suite provides ready-to-run business processes for 24 industries. New features and support for new business processes are continuously added, with enhancement packages that deliver innovation without disruption. SAP Composition Environment The SAP Composition Environment (CE) helps you to create flexible differentiating companyspecific business processes--processes that SAP does not yet address with standard software. SAP CE is a set of tools that gives companies the ability to compose new processes and extend core business processes. This means these composite processes are being built on top of the SAP Business Suite, they are basically extensions of the SAP Business Suite. These processes are typically agile and tend to change often. Composite business processes can be human-centric or system-centric. System-Centric System-centric processes focus on integrating application core processes with third party systems. Examples of system-centric include B2B cases or the integration of h suppliers and customers (covered by SAP Process Integration). Human-Centric In human-centric processes, the majority of the activities in such a business process are driven by human activities. This is also where SAP's new offerings SAP Business Process Management (BPM) and SAP Business Rules Management (BRM) fit in. Both offerings are an integral part of the SAP NetWeaver CE.


3

Unit 1: Business Process Management

While you want to innovate, you do not want to reinvent everything from scratch. You want to leverage your existing IT investments and make reuse of process components. This is the function of the Enterprise Services Repository (ESR) . SAP BPM is tightly integrated with the ESR to enable the reuse of service-enabled application core processes when composing new processes. Today, SAP delivers more than 2800 of these enterprise services.

User Interface

Porta

c: ... 0 c:

'

· - 4l

:-:: E c: I/)

o o

E ·;;

SOA Composition

.,, §

SOA Interoperability

Q. ...

0 c: (.) w

V);

...Cl

Desktop Mobile


Forms

Wiki/Blog

Peivasive

Business Rules Management

Voice

Search

UI Composition

4l Ill

(,)

0

Ci.~ -

SOA Provisioning

Service & Event Enablement

Serviceenabled Applications

Figure 2: End -t o-End SOA Infrastructure-· TODAY Enabl ing Managed Process Flexibility

BPM now provides the fo llowing features: •

SAP Process Integration (Pl), a platform for a customer to realize a SOA landscape. Using Pl, customers leverage enterprise services provided by SAP and enable their existing investments in third party and legacy applications as services

•

SAP Composition Environment, a rich set of modeling tools for customers to build agile and flexible applications by consuming the services

•

NW BPM, which puts the various UI blocks and services together to create end-to-end processes that solve day-to-day problems of customers

Along with the infrastructure, BPM also provides the following features : •

Over 2,800 services by service enabling our existing Business Suite

•

The tried and tested service methodology to our customers as SOA300 course

•

Reusable content such as the Global Data Types on which our Enterprise services are based

With the tools, content, and methodology a customer can jump start his/her SOA implementation to build flexible applications while leveraging existing investments.

4



Java Application Server

Eclipse Development Environment

'

Event Flow I Rules

Role

.- -

-

1-Portal and Web

Analytics

Forms

{o}-,;-, Service

@ New service

~ fac;ade

Ej Data

@ Basic service

service

Enterpris service

L ___ - - - - - - - - - - -

'

Mobile and Voice

-----

I I

Figure 3: Model-Driven Development and Deploym ent With SAP Composition Environment

Composition Environment The SAP Composition Environment (CE) is based on an enterprise-class JavaEE 5 application server as runtime and an Eclipse 3.5-based development environment. The SAP NetWeaver Java Application Server, an enterprise-class Java EE 5application server to ensure robustness, scalability, and supportability through features such as configurable session failover, built-in load balancing and cluster support, robust monitoring, and unique supportability of non-functional problems-based on SAP's own Java VM features . The server offers full support of the latest Java EE 5 features, such as EJB 3.0, JSF 1.2, Java Persistency API 1.0, Service Data Objects (SDO) 2.1 standard simplifying data programming for applications and frameworks, support for development of standard-based portlets, and a job scheduler implementation. With the Java Connector Architecture (JCA) 1.5 and full Web Services standards support, it enables connectivity to SAP and non-SAP backend and services. Memory Analyzer is a complementary debugging and analysis tool for Java heap dumps (donated to the Eclipse Technology Project). The SAP NetWeaver Developer Studio (NWDS), an integrated Eclipse 3.5-based development environment for the creation of Java-based, multi-tiered composite SOA applications. SAP NetWeaver Developer Studio is built on Eclipse, an open-source tooling platform comprised of extensible frameworks and tools. SAP has enhanced the standard Eclipse functionality with a comprehensive set of design, construction, and modeling tools. Customers and partners can already develop and run Java applications in an SOA landscape with this Java-only option. However, integration with software lifecycle management, an Enterprise Services Repository and registry, and an enterprise service bus are mandatory for complex and heterogeneous business application landscapes. SAP NetWeaver Enterprise Services Repository (ESR) is the "central registry" and repository in which service interfaces and enterprise services are modeled and their metadata is stored. This includes the metadata repository of all service objects in a SOA as well as a UDDI (Universal


5


Description. Discovery and Integration) v3-compliant services registry that supports publishing, classifying and discovering services. Integration with SAP NetWeaver Development Infrastructure (NWDI) ensure a comprehensive software lifecycle management and transport logistics for all content (including models and code) through the development-test-production landscape. Optional connectivity through a service bus infrastructure and EAi is achieved with SAP NetWeaver Pl 7.1 SAP CE also provides a set of model-driven tools for composing services, creating user interfaces. and orchestrating processes that simplify development and increase productivity significantly. •

The SAP Composite Application Framework (CAF) is a business object modeling and servicecomposition tool. enabling development of new business logic and adaptation of existing enterprise services.

•

SAP NetWeaver Visual Composer provides a model-driven user interface (UI) development tool for transactional and analytical Uls, including the incorporation of voice and mobile interaction into enterprise applications.

•

Web Dynpro allows you to build rich user interfaces and data-driven applications while benefiting from graphical tools and code generation that speed up the development process. Web Dynpro clearly separates business and display logic in a model-view-control (MVC) paradigm.

•

SAP Interactive Forms by Adobe add online and offline support for composite forms

•

A portal is included with SAP CE to offer a single access point for users and roles through a federated portal network implementation .

•

SAP CE provides SAP BPM as a flexible framework for designing and running user-centric collaborative processes and reusable workflows.

fiii

Figure 4: Manage Enterprise Business Processes (1) - Application Core Processes

6



Business Process Management needs to take into account different sub-process types. Packaged processes as application core build the center of gravity for process standardization. Application Core Processes represent the core part of an application. These processes are stable and not frequently changed. SAP delivers processes of SAP Business Suite Applications as well as processes of SAP industry solutions. The processes are configurable. Often business workflows are used to automate a process. Depending on the company, these processes cover 70o/o-80°/o of all processes.

!

--··-·-···· 1 .

I l

·-...................-...-····-.J

Figure 5: Manage Enterprise Business Processes (2) - Composite Business Processes (with SAP BPM)

Composition and integration provide competitive differentiation by composing new processes/ applications and integrating them with business partners and legacy systems. These Composite Business Processes support strategic agility and speed to market. They cover 20°/o - 30% of the company's processes. The following points apply to Composite Business Processes that are realized as human-centric: •

Collaborative across business systems and organizations

•

Need ad hoc extensions to manage pockets of flex ibility

•

Defined by functional business requirements

The following points apply to Composite Business Processes that are realized as system-centric: •

Integrated across business systems and services

•

Integrated with human-centric processes

•

Defined by technical specifications based on functional business requirements


7


Event

Rules

Data

....------ ••.• •,

• ••

•' •' •' '' ••

UI

•

Process Context

.......

••

,• . . .... __ ---,,

fJ Roles

.•

D

•' •• • ' ,'•

Workflow & Task

~

Figure 6: Key Process Meta Model Concepts

The relevant components in business processes include the following: •

Data

•

Events

•

Rules

•

Uls

•

Tasks

•

Flows

All these components have to be covered from a business perspective as well as a technical perspective.

Business Process Management Components SAP Business Process Management (BPM) enables you to model, connect, compile, deploy and maintain composite business processes. These capabilities are split into the following main building blocks:

8

•

Process Composer

•

Process Server

•

Process Desk

©Copyright . All rights reserved .


Business Process Management Roles

l!xecutive

Business User

Business Expert

Design Collaboration

Bus iness Analyst Business Process EXpert (BPX)

lnfo111wtlon

I

Vertical • Layers of abstract ion

I Process Architect

Architect

Horizontal

AppUc•aon ARldtect

Appletitlon Consult:Mat

• multi-design user support • threaded model discussions • model differencing

Figure 7: Business Process Management - Personas Across t he Enterprise

The process composer of SAP Business Process Management is integrated into SAP NetWeaver Developer Studio as two separate perspectives. These two perspectives--Process Modeling and Process Development--offer different views over one and the same process model. Consequently, the two perspectives enable different process modeling role (for example, business analyst, process developer, and so on), and makes possible the collaboration between them. The Process Modeling perspective is a subset of the Process Development perspective. The Process Modeling perspective offers the option of designing a process, but this process is in status Draft and cannot be built and deployed. This perspective can serve as a starting point for process modeling, where a business analyst designs the process and hands it over to a developer to add the necessary technical details. The Process Modeling perspective has a subset of the views that are available in the Process Development perspective, which are filtered to show only information relevant for business analyst type of users. Process models created in the Process Modeling perspective are not checked for errors and constraint violations and do not contain error markers. These process models are always created in status Draft, which can be changed to Released to Build in the Process Development perspective only. The process model can be built after the Released to Build status is set. The Process Development perspective offers a full set of capabilities for designing, implementing, building, and deploying a process. A developer can open the process, which is designed by a business analyst in the Process Development perspective, perform the required changes to make the process executable, and finally change its status from Draft to Released to Build. Changing the status is irreversible. A developer can also design from scratch and implement a process using the Process Development perspective as a starting point. Process models created in the Process Development perspective are always created in status Released to Build and are checked for errors and constraint violations.


9


Process Orchestration SAP Process Orchestration is a package solution that combines the power of SAP BPM, SAP Business Rules Management (BRM), and SAP Pl into a single, integrated solutions. SAP Process Orchestration has the following features: •

It is based on single stack Java

•

It is a Business Process Modeling Notation (BPMN) standard

•

It is the graphic configuration that uses integration flows

LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:

•

10



Unit 1 Learning Assessment

1.

What are the three Business Process Management components?

Choose the correct answers.

D D c D D

A Process Composer B Process Context Process Desk

D Process Server


11

Unit 1 Learning Assessment - Answers

1.

What are the three Business Process Management components?


12

0

A Process Composer

D

B Process Context

0 0

c

Process Desk

D Process Server


Process Modeling Environment

Lesson 1

14 17

Building a Development Infrastructure Exercise 1: Build a Development Infrastructure

Lesson 2

25

Selecting a Process Modeling Perspective

39

Exercise 2: Create a Process with the Composite Designer

UNIT OBJECTIVES

•

Build a development infrastructure

•

Select a process modeling perspective

•

Create a process with Composite Designer


13

Unit 2

Lesson 1 Building a Development Infrastructure

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to build a development infrastructure. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

•


Development Infrastructure SAP BRM Development Components

The development infrastructure of SAP Business Process Management is split into the following main building block: •

Process Composer

•

Process Server

•

Process Desk

The development infrastructure of SAP Business Process Management (BPM) is split into main building blocks: Process Composer, Process Server, and Process Desk. Process Composer

Process composer

Process Desk

Process se rve r

Figure 8: Process Com poser

The Process Composer is seamlessly integrated into SAP NetWeaver Developer Studio as a separate perspective and provides BPMN process modeling capabilities. BPMN (Business Process Modeling Notation) is based on the specifications adopted by the Object Management Group (OMG). This notation allows easy and intuitive process modeling for business analysts and developers in one common environment. The Process Composer supports all stages of process modeling from high-level definitions down to the detailed enrichment. SAP's BPM notation distinguishes between human and automated

14


Lesson: Building a Development Infrastructure

activities. These activities are structured within subprocesses. Human activities trigger tasks, which are executed through users while automated activities execute Web services and provide full integration into SAP's SOA-enabled business applications. You can also import BPMN 2.0 models created outside of the NetWeaver Developer Studio into BPM . Process Server

'

Process composer

Process Desk

'

Process server

Figure 9: Process Server

The process server represents runtime services in BPM. The integration of BPM into SAP NetWeaver Administrator enables you to start and stop processes, to monitor and manage processes and tasks, and to troubleshoot processes. Process Desk

'

Process composer

Process Desk

Process server

Figure 10: Process Desk

The Process Desk represents a building block for task management, UI and forms integration, rule definitions, and event resolution. Task management provides capabilities for users to access, investigate, and execute the tasks assigned to them. Task management is also integrated into existing applications including the Universal Worklist (UW), which is already successfully deployed in customer scenarios. SAP's UI technologies, such as Web Dynpro and Inte ractive Forms, can be configured for user interaction within modeled processes. Rapid UI prototyping capabilities enhance and speed up the design and specification of process interaction components. Uls are then generated from the modeling artifacts of the process context.

Modes of Development The development in the NetWeaver Developer Studio works hand in hand with the system access over various Pl-Internet pages, like NetWeaver Administrator and WSNavigator. Development starts with the activation of users. This takes place in the Portal. For full access to all functionalities between the local NetWeaver Developer Studio and the Java Server you need to have activated users.


15

Unit 2: Process Modeling Environment

After the users are activated in the Portal, the SAP NetWeaver Administrator, and the Web Services Navigator, you must assign the local NetWeaver Developer Studio to the Java Server on the SAP system stack. This assignment, and all other settings in the NetWeaver Developer Studio, are done using preferences. The preferences are accessed from Windows~ Preferences . The first setting has to be made to the AS Java System. This is done using the activity SAP AS Java in the Preferences menu. You have to add a system and define one system as the default system. The next setting is for the integration directory. For this, use Pl Tools Configuration~ Connections. Here the URL or a manual link to the Integration directory is maintained. Another step is the access to the Enterprise Services Repository. For maintaining this access, the link Web Services~ Enterprise Service Browser is used. You have to maintain entries for the ESR system, the URL to the ESR host, an HTTP host, and, if required, a EST Https port.

16


Unit 2

Exercise 1 Build a Development Infrastructure

Business Example You are a technical expert in business management processes and need to create a process. To do so. you must first create some necessary settings. In this exercise, you will create an email account to be used by the process for sending messages. Additionally, you wil l check the validity of your user name, register the J2EE server with the NetWeaver Developer Studio (NWDS). and launch NWDS for the first time. In this exercise. when the values include##, replace the characters with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Activate the user Administrator##. 2. Check that the users Requestor##, Supervisor##, and Approver## exist. 3. Activate the users Requestor##, Supervisor##, and Approver##. 4. Create an email account for the user Requestor##. 5. Launch NWOS Workbench . 6. Establish a connection between the J2EE server and NWDS. Use the data in the following table to complete the step. Field

Val ue

Instance Host Name

nwktdcOO

Instance Number

0

Add to Domain

Default

7. Connect to the Integration Directory using the data in the following table. Field

Value

System Alias

AEXNWK

URL

http://nwktdc00.wdf.sap.corp:50000

8. Connect to Enterprise Service Repository (ESR) using the data in the following table. Field

Value

ESR System

/rep

ESR Host

nwktdcOO.wdf.sap.corp


17


Field

Value

ESR HTTP Port

50000

Secure Connection (HTTPS)

Deselect

9. Establish the connection to the SAPBPM training files at h ttp : I I nwkt dcO O. wdf . sap . corp : 50000 I dir to have access to the group folders and files needed for the exercises.

18


Unit 2 Solution 1 Build a Development Infrastructure

Business Example

You are a technical expert in business management processes and need to create a process. To do so. you must first create some necessary settings. In this exercise, you will create an email account to be used by the process for sending messages. Additionally, you wil l check the validity of your user name, register the J2EE server with the NetWeaver Developer Studio (NWDS). and launch NWDS for the first time. In this exercise. when the values include##, replace the characters with the number your instructor assigned to you. 1. Activate the user Administrator##. a) Log on to the system cloud landscape. Your instructor will provide information about the log-on process. b) Start your internet browser. c) In your internet browser, go to the following url: http : I / nwktdcOO . wdf . sap . corp: 50000/irj d) Log in with the user name Administrator## and the password provided by your instructor.

Note: When entering the password for the first time, you are prompted to change the password. Make a note of the new password you select; it will be used throughout the course.

2. Check that the users Requestor##, Supervisor##, and Approver## exist. a) On the SAP NetWeaver Training screen, choose the User Administration tab. b) In the Identity Management screen, in the empty Search Criteria field. enter Requestor##. The first field contains the value User. c) Choose Go. d) Double-click the row with the user Requestor## to view details about the user. e) Repeat steps b through d for the users Supervisor## and Approver##.


19


liii System Selu!>

Contei>t Adlrinistr&tlon ~

Identity Manegement

user Adlmisftation

User Adrmlstratlon

IJse< Authorizatlon Reports

SystemAdll'inlstr&tlon User Stallsti:s

Ful Sc reeo

> Identity ~t

-

Search

SearehCriteria:

• IJA10et•Sow

luser

I Q-eale User Jl Copy to New Us& 11 1Delete 11 ':'clpal

SL..

t..ogon D

a

0

Request0<01

Option

I~ ~~-t_ oro_ 1 -~I [92] I Actvanced Seatch I J lklkxk Jl Lock

•

II Generate New Password 11 I Export J

Na.me

Cleta Source

Oepartlrent

I>.£ Oetabase

Requestor01. RO<>

I I

Figure 11: Preferences Screen--Enterprise Service Browser Assigned

3. Activate the users Requestor##, Supervisor##, and Approver##. a) On the NWK Identity Management page, choose Log off (from the upper right corner). Choose Yes to confirm the log off message. b) In the SAP NetWeaver Logan screen, in the User field, enter Requestor## along with the password provided by the instructor.

Note: When entering the password for the first time, you are prompted to change the password. Make a note of the new password you select; it will be used throughout the course.

c) Repeat steps a and b for the users Supervisor## and Approver##. 4. Create an email account for the user Requestor##. a) From the Windows Start menu, choose All Programs

~

Initialize Course ~ BPM ~

Initialize SAPBPM.

b) In the Initializing E-Mail Accounts dialog box, choose OK. c) In the Add Your Email Address dialog box, do nothing. You do not need to enter an email address. d) When the WinMailSetupSAPBPM_lO information screen appears, choose OK. e) From the Windows Start menu, choose All Programs~ Windows Live Mail. f) Verify in Windows Live Mail the user Requestor## appears in the menu on the left. 5. Launch NWDS Workbench . a) From the Windows Start menu, choose All Programs ~

~

SAP NetWeaver

~

NWDS 7.31

NWDS 7.31 SP08.

b) On the NWDS screen, choose Workbench . 6. Establish a connection between the J2EE server and NWDS. Use the data in the following table to complete the step.

20



Field

Value

Instance Host Name

nwktdcOO

Instance Number

0

Add to Domain

Default

a) On NWDS screen, choose Window

--+-

Preferences.

b) In the Preferences dialog box, choose SAP AS Java. c) To add a new SAP system, Choose Add. d) In the Add New SAP System dialog box, enter the data according to the previous table. e) Choose OK.

!I

r~: Preferences

,...l type _ f_ ilter - -t ex_t _ _ _ _

l±l General 1!) Ant Composite Application Framev l!l Composite Designer l±l Data Management &J Data Mapping Deployment S Destination Configurations l!l Development Infrastructure l±l Dictionary l±l Enterprise Service Modeling l±l Help S InstaD/Update

l!I~

SAP AS Java

¢> •

D

• •

i--------------------Add or remove SAP Systems to be used for monitoring, control, deployment and debugging. Select a default system for deployment.

l!l .Java i±J .Java EE Logging and Tracing @ Model l/alidation l!l Modeling I nfrastructure l!l Pl Tools Configuration l±l Plug·in Development l±l Process Composer Provisioning Admin l!l Rules Composer tiJ Run/Debug ··· SAP AS .Java

Figure 12: Preferences Screen--Defau lt SAP System Assigned

7. Connect to the Integration Directory using the data in the following table. Field

Value

System Alias

AEXNWK

URL

http:/I nwktdcOO .wdf. sap. corp :50000

a) In the Preferences dialog box, expand Pl Tools Configuration

--+-

Connections.

b) Enter the data from the table. c) Choose Apply. d) Choose the Test Connection button.


21


A dialog box appears informing you that the system is available. e) Choose OK. 8 . Connect to Enterprise Service Repository (ESR) using the data in the following table. Field

Value

ESR System

/rep

ESR Host


ESR HTTP Port

50000

Secure Connection (HTTPS)

Deselect

a) On the NWDS screen, choose

Window~

Preferences.

b) In the Preferences dialog box, choose Web Services. c) Choose Enterprise Service Browser. d) In the Enterprise Service Browser, enter the appropriate information from the previous table. e) Choose Apply. f) Choose OK.

Ente rprise Service Browser

.. ....

Connection Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . Recent

I

ESR Http Port

I!rep InwktdcOO.wdf .sap.corp Isoooo

ESR Https Port

j sooo1

Secure Connection (HTIPs)

r

ESR System ESR Host

Figure 13: Result of t he User Check

9. Establish the connection to the SAPBPM training files at http : I I nwktdc OO . wdf . sap. corp : 50000 I dir to have access to the group folders and files needed for the exercises. a) In your internet browser, open a new tab and enter the following url: http:/ I nwktdcOO.wdf .sap.corp:SOOOO/dir b) On the SAP Process Integration screen, in the Training Information section, choose How to open share for file adapter files. c) Choose the link Open NWK tmp share as Y drive .

22



d) In the File Download - Security Warning dialog box, choose Open (located at the bottom of the dialog box). e) In the message dialog box, choose Open. f) In the warning dialog box, choose Open. g) Choose TrainingSetup

~

SAPBPM.

From here you copy the files needed for the exercises.


23



•

24



Unit 2

Lesson 2 Selecting a Process Modeling Perspective

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to select a process modeling perspective and create a process with Process Designer. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

•


•


Modeling Approaches Modeling a process involves various stages and requires particular elements. Process Definition The definition of the process must meet the following parameters: •

Specific order of events and activities that aim for a certain goal

•

The events and activities have strictly defined inputs and outputs

•

The events and activities are connected in a process and eventually produce a value

The following elements are essential to process modeling: •

An event that makes the process start

•

Activities to be performed

•

Decisions to be taken

•

A final result of the process flow

•

Exceptions that may occur during the process

In the SAP NetWeaver Developer Studio, the Process Modeling perspective is used to sketch processes (the business view). The Process Development perspective is used to make the process executable (the developer view). Processes in BPM The Process Composer adopts the Business Process Modeling Notation (BPMN) to enable easy and intuitive modeling of end-to-end business process. You use the defined in the BPMN specification flow objects, connecting objects, artifacts and swimlanes to create a business process model.


25


Modeling in the Process Composer allows you to create more than just a descriptive model of a standard business process, but also provides capabilities for you to fore see and model possible exceptions. You can also model exceptions handling to visualize how the process branches after an exception has occurred. Apart from creating a process model, the Process Composer allows you to define the business logic behind it, which makes the process model executable. To do that, the process composer integrates the SAP-specific development and standard project development allowing the consumption of Web services, the usage of Web Dynpro (WO) and Visual Composer (VC) user interfaces (UI), the usage of Adobe offline forms , and the usage of rules and functions in process modeling. Web services assigned to process model automated activities allow a step in the process modeled using an automated activity to be executed through starting a Web service. WO, VC Uls and Adobe offline forms assigned to tasks that are modeled as human activities enable a human to interact with the process and execute tasks. Rules and functions provide strong capabilities regarding decision making and transformation of data required in the process model. Another key feature of the Process Composer is that all Web services, Uls, tasks and rules, and functions are reusable units. You can use all of them in different projects and models, which enhances flexible process modeling. Also, you can develop custom reusable units corresponding to your business needs. Using the Process Composer, you model different processes based on different scenarios. For example, you can model a business trip approval scenario, a leave request approval scenario, a goods delivery scenario, and so on. Process Development Steps The following steps are involved in process development: 1. Defining the business process 2. Modeling the process (that is, the sequence of process steps) This step includes modeling flow objects, artifacts, and swimlanes. 3. Defining the business logic and data flow Defining the business logic includes importing and assigning service interface definitions, creating and assigning tasks, and importing and assigning data types. Defining the data flow includes creating sequence flow connections and data flow connections. 4. Compiling and deploying the business process model This step involves installing the process definition and runtime engine. Top Down Modeling Approach The top-down approach focuses on the overall process. It starts with defining the overall business requirements that give the framework of the business process model. After that the model that describes how a requirement is fulfilled is split to separate business processes. Each of these processes has its specific activities and the activities include on their side-specific services and tasks. The goal of the model, is to depict a broader view of a business process fulfilling a given requirement but not to show how a specific activity is performed. This broader view helps business analysts and managers to see how the overall process goes, where it needs improvements, and whether any elements are missing in the general process. On the other side, a

26


Lesson: Selecting a Process Modeling Perspective

top-down process model that does not focus on the subprocesses' characteristics and activities does not allow you to see how the subprocesses and their activities behave in reality. In the Process Composer, you can use the top-down approach to model a process according to the requirements of a specific business case. The starting point is defining a general overview of the process and the process steps. With this approach, the process modeling includes the following steps: •

Creating a process

•

Creating the process steps, represented by activities

•

Creating an importing the business logic of the process steps (tasks, Web services, rules)

Top-down Approach Guidelines

•

Vertical approach

•

Depicts a broader view of a business process fulfilling a given requirement, but not to show how a specific activity is performed

•

Focuses on the overall process--starts with defining the overall business requirements as a framework for the business process model

•

Support business analysts and managers in process improvement efforts and functionality gap analysis

Top-Down

0 Creating a process

O Creating process steps

0

Bottom-Up

0

Creating and Importing business logic

Inside-Out

-

Sub Process 1

Sub-sub Process 1

J.

l±l

0 Creating a process Sub-sub

Process 2 Creating and Importing Business

O Creating process steps

l±l

-

-

Lo~ic

Figure 14: Process Modeling Approaches

Bottom up Modeling Approach In contrast to the top-down approach, the bottom-up approach starts with defining the activities that stand at the base of the process model. Using them, many different and detailed business processes are created, describing how low level business requirements are fulfilled . The goal of the model is to show how a specific activity is performed to produce a value at the end of the process. In other words, this approach focuses on the subprocesses first. This detailed view of them helps developers and system architects to make the process work. However, a problem occurs when this abundance of details has to be combined to form the overall model picture or when it comes to defining the key requirements the general model should fulfi ll .


27


In the Process Composer, you can use the bottom-up approach to model a process focusing on the details of the process steps. After defining the process steps details, that is to say the business logic of the steps, you can combine them to create the process model.

Process Modeling Steps •

Creating and importing the business logic of the process steps (tasks, web services, rules)

•

Creating a process

•

Creating the process steps, represented by activities

Bottom-up Approach Guidelines •

Vertical approach

•

Shows how a specific activity is performed to produce a value at the end of the process

•

Starts with defining the activites that stand as the base of the process model

•

Uses many different business processes, describing how low level business requirements are fu lfi Iled

•

Supports developers and system architects who make the process work

Inside Out Modeling Approach Unlike the top-down and bottom-up approaches, which are a rather vertical type of modeling, the inside-out one is a horizontal approach. It consists of defining key processes in the overall process and then complementing them with other processes. This approach may be helpful to modelers in different areas in case none of the vertical approaches is appropriate. Like both other approaches, this one has its downsides as well. One of them is that when using this approach, there might be difficulties in defining what the key processes are. In the Process Composer, you can use the inside-out approach and represent the key processes in the overall process as subprocesses. You can represent a complex task as a subprocess if you want to focus on the task as one of the key processes in the model. You can later add to the subprocess some human and automated activities, which could act like additional small processes whose details are not important.

Inside-out Approach Guidelines

28

•

Horizontal approach to define key processes in the overall process and then complementing them with other processes

•

Support modelers in different areas, in case none of the vertical approaches is appropriate

•

Key processes represented in the overall process as subprocesses

•

Complex tasks represented as subprocesses, if the tasks are key processes in the model

•

Human and automated activities added to the subprocess, which act like additional small processes whose details are not important



Synchronous and Asynchronous Processes A process can be either synchronous or asynchronous. Synchronous Process When executing a synchronous process, the process may respond with a response message. At design time this response message is provided using the input mapping of the message end event. The response message is sent once when the first token reaches the message end event. The initiator waits synchronously during the time frame that is required to execute the process between the start and message end event. To model a synchronous process, you need to create a WSDL file (service interface definition) that has an operation with input and output parameters. To provide process context data back to the process initiator, the output parameter of the WSDL operation can be filled with the input mapping of the message end event. Synchronous Process Parameters

•

The process may respond with a response message.

•

The response is provided using the input mapping of the message end event.

•

The response message is sent once when the first token reaches the message end event.

•

The initiator waits for the process to execute from start to the message end event.

•

To model a synchronous process, you need a service interface definition with an operation containing input and output parameters.

Parallel Split in a Synchronous Process If you have modeled a parallel split in your synchronous process, it is possible that several tokens reach the end event. When a token first receives a message end event, the response is sent back synchronously from that message end event to the process initiator. If the end event is not a terminating event (the Terminating option is not selected in the end event properties) the process continues asynchronously if there is at least one other token left. Once the process instance has responded with a message end event for the first token, no further response is sent. Parameters for a Parallel Split in a Synchronous Process

•

A parallel split in a synchronous process may have several tokens reaching the end event.

•

When a token first receives a message end event, the response is sent back synchronously.

•

Once the process instance has responded for the first token, no further response is sent, although there are additional tokens remaining--the process continues asynchronously.

We recommend that you do not model any human activities in synchronous processes because of several timeouts (for example, from Web Service Navigator, Web Service Client, BPM runtime) with a duration of a few minutes. When a timeout occurs outside BPM, an HTTP error is returned and the process runs asynchronously. If the process server notices that a timeout has occurred, the process is terminated with an error that is described in the default trace.


29


Synchronous processes run synchronously if you initiate them through a Web service call. Otherwise, processes modeled as synchronous processes are executed asynchronously if you start them in the Process Repository or with the Debugger. Asynchronous Process The process does not send a response message in an asynchronous process. The initiator of an asynchronous process is not kept waiting for a response. To model an asynchronous process, you only need to define input parameters for the operation in the assigned WSDL file . Asynchronous Process Parameters

•

The process does not send a message response.

•

The initiator is not kept waiting for a response.

•

To model an asynchronous process, you need a service interface definition with an operation containing input parameter.

Process Modeling Perspective SAP NetWeaver Developer Studio enables you to create a process model and the business logic behind it in detail.

Jiii

Create a Composite Application

Composite Designer Perspective (Developer) Create a Process (Composite Application Process Layer)

SAP Netweaver Developer Studio

Create a process from model to execution

Model a process

Process Development Perspective (Developer)

Process Modeling Perspective (Business Process Experts)

Figure 15: Process Modeling Perspect ives

The Process Composer consists of two perspectives: the Process Development perspective and the Process Modeling perspective. These perspectives offer different views of your process model and enable different process modeling roles to be assigned to specific steps within the process. SAP NetWeaver Developer Studio is the design environment for composite applications. SAP Composite Environment (CE) consists of multiple composite application layers including a process layer. Within the process layer, you can define a process using the Process Development perspective. Process Development Perspective

30



The Process Development perspective offers a full set of capabilities for designing, implementing, building, and deploying a process. A developer can open a process, which is designed by a business analyst in the Process Development Perspective, perform the required changes to make the process executable, and change the status of the process. .. .

J~ J Proje(t Elb'er

•

I iv

e: ~ I

'i:!.""" t ~...

"' = 1:1

13 l.:>~J.P.o....e:odt!s

~ SeMc:e A:efetences 13 W Process ModdnQ

S~ Proces,.. I Ji, Put
-..e!J

£

l!ri9 Evm Tri990
~ Reportno Data Soorces 12:) Rule sets i;9 Functions

P
ll Problems 1fl! 1 - yB Process IJ1st¥>CeS] ~' S-d1 Cons@ I

Purchase Order Process XX J Entet •...,. f0t till< element and a desc~ (CCJ(;ollal):

W«mot;oll XX To< •Gene.re)!

Approve Pl..-cl'-.ase Request XX Task

.l1lJ Entet Putchose "-'t XX Task

W@

.0

--

usertexts

N4tfle:

J1>uoct>ose Clod«"°'•" xx

Docu-nerl:«lon:

Doto Types

~ ~ SeMce lrterfdct:s: ic, src

~ Make this pool active (other pools become battiYe)

D Enable - . i Propagation Rdease status: Refeas~ to Build

•

Figure 16: The Process Development Perspect ive

A developer can also design and implement a process using the Process Development perspective as a starting point. Process models created in the Process Development Perspective have a Released for Build status and are checked for errors and constraint violations. Process Modeling Perspective The Process Modeling perspective is a subset of the Process Development Perspective. It offers the option of designing a draft process. This perspective can serve as a starting point for process modeling. Business analyst design the process in this perspective and then hand it over to a developer to add the necessary technical details.


31

Unit 2 : Process Modeling Environment

:-: Process Mo e 1ng - Pure ase Or er Process XX Process - SAP NetWe

E1le f.dit

Jo ·

View

~vtgate

\!llndow !ie!P

~1~1

ft:i Project Explorer B

~ch

~I

!::!

0 [LocalDeveloprnent] po_product_xx/pr/pm El DI> Process Modeling 8 ·G§ Processes ' ~ Purchase Order Process XX 8' f8 Tasks

,9

' ,@ 1

~

Add Additional Purchase Request Information XX Task Approve Purchase ReQUest XX Task Enter Purchase Request XX Task

p Properties I:3-..., ,.,_

Jb Purchase Order Process xx -----~ Enter

a name let this element and a description (Clltional):

General Appearance User Texts

Name:

!Purchase Order Process XX -

Documentation:

D Make this pool octive (other pools become inactive) D Enable Pmcipal Prop09ation Release status: Released to &.ild

Figure 17: The Process Modeling Perspect ive

The Process Modeling perspective has a subset of views that are available in the Process Development perspective. These views can be filtered to show only information relevant to the user. Process models created in the Process Modeling perspective have a draft status. These process models are not checked for errors and constraint violations and do not contain error markers. The status of draft process models can be changed to Released to Build when development is complete, which enables the process to be built and deployed . Abstract Flow Objects Abstract flow objects are objects with no specific type and are used when the object type is not important, for example, the abstract gateway shows where the sequence f low branches or merges. They can be converted to a specific object type later in the process model development. Process Development and Process Modeling Perspective Objects:

•

Abstract events

•

Act ivities

•

Gateways

Process Creation with Composite Designer Within the perspectives, the Process Composer t o is used to create processes.

32

© Copyright. All ri ght s reserved .


•

·.: Palette ~ S.lect ••• t..+ Marquee

Approve SO Cha.nge Proceas

Siles Manager

Aceounc Executive

ERP -+-

Connedion.s

0~ Flow Objects • :) Start Event

•0 •0

D

x

Olrt-etUpd6:6

lntttmed1ate Event End Event

- O Activity

0 Hum•n

Need Arp pro

4!:) Automoted

=

App1ov11Cotmc1

~ Notification

<) AP9fove S.IH

1±1 Rtfuencttl Sub•Proctss

Order Change: Re
EB Embedded Sub·Ptoct
Reje.ct

x

-0

Appr°""

.,.

,.

-~ Exclusive Choice

0-

Update S.1<$

0

Gotewoy

~

Event·B•sed Choice

~

Porollel Split

~ Unconttolled M
tiS' Parallel Join S..itsOtder

Q

AP9"0"'1

Art~octs

D D•t• Object

Notifiootion

~ Annotation

[8 Swimlanes

rs l•ne (

••

t

I

[J Pool

Figure 18 : The Process Composer

Projects contain all the reusable elements and source files needed to model a process. Reusable Elements and Source files

•

Data types

•

Rules and functions

•

Service interfaces

•

Tasks

•

Processes

Processes contain all the graphical elements and connections needed to form one process model. Graphical Elements and Connections

•

Flow objects

•

Connection objects

•

Artifacts

•

Swimlanes

Palette Modeling Items


33


•

Activities

•

Events

•

Gateways

•

Connections

•

Artifacts

•

Swimlanes

•

Abstract flow objects

Projects Before you start modeling a process in one of the modeling perspectives, you must create a project of type process composer and a process. Both of them act as a container in which you store the different elements you use in process modeling. A Process Composer project contains all reusable elements and source files that you use to model a process. You make the reusable elements available by creating and import ing them. You can use them to represent different steps in the process models. For example, you can use a task to create a human activity. It represents a step in the process where a human action is needed for the process to continue. Processes A process in the Process Composer contains all graphical elements and connections between them that together form one process model. The elements are specified by BPMN . You place the necessary objects representing the process steps and connect them in the sequence in which they are executed in the process. The process can contain another referenced subprocess, which allows you to model processes with different granularity.

Pool and Lanes Process Creation Pools and lanes let you assign tasks and activities to specific users. A pool is the business process and the lanes specify and structure roles and activities.

34



s

r

EPM

Figure 19: Pools and Lanes

Pool Business processes are created in pools. A pool represents one participant within a process. A participant can be a business entity or a business role, such as a buyer, seller, or manufacturer. A business process can contain multiple pools. The procedure for creating pools and lanes is shown in the figure entitled, Using the Composite Designer to Create a Process--Pools and Lanes: 1. Create a new process (using the wizard). 2. Define a pool and the necessary lanes. 3. Call the process development perspective to model your process.

~

HtoiflOl:lt.

B

0 1<0•boa:w o ~.--~

e ei.ac. . . . .

tt-~,_.. .... ~

,.,,,... ,~ (>- JIOd'XIC

I

I

i..w- 1:~10r. ~XI(. ~xr.wxx

I

POftoduct.)OC (vendor>O<.a>m) P.,.t41 SQ Procm B ~ (toc-~)po_prodJ
u

~~

<-••tr..11111Mt-ctl~

flJ6'ICh

(ft:OC:e., ; cr: J.~.,.

. ,.... . I

8-W ProcmModeliio

e

2 ,___ __

I - · II ...,.. ij

:F a••·5'!fWI

· cf) E - l•IOO<.S

Q Dot• Sol¥ces

"""' I

~ !\Jo sets

e1 . . . IS Doto Types 8 (!) SeM:•lnt,.foces I

• Us«

;})

$1'(

lnte
Figure 20: Using the Composite Designer to Create a Process--Pools and Lanes

A pool acts as a container for the sequence flow between activities. A sequence flow can cross lanes within its pool, but cannot go outside the boundaries of the pool. The interaction between pools, for example in a business-to-business context, is managed through messaging.


35


Even if a business process contains multiple pools, only one pool can be active at a time. A business process can only be modeled in the active pool. Lanes A pool is divided into lanes which are used for structuring activities. A lane represents one process role, for example an employee or sales manager, or an organizational unit within a company. Lanes are essential because they define which process roles are responsible for specific activities. The lane is usually named after the process role or organizational unit.

Generated Lanes

'

....

..,..,_-vit--i

•

j ~~

·-•-•i» :· -...._.. .... . . . .

.. ........ ~ oe;

.

. ,,..._;)!

....,_":_ ....... ..........

tr;p(-

·-.. -

-)I

" Start Event

·--

~..... -~

..._ ,.,.e-....._ ,,..

·---f-

. .;..__.... , ., ~

·...-··--

,<·-~

• End Event '

.._

••

" . . ""'°""11;1!1.. - . . t l

• "

___ ..

---!

•

- .. o

Palette

""".e ....._,• ,. """"• 0, 1 . . . '"'

~ C. 'lo IP! e~

.._

~

'>
~ ~ tt

-..i-

I .t. ueJll

.... .........__ __,......_.... ...·-- ---~-j· I'.; ,..,.,..l!I

-0,.....

-

_

• -...-~a

_.

...._.. , .

,,..__

Figure 21: Model t he process in the Process Development Perspective

The start and end event are generated together with a connection between them. First, delete the connection between the start and event using the context menu of the connector. Then, model your process using the Palette

Speed Buttons In addition to the palette, the Process Development perspective provides speed buttons for quick and easy modeling. The speed buttons appear around pools and flow objects. In addition to the explained speed buttons there is a waste bin speed button that deletes the corresponding flow object or artifact with its connections. But be careful: Choose the waste bin speed button causes the corresponding flow object or artifact to be deleted without a request for confirmation.

36



l} r

D

~

~

'Start ~

0

v

u

>

Figure 22: Speed Buttons

~

Creates an activity (human, automated, mapping) or a sub-process Creates a gateway (exclusive choice, parallel split, uncontrolled merge, parallel join)

_i

Create an event (start, intermediate timer, end, end error, termination) Creates a connection

Creates an artifact (data object, annotation)

-

You can use the speed buttons around a flow object in two different ways: •

Click the speed button to open the menu.

•

Drag and drop the speed button to the area in the pool where you want to place the new flow object.

There is no menu for the connection and the waste bin. The correct connection between objects is automatically created. While you are creating an activity, a gateway, an event or an artifact the correct connection is automatically added. For example, you create a connection between a start event and a data object, then a data flow connection is automatically created. If you create a connection between a start event and a human activity, a sequence flow connection is created and between the start event and an annotation an association connection is created. You cannot create activities, gateways, events, connections, and data objects outside of the pool. Annotations can also be placed outside of the pool. When you model your process, you may want to copy a single flow object, artifact, or a group of flow objects, and use them elsewhere in the process model or in another process model.


37


Hint: You can also copy a whole pool and its contents. You can copy and paste objects between processes created in the same project.

38


Unit 2

Exercise 2 Create a Process with the Composite Designer

Business Example

You are a business process administrator. Create a new product that includes a process using Composite Designer. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create a product called PO Product ## using the data in the following table.

-

-

Dialog Box

Element Name

Values

Define a New Product

Name

PO- Product- ##


Vendor

vendor##.com

Define SC Attributes

Name

PO_##_SC


Vendor

vendor##.com

Select Software Components Software Components

PO## - SC

Select Initial Technologies

Process Modeling, Visual Composer, Web Dynpro, Rules Composer

Initial Technologies

2. Create a process named Purchase Order Process ## using the data in the following table. Field

Values

Name

Purchase Order Process##

New Pool Name

Purchase Order Pool ##

New Pool Lanes

Requestor ##, Supervisor##, Approver##, ERP##


39

Unit 2 Solution 2 Create a Process with the Composite Designer

Business Example

You are a business process administrator. Create a new product that includes a process using Composite Designer. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you . 1. Create a product called PO Product ## using the data in the following table.

-

-

Dialog Box

Element Name

Values


Name

PO- Product- ##


Vendor

vendor##.com


Name

PO_##_SC


Vendor

vendor##.com


PO## - SC


Process Modeling, Visual Composer, Web Dynpro, Rules Composer


a) On the SAP NetWeaver Developer Studio screen, choose Window Other. Alternatively, you can use the Open Perspective button

Open Perspective -

ta .

b) In the Open Perspective dialog box, select Composite Designer and choose OK. c) In the File menu, choose New -

Product .

d) In the Define a New Product dialog box, in the Name field, enter the new product name. e) In the Vendor field, enter the new vendor name. f) Choose Next. g) In the Select Software Components dialog box, choose New Software Component. h) In the Define SC Attributes dialog box, in the Name field, enter the SC name. i) In the Vendor field, enter the SC vendor name if it is not already displayed .

40



j) Choose Next. k) In the Define SC Dependencies dialog box, choose Finish .

Note: Creating the necessary objects could take some time. Please be patient if this is the case.

I) In the Select Software Components dialog box, un-select My Components. m) Choose Next. n) In the Select Initial Technologies dialog box, select the appropriate checkboxes using the data from the table. o) Choose Next. p) In the Select Development Components dialog box, verify the information is correct and choose Finish . The Explorer tree appears on the left side of the screen. Product properties appear in the middle of the screen, and the Palette appears on the right.

liii

i>Cornpo.te E l:!

"

Sea"h eon

0

I El !i!~i: ~

ii\l;) l'O_Prodx.t_20 [vendo~.wn)

~ POj>rodx.t.)O [vondor20.c<>m] !3 '

I I

-

01

I I

Portal (0) Process (0)

-

l

UJer Interface (0)

[

Business logic (0)

L

Elotternal ser~ces (O)

.J P«ette

I

.

~ Sel•ct :·~ M«queti

•••

J

-

_]

l

"'

Create Relation

LJPO
~ -olQ Process

.t ""°""' liiill Us« lrte
"'

"'
I!! JSP

-.

(;.j)&moss lo<,Jic
.

"

.

Figure 23: Resu lt of Creating a New Product

2. Create a process named Purchase Order Process## using the data in the following table. Field

Values

Name

Purchase Order Process##

New Pool Name

Purchase Order Pool ##

New Pool Lanes

Requestor ##, Supervisor##, Approver##, ERP##

a) If the results appear as shown in the figure entitled Result of Creating a New Product, go to step b. If not, on the Composite Explorer view, double-click PO_Product_## . b) From the Palette, choose Process PO_Product_## layout view.


~

Process and drag it to the Process section of the

41


c) In the New Process dialog box, in the Name field, enter the new process name from the table above. d) Select the Create a Pool with the Following Name and Lanes checkbox. e) In the New Pool Name field, enter the pool name. f) In the Lanes field, enter the lane names. g) Choose Finish. ~ ~- PO_product_20 [ vendor20.com] ~

JS Purchase Order Process 20 Portal (O) Process (1)

3aPurchase di

Order Pro ...

User Interface (0) Business Logic (0) i:wternal Services (0)

Figure 24: Creation Process Results

h) Double click the Purchase Order Process. A new tab for the process opens.

42


Lesson: Select ing a Process Modeling Perspective

~ PO_Product_20 [vendor20.com]

&

f~ PU'chase Order Process 20 ~ ' ._

"'-~~~~~~~~---

Pur chase Or der Pool 20 Requestor 20

Supervisor 20

Approve r20

~ Start I I I

I I

• I I

I I I

I

e End

I

Figure 25 : The First Process

Note: The process contains two tabs--one for the product and one for the process. Notes appear in these tabs when there are issues about the product or process.

© Copyright. All right s reserved.

43



44

•


•



Unit 2

Learning Assessment

1.

After the users are activated in the Portal, the SAP NetWeaver Administrator, and the Web Services Navigator, you have to add a system, and define one system as the default system .

Determine whether this statement is true or false.

D D

True False

2. What are the two Process Composer perspectives?


D D c D D

A Process Desk perspective B Process Development perspective Process Modeling perspective

D Process Server perspective

3. A business process is created in a pool.


D D

True False

4. Where can a sequence flow go?

Choose the correct answer.

D D D

A It must stay in its own lane. B It can cross lanes within its own pool, but it cannot cross the boundary of its pool. C It can cross lanes within its own pool and can cross pool boundaries.


45

Unit 2: Learning Assessment

5. What does a pool represent


D D c D D D

A An activity B A process model A process participant A process role

6 . What does a lane represent?


D D Dc D D

A An activity B A process model

46

A process participant A process role


Unit 2

Learning Assessment - Answers

1.

After the users are activated in the Portal, the SAP NetWeaver Administrator, and the Web Services Navigator, you have to add a system, and define one system as the default system .


D 0

True False

2. What are the two Process Composer perspectives?


D 0 0 c D

A Process Desk perspective B Process Development perspective Process Modeling perspective

D Process Server perspective

3. A business process is created in a pool.


0 True D False 4 . Where can a sequence flow go?


D 0 D

A It must stay in its own lane. B It can cross lanes within its own pool, but it cannot cross the boundary of its pool. C It can cross lanes within its own pool and can cross pool boundaries.


47

Unit 2: Learning Assessment - Answers

5. What does a pool represent


D D


c ~

D

A process participant

D A process role

6 . What does a lane represent?


D D c D


~

48

A process participant

D A process role


Business Process Model

Lesson 1

51 61

Notating a Business Process Model with BPMN 2.0 Exercise 3: Notate a Business Process Model with BPMN 2.0

Lesson 2

70

Adding Activities to the Business Process

Lesson 3

76

Adding Tasks to the Business Process

83

Exercise 4: Create a Notification Activity

Lesson 4

91

Adding report activities to a business process

Lesson 5

94 103

Extending the Strategic Business Process with Events Exercise 5: Handle a Boundary Exception

Lesson 6

107 111

Extending the Strategic Business Process with Gateways Exercise 6: Create a Business Process with Events

Lesson 7

121

Adding activities to a business process

UNIT OBJECTIVES

•

Notate a business process model with BPMN 2.0

•

Compose a business process model with BPMN 2.0


49

Unit 3: Business Process Model

50

•

Add automated activities to the business process

•

Add human activities to the business process

•

Add tasks to the business process

•

Add notification activities to the business process

•

Add report activities to a business process

•

Manage business events

•

Add gateways to a business process

•

Add activities to a business process

•

Add artifacts to a business process


Unit 3 Lesson 1 Notating a Business Process Model with BPMN

2.0

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to notate and compose a business process model using BPMN 2.0 . LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

•


•


Categories of Elements Introduction to BPM Flow Objects

Connection Objects

-

-

I"

cl! ••• ;;

..= "

CZJ°" S.art

0 Pt.rcho
OOJroeutOtto

:E

:t'! .::••

..

•E •"=

I

<> Plxctoase "";"' 1\1 -

Ill Reciveit

..~ ~

or

re EndO

,_

>

1ii

-

""" frter

I"• t • 15.

Artifacts

--

I

l1l

Swim lane

(} Apprcwe Pt.reha. .

'h Req.;est

-..... --d

c.....

x

Chonge

......y

•

·-

<'"1

Cr88Se P\lctu...,

°'"°'

I

Figure 26: Categories of Elements

Business Process Modeling Notation (BPMN) defines the following categories for core elements: •

Flow objects - Defines the graphical behavior of a business process and contains the activity, gateway, and event elements

•

Connection objects - Links flow objects to each other and contains the sequence flow, message flow, and association elements


51


•

Swimlanes - Groups flow and connection objects by accountability within a business process and contains the pool and lane elements

•

Artifacts - Provides additional information about a business process and contains the data object, group, and annotation elements

Basic Elements

Activity

Gateway

0 Event

Figure 27: Basic Notation Elements

The following three basic notation elements are used in a business process model: •

Activity - A step in a business process that requires a system or person to perform a specific action.

•

Gateway - A gateway controls branching, merging, and parallel actions in a business process. A gateway does not represent an action.

•

Event - An event shows a start, pause, resume, or interruption within an activity or the business process itself.

Activities

liii

n, Human Activity

Automated Activity

Reporting

~ Notification

Referenced Sub-Process

Mapping

[±)

Embedded Sub-Process

l±J

'~

Looping

Ill

Figure 28: Basic Activity Elements

52


Lesson: Notating a Business Process Model with BPMN 2.0

There are eight categories of activities available for modeling a business processes. Human Activity A human activity is an activity in the process that is performed by a person. Human activities require assigned tasks. When the process reaches a human activity, the assigned task must be completed by a person before the process can continue. Tasks require input and output data . mappings. Automated Activity An automated activity is an activity that is performed by a system. Automated activities require a service interface definition and an assigned operation. In addition, automated activities require input and output data mappings. Referenced Subprocess A referenced subprocess is an activity in the process that is a graphical representation of another independent process. When the process flow reaches the referenced subprocess, the other independent process is called. The parent process and the referenced subprocess communicate through input and output data mappings. Embedded Subprocess An embedded subprocess is dependent on the parent process and cannot be executed independently like the referenced subprocess. The embedded subprocess has the local process context of data objects, which is not visible to the parent and root processes. Reporting Activity A reporting activity is used to collect data from the process context so that process data can be analyzed. The reporting activity references a reporting data source and indicates where in the process data is gathered for reporting. Input mapping is required for the reporting activity to specify which process context data is to be collected by the reporting activity. Notification A notification is used to send email updates from the process. You must specify the recipients of the email updates. You can also customize the subject and message texts that are sent. Mapping Activity A mapping activity is used to take complex data from data objects in the process context and convert it to a format that is easier to use. Rule sets can be used to convert data through a mapping activity. Mapping is required between the data objects in the process context to convert data. Looping Looping activities enable embedded subprocesses and simple activities to be executed multiple times in parallel based on a list in the process context.


53


Gateways

liii

Exclusive Choice

Parallel Split

Parallel Join

Event based Choice

Uncontrolled Merge

Figure 29: Basic Gateway Elements

There are five elements for notating gateways available for modeling a business processes. Exclusive Choice The exclusive choice gateway controls the sequence flow between activities. It is a question that is asked at a specific point in the process and has predefined set of answers to choose from . These answers are the gates. Each gate is assigned a predefined condition that is based on a boolean expression. The boolean expressions use values in the process data to determine which path has to be taken. Each gate has an outgoing sequence flow. Parallel Split The parallel split gateway lets you create parallel work flow. Although you do not need to use the parallel split gateway for parallel flow. with this gateway you can clarify the behavior of complex situations where a parallel flow is required. Each gate of the parallel split gateway has an associated sequence flow. No conditions are assigned to this gateway. Parallel Join The parallel join gateway merges a set of parallel sequence flows that were generated earlier in the process. The parallel split gateway and the parallel join gateway should always be used together. Event-Based Choice The event-based choice controls the sequence flow by choosing an outgoing gate based on events that occur at a specific point in the process. Unlike the exclusive choice where the gate is chosen based on an evaluation of expressions, the event-based choice is used to determine the outgoing gate based on a specific event, like receiving a message. In the Process Composer, the event-based choice is always followed by an intermediate event that either waits for the receipt of the message or waits for a certain amount of time to pass before continuing the process flow. Uncontrolled Merge The uncontrolled merge gateway is used to merge alternative sequence flows. There are a few special situations where you need an uncontrolled merge gateway. The most common use of an

54



uncontrolled merge gateway is to join two alternative sequence flows that were generated by a decision earlier in the process. The alternative sequence flows are merged in preparation for a parallel join gateway that synchronizes a set of parallel sequence flows generated later. Without the uncontrolled merge gateway, any number of sequence flows more than three (for example, four sequence flows) might arrive at the parallel join gateway at the same t ime. Only three of the four sequence flows can pass a token at one t ime. The parallel join gateway would wait for the fourth token, which would never arrive. The process would be stuck at the point of the parallel join gateway.

Events

@

Start Event

~

Intermediate Timer Event

~

®)

® ®

Intermediate Message Event

@

Escalation Boundarv Event

©

Escalation End

0

Error End

Error Boundary Event

End Event

Termination

Figure 30: Basic Event Elem ents

There are nine elements of events available for modeling a business processes. Start Event A start event is an event that does not need or require a specific trigger, for example when designing a draft of a process model. When the process is finally designed, this event can be set by a message trigger to start the process. A message start event indicates that the process start is triggered when the event receives a Web Services Description Language (WSDL) message. You assign a message trigger that is created from a service interface and an operation to the message start event. Intermediate Timer Event An intermediate timer event shows where the process pauses and waits for a certain time to pass before resuming. Intermediate Message Event An intermediate message event shows where the process pauses and waits for a WSDL message from outside the process before resuming. You cannot use intermediate message events in embedded subprocesses. Error Boundary Event A boundary event is a specific intermediate event that you place on the boundary of an activity but not in the process flow. You use boundary events for exception handling, which are triggered by an error or escalation. The boundary event handles an exception that has occurred while the activity has been performed.


55


End Event An end event is an event that has no specific result. You can use it when the exact result of an end event is not important, for example when designing a draft of a process model. You can add a result to an end event later on, for example a message or error. You can also use an end event without a trigger in an embedded subprocess. A message end event ends a process and sends a WSDL message as a result. A process can have only one end event whose result is a message. You assign a message trigger created from a service interface and an operation to the message end event. You can assign the same WSDL file message trigger with a request and response to the message start and end event to model a synchronous process. Termination The termination event ends the process flow in a regular way. If a branch in the process reaches a termination event, all parallel flows in the process are also terminated. You can set all end events as terminating and make them behave as a termination event. Escalation Boundary Event A boundary event is a specific intermediate event that you place on the boundary of an activity but not in the process flow. You use boundary events for exception handling and thus they are triggered by an error or escalation . The boundary event handles an exception that has occurred while the activity has been performed. For escalation boundary events, the following exception types may occur: •

Escalations in human activities

•

Escalations that you model including errors and exceptions

Escalation End The escalation end event represents an exception that occurs inside the process, for example when a task is not completed until the defined deadline. The escalation is internal for the BPM system and is not visible for other systems. There can be more than one escalation end event in a process. You need to set an escalation type for the escalation end event and have the option of making an escalation critical. The escalation is thrown from an inner subprocess to the next outer process until the exception can be handled by an exception handler. If no exception handling is possible for a critical escalation, the process is suspended. You can analyze the exception in the SAP NetWeaver Administrator. Error End You use error end events to model an error that occurs in the process. This error triggers a WSDL fault, which can be defined in the service interface of the message trigger you assign to a message start event. Since the error is defined in the service interface, it is visible outside the BPM system and can be used to communicate with other systems.

56



Supported Connection Objects Sequence Flow

.

Message Flow --~

- - - - .. - -- - -

Data Flow

Association

Figure 31: Basic Connection Elements

There are four elements of connection objects available for modeling a business processes. Sequence Flow The sequence flow element connects flow objects and defines the sequence of a business process. A flow has only one source and one target which is an element of the category Flow Objects. Message Flow The message flow element shows the interaction between two or more services. The Sequence Flow element is used for connecting the flow object and to define the sequence of business processes. The Message Flow object is used to show the interaction between multiple business processes. In this sense, a business process is just a service, which is invoked by other processes and do exchange data among each other. Data Flow A data flow element displays input and output data from and to an activity. Association The association element is used to attach notes, information, and other documentation to an activity. An association is either unidirectional or it has no direction. When an association is unidirectional, it is classified as a data flow connection object within SAP BPM. When an association has no direction, it allows users to add documentation to a flow object.

Notation Orchestration and Choreography


57


Orchestration

-0

0

c..

____ ,...

Choreography

-c ~

.. 0 QI 0 -;( 0..

w

-c 2c ~

0

.. 0 0..

.

;'

•

Figure 32: Orchestration and Choreography

Orchestration Orchestration Properties: •

Models the process flow of control in a single interval (active pool)

•

Represented as a sequence flow

Orchestration describes the sequence flow of objects in a process within its pool and its lanes. The sequence flow is the logic behind a business process and defines its internal structure. The flow objects inside a process are limited by the boundaries of its pool. Orchestration is managed by a sequence flow. Choreography Choreography Properties •

Models the interaction between pools (not flow of control)

•

Represents message flow

Choreography defines the interaction between business processes or services. It describes the composition of the internal or external business processes of a company. It shows the entire chain of an order process and choreographs how the processes work together. Processes can be run from within a company (for example, the manufacturing department) or by another company (for example, a supplier or a customer) that belong to the chain of an order process. Choreography is managed by a message flow. Choreography is only for documenting a business process since only one pool is active at time. Choreography is initiated by the process engine.

Notation Artifacts Besides the modeling of a process flow, BPMN allows you to add artifacts to your process model. Artifacts include the following objects: •

58

Annotations - Purely descriptive objects, used for providing comments during process modeling



•

Data objects - Artifacts that store process context and are accessible during the entire process

Data objects are usually forms that record the output information of an activity. The output of one activity is the input information for a subsequent activity in the process. Data objects manage the process context. The process context enables the sharing of data throughout a business process and makes that data available to all flow objects. Artifacts are managed by the Process Modeler.

Notation Elements: Pools and Lanes Pool Lane

Lane

Figure 33: Notation Elements: Pool with Lanes

Business processes are created in pools. There is always at least one default pool. The default pool is automatically created when you model a process in the Process Composer. Pools Pool Characteristics:

•

A pool contains a single BPMN process

•

A sequence flow is constrained in exactly one pool

•

A process diagram may contain several pools

•

A pool can be either active or inactive

•

A pool generally represents a logical collection of roles, organizational units, and systems

A pool acts as a container for the sequence flow between activities. A sequence flow can cross the boundaries of lanes within a pool, but cannot cross the boundaries of the pool itself. The interaction between pools is managed through the message flow. A pool represents a single process and is a part of a cross-organization or cross-company business process. Each single process has its own pool within the larger business process, which can contain many pools. Only one pool can be active at any t ime. Processes are modeled in the active pool.


59

Unit 3 : Business Process Model

A passive pool contains external activities that are relevant to the process in the active pool but are not an end-to-end process. External activities are a subset of an end-to-end process. Lanes

Lane Characteristics •

A lane is part of a pool

•

A pool may have one or several lanes

•

In general , a lane represents a role or an organizational unit

A pool is divided into lanes and is automatically created when you create a new process. A lane is a partition within a pool and is used for structuring and organizing activities. Lanes define the process roles that responsible for completing the activities in a process. Each process role is assigned to a particular lane and can represent internal roles, such as an account manager, or systems, like an enterprise application or an internal department.

Business Trip Approval Employee

Manager

Start

Submit Request

',

Receive Request

Approved? Em ail Notification

"' -,·,;,_·; •· ..

Yes

No

I

I

Figure 34: Business Trip Approval Process

This example shows a process named Business Trip Approval that is modeled in one pool. The activities and events in the process are organized in two lanes named Employee and Manager. The activities and events are connected within and across lanes by a sequence flow.

60

© Copyright . All rights reserved .

Unit 3 Exercise 3 Notate a Business Process Model with BPMN 2.0

Business Example

You are a business process administrator. You have been asked to notate a new business process model in BPMN 2.0 . In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you. 1. If necessary, open the process called PO_Product_##. 2. Delete the connection between the Start event and the End event. 3. From the Start event, add a human activity named Enter Purchase Request ##.

Note: Be sure to save your changes frequently. Saving can be done whenever the disk symbol is active.

4. From the Enter Purchase Request## activity, add a human activity named Add Additional Purchase Request Information ##. 5. Assign the Add Additional Purchase Request Information## activity to the Supervisor role. 6. From the Add Additional Purchase Request Information## activity, add an automated activity named Create Purchase Request ##. 7. Assign the Create Purchase Request## activity to the ERP## role. 8. From the Create Purchase Request## activity, add an automated activity named Determine if Approval is Required ##. 9. Assign the Determine if Approval is Required## activity to the Approver## role. 10. From the Determine if Approval is Required## activity, add an exclusive choice gateway named Approval Required##? . 11. From the Approval Required##? gateway, add an automated activity named Release Purchase Request ##. 12. Assign the Release Purchase Request## activity to the ERP## role. 13. Change the name of the Alternative 1 gate to No.


61


Jii

I

~

Release Purchase Request 20

Figure 35: Changing the Name of an Object

14. Place the gate named No near the upper right side of the Approval Required##? exclusive choice gateway.

No

~

x Approval Required ...

Figure 36: Position of t he Gateway

15. From the Approval Required##? gateway, add a human activity named Approve Purchase Request

##.

16. Change the name of the Alternative 2 gate to Yes. 17. Place the gate named Yes by the lower right side of the Approval Required##? exclusive choice gateway. 18. From the Approve Purchase Request## activity, add an exclusive choice gateway named Request Approved?.

•

-·

·-· - --· -·

-·

-··--

~-·-~

l

........ ,_.., 1 1···-· •

l _., -··

r;........

&-•-

•

0

-

-·

.........

~·-

) ..·-· .,,...

··-··

Figure 37: Results of t his Exercise Before Formatting

62



19. Format the process.

©Copyright . All rights reserved.

63

Unit 3 Solution 3 Notate a Business Process Model with BPMN 2.0

Business Example

You are a business process administrator. You have been asked to notate a new business process model in BPMN 2.0 . In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you .

1. If necessary, open the process called PO_Product_##. a) In the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Product_## [Vendor##. com] ~ Process [Local Development] po_product_##lpr/pm ~ Process Modeling ~ Processes ~ Purchase Order Process ##.

~

b) Double-click Purchase Order Process## . 2. Delete the connection between the Start event and the End event. a) On the Purchase Order Process## modeling surface, select the connection between the Start event and the End event. b) In the context menu, choose Delete . 3. From the Start event, add a human activity named Enter Purchase Request ##. a) In the Purchase Order Process## modeling surface, select the Start event. b) Using the speed buttons, choose Activity

~

Human .

Speed buttons appear when your cursor touches an object in the process. c) Name the activity Enter Purchase Request ## . d) On the keyboard, choose Enter.

Caution: Each naming activity must be confirmed/ended by an Enter command from your keyboard. This applies to all exercises in this course.

Note: Be sure to save your changes frequently. Saving can be done whenever the disk symbol is active.

64



4. From the Enter Purchase Request## activity, add a human activity named Add Additional Purchase Request Information ## . a) Choose the Enter Purchase Request## activity, then from the speed buttons choose Activity~ Human . b) Name the activity Add Additional Purchase Request Information ##. c) On the keyboard, choose Enter. 5. Assign the Add Additional Purchase Request Information## activity to the Supervisor role. a) Drag the Add Additional Purchase Request Information## activity to the Supervisor## lane. 6. From the Add Additional Purchase Request Information## activity, add an automated activity named Create Purchase Request ##. a) Choose Add Additional Purchase Request Information##

~

Activity

~

Automated.

b) Name the activity Create Purchase Request ##. c) On the keyboard, choose Enter. 7. Assign the Create Purchase Request## activity to the ERP## role. a) Drag the Create Purchase Request## activity to the ERP## lane. 8. From the Create Purchase Request## activity, add an automated activity named Determine if Approval is Required ##. a) Choose Create Purchase Request##

~

Activity

~

Automated.

b) Name the activity Determine if Approval is Required ##. c) On the keyboard, choose Enter. 9. Assign the Determine if Approval is Required## activity to the Approver## role. a) Drag the Determine if Approval is Required## activity to the Approver## lane. 10. From the Determine if Approval is Required## activity, add an exclusive choice gateway named Approval Required##?. a) Choose Determine if Approval is Required##

~

Gateway

~

Exclusive Choice .

b) Name the exclusive choice gateway Approval Required? . c) On the keyboard, choose Enter. 11. From the Approval Required##? gateway, add an automated activity named Release Purchase Request ##. a) Choose Approval Needed?

~

Activity

~

Automated.

b) Name the activity Release Purchase Request ##. c) On the keyboard, choose Enter. 12. Assign the Re/ease Purchase Request## activity to the ERP## role . a) Drag the Re/ease Purchase Request## activity to the ERP## lane.


65


13. Change the name of the Alternative 1 gate to No.

fiii

I

lb


Figure 35: Changing the Name of an Object

a) Select the Alternative 1 gate. b) Double-click the text field and enter No.

Note: Depending on the size and resolution of your screen, it may be necessary to scroll to view the process. You can also change the zoom factor of the working area, either by using the predefined zoom values or by entering a value lower than 100°/o.

14. Place the gate named No near the upper right side of the Approval Required##? exclusive choice gateway.

~

No

x Appr oval Required ...

Figure 36: Position of t he Gatew ay

a) Select the gate named No. b) Move the gate near the upper right side of the Approval Required? exclusive choice gateway. 15. From the Approval Required##? gateway, add a human activity named Approve Purchase Request

##.

a) Choose Approval Required?

~

Activity

~

Human .

b) Name the activity Approve Purchase Request ##. c) On the keyboard, choose Enter. 16. Change the name of the Alternative 2 gate to Yes . a) Select the Alternative 2 gate. b) Double-click the text field and enter Yes . 17. Place the gate named Yes by the lower right side of the Approval Required##? exclusive choice gateway.

66



a) Select the gate named Yes . b) Drag the gate to the lower right side of the Approval Required##? exclusive choice gateway. 18. From the Approve Purchase Request## activity, add an exclusive choice gateway named Request Approved?.

I

I

0

·-·

-·

·-·

-

,.........

~,.. ~

-

......,.......-_...

·-

.........

~--

-· ·-· ........

......... 0 ".---

-

•..

~--

Figure 37: Results of t his Exercise Before Formatting

a) Choose Approve Purchase Request##

---+

Gateway

---+

Exclusive Choice.

b) Name the exclusive choice Request Approved##?. c) On the keyboard, choose Enter. d) Choose Save . 19. Format the process. a) Choose the Purchase Order Pool## (the block above the four swimlanes). b) From the context menu , choose Format Pool. c) Choose Save.


67


liii

0

F\ntu 1t O"dtr Pool 2t tuptn'I

•or 20

14>prov1r2t

ERP70

E11tr

l I

-··

Ott aril1t Ir

Rtq t lft
'"

••

0\ Jt./

""'IOGI' qtiltCI.~ YU

,,)

~

ll!tlt•t

P11elast

Pt l!C\3't

P.tq•t•tm

0

Rtqtu:ta>

Figure 38: Pool Formatting Results

Note: When this exercise is completed, several process objects will indicate errors/ problems. These issues will be fixed in following exercises. You can check these issues in the Problems tab.

68




•


•



69

Unit 3 Lesson 2 Adding Activities to the Business Process

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to add activities to the business process. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

•


•


Automated Activities Overview Service Definition

_____ _____

, Remote Function Call ;

Automated Activity

Output Mapping

Input Mappings Figure 39: Automated Act ivities Overview

An automated activity is a type of flow object in a process that executes a service. An automated activity has the following properties: •

Automated activities must reference web services or Remote Function Calls (RFCs) that have been imported into the Process Development Component.

•

Data can be mapped to and from the process context and the automated activity (just like the human activity).

•

Exceptions that are thrown by the service can be caught and dealt with by the process.

Service Interface Definition and Remote Function Calls Web service interface definitions and RFCs are imported into the Process Development Component for use with business processes. When a process is deployed, the service interface definition is called, and the automated activity runs. You can use predefined service interface definitions or create your own. If you have multiple service interface definitions, you can group them together in a service group. Web service interface definitions are stored as a WSDL file . Input and Output Data Mappings

70


Lesson: Adding Activities to the Business Process

Input and output data mappings enable objects and activities to share information with other objects and activities in a process.

Automated Activities Modeling Tasks )

Automated Activity

I

;

"'7 Service Definition or RFC

""7 Service References

"'-7 Input and Output Mappings Figure 40: Automat ed Activities Tasks

After adding an automated activity to the business process, you must assign service interface definitions to the automated task. Existing service interface definitions can be imported or new service definitions created. In place of service interface definitions, Remote Function Call modules can be imported and used. First, you create an automated activity as part of your process. To make the automated activity work, proceed as follows : 1. Assign a service interface definition (WSDL file) of a Web service and an operation to the automated activity. 2. When you create an automated activity, it has a Sample Timer service interface assigned to it by default. This default service interface enables you to model executable processes more easily and quickly. You can replace the default Sample Timer service interface with a new one. 3. When the process is executed at runtime, the respective Web service is called and the automated activity is executed. 4 . You make service interface definitions available either by importing or manually creating them. You also create service groups for the service interfaces. Service references also need to be created to enable a connection to the systems that provide the necessary Web services. Service references are created within a service group and are used to configure Web services when a process is deployed. Finally, data mappings and boundary events must be defined to enable the activities in a process to share data. The input/output mapping and boundary events configuration is the same for both human activities and automated activities. To import service interfaces and Remote Function Call (RFC) definitions, use the following procedure: 1. Create the automated activity.


71


2. Make service interfaces available. Import service interface definitions to make them available. Alternatively, you can use one of the following methods: •

Create new service interface definitions and define operations from them.

•

Use the search capabilities in the Search Console view in the NetWeaver Developer Studio.

•

Import RFC modules from the ABAP backend system.

3. Assign service interfaces to automated activities. In the Properties view, choose the Interface tab, then select a service and an operation. 4. Create service references. Service references enable the connection at runtime to the particular systems that provide the necessary Web services. Create service references to service groups, which are used to configure all Web services. 5. Define data mappings.

Import Service Interface and Remote Function Call Definitions Service interface definitions are imported from the following sources: •

Enterprise Services Repository (ESR)

•

File system or a remote location such as a URL

•

Services Registry (SR)

Ii;,.- -

Ji. ._, _ _ .C.1

~0

'f?. ·i' ..,.

8 0 Aocf~$ 9

WSOL IM.po rt

.!

&i l~)c-cd.Jttl/r:C/Dll!I

~~ 0t '""' • WSIX. ten}l!lt 1°"* n

u- ~ W5Ct $0U'te.

. Ii«<-.

)'Ola' ~e «Jd

- -toPtoo.tbWrq

r;:;-3,.....

e ....

!ij !D t~ frrn:"N

Av~ ~SW(ef

.... . ,...,

.!l' ~o.;..~

"Efiii"'""'!@!i!o;i (' Rtr'MtAI locollllonJ ~ ~

r- ,._..,..,,

ff) I/I f
_!.!'WWW

, -"' &:;.• uw~-

e u~sl(l\JIC. 8 :JI {~I

Ne-Wn... lllllO'tllK

I

I

-

'S•··--·"

._..,_.,...

u.

P ' -•1,..,.fp

e~ 1~~:~. .:J

'

•'-10

I ..,., I : · I <""" I

You import RFC defin itions from an R/3 destination :

-I ,,._.,.. -

::J

I

!P1"""!

.,.._fl-----~'

00 (l9 Dato Types

' lt}

I

11' '9 i'BIMF

5l 67 src

a U~r Interlace

e !iii 6usinoss logic «\J

New WSOl ...

!...,art WSDL ... Import RFC

,!)

--

-·1- . .,

I

~

I

Figure 41: Im port Service Interface and RFC Definitions

Using a Mock Service In the context menu of the automated activity you have the option to replace the service assigned to the automated activity with a mock service. Selecting this option will generate the stub of an EJB that you can then implement. This makes it possible to test your process without having a connection to required backend systems. You use a version of the process with the mock service and afterwards you use the context menu of the automated activity again to revert to the original . service.

72



f E GI

Search Console

:I

NW Consumption Tools

ABAP Workbench

Web UI

Ill

c 0

f.)

..

C GI

Find

0 di ·0 .. c.

Collect

Full Search Browse Content Related Objects Service Variants

.: E 0 0

Cl) f.)

Explore

Understand

Service Basket

Docu Access Technical info Sample Apps Test Data

Related Objects Service Variants

Reuse existing data sources and allow link to various tools

~-'

'---· ---=-1 Service Endpoints

Service Definitions

'~-Service Docu

ws

Backend

Navigator

Figure 42: Lean Consumpt ion--Single Access Across Federated Repositories Based on Solution Composer

SAP NetWeaver Developer Studio 7. 3

SAP Enterprise Service Workplace

Search Console

WebUI

• I•

-

REST

1

Solution Composer

rFederatJ

ES Workplace Platform

I

Content

I

ws

-Service

Navigator

Registry

I

I

ESR

Backend

Figure 43: Lean Consumpt ion--Architecture where Solut ion Composer is the Technology Base

The Solution Composer is a PC-based tool for creating and editing business maps. It offers federated repository access, which means access to Federated Content, using the REST (Representational State Transfer) principle. Over 400 business maps are delivered with the tool, supporting customer-specific solution planning and design. The Solution Composer is used by those involved in discussing SAP solutions and business processes, including the following: •

Account/Sales executives/Presales

•

Consultants/Partners

•

Customers


73


Search Console

n·

...

,,..,

,-._..

~.....

l!°'!"..!'l.,___

.....

~·

-

......_

.. ,.....,.l""llO!u••o. ...c ......................, _,...,.,.. · · - - -.=--....-

--·~""""•"'ll-.

""~-.- ~ -·~-.vhll.o.~

~

.."--...., ..._, .-...

-.....__ _-...,bnlcalData

Full Text Search

• G "'-'-""'-'r.. .. & P,ftMt ~~¥...)> • 9 ~~'•...w6>\Nrt'WS°'*' WI

ii 0 QAt),.....,lll

flltM~t.•"'.'O'OWW.-...e~w

!iFl'4~1rr~"""'~ ~ 0 ....~~.,,.,._~

--M--- ..

-

....,,.....

--

ii o -c~,,.,_o.t

Browse Search Results

,.....,

,$1 1~

lt<.....'fllftlll"-X..~

.. ...

......,,..

•

,.~

-

·--

~-c-'o\!fT,,,,_,_.

-

~--·°' Zo==

Tec hnical Data

--··-

tJ!!E'b . ,

~I

p( w••

0

M'Uct.1$'..WYAN""•

Figure 44 : Search Console Capabilities, Eclipse Plug-in Integrated in the SAP NetWeaver Developer Studio

Human Activities Overview Human Act ivities are steps in a process that must be acted upon by users. • Human Activities must be associated with tasks (that are in turn associated with Web Dynpro or VC Components) • Data can be mapped to and from the Process Context and the Human Activity

0

Human Aclivtty

• Configuration made at the Task level can be overridden at the Human Activity level • Time Constraint exceptions that are thrown can be caught and dealt with by the Process • Tasks and UI Components can be generated from the Activity! Q Prbpert!OS

'"0

-

.!!.. Problems I~ ld
Approve

Ge.neral

Enter a name for this E'lemeflt and optlonaty provide a documentation:

Tosl< Potential CWmers

Name:

Ootumentatkln:

input Mapping Otltput Mapping

I eoundary ~vents

lltlnnrove ~.

I:' PropertieS .&!..

0

.'IL Pl'OlllemS -21 lden!ly erowser11li 1rlraslrticturt consc1e1ra COtnj)Onent Pl'opMieS ,

Approve

Genetal Tasl< Potmtlal Owners Input MapP1g 0Uq>Ut~

Boundary Evems

Assign a task to the human aa!V
W1(§iirove ... Task Ovetl'ide$

seect the c.ask atut>utes that you \+/!sh to override on human·acttvly level: O Pl'Or'ly 0 .Adlval!On ime

0

Potential owneO Start deadkie 0 Exdlded owrwO Complell>n deadlne

D Exl*•tlOn rm.

Figure 45: Human Activit ies Overview

A human activity is a type of flow object in a process that represents an activity that a person performs. When you create a human activity, there is a default task assigned to it. The default task enables you to model executable processes quickly. The default task can be easily edited or replaced with a new task. To run successfully, a human activity requires a task and input and output mappings.

74



Human Activities Modeling Tasks Human Activity

I

'V I Task

I

I

v7 Output Mapping Figure 46: Human Activities Modeling Tasks

After adding a human activity to the business process, a task must be added and data mappings defined to make the activity run successfully. Every activity must have either the default task or a new task assigned to it. A task describes a specific job that must be completed. Activities must have data mapping defined to enable the activities in a process to share data.

Human Activities Task Configuration After a task is assigned to an activity, the task can be configured for the specific activity and role. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:

•


•


© Copyright. All rights reserved.

75

Unit 3 Lesson 3 Adding Tasks to the Business Process

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to add tasks to a business process. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

•


•


Tasks Overview A task is a request for a human to perform an action. In process modeling, you use tasks to assign them to the human activities in your process. A human activity is a type of flow object in the process you model that illustrates an activity that a human performs. When you create a human activity, it has a default task assigned to it, which you can change with another task. The following settings can be configured at the task level: •

Task priority level

•

Principals for process roles (potential owners, excluded owners, administrators)

•

Dynamic user texts for task titles

•

Time constraints to control when the task start/stops

Tasks Definition A task is a set of instructions that describe how to perform a specific action. In process modeling, tasks are assigned to the human activities in a process. When you create a human activity, a default task is automatically assigned to it. The task is easily edited or changed. After creating a task and assigning it to a human activity, you can edit the task to define its attributes. When working with tasks, you can assign the fo llowing attributes:

76

•

Task name and description

•

User interface

•

Task owners

•

Task administrators

•

Time constraints

•

Task priorities


Lesson: Adding Tasks to the Business Process

•

User texts

Task Creation To create a task, use the following procedure: 1. Create the task. Specify a name for the task and a description. 2. Assign a user interface to the task. Assign either a Web Dynpro or Visual Composer UI component or an Adobe Form. Alternatively, you can use the UI Task Generation template. 3. Define task owners Define owners of the tasks on one of the following levels: lane level, human activity level, or task level 4. Define task administrators. 5. Define t ime constraints (optional) 6. Define task priorities (optional) 7. Define user texts (optional) The Task Editor has a number of views that allow you to configure different elements of the task. In the Overview tab of the Task Editor, you can perform the following tasks: •

Turn on/off the ability of task owners to seek contribution from others.

•

Set the U I component used by the task.

•

Change the name of the task

•

Set the priority of the task

Define Name and Description of the Task You specify a name for the task when you create the task. In the Task Editor you have the option to rename the task. 1. Expand Process Modeling, then expand Tasks. 2. In the context menu of a task, choose Open. The Task Editor opens. 3. On the Overview tab, under General Information, choose the Rename ... button. 4. In the dialog box that appears, specify a new name for the task in the New Name field and choose the Finish button. 5. (Optional) In the Documentation field, specify a description of the task. User Interface A task 's user interface allows users to interact and complete tasks using customized windows and screens within the business process on the system computer. Tasks can use a default UI task generation template or a custom UI created using Web Dynpro, Visual Composer, or Adobe


77


Offline Forms. The default template allows quick and easy creation of multiple tasks and Web Dynpro and Visual Composer UI components. Tasks can share and reuse UI components or have their own unique UI component. Web Dynpro/VC Components To assign a Web Dynpro/VC component to a task, perform the following steps: 1. Select the Choose button to launch the wizard. 2. Choose Unified UI Import Wizard. 3. Choose UI Technology: Web Dynpro or VC, then choose Search and select the applicable component. 4. Choose the complete event and mark any other events and boundary events. In the process, the human activity illustrates an activity that triggers a task. This task is executed by a human. The interaction between a human and the process is enabled through a user interface (U I). The UI assigned to a task allows the user to access and execute that task. This procedure shows how you assign a UI to a task. You can assign Uls of the following technologies: •

Web Dynpro

•

Visual Composer

You can search for UI components in the WD and VC projects available in your workspace. When you assign a UI component to a task, a dependency between the Process Composer DC and the DC contain ing the UI component is automatically set.

Note: You must make a DC dependency to public parts of WD/VC DCs that contain UI components. If this is not done, nothing will display in the wizard for you to select. Boundary events can be caught at the BPM level. The Show All Components radio button allows you to see UI components that do not meet requirements to be integrated into BPM. Task Owners Task owners are the people who are responsible for completing a specific task or activity in the business process. You can assign task owners to the following business process components: •

Lanes

•

Human activities

•

Tasks

Task owners can invite other people to contribute to a task or activity once it is deployed. This enables multiple users to work on a single task at the same time. Contributors help and support the task owner, but the task owner is responsible for managing and completing the task or activity. Defining Time Constraints (Optional)

78



The time constraints are deadlines that refer to the activation, start, completion, and expiration time of the task. Defining Task Priorities (Optional) Task priorities set the importance of a task from very high to low. To add task priorities, perform the following steps: 1. Expand Process Modeling, then expand Tasks. 2. In the context menu of a task, choose Open. The Task Editor appears. 3. On the Overview tab, under Priority, select a priority from the drop-down menu. Defining User Text (Optional) User texts provide a short description or brief instructions for the person responsible for completing the task. User texts of tasks that have a Web Dynpro or Visual Composer UI component assigned to them are displayed in the Universal Worklist. User texts for tasks that have an Adobe form assigned to them are sent in an email to the task owner or potential owners with the form attached. You can configure user text with dynamic content so that data and information is always accurate. To create user text, perform the following steps: 1. Expand Process Modeling, then expand Tasks. 2. In the context menu of a task, choose Open. 3. In the Task Editor, choose the Add button to add a variable. 4. Choose the value in the Name field to rename the variable.

Caution: You can only use the letters A through Z, the numerals 0 through 9, and the underscore character in the variable name.

5. Choose a type for the variable from the Type drop-down menu, if necessary. Choose the Edit button to define an expression. Choose OK. The return value of the expression you create must match the type you chose in the Type field of the Variables table. 6. Specify a subject for the task in the Subject field and a description in the Description field. Use braces {}to reference the variables you defined. You reference a variable by putting the variable's name between the braces. Note: If you decide to send custom email notifications to the potential owners once the task is created, the Subject and Description will also be used as the subject and body of the email.


79


Task Roles Task Roles for Human Activities

•

Potential owners - A list of people who can be assigned to a task

•

Excluded owners - A list of people who cannot be assigned to a task

•

Administrators - A list of people who are assigned to a task

You can assign and change task role assignments for a task from the human activity in the business process. The principals available to assign to task roles are from the User Management Engine (UME) of the CE AS Java. The role assignments can be overwritten at the activity level. The Roles view of the Task Editor allows you to assign principals to roles of the task. The User Texts view of the Task Editor allows you to create parameterized texts for the task subject and description.

Time Constraints Time constraints are the time frames defined for a task. The following time constraint settings are available for a task: •

Activation Time - The time when a task becomes active. A task will not be available to the task owner until the activation time begins.

•

Start Deadline - The time when a task must be started. If a process is not started on time, an exception can be thrown.

•

Completion Deadline - The time when a task must be completed. If a process is not completed on time, an exception can be thrown.

•

Expiration Time - The time when a task becomes inactive and is no longer available to the task owner. The process continues on to the next step if the expiration time is reached.

The Time Constraints view of the Task Editor allows you to set time constraints for when a task is activated , started, completed, and expired.

Notification Overview A notification is a specific type of activity that you model as a separate step in your business process. When the process flow reaches this step, an email is sent to notify selected recipients that a specific event has happened or some activity has been completed in previous process steps. Emails can be dynamic, keeping process data and results current. You can use notification activities in many places in the process model depending on which activities and events you want the process to send notifications about.

Notification Activities Modeling Tasks A notification is a specific type of activity that is modeled as a separate step in your process model. When the process flow reaches this step, an e-mail is sent to notify selected recipients that a specific event has happened or some activity has been completed in previous process steps. You can use notification activities in many places in the process model, depending on which activities and events you want the process to send notifications about.

80



Recipients When you model notifications, you have to define the recipients of the email. Recipients can be users, groups, or roles from the User Management Engine (UME). An e-mail can be sent to users in the UME or to external recipients. You can also define recipients with an expression. Emails are sent in plain text. You can customize the subject and the text of the e-mail using text variables from the data objects in the process context


81


82


Unit 3 Exercise 4 Create a Notification Activity

Business Example

You are a business process administrator. You recently notated a new business process model in BPMN 2.0 and now have been asked to extend the process model by adding and configuring a notification activity. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you. Create a Notification Activity

1. Select the Request Approved##? exclusive choice. 2. From the Request Approved? exclusive choice, add a notification activity named Email Notification ##. 3. Assign the Email Notification## activity to the Requester## role. 4. Change the name of the Alternative 1 gate to No . 5. Place the gate named No near the upper left side of the Request Approved? exclusive choice gateway. 6. Create a connection between the Request Approved##? exclusive choice and the Release Purchase Request## activity. 7. Change the name of the Alternative 2 gate to Yes , then press Enter on your keyboard. 8. Place the gate named Yes by the upper right side of the Approval Required? exclusive choice gateway. 9. Create a connection between the Release Purchase Request## activity and the Email Notification## activity. 10. Create a connection between the Email Notification## activity and the End event.

Hint: You may need to move the End event below the Email Notification activity to create a connection.

11. Autoformat your process to straighten lines and align objects. Write an Email and Assign a Recipient for the Notification Activity

1. Write an email and attach a notification activity using the data in the following table.


83


Field

Value

Subject

Your purchase request has been finished

Message

Hello Requestor ##,Your purchase request has been finished.

2. Define Requestor## as the principal recipient of this email. 3. Verify the recipient setting for the email. Accelerate User Searches

1. To accelerate the user search, deactivate the network proxies.

84


Unit 3 Solution 4 Create a Notification Activity

Business Example

You are a business process administrator. You recently notated a new business process model in BPMN 2.0 and now have been asked to extend the process model by adding and configuring a notification activity. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you. Create a Notification Activity

1. Select the Request Approved##? exclusive choice. a) If the process is closed, perform steps band c. Otherwise, proceed directly to step d. b) In the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Product_## [vendor##.com] ~ Process [LocalDevelopment] po_product_##lprlpm ~ Process Modeling ~ Processes .

~

c) Double-click Purchase_Order_Process_## . d) On the Purchase_Order_Process_## tab, select Request Approved?. 2. From the Request Approved? exclusive choice, add a notification activity named Email Notification ##. a) Choose Request Approved?

~

Activity

~

Notification .

b) Name the notification activity Email Notification ## . 3. Assign the Email Notification## activity to the Requester## role. a) Drag the Email Notification## activity to the Requester## lane. 4. Change the name of the Alternative 1 gate to No. a) Select the Alternative 1 gate. b) Double-click the text field and enter No. 5. Place the gate named No near the upper left side of the Request Approved? exclusive choice gateway. a) Select the gate named No . b) Move the gate near the upper left side of the Request Approved? exclusive choice gateway. 6. Create a connection between the Request Approved##? exclusive choice and the Release Purchase Request## activity. a) Choose Request Approved?


~

Connection.

85


b) Click and drag the connection from the Request Approved? exclusive choice to the Release Purchase Request## activity. 7. Change the name of the Alternative 2 gate to Yes , then press Enter on your keyboard. a) Select the Alternative 2 gate. b) Double-click the text field and enter Yes. 8. Place the gate named Yes by the upper right side of the Approval Required? exclusive choice gateway. a) Select the gate named Yes. b) Drag the gate to the upper right side of the Approval Required? exclusive choice gateway.

fiii No

0

x

Approval iequired ... Yes

0

Approve Purch$$e Request 20

No

,----:---------+-----< 0

I I

~

•

0

Rele Purcha$e Request 20

Yes

x >---'

Request Approved?

~

E.mail Nolitle$tion 20

Figure 47: Repositioned Gatew ay Results

9. Create a connection between the Release Purchase Request## activity and the Email Notification## activity. a) Choose Release Purchase Request##

~

Connection .

b) Click and drag the connection from the Release Purchase Request## activity to the Email Notification## activity. c) Use the contact points to move the connection if necessary.

86



x 0

)-No-~'-----....

Approve! equired ... Yes

0

•

Approve

~

Purchose

I

Request 20

0


No ----+--------1------" Yes

0

Request Approved?

€Q

Email

Notific«ion 20

I

I

Figure 48: Connection Results

10. Create a connection between the Email Notification## activity and the End event. a) Choose Email Notification##

~

Connection.

b) Click and drag the connection from the Email Notification## activity to the End event.

Hint: You may need to move the End event below the Email Notification activity to create a connection.

11. Autoformat your process to straighten lines and align objects. a) In the Purchase Order Pool## header context menu, choose Format Pool. b) Choose Save.


87


.to-

liii

I -·

,,_.

._.

-·

r

....·~·,..•

o:.........,.

·-·" ....---·

..

......... -

0

\

•

~

Lo.... .

~

-·- .. D

'

o:-··

h ,WJ/ ••

o:......,,..

..

® Figure 49: Exercise Results

Write an Email and Assign a Recipient for the Notification Activity 1. Write an email and attach a notification activity using the data in the following table. Field

Value

Subject

Your purchase request has been finished

Message

Hello Requestor ##, Your purchase request has been finished.

a) If the process is closed, perform steps band c. If not, proceed to step d. b) In the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Product_## [vendor##.com] [Local Development] po_product_##lpr/pm ~ Process Modeling.

~

Process

~

c) Double-click Purchase Order Process##. d) On the Purchase Order Process## modeling surface, choose the Email Notification## activity. e) On the Properties tab, choose the Mail view. f) In the Parameterized Text section, fill in the fields using the data in the table. 2. Define Requestor## as the principal recipient of this email. a) On the Properties tab, choose the To view. b) At the end of the Principals field, choose Choose.

88



c) In the Principals dialog box, In the Principal Name drop-down menu, choose User. d) In the next text field, enter Requestor## .

-

..

~Browse

-

Principals Select Principals from UME

Princil» Name:

JUser

.. .

Coofiaure Defau!!: 5erver ...

EJ .... l Req ...;.u_est _or_@..;...._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __,,!•_.1 1

Search Results:

Search

Principals to Select:

Add >

Figure 50: Principals Screen--Search for User Requester##

e) Choose Search . f) In the Logan to SAP AS Java dialog box, in the User Name field, enter Administrator## and in the Password field, enter the password and select the Save Username checkbox. g) Click OK.

Note: The user search in the UME may take some time; please be patient. In the next step you accelerate the search.

h) On the Principals screen, in the search results area, choose Requestor##. i) Choose Add.

j) Choose OK. k) Choose Save. 3. Verify the recipient setting for the email. a) On the Properties tab, choose To. b) In the Principals field, verify that the entry says Requestor## . Double-checking here assures that the user has been properly assigned . Accelerate User Searches

1. To accelerate the user search, deactivate the network proxies. a) In the NetWeaver Developer Studio, choose Window b) In the Preferences dialog box, expand General

~

~

Preferences .

Network Connections .

c) On the Network Connections screen, in the Active Provider field, choose Direct. d) Choose Apply, then, choose OK.


89



90

•


•



Unit 3 Lesson 4 Adding report activities to a business process

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to add report actitives to a business process. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

•


Report Activity Overview Report activities allow you to collect rea l-time task and process context data for reporting. Reports can be generated from any data source in the business process. Data sources are defined through input and output mapping.

Report Activity Modeling Tasks Report Activity

I

'v Input and Output Mapping Figure 51: Report Act ivit ies Modeling Tasks

For reporting activities to successfully col lect data, data input and output mappings must be defined. Tasks and processes must also be configured to collect and analyze the appropriate data for a report. Reporting Data Types

•

Generic Process Data--Processes and task instance data, Meta data for process and task definitions

•

Process Context Data--Defined as part of the process model (for example, business payload data)

Design Time Report Data Sources BPM Reporting Data Sources


91


•

Ability to add process context data to a custom data source table

•

Use Visual Composer to create light-weight analytic dashboards to visual data

•

Provides data extraction to Bl

13 Ji; [Loclll>evelopmert) bpm/rej)Oft"9Jbpm ijl ~ Connectivity S !>l> Prcxess Modelno W~ P<0
lil'8 TMl
'9 Event Triggers

El

~ ReportinQ Dot• Sources

I

~ Orderttlstory Rule

s

·-18 Fune

S-~ o.t.

mi8 Servi

Ll .,....,,

lntetfoces

lion OrderHistory - Gelier -<11- - - t Define the input mapping for this element: • Repcwtin9 Rddf

L°"""'9

oefriedata fietk for h."IXWtnQ: ~=

ifl)Uts of OrderHistory

!:.====='! Process context

-

,..,. _ ----,-,,----. ~Add -~

product

= =ii

st:Mg

_....

-

Input Mapping

MIO

S¥n!I

ordtri:I

I=====~ ~ 8 Ill Co~xt

!======'~ ·•8 li3 Orde:History

!ID

Approve

(ID "ll!>rove

III

OJderlD

l!I orderld

l!I Product -1-----1"--- Ill 1>
Figure 52: BPM Reporting Data Sources--Design Time

BPM Generic Reporting Data Sources with SAP NetWeaver Visual Composer

•

Functionality available using the Visual Composer browser version

•


•

Real-time data

-......

1~~0:-~ S)'Stnl de.slnMi:.n

I"'\Id)...,.

-

-

..

-

.

I

~forla?*

,,..

' ...0

FilTEA:

h

I

'-81 .0ROERHLSTORV _DEMO.SAP_ 1....,...

I '-

'-

I ...... 11

INFO

OATA ~

1111

I

....

.....

C.-..1

I

'il:J

-,_

q,,

.,,I

""""" ra.

to.ndSresJt(s)

'""ll!l ""'-'"'llESS..l<>O..D<

""""

p.J SPM_M't_~j)S (Ttl SPN_M'f_
......tl

Im l!PfoljUl:tl'"'-_ASSt
DAfA

-

. """""' 155' . c,._.

11111:::: i

Order History Resport

I'lb -

IS

C>,

I

~~ Techrticallla me Ordertf EStory_oe:mo.sap_ t

Otta;>tion

current User

,__]

Ordettllltory_demo.sap_ 1

AdtMISlfator,

.,J l

~proved

!'
Onlet

Oate

Product

Ouan1ity

FB'6EF••OF89110ECI 01A£3A04DF8A110EE

1 2~789$28468

S93933

200

1

1259789S12640

12J2J09 12J2J09

$939335

5-00

1

ECOCF39<0F90110EC•

• 2~7924736<10

1212J09 12/2J09

9&48444

222 300

J

7F88E621DF92110E9B 12S979314S906

U73833l

!21~

1

•

-

"•

~

Figure 53: BPM Generic Report ing Data Sources--SAP NetWeaver Visual Com poser

92


Lesson: Adding report activities to a business process

BPM Generic Data Sources with SAP NetWeaver Visual Composer •

Predefined list of generic data sources regarding real-time processes and task instances

•


Real time Process status

'flA'o
0

,,........,.;JWI'

ot•h~'41toa

I~

~~IWllOlCl

CCJl,ll\Cl'fl)

11=it·,.,.~

W1~Qll: ll«Q

~~

t:>W_.-~

~l)C(t~)OfSC UCC~

ti,.Ptl~(S$

00111\MO

. .T.r.v.QKUPl.. 'l,.P!IQGf;l;$

Of'W':~

·~~JIO(A( ~l'\ln.C

·~

$1.t•9'fWle'l0U< ~QGAJ$$

,....,..

...

...

,._

··-·-- ·..... ....

0~~•1QtM -OO~"'" '=ec~'--1111.oa

O:W~

-

Process Instance Report

ll:IM9

"'"" ..,. ,,,,.,.

1 111..:.

.,._.. """'°

llflM$

~

Task Instance Report

etailed Business Log Report

Real Time Process Task status

....

.......

......

l

...

.

·~$$ ~''?JOS.•1

---

,,.. "'"'..,, """"'° ,.,., .;: ""* "'""-""'

....... OOU~110.

~»>l'lt

""""" '°""""' "''"""

,.........01

OOll"l.tttO

)4.(IOll.J!.lt *>~l:,U

~·.~•11!

)otHt'2! 01

Ut\Mlt tl~Mlt

•

..... _ .. ........ ... .. ......... -·,

"""' ~

...... ...... ............ ,.... "'"'°'

~._

··111~

- -........ '

'

n•~oo

,

,,..,.Oll

rii!IB ,._. ;$,SGf:i'nM

~,·)$~' ' *

:&.•n• , .. . ff

1,tu.00

S ,W I N

"''"'

».tPitf

1-&l,IOfOO S,Gl'OO

n.~~:t• ~,.,

..

)l.9<00

O,io• M

ot$11C4

o.su..

--

t:I ""' -blloo ~ ~~re~ioa-... ~•.o!!!!!"--..?;!

IOI'::~ lllf4>"l'!M'

.-:in

~ ·-

....

•DCOll'~ ~ !"511

f · l:h ·--"" · .,..___ l~tlll,o."f; · ~~•IU ~ U.S...t:Olltu 1 -

•l!C:>'l:t• - - . - ~ •-ldC . - ,.OCJW.

~ ..U-JOt· ·"''UtJlb'U. ~ -..a1_ttt; • -

~~ -~ ~

·~·~.. ~I.I ~... ·-

~

·~-- ~ 1"*"

•*11''*="-' ~ ~.."'

~ ~

..,....

~·

•""'OI

,.~.,. • JM,.i.•,.f llof!t • mSMetott l?ti•l.Ml'!i•

,.._,.

""'"'l,S./'M.t

wu... w 1nt.t1'• 111$• ' *'"~°'' ,.,,u ,,,.,,,.a;i; ....

)ao_,,.,,olt

...

--·:»•:nt.••''"'"'' '"'"''VJ*• •~..,

-.Nfllll """'-......" ..-

,..•

~

11u.-u..i 1*111.•n-• •

t.o..'lllf1rtll ........~...... i~""""'

"~.-.

·-,.,.._

Figure 54: BPM Generic Data Sources--SAP NetWeaver Visual Com poser

Report Data Sources •

Process context data

•

Task context data

•

Visual Composer

LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: •



93

Unit 3 Lesson 5 Extending the Strategic Business Process with Events

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to extend the strategic business process with events. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson , you will be able to:

•


Event Models The events in the process have different triggers and results and effect the flow of the process. You use events to indicate that a process has started or ended, or that the flow is delayed and is waiting for a certain time before resuming. You can also use events to represent the interaction between different processes. To model events. perform the following steps: 1. Create the event. 2. Assign a trigger to the event or configure the trigger time for intermediate timer events. 3. Use triggers to indicate the reason for an event to occur (for example, a message or an exception). 4. Define a start condition for a message event and a correlation condition for an intermediate message event. Start Condition Start conditions are defined for start message events to specify which messages can start a process. The start condition compares the payload of an incoming message to a predefined constant. For example, a start condition is configured to begin a process when an order for 10,000 units or more is received . When an order is received with a value of 10,000 or more, then the process begins. If the incoming order is less than 10,000 units, then the process does not start. You can also use the default value True, which means that any message can trigger the start event. Start conditions can be configured in great detail. Correlation Condition If you use intermediate message events in your process, you to have configure correlation conditions for them. A correlation condition matches an incoming message to the process context and evaluates which particular message the intermediate message event expects.

94


Lesson: Extending the Strategic Business Process with Events

In contrast to other conditions, correlation conditions can only consist of equality predicates with the conjunction operator AND. The following example shows a correlation condition:

e v e nt/custome rI D = process/customerI D AND e v ent/orderl t em = p roce ss/ orderltem AND e v e nt/type = "ORDER" . Depending on the event type, an input or an output mapping may be required.

Start and End Events

Start Event

End Event

Figure 55: Start and End Events

Start Event A start event creates a new process instance or indicates the start of a referenced sub-process. A start event is an event that does not need or require a specific trigger. A message start event indicates that the process start is triggered when the event receives a Web Services Description Language (WSDL) message. You assign a message trigger that is created from a service interface and an operation to the message start event. End Event An end event is an event that has no specific result. You can use it when the exact result of an end event is not important. A result, such as a message or error, can be configured at any time, but is not required. You can configure the following end event attributes: •

Name

•

Trigger Type

•

Description

An end event can be used without a trigger in an embedded subprocess. Message End Event A message end event ends a process and sends a WSDL message as a result. A process can have only one end event whose result is a message. A message trigger is created from a service interface and an operation and assigned to the message end event. The same message trigger created from a WSDL file with a request and response is assigned to the message start and end events to model a synchronous process.


95


Intermediate Events

liii

@ 'EJ...

Intermediate Timer Event

Intermediate Message Event

Figure 56: Intermediate Events

An intermediate event pauses a process and has no specific trigger to continue. Use an intermediate event when the exact trigger of an event is not important. You can set a trigger, for example a message or timer, to an intermediate event at any time, but it is not required. Intermediate Timer Event An intermediate timer event shows where the process pauses and waits for a certain time to pass before resuming Intermediate Message Event An intermediate message event shows where the process pauses and waits for a WSDL message from outside the process before resuming. Intermediate message events cannot be used in embedded subprocesses.

Error Boundary Events Error Boundary Event

Escalation Boundarv Event

Figure 57: Boundary Events

An error boundary event is a specific intermediate event that you place on the boundary of an activity, but it is not in the actual process flow. Error boundary events handle exceptions that occur during an activity and are triggered by an error or escalation. A sequence flow connection starting at a boundary event shows the process flow after an exception. Exceptions can occur in the following areas within a process: •

Root process If the exception occurs in the root process, it is handled by a default handler at runtime and you model only the exception in your process. When the exception occurs, the whole process is suspended and an administrator can inspect the process.

96



•

Referenced sub-process If the exception occurs in a referenced sub-process, it can be handled by a boundary event in the referencing process. In this case you model both the exception and the exception handling. You place the boundary event on the boundary of the sub-process flow object in the referencing process. The sub-process flow object represents the referenced sub-process.

When the exception occurs, the whole process is suspended. Depending on the type of exception, the sub-process and the process may behave in the following ways: •

Critical exception If a boundary event can handle the exception. the sub-process is canceled and process execution continues from the boundary event. If no boundary event is available. the exception is handled by the default handler and the sub-process remains suspended. The root process is also suspended and an administrator can inspect it.

•

Non-critical exception If a boundary event can be found, the branch, which created the exception in the sub-process, ends and processing continues from the boundary event. If no boundary event can be found, the sub-process remains suspended and the root process is also suspended. The default handler handles the exception and an administrator can inspect the process.

•

Embedded sub-process If an exception occurs in an embedded sub-process, it can be handled by a boundary event in the parent or root process. The embedded sub-process depends on the parent process and cannot be suspended alone but together with the surrounding process. Only an escalation exception type can occur in an embedded sub-process. You model both the exception and the exception handling. You place the boundary event on the boundary of the embedded subprocess, or on the boundary of a parent process up in the hierarchy.

•

Actvity If the exception occurs within an activity, you model only the exception handling because the exception is not visible outside the activity. You can place a boundary event on the boundary of a human and automated activity to show how the exception that occurred while the activity was being performed is handled.

•

Caution You can create a boundary event only for human and automated activities for which an exception or respectively WSDL fault has been defined.

•

End of the caution An exception can also occur in a branch of a parallel process or sub-process. In this case, the whole process instance is suspended until the exception is handled by a boundary event or by the default handler. If the exception is handled by the default handler. the process instance remains suspended and an administrator can inspect it.

Other Events


97


E rror End

Escalation End

Termination

Figure 58: Other Events

Error End Event An error end event terminates a process that has reached an error state. An error end event is used to model an error that occurs in a process. This error triggers a WSDL fault, which can be defined in the service interface of the message trigger assigned to a message start event. Since the error is defined in the service interface, it is visible outside the BPM system and can be used to communicate with other systems. There can be as many error end events in a process as the number of faults defined, but a synchronous process ending with an error end event cannot be modeled because a WSDL fault response is not supported. Error end events cannot be used in embedded subprocesses. An error that occurs in a referenced subprocess is handled by an error boundary event, which is placed on the boundary of the subprocess flow object in your process. Escalation End Event The escalation end event represents a business error that has occurred and needs to be processed (for example, when a task is not completed by the defined deadline). The escalation is internal to the BPM system and is not visible to other systems. There can be more than one escalation end events in a process. The escalation type and importance of the event can be configured in the process. An escalation is thrown from an inner subprocess to an outer external process until the exception can be handled by an exception handler. If exception handling is not possible for a critical escalation, the process is suspended. Exceptions are analyzed in the SAP NetWeaver Administrator Termination A termination event stops the process or sub-process immediately. A termination event, by default, is triggered by a message, but also can be triggered by an error or escalation. A termination event ends a process flow by design. If a branch in the process reaches a termination event, all parallel flows in the process are also terminated. Termination events can be configured in detail. Exceptions indicate problems that have occurred and/or changes from the normal flow of the process. When an exception occurs in the process, the process execution stops at that point. There are the following two types of exceptions in the process composer, differentiated by their triggers :

98



•

Errors

•

Escalations

To model exceptions and exceptions handling, you create the following event types: •

Error end event

•

Escalation end event

•

Boundary event

Exception Types in Human Activities An exception that occurs in the inner flow of a task is of type escalation and can be critical or noncritical. Depending on the type of the escalation in the inner task flow, you can create a critical or non-critical boundary event for the human activity to which the task is assigned. Critical and noncritical boundary events have different graphical representations on the boundary of the human activity. The following are exception types for human activities: •

Critical escalation When the escalation occurs, the task execution is canceled and the critical boundary event handles the exception. The process continues from the critical boundary event and does not follow the regular flow out of the human activity.

•

Non-critical escalation A non-critical escalation does not cancel the task execution and you can work on the task and complete it at runtime. The non-critical boundary event handles the escalation and the process continues from the boundary event. When the task is completed, another token of the process continues independently following the regular flow out of the human activity.

To use exceptions, perform the following steps: 1. Create the necessary events. 2. Define the input mapping Input mapping defines the information that the exception needs. 3. Define the output mapping. The output mapping for boundary events shows how information about the exception is used in the process.

Reusable Event Triggers You create service interface definitions or WSDL files to use them in your business process model so you can execute it. You define operations for the service interface definitions you use in your process. The operation is an abstract description of an action supported by the service. The WSDL files are included in a Service Group to be able to configure upon deployment.


99


,......__. Project Explorer

E3-.....,

~- Navigator

= El

B ~I l±l B

ff 7 [LocalDevelopment) productl/infra/sgc !; [LocalDevelopment) productl/pr/pm l±l ~ Connectivity

. S DD Process Modeling !±!· ~ Processes I•

I•

I•

C8 Tasks

i El c9 Event Triggers •

I. . I. I. I I I ·•

I : •

I. I.

(C, Messages

@ New Message

(C, Escalations @ New Escalation ~ Reporting Data~rn .,....- - - - - - '

. ~ Rule Sets

l!l GS Functions l±l ~ Data Types

. .: .. '-."'~·'- -· -

Figure 59: Creating Reusable Event Triggers (1/ 2)

New Message T riggef

N ew M cssoge Trigger

s.lect--

Creot..encwMess.oe Trlo9cr

Oekio pl)pOj t1$S S\ld'i ti ffJf'VQ, k'lt0tf«e 41-.d Ol>tll'ttlon:

,.,.,.,., Ope.-~:

""" I

-r...,

·I

Ql!lT~(ln:oetrtne,o.t:oetT~soanse)

·I

,,__.,.........,,_~~~~~=---.;.;

!!<>t,

Figure 60: Creat ing Reusable Event Triggers (2/2)

Creating reusable event triggers enables you to model events more easily and quickly. You make the necessary settings once and then assign the trigger to more than one event in your process. The event trigger represents the web service endpoint of the process at runtime. You can also use one and the same event trigger in multiple processes that are contained in the same project. Note that assigning the same message trigger to start events of multiple processes may result in starting all these processes together when the service interface is invoked. You have to specify different start conditions if this behavior is undesired. You can create the following types of reusable event triggers: •

Message Trigger You use message triggers for modeling message start. intermediate message, and message end events. You create the message trigger from an operation of a service interface. To make service interfaces available, you can either import or create service interface definitions or WSDL files in your project. When there is a WSDL fault defined for an operation in the service interface definition, an error trigger is automatically created together with the message trigger. You cannot create a separate error trigger manually, but you can add a fault in the

100



WSDL file and then create message and error triggers. You can use the error trigger to model error end events in your process. •

Escalation Trigger You use escalation triggers to model escalation end events in the process. Escalation end events represent a business error that occurs in the process, for example an item runs out of stock in a purchase order process. All the deadlines you define in a task can also trigger escalations when they are reached. When you create escalation triggers, you define the escalation type, which is a XSD type. In this way you define which data the escalation transports from the place it is thrown to the place where it is handled. You have the option of marking an escalation as critical. Error and escalation end events can be handled by a respective boundary event. When you have created your event triggers, you can assign them to the events you model. You can also create start and end events directly from event triggers when you drag and drop them on the modeling surface, or intermediate events when you drop a trigger on a sequence flow connection. When you drop an event trigger on an already modeled event, the trigger is updated with the one you dropped on the event. ,....

Intermediate !Ylessage ·-

General Event Trigger

Define the correlation condition for this event: 1 string-e qual(DO_AddressType/key, verificationResponse/address/id)

Output Mapping Correlation Condition

I

Figure 61: Intermediate Event Message (1/2)

Intermediate event messages in BPM are used to receive asynchronous messages. The process instance stops until the message is received . Correlation conditions are used to determine to which process instance the incoming message belongs. If the comparison of a key value(s) from the incoming message to a key value(s) in the process instance context match, then the message belongs to the process instance. At this point the process instance continues to the next step. Any unique data value could be used as a key value, for example, a product ID, an order ID or a business partner ID. In general, key values must uniquely identify the process instance.


101


Intermediate Message ...-Genor-.,- - - - < Select a trigger for this event T"9Qer Type:

Event Trigger

Triooer:

lverficationResponse

Correlation Condition

Ploject E>plc
•

El

r:J.' ~ f'6Y!Qato<

~ [T.,.[ODl<>m~IP«<

il1 lj\ ConnertNo;y SW Process~

"'°'.....

00 ~ l»IS T..t.s

Demo propettles such .. service Interface and """'ation:

ec.9

9-0 Me-ssaoes

8

• Settings

St•""°'°"

-@ Verflc.ationResponse

Sm!ce: jAddre.
Figure 62: Intermed iate Event Message (2/2)

Intermediate event messages are bound to the event message. Event messages are in turn bound to service interfaces. When the BPM project is deployed, the service interface is exposed as a web service. Clients make call to this web service, which is turn executes the BPMN intermediate message step.

102


Unit 3 Exercise 5 Handle a Boundary Exception

Business Example

You are a business process administrator. You recently notated a new business process model in BPMN 2.0 and now have been asked to extend the process model by adding and configuring a boundary exception. In this exercise, the process will be terminated. If the process is not terminated, the next scheduled human activity will begin. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you. 1. For the Enter Purchase Request## human activity, create the boundary exception named CompletionOeadlinelsNonCriticafException. 2. Make a connection from the CompletionDeadlinelsNonCriticalException boundary exception to the End event.


103

Unit 3 Solution 5 Handle a Boundary Exception

Business Example

You are a business process administrator. You recently notated a new business process model in BPMN 2.0 and now have been asked to extend the process model by adding and configuring a boundary exception. In this exercise, the process will be terminated . If the process is not terminated , the next scheduled human activity will begin. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you . 1. For the Enter Purchase Request## human activity, create the boundary exception named Completion DeadIine IsNon CriticaIException .

a) If the process is closed, perform steps band c. If not, proceed to step d. b) In the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Product_## [vendor## .com] [LocalOevelopment] po_product_##/pr/pm

~

Process Modeling

~

~

Process Processes .

~

c) Double-click Purchase Order Process## . d) On the Purchase Order Process## modeling surface, select the activity Enter Purchase Request## .

e) On the Properties tab, choose the Boundary Events view. f) Choose Add. g) In the Select dialog box, choose CompletionOeadlinelsNonCriticalException . h) Choose OK.

fiii

st rt

..: - -

..

Enter Ptrchase Request 20

" •

Figure 63: Boundary Except ion Added

2. Make a connection from the CompletionDeadlinelsNonCriticalException boundary exception to the End event. a) On the PO_Product_## modeling surface, select the CompletionOeadlinelsNonCriticalException boundary exception.

104


Lesson: Extending the Strat egic Business Process with Events

b) Choose the Connections speed button and drag the connection to the End event. To drag the connection line, you can use the scroll wheel on your mouse.

Note: Depending on the size of your screen , it might be necessary to lower the zoom factor. You can do so using the plus or m inor glasses or by entering a value in the zoom window.

c) Choose Save.

0

..., z

# :icn:i:not

® ... Figure 64: Connection between Boundary Exception and End Event


105



•

106



Unit 3 Lesson 6 Extending the Strategic Business Process with Gateways

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to add gateways to the strategic business process. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

•


Gateways Gateways are used in BPMN to control the direction(s) of the flow throughout the process. Gateways are represented as diamond figures in BPMN notation. A gateway is a type of flow object in the process that shows a merge or a split of a process flow. Create a gateway to indicate that a decision must be made or that the process flow must be split or merged depending on the given conditions Table 1: Gateway Types Gateway Type Exclusive Choice

Symbol

Properties Only one path can be taken. Each Gate has a Boolen data . expression.

Parallel Split (also AND gateway)

Splits sequence flow in parallel stream.

Event Based Choice

Only one path can be taken. Decision is based on events.


107


Gateway Type

Properties

Symbol

Uncontrolled Merge

Merge exclusive alternative incoming sequence flows to one outgoing sequence flow .

Parallel Join

Merge parallel alternative incoming sequence flows to one outgoing sequence flow .

Exclusive Split

fiii

Exclusive Split Notation

Valid Claim Default Path -""".............,...

Invalid Claim

Figure 65: Exclusive Split Gatew ay

The exclusive split gateway allows the control flow to take one path dependent on the conditions that are defined. Multiple paths can leave from an exclusive split gateway. Although not mandatory in all cases, divergent control paths from exclusive split gateways should converge at uncontrolled merge gateways. Every exclusive split gateway has a default path that has no conditions set. Given conditions must return a boolean value. If the conditions for the other paths are not met, then the control flow follows the default path. The default path is notated in the business process with a slash mark.

Parallel Split and Parallel Join Parallel Split Gateway and Parallel Join Gateway Notation

+

I '~

Notify Supplier PO Received

0

Verify PO

I

:,. Check Supply on Hand

+-

Figure 66: Parallel Split and Parallel Join Gateways

108


Lesson: Extending the Strategic Business Process with Gateways

A parallel split gateway ensures that all paths diverging out of the split must be taken. The parallel join gateway ensures that all paths leaving the gateway are taken. All paths eventually meet at the parallel join gateway where they merge back into one flow. The parallel join gateway will not allow a process to continue until all paths arrive at the parallel join gateway.

Event-Based Choice Event-Based Choice Gateway Notation --+fl~)--+!

0

Message Event Received

Message Event

Start

D

Event

~h:: : :coi~e-.ti~1--+1 0 ~

Timer Event Received

End

Timer Event

Process_IO

Figure 67: Event Based Choice Gateway

The event-based choice gateway controls the flow direction based on events. An event-based choice gateway is immediately followed by an intermediate timer event and an intermediate message event. The event that is triggered first is the path that is followed by the process flow. The event-based choice gateway only controls flow direction. There is no configuration specific to the event-based choice; only the intermediate events that follow the event-based choice gateways are configured to allow the activity or process to continue once all conditions are met.


109


110


Unit 3 Exercise 6 Create a Business Process with Events

Bu siness Example

You are a business process administrator. You recently notated a new business process model in BPMN 2.0 and now have been asked to extend the business process model by adding new events.

Note: In this exercise, a new product and process are created in order to keep the exercise simple and workable.

In this exercise you will create a new product to explore different scenarios within SAPBPM which cannot be added to your primary PO_Product_## process. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create a product called PO_Enhanced_## using the data in the following table. Dialog Box

Element Name

Value


Name

PO- Enhanced- ##


Vendor

vendor##.org


Name

SC_PO_Enhanced_##


Vendor

vendor##.org


PO_##_SC


Process Modeling, Visual Composer, JSP/Servlet, Web Dynpro, Composite Application Framework (CAF), Dictionary, Service Composition, EJB/JPA, Rules Composer, Service Group Configuration


2. Create a process named HandleEvents## using the data in the following table. Field

Values

Name

HandleEvents##


111


Field

Va lues

New Pool: Name

Pool Administrator##

New Pool: Lanes

Requestor ##,Supervisor##

3. Create a new process with the fol lowing objects. Add the following objects in the order given. 1. From the Start event, add an event-based choice named Event-Based Choice ##. 2. From the Event-Based Choice object, create an intermediate message named Intermediate Message ##. 3. From the Event-Based Choice object, create an intermediate timer named Intermediate Timer##.

4 . Connect the Intermediate Message and Intermediate Timer objects to the End event. 5. Assign Administrator## as the principal user for the pool. 6. Set the intermediate timer for 1 minute. 7. Build and Deploy PO_Enhanced_## and then verify the deployment. 8. Run the HandleEvents## process from the Process Repository. 9. View the process on the Manage Processes screen. Identify what data is being used and what events have been initiated.

112


Unit 3 Solution 6 Create a Business Process with Events

Business Example

You are a business process administrator. You recently notated a new business process model in BPMN 2.0 and now have been asked to extend the business process model by adding new events.

Note: In this exercise, a new product and process are created in order to keep the exercise simple and workable.

In this exercise you will create a new product to explore different scenarios within SAPBPM which cannot be added to your primary PO_Product_## process. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you. 1. Create a product called PO_Enhanced_## using the data in the following table. Dialog Box

Element Name

Value


Name

PO- Enhanced- ##


Vendor

vendor##.org


Name

SC_PO_Enhanced_##


Vendor

vendor##.org


PO_##_SC


Process Modeling, Visual Composer, JSP/Servlet, Web Dynpro, Composite Application Framework (CAF), Dictionary, Service Composition, EJB/JPA, Rules Composer, Service Group Configuration


a) If you are already in the Composite Designer perspective, proceed to step d. b) On the SAP Net Weaver Developer Studio screen, choose Window Other.


~

Open Perspective

113

~


c) In the Open Perspective dialog box, select Composite Designer and choose OK. d) In the File menu, choose New

~

Product.

e) In the Define a New Product dialog box, in the Name field, enter the product name. f) In the Vendor field, enter the vendor name. g) Choose Next. h) In the Select Software Components dialog box, choose New Software Component. i) In the Define SC Attributes dialog box, in the Name field, enter the SC name. j) In the Vendor field, enter the vendor name if it is not already displayed. k) Choose Next. I) In the Define SC Dependencies dialog box, choose Finish. m) In the Select Software Components dialog box, select your newly created software component, SC_PO_Enhanced_##. Do not select My Components. n) Choose Next. o) In the Select Initial Technologies dialog box, select the appropriate checkboxes using the data from the table. p) Choose Finish. The PO_Enchanced_## process modeling tab opens. 2. Create a process named Handle£vents## using the data in the following table. Field

Values

Name

HandleEvents##

New Pool: Name

Pool Administrator##

New Pool: Lanes

Requestor ##,Supervisor##

a) If the Process Modeling tab is already open, go to step b. Otherwise, in the Composite Explorer view, double-click PO_Enhanced_## . b) From the Palette, choose Process PO_Enhanced_## Layout view.

~

Process and drag it to the Process section of the

c) If the Select Target Development Component dialog box displays, choose [LocalDevelopment] po_enhanced_##/pr/pm and choose OK. d) In the New Process dialog box, in the Name field, enter the new process name. e) Select the Create a Pool with the Following Name and Lanes checkbox. f) In the Process Name field, enter the pool name. g) In the Lanes field, enter the lane names.

114



h) Choose Finish . 3. Create a new process with the following objects. Add the following objects in the order given. 1. From the Start event, add an event-based choice named Event-Based Choic e ##. 2. From the Event-Based Choice object, create an intermediate message named Intermediate Message ##. 3. From the Event-Based Choice object, create an intermediate timer named Intermediate Timer## .

a) If the PO_Enhanced_## tab is still open, proceed to step b. Otherwise, In the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Enhanced_## [Vendor##.com] ---.. Process ---.. [LocalDevelopment] po_enhanced_##/pr/pm ---.. Process Modeling ---.. Processes. b) Double-click the Handle Events## process. c) On the HandleEvents## tab, select the connection between the Start event and the End event. d) In the Edit menu, choose Delete. e) Select the Start event. f) Using the speed buttons, choose Gateway ---.. Event-Based Choice . g) Name the object using the list as a guide. h) On the keyboard, choose Enter to apply the name. i) Choose the Event-Based Choice## object. j) Using the speed buttons, choose Event and then the Intermediate Message. k) Name the object using the list as a guide. I) On the keyboard, choose Enter to apply the name. m) Repeat steps I through K to add the remaining Intermediate Timer. n) Choose Save. 4. Connect the Intermediate Message and Intermediate Timer objects to the End event. a) In the HandleEvents modeling surface, select the object. b) Using the speed buttons, choose Connection and drag the connection to the End event. c) Repeat the steps to connect the remaining object. d) From the context menu of the pool header, choose Format Pool. e) Choose Save.


115


Note: It may be necessary to first move the end object to the end of the lane.

Pool Administrator20

•

•

· ·~-

Requestor10

Supervisor10

-

I

G:I)

St rt ~'

--<:<~l: >-v Event-Based Choi . ....-:

~

....

~~ a-,:::

--

l~l a-.-

1n1ermedi..,e ...es....•• -rmeaiate Tim ...

1m

a End

Figure 68: Intermediate Message and Intermediate Timer Connection Resu lts

5. Assign Administrator## as the principal user for the pool. a) Choose the Pool header. b) On the Properties tab, choose the Administrators view. c) At the end of the Principals field, choose Choose . d) In the Principals dialog box, in the Principal Name drop-down menu, choose User. e) In the next text field , enter Administrator ##. f) Choose Search . g) If requested, log in with the user name Administrato r## and your password (created in the first exercise). It may take a few moments for the results to appear. h) On the Principals screen, in the Search Results area, choose Administrator##. i) Choose Add. j) Choose OK. k) Choose Save . 6. Set the intermediate timer for 1 minute. a) Select the Intermediate Timer. b) On the Properties tab, choose Timer Configuration .

116



c) In the Offset field, enter 1 in the first text box and choose Minute(s) from the drop-down menu. d) Choose Save. 7. Build and Deploy PO_Enhanced_## and then verify the deployment. a) In the Composite Explorer view, in the PO_Enhanced_## context menu, choose Deploy. b) From the Product Build Required dialog box, choose Build and Deploy. It may be necessary to log on to the Java server. To do so, use the user Administrator## with its password. c) If the Build Success dialog box or GAF Project Generation dialog box is displayed, choose OK. The deployment starts automatically. d) When the deployment is finished, on the Infrastructure Console tab, choose Deploy. e) Verify the deployment.

Note: It may take some time for the process to build and deploy.

/

(Li Properties ;& Relations Action l±l & Build ~ Build B ill Deploy • Deploy ill Deploy 6 Deploy • Deploy ill Deploy ~ Deploy

ff. Problems ~@» lnfrastructure Console Obiect Name

D D D D D

~"""' Messaae

$Deploy VI

Building DCs(po_enhc Building DCs(po_enh.: Deploying DCs to J2E DC po_product_20/ui po_product_20/ui/vc po _enhanced_20/bl/caf/dictionar ... DC po_enhanced_20, po_enhanced_20/bl/caf/metadata ... DC po_enhanced_20, po_enhanced_20/bl/ddic [demo.s ... DC po_enhanced_20, DC po_enhanced_20, po_enhanced_20/ui/vc Deployment of 18 file

Figure 69: Infrastructure Console--Build and Deployment in the Infrastructure Console

fiii

Cl PrOj)el'ties ;& Relations (l Problems

I Time

I

i i i i i i i i i

09:16:15 09: 16:15 09: 16:13 09:16:08 09: 16:03 09: 15:59 09: 15:59 09:15:58 09: 15:58

'iJ Irirastructure Console f$

Deploy View Console !:3 ~

Mes OeployRestAt:status 'Success' [#1]: +++Deployment of session ID[371] finished with status [Success]+++ . [[ deployerld~t ]] [[#5: 52.169 sec]] [ (more] [#1]: Deployment of[name: 'po_product_2()NprNpm', vendor: 'demo.sap.com'(sda)] finished. [#I]: Deployment of [name: 'po_enhanced_2()NprNpm', vendor: 'demo.sap.com' (sda)] finished. [#1): Deployment of [name: 'po_enhanced_2().-.blNcafN8ar', vendor: 'demo.sap.com' (sda)] finished. [#1]: Deployment of [name: 'po_enhanced_2Cl-vuf.vwcf, vendor: 'demo.sap.com' (sda)] finished. [#I]: Deployment of [name: 'po_product_20-VUl-vwcf, vendor: 'demo.sap.com' (sda)] finished. [#I]: Deployment of [name: 'po_enhanced_2().-.b1Nrules', vendor: 'demo.sap.com' (sda)] finished. [#I]: Deployment of [name: 'po_product.,20o-01Nrules', vendor: 'demo. sap.com' (sda)) finished.

Figure 70: Deployment Results in t he Deploy Console

8. Run the HandleEvents## process from the Process Repository.


117


a) Log onto SAP NetWeaver Administrator from the URL http://nwktdc##.wdf.sap.corp: 50000/nwa. The user ID is Administrator##. b) In SAP NetWeaver Administrator, choose the Configuration tab. c) Choose Processes and Tasks . d) Choose Process Repository. e) In the first line of the list of components, enter ## (the number assigned to you). This "search help" step is used to minimize the number of components displayed. f) On the keyboard, choose Enter. g) In the search results, select po_enhanced_##-pr-pm (vendor##.org) . h) In the List of Versions of Component po_enhanced_##-pr-pm (vendor##.org) table, scroll down to the Details of Component po_enhanced_## section and verify that the HandleEvents process is selected. i) Choose Start Process. Details of Component po_e nhanced_20-pr- pm /

Processes and Tasks

l

Resources

I Process AO\v II start Process... I ------~

'iO "iP

Narre

I

Handle Events

Figur e 71: Starting the Pr ocess

j) In the BPM Process Startup: Process screen, choose Start Process. k) On the BPM Process Startup: Process screen, choose Details.

BPM Process Startup: Process 0 A'ocess Handle Events started with process instarn:e ID61c94bdlla37711e384e80000006240ee

-

Deteis ..

Fevontes _.

~edl.i'lk ..

Go To_.

SUpport QetMt

Figur e 72: Started Pr ocess Details

I) Choose View Started Process. m) On the Manage Processes: Process Instances screen, verify that the entry for Lifecycle Status field (2nd column) says Completed. If the status reads In Process, choose Refresh.

118



Manage Processes: Process Instances Favorftes,,

Related lllks,,

Go To,,

Show: l

Support OetaJs

"' 111 Actions ,, 111 Show Process Flow

I Export to Spreadsheet l[Add 8dr1alistrator] Find Proc ess tnst81lCes: l61c94bdDa37711e384e80000006240ee Status

II Sholl

l

I I Go I

l ifecycle Status

Process Narre

Process Subject

Coo-pleted

Handle Events

FOOi Adninistrator20 61c94bd0a377111

Process Instance U

~

• OK

Figure 73: Complet ion of t he Process

9. View the process on the Manage Processes screen. Identify what data is being used and what events have been initiated. a) On the Manage Processes: Process Instances screen, choose Show Related Tasks. b) Choose the Context Data tab. c) On the Context Data tab, identify what data is being used internally. d) Choose the History tab. e) On the History tab, view which events have been initiated. It may be necessary to change the entry in the Show field from Basic to Advanced. f) Choose Back. g) On the Manage Processes: Process Instances screen, choose Show Process Flow. h) Verify that the process was handled. The process was successfully handled if no token sign is visible.


119



•

120



Unit 3 Lesson 7 Adding activities to a business process

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to add automated and human activities to a business process. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

•


•


Referenced Subprocess Activities Parent Process Referenced Subprocess Start ven End Even

Start ven Get Sales Data Send Sales Report

Referenced Subprocess

End Even

Figure 7 4: Referenced Subprocess Activities

Referenced subprocesses are used to call other processes, making the main process less complicated. Referenced subprocesses use the following guidelines: •

The subprocess must reference a process that is defined in the same process development component.

•

Processes referenced by subprocesses must have a start and end point, like the main process.

•

A process used as a subprocess must maintain its own process context, just like the main process.

•

The rest of the configuration, input/output mapping, and boundary events, are done in the same way as the other activities.


121


The referenced subprocess is a type of activity in the business process model. Use referenced subprocesses to reference another independent process by the parent process. You can reference processes contained in the same development component (DC) as the parent processes or in a different DC. When you reference a process in a different DC, you have to define the DC dependencies. A process used as a subprocess must contain its own process context. The referenced subprocess has a start event and end event containing the same event trigger. When a subprocess is created, the start event and end event for that subprocess can be created from a selected trigger. When modeling referenced subprocesses, choose between a top-down or a bottom-up approach. The difference between these approaches is the sequence in which the steps are executed to model the referenced subprocess. Top-down approach In a top-down approach, a referenced subprocess activity is created in the parent process being modeled. A new process is modeled containing events, activities, and connections and then assigned to the referenced subprocess activity created in the parent process. Bottom-up approach In a bottom-up approach, the new process is created separately from the parent process being modeled. A referenced subprocess activity is created in the parent process and the new process is assigned to the referenced subprocess activity created in the parent process. As a result, the subprocess activity references the process you have modeled and assigned to it. When modeling referenced subprocesses, data mappings can be defined to show how the referenced subprocesses use data for input and output communications with the parent process.

Embedded Subprocess Activities

Embedded SubProcess

l±l f} Embeclded S..b Process

ii

0

-,,

Collapse

u 0

"',,

,,.." ...E

·(O~~soms) ·(~ s:p:e· ) ·O

0

Is' C/ Start

End

SIart

D

•

@ Collapse fogure

~

Q~ i:i t

<>. o.

End

•

II'

.. ,,"'@ ,,..... .. u 0

SIart

' [

E~:.

&lb· )

·® End

D

...E

I

Figure 75: Embedded Subprocess Activities

An embedded subprocess is a compound activity that is defined as a flow of other activities. The compound activity can be expanded to show the contained flow of activities and collapsed to make the parent process easier to view. The embedded subprocess is dependent on the parent

122



process and cannot be executed independently like a referenced subprocess. The embedded subprocess has a local process context of data objects that is not visible to the parent and root processes. However, the process context of the parent and root processes is visible for the embedded subprocess. Embedded Subprocess Guidelines •

Can access both its own and parent's process context

•

Can be shown expanded or collapsed

•

Contain no lanes

A subprocess can be embedded in another embedded subprocess and then embedded in another one to create a hierarchy. As a result, there can be multiple parent processes but only one root process at the top. An embedded subprocess in a hierarchy has access to the process contexts of all its parent processes and the root process. There is no data mapping between a parent process and an embedded subprocess. Because the embedded subprocess depends on other processes, it does not have all the features of an independent business process. There are no participants and roles in an embedded subprocess, which means there are no pools and lanes. The embedded subprocess can have multiple outgoing tokens. If, for example, there is a parallel split gateway inside the embedded subprocess, all tokens that reach the end event continue outside the embedded subprocess. The embedded subprocess can only contain a subset of the events available in the Process Composer. The fo llowing events and event triggers can be used in an embedded subprocess: •

Start Events - 1 None (without a trigger)

•

Intermediate Events - O..n Timer

•

End Events - 1..1, O.. n Escalation

Use an embedded subprocess and its local context to model exceptions and exception handling. Exceptions are a type of escalation and are handled by boundary events. Boundary events are placed on the boundary of an embedded subprocess where an escalation is thrown or on the boundary of a parent process higher up in the hierarchy.

Looping Activities All activity types can be configured to be looped over multiple times. Looping is controlled by a bound list in the process context. For each item in the list, the activity is executed. The item in the collection being looped over can be accessed for input mapping from the currentCo/lectionltem node.


123


Looping fO Sates!Xder8yfDQueryRe$pOnse_ln

111

I Defioiepr~'"'the~

Lo<>pinog

r....i...

°"'""'~ ~EVel)ts

=

0

@p...WFO< f,!!!j

NO L-

Loop Context

0

Select cokttlon 'oo_Customl!f~/etd!l'$Jor'dt!r$ · detno.~,cottlft,Ht/pc_3/Gef.~'>*$Clrtcll!roetals/<.«_~_sates_cxdbf_o

ColectiOn:

-

O use eocllfes<>ioo biiretsiQn: I

~ SalesOrderBylDQuer yResponse_ln

Genorol l.OQj>inO

lnterf0<0 Input Mapping CIA~~

Define ti.. ~t tMppinQ ftx this el•ment: lnpoJts ol SalesOl'derBylDQueryResponse_ln

Process context

I~

8-1'l3 i!.\!!!."!l!S..~~ I w

C\J'rency

IE·~ 1;

Boundary Evms

@ netAMO
I fl'I. •8

ct\ SalesOrdefBylDQuery_sync *8 fiil SalesOl'derSele
l1J text()

~

Figure 76: Looping Act ivities

To model multiple, parallel instances of an activity in a process model, create a looping activity. All activity types in a process model can be configured in the Process Composer to loop multiple times. At runtime, a dynamic number of activity instances can run in parallel. The exact number of instances to be executed at runtime with a loop context is defined in the Process Composer. To define the loop context, select a specific data object with an XSD element, which is a list from the process context. or use an expression, which evaluates a list of elements. The number of elements in the list defines how many instances are executed. All the instances of an activity are executed in parallel. The process flow continues after all of the parallel instances of the activity have been completed. Multiple Instances Activities •

Referenced subprocesses

•

Embedded subprocesses

•

Automated activity

•

Human activity

•

Mapping activity

•

Reporting activity

The following additional loop-specific data objects are automatically created when using the Parallel for Each loop option:

124

•

NumberOfCompletedlterations - This data object contains the number of completed loop instances.

•

CurrentCollectionltem - This data object contains the list element assigned to each loop instance.



These two data objects are only relevant for loops and are part of the local context of the activity with the multi-instance loop. Loop-specific data objects can be used when input and output data mappings are defined for this activity, but the two loop-specific data objects cannot be used for data mappings of other activities in the process. The loop-specific data objects can only be used as a source when defining data mappings, but they cannot be used as a target. To transport information from within the loop context to a data object outside the loop context, the corresponding output mapping must be defined and appended. Dynamic Parallel Looping Dynamic parallel looping with use-case follows these guidelines: •

Parallel batch procesing/task routing for multiple line items

•

Dynamic number of line items (not known at design time)

•

Synchronization upon completion

Dynamic parallel looping with variants follows these guidelines: •

Continue outer flow before all line items were completely processed

•

Cancel remaining line items when certain criteria is met

•

Number of line items changes at runtime

The dynamic parallel looping uses the workflow patterns according to the following guidelines: •

Multiple instances without synchronization

•

Multiple instances with prior design time knowledge

•

Multiple instances with prior runtime knowledge.

•

Multiple instances without prior runtime knowledge

•

Static partial join for multiple instances

•

Canceling a partial join for multiple instances

•

Dynamic partial join for multiple instances

The dynamic parallel looping shown below displays a workaround using a thread split, asynchronous trigger, and thread merge pattern, as well as alternative multiple instance activity.


125


Thread Split 5 ,,--I

Increment Index

A.1---.1 )---l St•rt'-"'oool\;?lled ..erg ... ·

Olart Processln9 Nex!Unelem

H--<·

E8

DD D

Thread Merge

Figure 77: Advanced Patterns (1)

You can also have each subflow instance process a unique line item . Referenced subflows cannot "read through" to the context of the outer process. The invoking flow is asynchronously notified upon successful subflow start. Non-interrupting escalation end events are used.

Escalation End

Signal

• Process Line Item

0

Out

End


Dynamic parallel looping requires significant modeling effort, including the following: •

Thread split/merge pattern implementations

•

Complex mapping expressions for extracting line items from batch

•

Extra subflow for spawning the asynchronous escalation event

Most cases can be natively handled using plain "multiple instance" activities (BPMN).

126



!:! '-It Problerns l12l ldentty 8towset I:!>~ Proce>s lnstM
0

Propertie<

1±1

Batch Processing

Genetal

Procoss looping ls1put Mapphg

Out~~

-

Seatch Console I

e Cons<>lel ~ Wr"5Wct-console l

© XS"'=o .

Define propertie< for the loop

0

0

No loopinQ

Paralel For Each

loop Context

0

Bouncl4ry Events

Select colection

I~tUst/batch • demo.sap.corn/IOOflin<;/ml_wito_a_priori_rt_~l•doe/ml_with_a_priori_rt_l
conection:

0

El

Use expression Expression:

I

I

I

Edit

I


Outer processes may need to be continued before all line items are fully processed, as per the following: •

Remaining line items still need to be processed

•

Downstream discriminator synchronization

•

Complex mapping expressions for extracting line items from batch

•

Extra subflow for spawning the asynchronous escalation event

Mapping Activities Parent Process Start veny Data Object

. Mapping Activity

Get Sales Data Send Sales Report End Even

Figure 80: Mapping Activities

Mapping activities are simple activities that allow you to map the context itself, while calling rules and functions. Mapping Activities Guidelines

•

They are useful when you want to modify the process context data without having the execute human or automated activities

•

They can execute rules and functions in the mapping

The mapping activity is a type of flow object in the process. Use a mapping activity to transform complex data from data objects in the process context into simpler data. When working with


127


mapping activities, a mapping activity is created as a flow object in your process. Mappings are defined between the data objects in the process context.

Artifacts Overview BPMN allows you to model artifacts that hold additional information, such as the following: •

Data objects that are processed within an instance of the process Data objects store and process content and are accessible during the whole process.

•

Annotations to comment and explain the process Annotations allow you to provide comments within the process model. They are purely descriptions.

There are two types of artifacts used in business process: process context and annotations. Process Context In a business process, data is being transported and changed by events and activities. This data is stored in the process context. In the modeling environment of SAP Business Process Management, the process context is represented by a data structure defined in an XSD (XML Schema Definition) file. To add the process context and import all the data types that are needed, an XSD file is used. The XSD file defines the data types assigned to data objects. Data objects are used to define input and output data, which is mapped to an activity in the process model. To track the data changes, input and output mapping is defined. Process Composer mapping does not support all data types. The process context is the sum of all data objects, including roles information.

Note: For more information about XSD files, see SAP Note 1266539.

Annotations An annotation is an artifact that attaches notes to individual elements in the process model, such as flow objects, swimlanes, and data objects. Annotations provide additional text information about individual elements but do not effect the flow of the process. An annotation can be attached to one or more elements in the process model using a connection to show which element the annotation belongs to. When you use annotations in the process model, you proceed as follows: 1. Create the annotation in the process. 2. Enter the text information in the annotation. 3. Connect the annotation to an element in the process model (Optional).

Data Objects A data object is a type of artifact that allows you to provide additional information in the process model and define input and output data. A data object is created and the data type defined in the business process. Data objects define the input and output data mapped to an activity.

128



C~• EX!llo11!< ~

.,- Search Consdo

a~ S

~0

-r"'

PO_Pl'oduct_XX [venclono<.
U Po
G r..t
$

f!l Pvctw
IE Py;"»tfSc::q.msp.:igt. IB f\cd\!s$6cq.t:'fftm.1rir

1E Plr¢WHSm.mtlltf!I

'9 Event TriQQets

lb Repco~ Dot• Sources ~ R\ieSets i8 F'"1Ctlons

oo l!i

mua.

Ill~ Service lnlt

IB-t'P '"

lil • User Interface

roQ eu.nossLOQk re {ii;! cxt..na1 Sorvlcos l!l

{§} lnfrastJuclule

Figure 81: Data Objects

An XSD file defines the structure of the data that the data object contains. To set a data type to a data object that is different from the default setting, an XSD file is imported. An XSD file is used to define the elements, types, attributes, and groups of the XSD.

Note: For more information about the data types supported by Process Composer, see SAP Note 1266539.


•


•



129


130



1.

Which object is NOT a basic BPMN element?


D D D D

A Artifact B Activity

c

Gateway

D Event

2. _ _ _ _ _ _ provide additional information about a business process. Choose the correct answer.

D D D D

A Artifact B Connection object

c

Flow object

D Swim lane

3. _ _ _ _ _ _ contains activities, gateways, and events. Choose the correct answer.

D D D D


c

Flow object

D Swim lane


131


4. _ _ _ _ _ _ links flow objects to each other.


D D c D D D

A Artifact B Connection object Flow object Swim lane

5. _ __ __ _

groups the primary modeling elements.


D D Dc D D

A Artifact B Connection object Flow object Swim lane

6 . What does orchestration describe in BPMN?


D D D

C The sequence flow of objects in a process within its pool and lanes.

D

D The joining of alternative sequence flows.

A The output information of an activity. B The interaction between business processes.

7. What does choreography describe in BPMN?


D D D D

132

A The output information of an activity. B The interaction between business processes. C The sequence flow of objects in a process within its pool and lanes. D The joining of alternative sequence flows.


Unit 3 : Learning Assessment

8. What is the correct sequence of tasks required to make an automated activity run correctly?

Arrange these steps into the correct sequence.

D D D D

Assign service definitions or RFC modules. Define input and output mappings.

Add an automated activity to the business process.

Create service references.

9. What does a human activity require to run properly?


D D D D

A Event B Task

c

Gateway

D Data mappings

10. Which process components can task owners be assigned to?


D D D D

A Automated activities B Human activities

c

Lanes

D Tasks

11. What are the three types of task roles?


D D D D

A Administrators B Contributors

c

Excluded owners

D Potential owners


133


12. Which statements about notifications are true?


D D D D

A A notification is a type of activity. B A notification requires a task owner. C A notification requires recipients to be sent. D A notification is not part of a business process.

13. What data sources are reports generated from?


D D Dc D D

A Process context data B Visual Composer Universal Worklist Task context data

14. What is a trigger in a business process?

15. What is an intermediate event message used for?


D D c D D D

A Sending out notifications B Triggering a start event

134

Placing a pause in a business process Handling message exceptions



16. What does an error boundary event do?


D D D D

A It throws an exception when a pool boundary is crossed. B It handles exceptions triggered by an error or escalation. C It provides boundaries for how an exception is handled by the business process. D It confines an error to a specific activity in the business process.

17. What is a gateway?


D D D D

A It marks the beginning of a business process. B It contains configuration details for an activity. C It shows the merge or split of a process flow. D It is a type of artifact that sits outside of the business process. allows the contro l flow to take one path dependent on defined conditions.

18.


D D D D

A Event-based choice B Exclusive split choice

c

Parallel join

D Parallel split

19. _ _ _ _ _ _ ensures that all paths leaving a gateway are taken.


D D D D


c

Parallel join

D Parallel split


135


20. _ _ _ _ _ _ ensures that all paths eventually meet at a given point. Choose the correct answer.

D Exclusive split choice D c Parallel join D D Parallel split D A Event-based choice B

21. - - - - - - controls flow direction based on event. Choose the correct answer.

D Exclusive split choice D D c Parallel join D Parallel split D A Event-based choice B

22. What is a referenced subprocess used for? Choose the correct answer.

D D D

A To reference another dependent process by the parent process B To reference another independent process by the parent process C To reference another dependent process by a child process

D D To reference another independent process by a child process 23. Which statement(s) best describe an embedded process? Choose the correct answers.

D D D D

136

A It is a compound activity. B It is dependent on the parent process. C It can be embedded in another embedded process. D It does not have pools or lanes.



24. Which activities can be looped?


D D c D D D

A Referenced subprocesses B Automated activities Reporting activities Embedded subprocesses

25. What is a mapping activity used for?


D D D D

A To find the active event in the business process B To map input and output data C To convert complex data into simple data D To provide instructions on how to complete an activity

26. What is process context?


D D D D

A It provides additional information to the process model. B It attaches notes to elements in a process model. C It defines the sequence of the process flow. D It stores data from events and activities.

27. What is a data object?


D D c D D D

A It stores the process context. B It defines input and output data. It is a type of artifact. It is defined in the business process.


137


1.

Which object is NOT a basic BPMN element?


0 B Activity D c Gateway D D Event D A Artifact

2. _ _ _ _ _ _ provide additional information about a business process. Choose the correct answer.

0

A Artifact

D c D D D

B Connection object Flow object Swim lane

3. _ _ _ _ _ _ contains activities, gateways, and events.


D D c 0 D D


138

Flow object Swim lane



4. _ __ __ _

links flow objects to each other.


D

A Artifact

0

B Connection object

D D

c

Flow object

D Swim lane

5. _ _ _ _ _ _ groups the primary modeling elements. Choose the correct answer.

D D D

0


c

Flow object

D Swim lane

6 . What does orchestration describe in BPMN?


D D

A The output information of an activity. B The interaction between business processes.

[g)

C The sequence flow of objects in a process within its pool and lanes.

D

D The joining of alternative sequence flows.

7. What does choreography describe in BPMN?


D

A The output information of an activity.

[g)

B The interaction between business processes.

D D

C The sequence flow of objects in a process within its pool and lanes. D The joining of alternative sequence flows.


139


8 . What is the correct sequence of tasks required to make an automated activity run correctly?

Arrange these steps into the correct sequence.

~Assign service definitions or RFC modules.

@.] Define input and output mappings.

ITJ Add an automated activity to the business process. ~ Create service references.

9 . What does a human activity require to run properly?


D 0 c D D

A Event B Task Gateway

D Data mappings

10. Which process components can task owners be assigned to?


D

A Automated activities

0 0 0

B Human activities

c

Lanes

D Tasks

11. What are the three types of task roles?


140

0

A Administrators

D

B Contributors

0 0

c

Excluded owners

D Potential owners



12. Which statements about notifications are true?


0 B A notification requires a task owner. D c A notification requires recipients to be sent. 0 D A notification is not part of a business process. D A A notification is a type of activity.

13. What data sources are reports generated from?


0 B Visual Composer 0 c Universal Worklist D D Task context data 0

A Process context data

14. What is a trigger in a business process?

A trigger defines the conditions required to make an event start. 15. What is an intermediate event message used for?


D D

A Sending out notifications

0

c

D

D Handling message exceptions

B Triggering a start event Placing a pause in a business process


141


16. What does an error boundary event do?


D

A It throws an exception when a pool boundary is crossed.

0

B It handles exceptions triggered by an error or escalation.

D D

C It provides boundaries for how an exception is handled by the business process. D It confines an error to a specific activity in the business process.

17. What is a gateway?


D

A It marks the beginning of a business process.

D

B It contains configuration details for an activity.

0

C It shows the merge or split of a process flow.

D

D It is a type of artifact that sits outside of the business process.

18.

allows the control flow to take one path dependent on defined conditions.


D

A Event-based choice

0

B Exclusive split choice

D D

c

Parallel join

D Parallel split

19. _ _ _ _ _ _ ensures that all paths leaving a gateway are taken.


D D D

0

142


c

Parallel join

D Parallel split



20. _ __ __ _

ensures that all paths eventually meet at a given point.


D Exclusive split choice D c Parallel join 0 D Parallel split D A Event-based choice B

21. _ _ _ _ _ _ controls flow direction based on event.


0

A Event-based choice

D c Parallel join D D Parallel split D

B Exclusive split choice

22. What is a referenced subprocess used for?


D A To reference another dependent process by the parent process 0 B To reference another independent process by the parent process D C To reference another dependent process by a child process D D To reference another independent process by a child process 23. Which statement(s) best describe an embedded process?


0 0 0 0

A It is a compound activity. B It is dependent on the parent process. C It can be embedded in another embedded process. D It does not have pools or lanes.


143


24. Which activities can be looped?


0 0 0 0

A Referenced subprocesses B Automated activities

c

Reporting activities

D Embedded subprocesses

25. What is a mapping activity used for?


D

A To find the active event in the business process

D

B To map input and output data

0

C To convert complex data into simple data

D

D To provide instructions on how to complete an activity

26. What is process context?


D D D

C It defines the sequence of the process flow.

0

D It stores data from events and activities.

A It provides additional information to the process model. B It attaches notes to elements in a process model.

27. What is a data object?


144

D

A It stores the process context.

0 0 0

B It defines input and output data.

c

It is a type of artifact.

D It is defined in the business process.


Business Process Model Extension

Lesson 1

146 151

Managing Process Roles Exercise 7: Connect Process Roles to Pools and Lanes

Lesson 2

156 161

Managing Process Context Exercise 8: Create an XSD File and Define Process Context

Lesson 3

178

Creating Data Mappings

Lesson 4

186 189

Applying data transformations using functions Exercise 9: Develop and Use Custom Mapping Functions

UNIT OBJECTIVES

•

Identify process roles

•

Connect process roles to lanes and pools

•

Define process context

•

Store context data with Composite Application Framework

•

Store context data with Java Persistence Framework

•

Create data mappings

•

Apply data transformations using functions

•

Import mappings from the Enterprise Services Repository


145

Unit 4

Lesson 1 Managing Process Roles

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to identify process roles and connect process roles to lanes and pools. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

•


•


Connections Sequence Flow

Message Flow

-

--+

Data Flow

---->

- ----

Association

Figure 82: Connect ion Elements

There are four ways of connecting flow objects to each other or to other information within a process: •

Sequence flow

•

Data flow

•

Association

•

Message flow

The object type determines which connection type is used.

146


Lesson: Managing Process Roles

Flow Object Connection in a Process Sequence flows are used to connect flow objects in a process and to define the order of operation. You create sequence flows to connect flow objects in the process and to define their order of performance in the process.

-•

•:: Patette

~

!:! Select :-·1 Mar~ee

St

••• - cot)llO-

St

St "

e

-+ Sequence Flow

.. ~

0tt.Aman Actlvly

-·

{)~man Activly

Comects flow objects In the process to define ti-* order ol perf<>rmonce

1

I

·-

' I

e

0<> Row Objects

,

• ,0

!J

I

, Q Start Event

I

Q~monActivly

Intermediate Event

2

End Event

• 0 Activly

• Gatew;iy 0 M~acts

e

Cl Dot• Object L

~

..,.,,,.......,

End

Figure 83: Connecting Flow Objects in a Process

Message Flow between Separate Process Participants

I

Pool 1

Pool O

."1 Isa ) ,

St rt

,,''

,' ,~:e;~e Flow ,'

__

St rt

___...

__

.......

<>Human Activity

AutomatedO >'

1

~

..'

:jHuman Activity

lntermedi ~e Mes.':'.' ,

2

'

0Human Activity 2

'',,,, M~~~ge flow

',,, ''

I

li:ij

End

End

Figure 84: Connecting Separate Process Part icipants with Message Flow

A message flow is created to show how messages move between two separate process participants, such as separate business entities. In BPMN, each pool in the process model represents a participant. Message flows cannot be used between flow objects in the same pool.


147

Unit 4: Business Process Model Extension

Data Flow Modeling Modeling data flow and mappings allows you to do the following: •

Model data flows to store and read information from data objects

•

Map data interfaces of activities to process context to model data flow between activities

•

Leverage the enhanced mapping capabilities

Artifacts can be generated that hold business process relevants information and data given by services or human interaction, allowing the process context to be accessed from every point in the process. Mapping enhancements available since SAP CE 7.2 include the following: •

Any type support

•

Generic list functions (for example, append, insert, sort, filter, iterate)

•

Move-corresponding/deep copy

•

EJB mapping function generator

Process Roles Overview The SAP NetWeaver platform contains the following roles: •

UME roles and portal roles define a set of authorizations for static content.

•

Process roles are used for allowing a dynamic role based access control from artifacts available during a process lifecycle.

Process roles use the following guidelines: •

A role defines a set of rights and obligations for principals.

•

Process principals are assigned to process roles.

•

Permissions are assigned to process roles .

•

Principals as members of roles acquire permissions to perform an action on one or more objects.

Task processers can only execute the particular task he or she is assigned to. The processor who assigned to a human activity overrides the task processor. There might be different processors for a task because the task as reusable entity can be assigned to multiple human activities. The processor who is assigned to a lane can execute all tasks that are assigned to human activities in this lane. The lane processor overrides the task and human activity processors. If you use a task within a process, the potential processor definition of the surrounding lane takes precedence. The processor is evaluated while the task instance is created at runtime. During this process, UME groups and roles are resolved into UME users. This means that changes to the group or role after the task has been instantiated do not have any effect on the task instance that is currently

148



being created. If a user is assigned to a group or role that allows the user to execute a task during the task instance creation, the user could continue to work on the task and complete the task even if the assignment to the group or role is changed or canceled. These changes only take effect on the future task instances

Task, Activity, or Lane

~ Identified Potential Owners

- List of Excluded Owners

Actual Owner

,/~, Task Contributor

Task Contributor

Figure 85: Process Roles Overview

There are three types of roles for tasks, activities, and lanes: potential owners, excluded owners, and task contributors. Potential Owners Potential owners are used to identify users authorized to complete a task, activity, or activities in a lane. A potential owner becomes the actual owner, or processor, only when the task is opened. Once a task is claimed by a potential owner, the task is removed from the task list of all potential owners. Potential owners and task authorizations are defined at the task, human activity, and lane levels. When using principal propagation, the principal information of the actual owner is propagated in the process flow to be used later by an automated activity. Tasks can be accessed in the Universal Worklist. In BPM, portal roles are assigned to users to enable them to access and execute tasks (of a BPM process) in the universal worklist (UWL). Excluded Owners Excluded owners are principals who are not allowed to process a task in the process model. This construct is necessary to prevent users from approving their own requests . Excluded owners are defined on the task, human activity, or lane levels. Task Contributors An actual owner of a task can invite other contributors to work on the task instance while the task is active. Any user can be a contributor, except excluded owners. Task contributors can see the whole process context, monitor the task execution, and add notes and attachments, but cannot complete the task. When a user is invited to be a task contributor, the task displays in their UW. When the contributor opens the task, they can see the actual owner and the task description. Process Roles: Administrators


149


A business process administrator can execute administration tasks for processes, activities, or tasks. At least one administrator must be available for each process. A process cannot be deployed without an administrator. Process administration allows a process to be suspended, resumed, and terminated. Task administration allows you to execute, forward, suspend, or resume a task, change deadlines, and prioritize activities and tasks. Troubleshooting allows for the debugging of running processes in the Process Composer to locate an analyze errors. The troubleshooting tool is integrated into the SAP NetWeaver Administrator to check for the availability of BPM components and subsystems. There are also tools to monitor and manage processes and tasks.

150


Unit 4

Exercise 7 Connect Process Roles to Pools and Lanes

Business Example

You are a business process administrator. You recently notated a new business process model in BPMN 2.0 and now have been asked to extend the process model by configuring the pools and lanes. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you.

Note: In this exercise, the process created in exercises 2-5 is used.

Define a Notification Recipient

1. Verify the user Requestor## has an email address in the UME. 2. Verify the user Requestor## is a notification recipient. Define a Pool Administrator

1. Define Administrator## as the administrator of Purchase Order Pool##. Define Potential Owners for Lanes

1. Define Requestor## as a potential owner of the Requestor ##lane in your Purchase Order Request## pool. 2. Define Supervisor## as a potential owner of the Supervisor## lane in your Purchase Order Request## pool. 3. Define Appro ver## as a potential owner of the Approver## lane in your Purchase Order Request## pool.


151

Unit 4 Solution 7 Connect Process Roles to Pools and Lanes

Business Example

You are a business process administrator. You recently notated a new business process model in BPMN 2.0 and now have been asked to extend the process model by configuring the pools and lanes. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you .

Note: In this exercise, the process created in exercises 2-5 is used.

Define a Notification Recipient

1. Verify the user Requestor## has an email address in the UME. a) In your internet browser, log on to SAP NetWeaver Administrator from the URL http:// nwktdc00.wdf.sap.corp:50000/nwa as Administrato r##.

Note: The system may automatically log you in as a different user, depending on the browser tabs that are open . To log on as Administrato r## , choose Log Off. then log in as Administrator##.

b) In SAP NetWeaver Administrator, choose the Configuration tab. a) Choose the Security tab. b) On the Security tab, choose Identity Management. c) On the Identity Management screen. in the Search Criteria field, choose User. d) In the next text field, enter Requestor##. e) Choose Go. f) In the search results, double-click Requestor## . g) In the Details of User Requestor## screen, find the user's email address. You can also check the email address using the home screen through the url http:/ I nwktdc00.wdf.sap.corp:5000/irj. From there, log in as Administrator##, then choose User Management and search for Requestor## and double click it.

152



2. Verify the user Requestor## is a notification recipient. a) Return to the NetWeaver Developer Studio and in the Composite Explorer view choose the Purchase Order Process## modeling area tab. If th is process is not open. double-click the process in the tree to open it. b) On the Purchase Order Process## tab, choose Email Notification##. c) On the Properties tab, choose the To view. d) In the Principals field, verify that Requestor##, Ron appears. If Requestor## does not appear, add it as a principal. To do so, at the end of the Principals field , select Choose. In the Principal Name field choose User. Search for Requestor## and select it from the left screen, then choose Add, then OK. e) Choose Save . Define a Pool Administrator

1. Define Administrator## as the administrator of Purchase Order Pool##. a) Double-click the Purchase Order Pool## Lane . b) On the Properties tab, choose the Administrators view. c) At the end of the Principals field, choose Choose. d) In the Browse Principals dialog box, in the Principal Name drop-down menu, choose User. e) In the next text field, enter Administrator##. f) Choose Search. g) On the Principals screen. in the Search Results area, choose Administrator##, System . h) Choose Add. i) Choose OK. j) Choose Save . Define Potential Owners for Lanes

1. Define Requestor## as a potential owner of the Requestor ##lane in your Purchase Order Request## pool. a) On the Purchase Order Process## tab, choose the Requestor## lane. b) On the Properties tab, choose the Potential Owners view. c) On the Potential Owners view, select the Define Potential Owners Globally for Human Activities/Tasks in the Lane (Override Existing Settings) checkbox. d) At the end of the Principals field, choose Choose . e) In the Principals dialog box, In the Principal Name drop-down menu , choose User. f) In the next text field , enter Requestor## .


153


g) Choose Search. h) On the Browse Principals screen in the Search Results, choose Requestor## . i) Choose Add. j) Choose OK. 2. Define Superviso r## as a potential owner of the Supervisor## lane in your Purchase Order Request## pool. a) On the Purchase Order Process## tab, choose the Supervisor## lane. b) On the Properties tab, choose the Potential Owners view. c) On the Potential Owners tab, select the Define Potential Owners Globally for Human Activities/Tasks in the Lane (Override Existing Settings) checkbox. d) At the end of the Principals field, choose Choose. e) In the Browse Principals dialog box, In the Principal Name drop-down menu, choose User. f) In the next text field, enter Supervisor## . g) Choose Search. h) On the Browse Principals screen, in the Search Results area, choose Supervisor##, Sue. i) Choose Add. j) Choose OK. 3 . Define Approver## as a potential owner of the Approver## lane in your Purchase Order Request## pool. a) On the Purchase Order Process## modeling surface, choose the Approver## lane. b) On the Properties tab, choose Potential Owners view. c) On the Potential Owners tab, select the Define Potential Owners Globally for Human Activities/Tasks in the Lane (Override Existing Settings) checkbox. d) At the end of the Principals field, choose Choose. e) In the Browse Principals dialog box, In the Principal Name drop-down menu, choose User. f) In the next text field, enter Approver## . g) Choose Search. h) On the Browse Principals screen in the search results, choose Approver##. i) Choose Add. j) Choose OK. k) Choose Save .

154




•


•



155

Unit 4

Lesson 2 Managing Process Context

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to define process context and store context data with both the Composite Application Framework and the Java Persistence Framework. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

•


•


•


Process Context In a process, data is transported and changed by events and activities. This data is stored in the process context. Therefore, the process context is the sum of all data including the roles information. In SAP Business Process Management, process context is represented by a data structure defined in an XSD file. Before you create an XSD file, you have to define the necessary data in the business process. To add the process context and import all the data types that are needed, you need to import an XSD file. An XSD file defines the data types you assign to data objects. You use data objects to define input and output data, which is mapped to an activity in the process you modeled. To track the data changes, you need to define input and output mapping. Process Composer mapping does not support all data types.

156


Lesson: Managing Process Context

Purchase Request Data: • Header (1 entry)

\

• Item (1-n entries)

Header data of the purchase request:

Data of a Purchase Request Item:

• ID of the purchase request

Product Id

• Total amount of the purchase request

Product Name

• currency Seller Id • Region

• Product Price • Currency • Quantity

• Approved • ApproverComment

Figure 86: Process Data Model

Note: For XSD-related limitations, see SAP Note 1266539.

XSD File Creation XSD files contain the structure of the data contained within a data object. To change the default data type settings, you need to create or import an XSD file. XSD files are created using the Composite Designer perspective and using the function Data Type---+ New. Graphical Editor Functions

•

Use the function Add element to create data types, elements, and attributes.

•

Use the function Set Multiplicity to define the multiplicity of elements (1 .. 1, l .. n, 0 .. 1 and 0 .. n).

You can import existing XSD files from the NWDS Process Development perspective using the Import tool. XSD File Import Steps

1. In the NWDS Process Development perspective, choose File---+ Import. 2. In the dialog box that appears, expand Web Services and choose XSD . Choose Next. 3. Choose Browse to define an output folder for the XSD source file. Choose OK. 4. From the Available XSD sources, choose Remote Function/File System, then choose Next. 5. Choose an XSD file to import. To do so, choose Browse, then navigate to choose the applicable XSD file. Alternatively, enter a URL from which to import the file.


157


6. Choose Finish. The XSD file appears in your project in the Process Modeling~ Data Types~ XSD Files folder. Also, the XSD source file appears in the output folder you defined.

XSD File and Data Objects After you create or import an XSD file, you need to associate it with a data object. The procedure for editing an XSD file is as follows: 1. Expand Process Modeling, then expand Data Types and XSD Files. 2. In the context menu of an XSD file, choose Open. 3. In the context menu of Elements (on the Design tab), choose Add Element. 4. Under Elements, choose an element and define its properties. 5. In the context menu of Types (on the Design tab), choose Add Complex Type or Add Simple Type . 6. Under Types, choose a type and define its properties. XSD File Editing Guidelines

•

Make sure that your process is opened for editing in the Process Composer.

•

To create a new data object, choose the Data Object entry in the Artifacts section of the Palette and click the modeling surface.

•

To change the name of the data object, go to the Properties view and open the General tab. '1j, "l'Ur"*- O.det Pioco.s xx .~ 0

-•

Purchase Order Poot XX Requestor XX

Appr~er XX

Supervisor XX

·.:•Palette

~ s.lect

ERP XX

:- ·~ Mot~

·~

~

1::.:1

C,0-0bjocts

SI~

'

51.wtE...-.t

,0

End Event

, :> Lnterme6ote Event '

Etter

, Q MM.v

P\l:cnose

R-XX

!I

r1 + 1 1•~~1

· OGat._

•

{

<> _ . ._

D.wocts

I D Dalo ~Je
P\J'chose~

I

ti•or-x~

I

• •

--is

I

-- ~"

]

• O:ea!• f\l'c:ha:se: R-XX

18-

~

-

"

1i3L.V1e

IC!Pool

Reo,ioed)()( No

Amol
I I

Yes

0

AW
' I o""'r""'"""' xx

':;;>

No

E-Moi

~

Yes

0

Request--?

® End

,_ R-

P\J'chO!e R-XX

•

Figure 87: XSD Fi le and Data Object (BPMN: Artifact)

158



Data Objects in the Business Process If you choose the exclusive choice gateway type, you have to define the condition evaluation order. To do that, choose Condition Evaluation in the Properties view. The condition you place on top has the highest priority and is evaluated first. Data Object

Field ,Approved'

Result

~ IRequest Approved?I 1 - - - - - - - l Define the

General

I"="'"'""-"-'--'--~~

Condition Evaluation

Order

I

•

conditlon evaluation order f r this gateway. Condtio for clef a

Name

Condition

No y'es

boolean-equal(Re~estData/Header/Approved,false)

true

gate Is not evak.Jated. Default Gate

0

"[;i!j'

Figure 88: Usage of the Data Object in a Gateway

The exclusive choice gateway controls the sequence flow between activities. It is like a question that is asked at that point in the process. The question has a defined set of alternative answers, that is the gates. You define a condition for each gate based on a boolean expression. The expressions use the values of process data to determine which path has to be taken. Each gate has an outgoing sequence flow. J:1 Properties

~

~:J Relations ~ Problems ngj1 Infrastructure Console)

v

=!:I

~ E-Mal Notification XX ...,_.•..,..(j,._..,

General

To Mall

•

!'..i!!'.ii!J~!i

Defile the variables )'00.J 1~ant to use to parameterize the u,;er texts below Variables: Name Ex2r~s$fon I T~ string status lf(RequestDatafHeaderfApproved, "approved", "rejected'? message sttino RequestData(HeaderfApproverComment

I

11

I I I

Add

I

Remove

[

Edt

• Parameterized TeKts Defile the texts th11t wil be shown in the user's inbox. Use braces({}) to reference the v111'iilbles defined above .

Subject: Message:

~oar 2urchase reguest hast been J:stato~ll MeSsa(le>I

-•

I

.. Figure 89: Usage of the Data Object in a Not ification Step

Process Context with Data Objects Guidelines

•

In a process, data is stored in the process context.

•

The process context is referenced by a data object (artifact).

•

The structure of the data is defined by an XSD file.

•

The XSD file defines the data types which will be assigned to data objects.

•

The XSD file can be imported or created using a graphical editor.


159


160


Unit 4

Exercise 8 Create an XSD File and Define Process Context

Business Example

You are a business process administrator. You have been asked to create an XSD file to define the context of a business process. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you. Note: In this exercise, the process created in exercises 2-5 is used.

Create and Edit an XSD File

1. Create a new XSD file named PurchaseRequestData##. xsd in the [LocalDevelopment] po_product /pr/pm ~ src ~ wsdl folder. 2. Rename the XML schema to http : I / www . vendor## . com/ PurchaseData##. 3. In the Schema Index View, create a new complex type named PurchaseRequestHeader. 4. In the PurchaseRequestHeader complex type, add an element named PurchaseOrderID. 5. In the PurchaseRequestHeader complex type, add an element named PurchaseOrderTotalAmount. 6. Change the PurchaseOrderTotalAmount element type to double. 7. In the PurchaseRequestHeader complex type, add the elements in the following table. Element Name

Element Type

Currency

String

SellerlD

String

Region

String

Approved

Boolean

ApproverComment

String

8. In the Schema Index View, create a complex type named PurchaseRequestitem. 9. In the PurchaseRequestltem complex type, add the elements in the following table.


161


Element Name

Element Type

ProductlD

String

ProductName

String

ProductPrice

Decimal

Currency

String

Quantity

Decimal

10. Create a complex type named PurchaseRequestData. 11. In the PurchaseRequestData complex type, add the elements in the following table. Element Name

Element Type

Header

PurchaseRequestHeader

Item

PurchaseRequestltem

12. Set the multiplicity of the Header element to 1..1 (Required) . 13. Set the multiplicity of the Item element to 1.. *(One or more). 14. In the Schema Index View, add a new element named PurchaseRequestElement. 15. Change the PurchaseRequestElement element type to PurchaseRequestData. Create a Data Object

1. Create a new data object for the Purchase Order Process ## process and assign it to the Requestor ## lane. 2. Change the RequestData data type to PurchaseData - http://www. vendor##. com/ PurchaseData## . Fix Exclusive Choice Gateway Errors

1. Go to the Condition Evaluation tab for the Approval Required##? exclusive choice gateway. 2. Set the No condition as the default gate. 3 . For the Approval Required##? exclusive choice gateway, add the following condition to the Yes gate: boolean-equal (RequestData/Header/Approved, false) . 4. Configure the Request Approved##? exclusive choice gateway conditions using the data in the following table.

162

Condition Name

Configuration Information

No

Default Gateway

Yes

boolean-equal (RequestData/HeaderI Approved, false)



Fix Notification Activity Errors 1. In the Email Notification## activity, add a variable named Status . 2. For the Status variable, add the expression IF (RequestData/Header/Approved, False) . 3. For the Message variable, add the following text for the email notification (which will be shown in the inbox of the user) . Field

Text

Subject

Your purchase request has been {Status}

Message

Hello Requestor##, Your purchase request has been {Status}.

4. Build the PO_Product_## [vendor##.com] process.


163

Unit 4 Solution 8 Create an XSD File and Define Process Context

Business Example

You are a business process administrator. You have been asked to create an XSD file to define the context of a business process. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you . Note: In this exercise, the process created in exercises 2-5 is used.

Create and Edit an XSD File

1. Create a new XSD file named PurchaseRequestData## . xsd in the [LocalDevelopment] po_product /pr/pm ~ src ~ wsdl folder. a) In the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Product_## [vendor## .com] [LocalDevelopment] po_product_##/pr/pm ~ Process Modeling.

~

Process

~

b) Select Data Types . c) From the Data Types context menu, choose New XSD . d) In the Select a Wizard dialog box (if displayed), choose XML

~

XML Schema .

e) In the New XML Schema dialog box. choose [LocalDevelopment] po_product ~ src ~ wsdl.

##/pr/pm

In general, this is already pre-selected. f) In the File Name field , enter PurchaseRequestData##. xsd. g) Choose Finish . A new tab opens containing the Pur c ha s eRequ e stData## . xs d schema. 2. Rename the XML schema to http ://www . vendor## . c om/ PurchaseData##. a) In the PurchaseRequestData##.xsd modeling tab, choose the Schema http:/ I example.org/PurchaseRequest Data## (if not pre-selected). choose the Properties tab.then choose t he General view. b) On the General view choose Edit Namespace. In the Target Namespace field, enter http: //www. vendor##. com/ PurchaseData## . Choose OK. c) Choose Save .

164



3. In the Schema Index View, create a new complex type named PurchaseRequestHeader. a) In the Types section context menu, choose Add Complex Type. b) On the Properties tab, choose General.

Q Add Complex Type

[El PurchaseR

Figure 90: Adding a Complex Data Type

c) In the Name field , enter PurchaseRequestHeader. d) Choose Save.

Note: If the Accept Change screen appears, flag the field Always accept changes and choose Accept.

4. In the PurchaseRequestHeader complex type, add an element named PurchaseOrderID. a) Double-click PurchaseRequestHeader. The modeling surface for this complex data object opens. b) In the PurchaseRequestHeader context menu, select Add Element. c) Name the element PurchaseOrderIO. d) On the keyboard, choose Enter to apply the change. e) Choose Save.

liii

tE PurchaseR~ J::!ai:t®.l: __ _..L_ __,

...

[fil PurchaseOrderI

rJ Add Element

r.;i

~.J Add Element Ref

[fil PurchaseOrderT ~Add Any

---------~

@ Add Attribute

@ Add Attribute Ref Figure 91: Adding an Elem ent

5. In the PurchaseRequestHeader complex type, add an element named PurchaseOrderTotalAmount. a) In the PurchaseRequestHeader context menu, select Add Element. b) Name the element PurchaseOrderTotalAmount. c) On the keyboard, choose Enter to apply the change. 6. Change the PurchaseOrderTotalAmount element type to double. a) Select the PurchaseOrderTotalAmount element.


165


b) On the Properties tab, choose the General view. c) In the Type drop-down menu, choose Double.

liii

;& Relations

~ Problems

(!] element General

Name:

Constrairts

Type:

Documentation Extensions

MinllllJm Occurrence:

"""""""' Maximum Occurrence:

Advanced

IPIJrchaseOrderTot a!Amount

I

string

I•

1--.''--~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-'-i

double float nexBina Int ry

-

stnnQ

Figure 92: Changing Element Type

7. In the PurchaseRequestHeader complex type, add the elements in the following table. Element Name

Element Type

Currency

String

SellerlD

String

Region

String

Approved

Boolean

ApproverComment

String

a) In the PurchaseRequestHeader context menu, select Add Element. b) Name the element. c) Repeat steps A and B to add the remaining elements. 8. In the Schema Index View, create a complex type named PurchaseRequestitem.

a)

~

Choose ~ Schema Index View. to return from the Complex Data Type modeling surface to the Schema Index view.

0

b) In the Schema Index View, in the Types section context menu, choose Add Complex Type . c) In the Name field, enter PurchaseRequestitem. 9. In the PurchaseRequestltem complex type, add the elements in the following table.

166

Element Name

Element Type

ProductlD

String

ProductName

String

ProductPrice

Decimal

Currency

String

Quantity

Decimal



a) Double click the PurchaseRequestltem complex type. b) In the PurchaseRequesltem context menu, select Add Element. c) Name the element and set the type using the data from the table. d) Repeat steps b and c to add the remaining elements.

Note: If the entry type is not listed in the Type field, choose Browse. In the Set Type dialog box search for the correct entry. Select the appropriate entry and choose OK.

e) Choose Save. If the Accept Change screen appears, flag the field Always accept changes and choose Accept. f) Choose the Show Schema Index View button to return to the Schema Index view. 10. Create a complex type named PurchaseRequestData. a) In the Schema Index View, in the Types section context menu, choose Add Complex Type. b) In the Name field, enter PurchaseRequestData. 11. In the PurchaseRequestData complex type, add the elements in the following table. Element Name

Element Type

Header


Item

PurchaseRequestltem

a) Double click PurchaseRequestData . b) In the PurchaseRequestData context menu, select Add Element. c) Name the element using the data from the table. d) On the Properties tab, in the Type drop-down menu, choose Browse. e) In the Set Type dialog box, choose the element type, then choose OK. f) Repeat steps b through e to add the remaining element.


167


liii

~

IE PurchaseRequestoata

·-

IE PurchaseRequestHeader

(!) Header


(!) PurchaseOrder!D

string

@ Item

P\JrchaseRequestltem

(!) PurchaseOrderTotalAmount

double

(!) Cl.O'rency

string

I!) Seler!D

string

@ Region

string

{!) Approved

boolean

(!) ApproverComment

string

I

-

\

IE PurchaseRequestltem

-

@ Product!D

strin9

(!) ProductName

string

(!) ProductPrice

decimal

l!) Cl.O'rency

strin9

@ Quantity

decimal

Figure 93: Complex Data Ty pe Element Creation Results

12. Set the multiplicity of the Header element to 1..1 (Required). a) In the Header element context menu, select Set Multiplicity

~

1..1 (Required).

13. Set the multiplicity of the Item element to 1.. *(One or more) . a) In the Item element context menu, select Set Multiplicity

liii

~

1.. *(One or more).

IE PurchaseRequestData

-

(!] Header [ 1.. 1] PurchaseRe.questHe.ader (!] Item

[ I. .*) PurchaseRequestltem

,

Figure 94: Multiplicity Settings

14. In the Schema Index View, add a new element named PurchaseRequestElement. a) Choose the Show Schema Index View button. b) In the Schema Index View, in the Elements section, choose Add Element. c) Name the element PurchaseRequestElement. 15. Change the PurchaseRequestElement element type to PurchaseRequestData. a) Select PurchaseRequestElement. b) In the Properties tab, in the General view, in the Type drop-down menu, choose Browse. c) In the Set Type dialog box, choose PurchaseRequestData. d) Choose OK. e) Save your work.

168



00 Schema : http:lfwww.vendor20.com/PurchaseData20 fC:7 Directives

~Elements

~Types

III PurchaseBegyestElement : PurchaseRequestOata

~;'·,;.:~" ;:

[El PurchaseReguestOata [El PurchaseReguestHeader [El PurchaseReouestltem

Figure 95: XSD File Creat ion Results

Create a Data Object

1. Create a new data object for the Purchase Order Process## process and assign it to the Requestor ## lane. a) Choose the Purchase Order Process## tab. If this is closed, lin the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Product_## [vendor##.com] ~ Process ~ [LocalDevelopment] po_product_##lprlpm ~ Process Modeling ~ Processes. b) In the Palette, choose Artifacts

~

Data Object.

c) Drag the object to the Requestor ##lane. d) Choose the Properties tab, then choose General, and in the Name field of this new object enter RequestData. 2. Change the RequestData data type to PurchaseData - http://www. vendor##.coml Purchase Data##. a) In the Properties tab, select the Data Type view. b) In the Data Type drop-down menu, select PurchaseRequestData - http:/I www.vendor##.com/Purchase Data## . c) Choose Save . Fix Exclusive Choice Gateway Errors

1. Go to the Condition Evaluation tab for the Approval Required##? exclusive choice gateway. a) Select Approval Required?. b) In the Properties tab, choose the Condition Evaluation view. 2. Set the No condition as the default gate. a) In the Condition Evaluation view, in the row named No , check Default Gateway. 3. For the Approval Required##? exclusive choice gateway, add the following condition to the Yes gate: boolean-equal (RequestData/Header/Approved, false) . a) On the Condition Evaluation view, select the row named Yes. b) Choose Edit.


169


liii

0

Properties ~

)! Relations

fL Problems

-~Vc:>EJ t..:..i

s8>. Approval Required 20

Figure 96: Condition Evaluation Tab

c) On line 1, enter boolean-equal (RequestData/ Header/ Appro ved , false). El

(®condition Expression 1boo1 ean-equal. ( Reque stData/Hea d e r/App roved , fal.se)

•

!Enter f~ter text

s rot;.imw ~ [ii Processl~anceAttributes

J EB

EtJ

lil

RequestData @ Rules and Functions

r~tails No specific details available (

Extract f'unctloo,..

•

Figure 97: Condition Expression for Approval Required

Note: By dragging the node Rules and Functions ~ Boolean ~ booleanequal( boolean left, boolean right) from the area on the right side to the Expression Editor, you can generate the corresponding coding in the editor. Accordingly, you can generate the first argument of the boolean-equal () function by dragging the node Context ~ RequestData ~ Header ~ Approved from right to left.

d) Choose OK.

Note: The indicators for errors disappear automatically when an issue is fixed and the object is saved. In this case, the issue indicator (that is, the red "x") remains until you have saved the process.

170



Ll Properties

&i'-.. :J Relations) I[ Problems ) !Ji Wrastructur« Consde 0

1

Deploy V-iew Cooscle

l& Approval Required 20

jDefine the condition evaluation order for this gateway. Condition for defd 90te Is not evaluated.

-~!"

0 ... I Name I Yes 2 No

d. . . Con 1tion Eva1uat1on

I Conditloo

I Default Gate

0 0

boolean....--·-' (RequestData/Header/Approved, f aIse)

true

•

Figure 98: Result of Adding the Condition Evaluation for the Approval Required Object

4. Configure the Request Approved##? exclusive choice gateway conditions using the data in the following table. Condition Name

Configuration Information

No

Default Gateway

Yes

boolean-equal (RequestData/HeaderI Approved , false)

a) Choose the Request Approved##? exclusive choice gateway. b) Choose the Properties tab, then in the Condition Evaluation view, in the row named No, check Default Gateway. c) In the Condition Evaluation view, select the row named Yes. d) Choose Edit. e) On line 1, enter boolean-equal (RequestData/Header/Approved, false). f) Choose OK. g) Choose Save. Ll Properties !::f"\_$ Relations

fL Problems I ~ lnfrastructure COO.Ole 0

Deploy ~ Consde

~ Request Approved 20?

General

j Define the condition evaluation order for this gateway. Condtion for default gate ls not ev-ed.

·t· • t' Con d1 ion ~va1ua ion

_____.I

0 ... 1 Name

I Condition

I Defaut Gate

I Yes

boolean-equol(Request~ta/Header/Approved, false)

0

2No

-

0

Figure 99: Condition Evaluation for the Request Approved Object

Fix Notification Activity Errors 1. In the Email Notification## activity, add a variable named Status. a) Select Email Notification##. b) Choose the Properties tab. c) Choose the Mail view. d) In the Mail view, in the Variables area, choose Add. e) In the Name column, choose VariableO by double-clicking it and change the entry to Status .


171


2. For the Status variable, add the expression IF (RequestData/Header/Approved, False) . a) On the Mail view, select the row Status . b) Choose Edit. c) In the Expression Editor, on line 1, enter IF (RequestData / Header/ Approved , true , false) . d) Choose OK. 3. For the Message variable, add the following text for the email notification (which will be shown in the inbox of the user). Field

Text

Subject

Your purchase request has been {Status}

Message

Hello Requestor##, Your purchase request has been {Status}.

a) On the Mail view, in the Parameterized Texts section, in the Subject field, enter Your purchase request has been {Status} . b) In the Message field, enter Hello Requestor## , Your purchase request has been {Status} .

Note: Be sure to use braces {}when entering and referencing variables you defined under Variables in the subject and message of the email.

c) Choose Save . 4. Build the PO_Product_## [vendor##.com] process. a) In the Composite Explorer view, choose PO_Product_## [vendor##. com]. b) In the context menu, choose Build. The Infrastructure Console tab appears. c) Check that all actions are marked with a green checkmark.

172



Composite Application Framework Overview The SAP Composite Application Framework is used for Java business object modeling and service abstraction. It can be reached in the SAP NetWeaver Developer Studio (NWDS). The tools in the NWDS are organized. This enables application developers to focus on specific tasks. To reach the Composite Application Framework, choose the Composite Application perspective to develop with the Composite Appl ication Framework (CAF). Use CAF for standard persistence scenarios where highest possible performance is not needed and out-of-the-box conventions established by CAF are suitable. That is, relations are stored in a separate table, finder methods follow the (pl OR p2) and (ql and q2) style, equi-joins are used, and flushes take place immediately. Use JPA specifically if performance needs to be tweaked, standard table layout is not acceptable, or complex queries are required . In this case, use the JPA Editor to model JPA entities and apply templates to generate CRUD session beans. Motivation CAF aims at supporting the standard use cases of data persistence without requiring detailed JPA knowledge. Knowing the boundaries of CAF before deciding to use it is crucial to avoid getting trapped in them later.

Requirements and Constraints with Composite Application Framework The SAP CAF application service acts as an adaptation component to adapt data and the SAP CAF business object to locally store data. The SAP CAF application services are exposed as Web services and can compose other services. Business objects in SAP CAF can be used as persistent storage of data that has to be available in processes and UI applications. Here, the lifecycle of the content is not bound to a UI session or process instance. It has a lifecycle of its own. Data in an SAP CAF business object has its own lifetime, is persistable, and is not coupled to anything else.

Composite Application

BPM

Web Dynpro

Visual Composer

Business Entity

Figure 100: Intermediate Storage


173


Java Persistence Framework Overview Persistence components are responsible for fast access, management, and persistence of data. They rely on Enterprise Information Systems, such as an SAP system and/or database servers. Java Apphcat1on

-

Java Databa~ Connecttvlty (JDBC)

J

Java Persistence

(JPA}

A~J

.Object~elational

ReJalional Persistence

Java Data Objects )

•

(JOO}

Persistence

Op
0

JOBC is part of the Java Platform, Standard Ediion (Java SE)

I

Q

JPA i$ part of the Java Platform,

Database

0

I JOSC Ortver

Enterprise Edition (Java EE}

~

JOO is not oovered in this c l8$$

Figure 10 1: Java Persistence Framework

The main differences between the use of databases and ABAP are the following: •

Java and ABAP data have separate database schemas.

•

There is no direct table access between ABAPI Java stacks.

•

The collaboration takes place at component level: JCo, WebServices, XI

With Java EE 5, a new object-relational persistence API, the Java Persistence API (JPA), has been added to the Java EE standard. SAP NetWeaver Application Server, Java EE 5 Edition contains a JPA implementation that is provided by SAP and called SAP JPA 1.0.

NW AS Java Instance Java Displtcher '

J

s-I

StmrJ ...

NW AS Java+ ABAP Instance Java Displtcher

I

Setwr

ABAP Displtcher'

ltMfJ WP

WP

NW AS ABAP lnsta.nce ABAP Dilpltdltl

AP~P Sehl

WP

WP

Java Schem1

Figure 10 2: Java and ABAP Schemas

Entities JPA is an API for storing lightweight Java objects called entities in a relational database. An entity appears as a regular Java object, often referred to as a "Plain Old Java Object (POJO)." It does not need to implement any particular interface or extend a special class - all technical overhead associated with EJB CMP entity beans is gone with JPA. You are free to define the entity according to your data model, including inheritance and polymorphism, without major restrictions being imposed by the persistence framework.

174



Although an entity looks like a simple Java object, it is a Java object with a mapping to a relational database. Therefore it is necessary to declare an entity explicitly in order to distinguish it from other regular Java objects that you might use within your application, and you need a way to define how exactly to map the entity onto your existing database table(s). Since this kind of information can be considered metadata for the entity class, it is not surprising that JPA relies on the Java SE 5 standard technique for providing metadata: annotations.

Note: JPA allows the object-relational mapping information to be provided in XML format. However, annotations are easier to understand for a human reader, so annotations are used within this article.

Defining the Object-Relational Mapping When developing a JPA application, you will often encounter entities just regular Java objects that you instantiate, fill with data, send to other application components, and otherwise manipulate by Java means. The relational aspect of the entity, the fact that it also resides as a row in a database table, and the problem of accessing it there, is most of the time hidden by the JPA framework. When designing the entity class itself, however, you must consider its representation in the database. You have to tell the JPA framework how exactly to map the entity to the relational database, that is, you have to define the object- relational mapping. In contrast to the situation with CMP 2.1 or JOO 1.0, the object-relational mapping is an integral part of the JPA specification and therefore standardized. JPA makes the application developer's job as easy as possible by defining a set of very reasonable default mappings. If nothing else is stated, JPA makes assumptions on the names of tables and columns, for example. Only if they do not match your situation will you have to add an appropriate declaration. The following table summarizes the most important default rules: Table 2 : Default Mapping Rules Area

Default Role

Override by

Table name

An entity is mapped onto a table having the name as the entity (usually the unqualified name of the entity class).

@Table

Persistent fields

All fields (with field-based access) or properties (with property- based access) are persistent.

@Transient

Column name

A persistent field or property is @Column mapped onto a column of the same name.

Unfortunately, the JPA specification does not define whether table and column names are casesensitive. With SAP JPA 1.0, if a table name or column name is specified explicitly, its case is


175


respected . If the table name or column name is generated according to a default rule, upper case is assumed Defining the Persistence Unit The data model of a JPA application typica lly consists of several related entity classes, which have to be mapped together to the same database. The entity classes form a logical unit that is called a persistence unit. Within a JPA application, you have to define the persistence unit by a configuration file called persistence . xml. It is possible but not required to list the entities explicitly that form the persistence unit. If you do not do so, the JPA implementation scans the application for entities and detects them automatically.

Note: Always specify a data source in p ers istence . xml . Technically, specifying the name of the data source related to the persistence unit is optional in the persistence . xml file . If the name of the data source is omitted , some providers automatically use a built-in default data source, others assume a default name but do not provide the data-source itself, while others again might even reject the persistence unit as being incomplete. For this reason - and for the sake of clarity - it is highly recommended to always specify the name of the data source to be used. Working with Entities - The Entity Manager Since entities are regular Java objects, you can work with them in the same way you usually do. Instantiate an entity, read and modify its data, do whatever you like - but do not expect any of those operations to be reflected in the database automatically. If you want the JPA framework to manage a particular entity instance, you have to put it explicitly under the control of a JPA component called entity manager. As long as the entity manager controls the entity, you can expect that changes to the entity will be synchronized with the database. Once this control ends, however, the entity is again nothing but a regular Java object

Requirements and Constraints with Java Persistence Framework Business applications often have to deal with persistent data stored in a relational database. For the Java platform, there are a variety of standards and proprietary solutions that address the issue, making it difficult to decide. The most fundamental, low-level programming interface is the Java Database Connectivity (JDBC). JDBC works with tabular row and column data rather than with Java objects, so that a considerable amount of work has to be spent to convert data back and forth . Object-relational persistence frameworks , on the other hand, allow you to work with the Java object model only. The framework undertakes the task to map the Java objects to the relational database, translates searches on the objects to SQL and handles all communication with the database. JPA is an API for storing lightweight Java objects called entities in a relational database. An entity is nothing more than a regular Java object, often referred to as a "Plain Old Java Object" (POJO).

176




•


•


•



177

Unit 4

Lesson 3 Creating Data Mappings

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to create data mappings. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

•


Data Mapping Definitions Data mapping defines rules for transforming the source context to a target context. The visual display of mapped data mapping shows how data input and output by activities in the process are converted. Data mapping includes drag and drop, automapping, and quick fix features that make data mapping quick and easy.

liii

0

Approve Purcllase Request xx

Figure 103: Def inition Data Mappings

Data mapping defines the rules for transforming the source context to the target context. Each context consists of one or more nodes. You specify with drag and drop which nodes are mapped to each other in the mapping editor. You use expressions to specify how the transformation between the nodes is done. Data Mapping is done in the Mapping property section of flow elements and the Expression Editor. The mapping is performed in the the following steps: •

Define input and output mapping Define automappings to show how data used as input and output by the activities and the events in your process is transformed.

•

178

Define mappings using the Automapping option


Lesson: Creating Data Mappings

The automapping option creates a set of mapping suggestions based on matching the elements' names. structure. and data types. •

Apply quick fixes in data mappings and expressions You also have the option of fixing some common errors. which may occur when you define data mappings by applying a quick fix .

Data Mapping Rules You use expressions and a subset of the XPath grammar to specify how the transformation between the nodes is done. These include the following: •

Mapping parent and child nodes If you define data mappings to a child node, all of its parent nodes are also included in the mapping.

•

Mapping individual child nodes If you define mappings between parent nodes of the same type, all their child nodes are also mapped to each other.

•

Using axes in data mappings Additional axes can be used for selecting parent and root nodes in the expression editor. Additional axes are useful when you want to define data mappings between lists or between their child nodes.

In data mapping, expressions and a subset of XPath Grammar are used to specify how the transformation between the context nodes is done. Data mapping is done within the flow elements and the Expression Editor. Mapping Parent and Child Nodes Nodes can be of a simple type, which means that the node has no children, or of complex type, which means that the node has child nodes. If you define data mapping to a child node, all of its parent nodes are also included in the mapping and this type of mapping is indicated with an asterisk next to the parent node in the target context. Depending on whether you define mappings between parent nodes or only between their child nodes, you can achieve different mapping results. The results can also depend on the cardinality of the parent node. If the cardinality of the parent node is 1 and you map only the child nodes, the mapping engine creates the parent target node (B). even if the source context is empty. Look at the following example: AB Al ---> Bl A2 ---> B2 End of code

If you map the parent nodes and the source structure is initialized, then the target structure is created as follows: A ---> B Al ---> Bl A2 ---> B2 End of code


179


If the cardinality of the source parent node is greater than 1, which means that the source is a list, you have to map the parent nodes of the source and the target. For each of the elements in the source context, an element is created in the target context and the mapping between child nodes is executed. If no mapping between the source context and the target parent nodes exists, the mapping editor shows an error. You need to specify how the elements of the source context are transformed to the target with an expression as the following example shows:

---> B[] Al ---> Bl A2 ---> A2 A []

End of code

Note: The Process Composer does not support all data types. For more information about limitations on data types, see SAP Note 1266539. Mapping Individual Child Nodes When you define data mappings between parent nodes of the same type, all their child nodes are also mapped to each other. This default behavior is called deep copy and means that the source context is copied to the target context. A plus sign appears on the mapping line between the parent nodes so that you can expand and see the mappings between the child nodes. A - [+] ---> B Al Bl A2 B2 End of code

If you only want to map individual child nodes and not the whole structure, you can switch the mapping editor to one of the following options: •

1:1- This option allows you to select individual child nodes from the source context and map them to child nodes from the target context.

•

n:m - This option is available when the parent nodes are in lists. It allows you to select several child nodes from the source context and nap them to a single child node from the target context.

Using Axes in Data Mappings When you define data mappings, you can use additional axes for selecting parent and root nodes in the Expression Editor. Using additional axes is useful when you want to define data mappings between lists or between their child nodes. The following axes are available: •

Root selector - This selects the root node of a context node and is notated with a slash (I).

•

Parent selector - This selects the direct parent node of a context node and is notated with two periods and a slash( ../).

For example, you have the source and target structures of node described below. SourceRoot ---> TargetRoot

---> B [ ] Al ---> Bl All ---> Bll A[

180

]



A2 ---> I End of code

The XML Structure of the source context follows this syntax: alla2 all ' a2 ' End of code

In the source structure, node A is a list and has two child nodes: Al and A2. The child node Al also has one child node All. You want to map the All and A2 nodes from the source structure to the 811 node in the target structure and use the function string-join to aggregate the values of the source to the target. Depending on whether you use the parent or root selector, you have different results after the . mapping. The following example shows the syntax when using the root selector. string- j oin( End of code

(All,

.. /A2), "" )

The result of the mapping to the target node 811 consists of two elements: [all_a2_a2'] and [all'_a2_a2'] . The following example shows the syntax when using the parent selector. string- j oin( All, End of code

. . /A2), "" )

The result of the mapping to the target node 811 consists again of two elements [all_a2] and [all'_a2'].

Process Context Icons The Mapping Editor uses a variety of lines, icons, and symbols to help you visualize the data . mappings. Mapping Lines Mapping Editor Lines

•

Solid lines - These lines show actual mappings between source and target nodes. You can change these mappings.

•

Dashed lines - These lines show actual mappings whose source or target nodes or both nodes lie out of the visual area of the screen or is hidden. You can change these mappings.

•

Dotted lines - These lines show implicit mappings that you cannot delete or update.

Implicit mapping can be defined in two ways. First, you can use the deep copy feature to map nodes having the same complex type assigned to them. As all ch ild nodes are mapped to each other implicitly, the mapping lines between them are dotted when the mapping between parent nodes is expanded. You can also apply a reusable mapping function . All ch ild mappings are done implicitly and the mapping lines between them are dotted when the mapping between the parent nodes is expanded. Process Context Icons


181


~

structure with a 1 :1 cardinality

~

structure with a 0:1 cardlnallty

m

List/Collection with a 1 :n cardinality

~

List/Collection with a O:n cardinality

w

string based attribute

~

numeric based attribute

00

boolean based attribute

Figure 104: Process Context Icons

Process Context Symbols

Context Node Symbols •

Question Mark - Indicates that mapping to th is node is optional (upper right corner)

•

At Sign (@) - Indicates that the node is a simple type attribute (bottom right corner)

•

Stack icon - Indicates that the node contains multiple nodes or values

A text() child node may also be present in the source or target context. When you define data mapping from a text() node, the text() node uses the text value of its parent node, which is a complex type node with simple content. When you define data mapping to a text() node, the text value is assigned to the parent node as a text value. The text value does not have to be of type string, but can also be other types, such as an integer.

Input and Output Mapping Assigning Static Values to Target Context Nodes You can directly assign a static value to a target context node, which means that no data transformation from the source context is performed. There are many types of values you can enter including: numeral constants, true or false boolean constants, text constants, date, time, date and time. To assign a list with static values, enter the elements of the list between parentheses and separate them by a comma, for example, (ElementOne, ElementTwo, ElementThree). Defining Data Mappings You define data mappings to show how data used as input and output by the activities and the events in your process is transformed, according to the following guidelines: •

Input mapping Defines how the data transformation between the process context and the input context of an activity or event is done.

182



•

Output mapping Defines how the data transformation between the output context of an activity or event and the process is done.

•

Input and output mapping Shows which nodes are mapped to each other, but does not specify how the transformation is done. You define how the transformation is done with an expression.

•

Mapping assignment options Depending on the nodes type and their cardinality, you can define the following mapping assignment options: Set (Source context overrides the target context), Append (Source context objects are appended to the list of existing target context objects), Merge (Source context objects are merged with the target context objects)

You define data mappings to show how input and output data is transformed by the activities and the events in your process. When you define input mapping, you define how the data transformation between the process context and the input context of an activity or event is done. When you define output mapping, you define how the data transformation between the output context of an activity or event and the process context is done. Input and output mapping shows which nodes are mapped to each other, but it does not specify how the transformation is done. You define how the transformation is done with an expression. Mapping Assignment Options Depending on the type of nodes and their cardinality, you can define the following mapping assignment options: set, append, and merge. Set Set is the default assignment for both node types. When you use the set option, the source context overrides the target context. For example, in the source context object you have one element, and the target object contains five elements. When you use the set option, you have one element after mapping. Append The append option is available for both node types if the maximum occurrence is greater than 1. When you use the append option, the source context objects are appended to the list of existing target context objects. For example, in the source context object, you have one element and the target context object is a list containing five elements. When you use the append option, you have six elements after mapping. Merge The merge option is intended for structured target data. When you use the merge option, the source context objects are merged with the target context objects. New objects are created in the target object if the number of objects in the source object is greater than the number of objects in the target object. For example, in the source context object, you have a list containing five nodes A, B, C, D, and E. In the target object you have a list containing two nodes Mand N. When you use the merge option, after mapping you have a list with the following nodes: M, N, C, D, and E.

Automapping The automapping option creates a set of mapping suggestions by matching the elements' names, structure, and data types. You can also manually specify any necessary assignments.


183


Automapping Options

•

You can select between simple and advanced automapping.

•

Mapping suggestions are created using different algorithms based on your selection.

Simple Name-Based Automapping The simple name-base automapping option creates mapping suggestions by matching the elements' names from the source and target structures. Advanced Automapping The advanced automapping creates the mapping suggestions by matching the source and the target elements using the following algorithms: •

Name Matcher - compares only the names of elements

•

NamePath Matcher - compares the entire paths from element to root

•

Leaf Matcher - compares the leaves that lie underneath the given elements

•

Parent Matcher - compares the siblings of the given elements

When using the advanced automapping option , you can select the method for similarity aggregation. You can select either average, which calculates the average over all selected algorithms, or maximum, which accepts only the highest result over all algorithms and rejects the rest. Matching Precision You can adjust the level of matching precision when you switch between the high.medium, and low options. The high precision option means that only matches with a good quality are accepted, so you can be reasonably confident that the matches make sense. However, you must always check all the results. The low precision offers more matches but these may not be of a very high quality. Dictionary Import You can import a dictionary file to improve matching using synonyms and abbreviations. The dictionary supports text files and OLIF V2 file formats . In a text file, you define synonyms following a header named Synonyms and abbreviations under the keyword Abbreviations. With abbreviations, you must write the short form first separating pairs of entries by a comma. A sample text file is shown in the following example: Sy nonyms ship , deliver bill , invo i c e state , county Abbreviatio n s No, Number tel , telepho ne VAT , value added tax

OLIF File V2 Specification For information about the OLIF V2 format, see http://www.olif.net. Errors in Mappings You can solve several types of errors in data mappings and expressions by applying a quick fix . You can apply a quick fix to errors resulting from a difference between data types to define mapping between source and target nodes with different data types. The quick fix enables the source node data type to be processed as the target node data type with the "cast as" function .

184




•



185

Unit 4 Lesson 4 Applying data transformations using functions

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to apply data transformations using functions import mappings from the Enterprise Services Repository. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

•


•


Generic Functions

--

Built-in Supplied Functions

I

l)t:t(i(>r\(~~ot--"fot,,h""7).'0j

.:J

~"'t*fl'ft('lif:

J

~

7t- - ,

CO't<.'l d

'8

~>EB ~

IJ• Ea Oo.lr.-., ~'" ~ r-.s ~ r:a~...

"'Ill .._ I!> EB'"'" &;: a;

....

demG.,$.ip,<

No-SPed'll:~.a<;~

-m ...., .....__

Ql -~ "11h,J 1-.f. !ol.W,,""')

Ill ~ tb~Wt..-f!Ma~ . !il eNJ·Mth(MIQ1ett.~ 11Gtt> UJ lr(~t.e1t,stml(1 ..·) ~M, 1'1f'41 .••)~ -.~ wr.1oca >

m slr"9....,., mt~•·l'o9~. ~~ "'l'IO*~

I

}

,_I

• -11tiil«1>no~ """Oft/IC )

111 «.ts·ICl'(Wt.Q~. ~~ ) m ~~vM)

U! -...Cdttf,..... ¥M> Q) « 1fll;J(OKW1..-.)

m ?DIQ(

. .,

m ~~v~) m ~~._.,,

L

ttr~"'o'l4~. e~·;;t l

Gil ~~Wflll~!b"O!lo1tJ 311 ~~Nn;JW1;wt111Alt.t)

m~JOf(1 .. ·1~,.,...--Qr,

Figure 105: Generic Funct ions

Guidelines for Generic Functions •

Allow for general data mappings and data transformation abilities

•

Supply out of the box functions for general common used cases

•

Include basic Text, Data, Boolean, Numeric, and several generic functions

Generic functions are out-of-the-box functions that provide general data mapping and data transformation capabilities for commonly used cases. These functions include text, date, boolean, and numeric. Some examples of built-in generic functions are listed below:

186


Lesson: Applying data transformations using functions

•

Concatenate. If the Else

•

Sub String, Equals

•

Greater. Less Than

•

Sort, Filter, Add/Subtract Date

Custom Functions Custom functions are reusable functions that you create that allow for advanced data mapping and data transformation capabilities. You can create your own custom functions that can be reused . To create a custom function. right-click on Functions .

serv

Assign Custom Functions

I

~ New l~O Functton...

I

-=oat""'•T=ype,,-s~

ii New EJB Function. ..

5efvke lnterface~ C.._ed SeM:es

. Wl?§IW I R~lllq(lb(G.ecOfde.sfl.esoonci~) .;::,J ,.,,. I~""' '"'"'"" ".,... ' - - -'.

s a rillZlll 8 8 Riles ¥1d Fu'lc!W.$ m meooie1t1

re m

o."wn.w

l),,.......

.... Define Custom Functions

J

@

EB Gen«~

J:==--

2!I

\

m1•-1c am

$

(1J EB ~ ~f«»Ulfl/
mo.:.tf'o!Mllt( stllrY)&te)

m!!tpptt( "®9!Se!p. ertt: Jetio)

I w R.~<»dfr11..·1°'*"> 1

I "'

"""" I

Figure 106: Custom Functions

There are three function types: •

Expression functions

•

Mapping functions

•

Enterprise Java Bean (EJB) functions

Expression Functions Expression functions define both input and return parameters. To create a custom expression function , use the following procedure: 1. Create a new expression function and define both the input and return parameters. 2. Add the expression logic by dragging the input parameter(s) from the context including the desired function . 3. To use the function go to the Mapping view and double-click on the desired field . 4. Drag your new function into the work area and add the particular input field(s) from the context. To create a custom mapping function. use the following procedure: 1. Create a new mapping function and define both the input and return parameters. 2. Perform the necessary mapping, or use additional built-in expression functions .


187


3. To use the function. go to the Mapping view and double-click the desired field . 4. Drag your new function into the work area and add the particular input field(s) from the context. Custom EJB Function To create a custom EJB function. use the following procedure: 1. Create a new EJB function and define both the input and return parameters. 2. Select any existing EJB project to add the EJB. or select the existing service composer project. 3. Add the necessary Java code to the EJB. 4. Drag your new function into the work area and add the particular input fields from the context.

Custom and Generic Function Results

:J

-.......

LO 1oec1..uscomervr oers~esponse tEI rfil Customer

---···-·- IIl Customer!O ··---·-·• IIl LargestOrder - -' IIJ Rating

Mapping Function

Mapper(Custome'9o"'Dat'1Jyl0Re
j

··-8 lD.l Order --------~ IIl Date ·--··--·~ -IIJ ID ·······--' 1IJ Total

RaUnot;jb(GetO.deuR-se/O.deu) ~

~ s:ubstring(date,.6~'4)

Built-in Function

EJB Function

I

\ Built-i n Function

~

~

@~

10001,973773

1001973773

Date

05-09-2008

2008

Rating

Orders Collection

Good I Fair

Largest Order

Orders Collection

$200

-Customer ID

.

Figure 107: Final Result--Custom and Generic Funct ions

The mapping functions deliver various outputs, as shown in the figure entitled Custom and Generic Function Results. In the first example shown. a mapping function concatanates values. In the second example, a built-in function cuts away the information about data and year. In the third example, a EJB function adds information to a delivered field value. In the fourth example, the built-in functions select the "largest order" of the orders section.

188


Unit 4

Exercise 9 Develop and Use Custom Mapping Functions

Business Example

You are a business administrator. You recently notated a business a new business process model in BPMN 2.0 and now have been asked to create and use custom mapping functions. In this exercise you will use the PO_Enhanced_Product## process to create and configure extended functionalities in NWDS. Note: In this exercise, you create another product and process. This is done to make the exercise easier to follow and understand . This exercise discusses mapping data types for consolidation. The following data types will be used: •

OT CustomerBasicData -

Header -

CustomerlD

•


Header -

TaxlD

•


Orders -

Date

•


Orders -

ID

•


Orders -

Total

These data types will be mapped to the target data type DT_CustomerConsolidatedData to consolidate the information. •

OT CustomerConsolidatedData -

Consolidated CustomerlD

•

DT_CustomerConsolidatedData -

LargestOrder

•


Rating

The OT- CustomerBasicData - Header - CustomerlD and OT- CustomerBasicData - TaxlD data types are consolidated in the DT_CustomerConsolidatedData ConsolidatedCustomerlD . The data before mapping looks like the following example: Data Type

Data

DT_CustomerBasicData CustomerlD

Header -

DT_CustomerBasicData -

Header -


123-4 TaxlD

abc

189

Header


After mapping, the data is consolidated and looks like the following: Data Type

OT CustomerConsolidatedData ConsolidatedCustomerfD

Data ~

1234abc

In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you .

Check the Source Data Type DT_CustomerBasicData 1. Create a new process called CustomMappingFunction## using the data in the following table. Field

Val ue

Name

CustomMappingFunction##

New Pool: Name

Administrator##

New Pool: Lanes

Requestor##

2. Import the service interface Sl_CustomerData as a wsd l file from the Y:\ \ TrainingSetup shared folder using the data in the following table to complete the Service Reference dialog box. Field

Val ue

Name

Customer

Description

Customer

3. Check the source data type for DT_CustomerBasicData.

Create a Start Trigger Event 1. Create a start trigger named Start SI CustomerData Trigger## using the data in the following table.

- -

Dialog Box

Field

-

Value

New Message Trigger: Create Name a New Message Trigger

Start_Sl_CustomerData_Trig ger##

New Message Trigger: Select Operation

Sl_CustomerData

Service

2. Assign the Start_Sl_CustomerData_Trigger start trigger to the Start event. 3. From the Start event, add a mapping activity named CustomMapping## and connect it to the End event.

Create a Custom Mapping Function 1. Create a custom mapping function using the data from the following table.

190



Field

Va lue

Name

Custom Map##

Return Type (Use the search help in this field to find the necessary entry)

string - http://www.w3.org/2001/ XMLSchema

Parameters

argl, arg2

2. Map argl and arg2 parameters to the result object. 3. In the Result editor, add the following line: concat

( repl ace(argl ," - " , "" ),arg2)

Create the New Data Objects DO_CustomBasicData and DO_CustomConsolidatedData 1. Create two new data objects named DO CustomerBasicData## and DO CustomerConsolidatedData## for the CustomMappingFunction process.

-

Assign Data Types to Data Objects 1. Assign data types to data objects DO_CustomerBasicData# and DO CustomerConsolidatedData## .

Define Custom Mapping 1. Map the following CustomMapping objects to the corresponding nodes. Process Context, Left Column DO CustomerBasicData Customer/D

~

DO CustomerBasicData Tax/D

Header

Process Context, Right Column ~

Header -

DO CustomConsolidatedData ConsolidatedCustomerlD DO_ CustomConsolidatedData ConsolidatedCustomerlD

Create the Output Mapping for the Start Event 1. For the Start event, create output mappings for the following CustomMapping objects to the corresponding nodes. Process Context, Left Column MT CustomerBasicData MT CusomerBasicData -

~

Header Orders

Process Context, Right Column DO_CustomerBasicData -

Header

DO CustomerBasicData -

Orders

Create the Input Mapping for the End Event 1. For the End event, create input mappings for the following Custom Mapping object to the corresponding nodes.


191


Process Context, Left Column

Process Context, Right Column

DO CustomerConsolidatedData Consolidated CustomerfD

MT_CustomerConsolidatedData ConsolidatedCustomer/D

DO CustomerConsolidatedData LargestOrder

MT_CustomerConsolidatedData LargestOrder

DO_CustomerConsolidatedData -

Rating

MT_CustomerConsolidatedData -

Rating

Assign a Principal User to the Pool 1. Assign Administrator## as the principal user for the pool.

Build and Deploy the Process 1. Build and deploy the process.

Configure Inbound and Outbound Communication 1. Using SAP NetWeaver Administrator, find the Sl_CustomerData## service interface for vendor##.com. Connect to SAP NetWeaver Administrator using the following data. 2. Assign the profile SAP_DEFAULT_PROFILE to the Sl_CustomerData service interface. 3. Assign the NWK on nw ktdcOO. wdf.sap.corp Consumed Service Group to the Sl_CustomerData## service interface.

Test the Service Interface in Web Services 1. Connect to SAP NetWeaver Web Services. 2. Find the Sl_CustomerData service interface for vendor##.com. Field

Value

Search Type

Provider System (select radio button)

Search for

SI CustomerData

3. Select the parameters for the testing using the data in the following table.

192

Field

Value

Customer ID

12-3

TaxlD

abed

Date

ID

1234

Total

2000

User Name

Requestor##

Password

Your password


Unit 4 Solution 9 Develop and Use Custom Mapping Functions

Business Example

You are a business administrator. You recently notated a business a new business process model in BPMN 2.0 and now have been asked to create and use custom mapping functions. In this exercise you will use the PO_Enhanced_Product## process to create and configure extended functionalities in NWDS. Note: In this exercise, you create another product and process. This is done to make the exercise easier to follow and understand . This exercise discusses mapping data types for consolidation. The following data types will be used: •


Header -

CustomerlD

•


Header -

TaxlD

•


Orders -

Date

•


Orders -

ID

•


Orders -

Total

These data types will be mapped to the target data type DT_CustomerConsolidatedData to consolidate the information. •

OT CustomerConsolidatedData -

Consolidated CustomerlD

•


LargestOrder

•


Rating

The OT- CustomerBasicData - Header - CustomerlD and OT- CustomerBasicData - TaxlD data types are consolidated in the DT_CustomerConsolidatedData ConsolidatedCustomerlD . The data before mapping looks like the following example: Data Type

Data

DT_CustomerBasicData CustomerlD

Header -

DT_CustomerBasicData -

Header -


123-4 Tax ID

abc

193

Header


After mapping, the data is consolidated and looks like the following: Data Type

Data

OT CustomerConsolidatedData ConsolidatedCustomerlD

~

1234abc

In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you. Check the Source Data Type DT_CustomerBasicData

1. Create a new process called Cu s t omMappingFunc tio n## using the data in the following table. Field

Value

Name

CustomMappingFunction##

New Pool: Name

Administrator##

New Pool: Lanes

Requestor##

a) In the Composite Explorer view, double-click PO_Enhanced_## to open its modeling area. b) In the PO_Enhanced_## modeling area, from the Palette, choose Process and drag it to the Process section of the PO_Enhanced_## Layout view. c) In the New Process dialog box, in the Name field , enter the new process name. d) Select the Create a Pool with the Following Name and Lanes checkbox. e) In the Name field, enter the pool name. f) In the Lanes field, enter the lane names. g) Choose Finish.

..

~ PO_Enhanced_20 [vendor20] ~

......

Portal (O)

'

Process (2)

...

1cia:

CustomMa

•• ~ ·· ·

Jb

Handle Events

=

.. '•• I

J

I

Figure 108: The New Process in t he PO_Enhanced+## Product

2. Import the service interface Sl_CustomerData as a wsdl file from the Y:\ \ TrainingSetup shared folder using the data in the following table to complete the Service Reference dialog box.

194

Field

Value

Name

Customer



Field

Va lue

Description

Customer

a) In the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Enhanced_## [vendor##.org] ~ [Local Development] po_enhanced_##/pr/pm ~ Process Modeling.

~

Processes

b) Select Service Interfaces. c) In the Select Service Interfaces context menu, choose Import WSDL. d) In the WSDL Import dialog box, select the Remote Location/File System checkbox. e) Choose Next. f) In the WSDL URL Access dialog box, choose Browse . g) In the Open dialog box, choose the Y drive. The Y drive might be displayed as: tmp ( \ \ wdflb mtXXXX)

(Y:)

h) In the Y drive, choose, TrainingSetup, then choose SAPBPM. i) Choose Sl_CustomerData. wsdl.

j) Choose Open . k) In the WSDL URL Address screen, choose Next. I) In the Service Reference dialog box, choose the Create New radio button and enter the information from the table. m) Choose Finish . The new service interface can be seen at: PO_Enhanced_## [vendor##.org] ~ Process ~ [Local Development] po_enhanced_##/pr/pm ~ Process Modeling ~ Service Interfaces 3. Check the source data type for DT_CustomerBasicData. a) Choose PO_Enhanced##[vendor##.org] ~Process~ [LocalDevelopment]po_enhanced_##/pr/ pm~ Process Modeling~ Data Types~ http://vendorOO.com . b) Double-click DT_ CustomerBasicData. c) Double-click the blue arrow on the right side of the table. The Schema modeling area opens.


195


liii

Name _ Jcatego!:i .,, DT_CustomerBasicData Complex Type .,, Header Element Customerld Element Taxld Element .,, Orders Element Date Element ID Element [fotaij Element

Jrme

_J occurrence 1

)(sd:string )(sd:string

1

1 1..unbounded

)(sd:string ,XSd:string xsd:strlng

1 1

1

Figure 109: Elem ents of t he DT_CustomerBasicData Data Type

d) Close the tabs for the modeling areas for the OT_CustomerBasicOata data type. e) Double-click OT_CustomerConsolidatedOata . f) Open OT_CustomerBasicOata. Name • OT_CustomerConsolidatedOata ConsolidatedCustomerld LargestOrder Rating

ICatego!}'. Complex Type Element Element Element

IT~pe

joccurrenc

xsd:string

1 0..1 0..1

~sd:string

xsd:string

•

Figure 110: Elements of t he DT_CustomerConsolidatedData Data Type

Create a Start Trigger Event 1. Create a start trigger named Start SI CustomerData Trigger## using the data in the following table.

- -

Dialog Box

Field

-

Value

New Message Trigger: Create Name a New Message Trigger

Start_Sl_CustomerData_Trig ger##

New Message Trigger: Select Operation

SI CustomerData

Service

a) In the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Enhanced_## [vendor##.org] ~ Process ~ [LocalOevelopment] po_enhanced_##/pr/pm ~ Process Modeling ~ Event Triggers. b) Select Messages. c) In the Select Messages context menu, choose New Message. d) In the New Message Trigger: Create a New Message Trigger dialog box, enter the data from the table. e) Choose Next.

196



f) In the New Message Trigger: Select Operation dialog box, enter the data from the table (choose the F4-Help from the Service field). g) Choose Finish. The newly created message can be seen at: PO_Enhanced_##[vendor##.org] ~Process~ [Loca1Development]poenhanced_33/prlpm ~Process Modeling~ Event Triggers~ Message~ Start_Sl_CustomerData_Trigger 2. Assign the Start_Sl_CustomerData_Trigger start trigger to the Start event. a) In the Composite Explorer view, choose PO_Enhanced_## [vendor##.org] Process~ [LocalDevelopment] po_enhanced_20/prlpm ~Process Modeling ~ Processes

~

b) Double-click CustomMappingFunction##. c) In the CustomMappingFunction## modeling surface, choose the Start event. d) On the Properties tab, choose Event Trigger. e) In the Trigger field, select Start_Sl_CustomerData_Trigger##. f) Choose Save. 3. From the Start event, add a mapping activity named CustomMapping## and connect it to the End event. a) Choose the connection between the Start and End events, then choose Delete from the context menu. b) Using the speed buttons of the Start event, choose Activity

~

Mapping.

c) Name the mapping activity CustomMapping##. d) On the keyboard, choose Enter to apply the change. e) Select the CustomMapping## activity. f) Using the speed buttons, choose Connections . g) Click and drag the connection from CustomMapping## to the End event.

Note: It may be necessary to move the End event to a new position before completing th is step.

h) Choose the pool header and, from the context menu, choose Formal Pool. i) Choose Save. Create a Custom Mapping Function 1. Create a custom mapping function using the data from the following table.


197


Field

Value

Name

Custom Map##

Return Type (Use the search help in this field to find the necessary entry)

string - http://www.w3.org/2001/ XMLSchema

Parameters

argl, arg2

a) In the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Enhanced_## [vendor##.org] ~ Process [Loca/Development] po_enhanced_##/pr/pm ~ Process Modeling ~ Functions.

~

a) In the Functions context menu , choose New Mapping Function. b) In the New Mapping Function dialog box, for the Name and Return Type fields, enter the data from the table. c) In the Parameters table, choose Add. d) In the New Mapping Function dialog box, enter argl in the table. e) In the Type field, choose the string http : I / www . w3 . o rg/ 2001 / XMLSc hema. f) Repeat steps c through e for arg2 . g) Choose Finish .

liii

• Signature Define the retum type and parameters of the function: Return Type: )string· http://www.w3.org/2001/XMlSchema

0 Parameters:

Retums a collection

0 I

Name ar9l

Deprecated

·I

D aund-rn

r~e

I Collection

string · http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema string· http://www.w3.org/200 1/XMLSchema

arg2

r r

I

I I I I

I I

Add

Remove Up

I

DOW!),

I

Figure 111: Result of Creating the New Custom Mapping

2. Map argl and arg2 parameters to the result object. a) On the Custom Map## tab, choose the Mapping tab (found at the bottom of the modeling area, above the Properties tab). b) Drag argl and arg2 (on the left side) to the Result object (right side) with the left mouse button pressed. ~ PO_EnhM
@ Start_Sl_C-.oata_Trigge<

~ Custo~ppt>gFunctlon

llttJ Define Mapping Function aro1

[!) ••

c:t

El

® © )( IE".

III

rfil •cust0!N'lap20 ~""\..

•

ICl. >-

IIl

res.At

Figure 112: Result of the Mapping

198



3. In the Result editor, add the following line: co n e at ( rep l ace ( argl,

11

-

11

,

11 11

)

,

arg 2)

a) Double-click the Fx symbol in the connection line. b) In the Result Editor, on line 1, enter the line of code. c) Choose OK. d) Choose Save .

liii

D

~result

" I ooncat ( repl.ace (argl, " - " , "'" ) , arg2)

iJ

jEnter filter text IB ·(C. Context

rB ®

Rules and Functions

Detais

~r

•I

(J)

OK

[,

I

Cancel

Figure 113: Adding t he Mapping Condition

Create the New Data Objects DO_CustomBasicData and DO_CustomConsolidatedData

1. Create two new data objects named DO CustomerBasicData## and DO CustomerConsolidatedData## for the CustomMappingFunction process.

-

a) In the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Enhanced_## [vendor##. com] ~ Process ~ [LocalDevelopment] po_enhanced_##lprlpm ~ Process Modeling ~ Processes . b) Double-click CustomMappingFunction## . c) In the Palette, choose Artifacts

~

Data Object.

d) Drag the object to the Requestor ##lane and name it DO CustomerBasicData## .

-

e) Repeat steps c and d for the second data object, DO CustomConsolidatedData## and thedatatype DT CustomerConsolidatedData - http: //www.vendor##.com.

-

Assign Data Types to Data Objects

1. Assign data types to data objects DO_CustomerBasicData# and DO CustomerConsolidatedData## . a) Choose the newly created data object DO_CustomerBasicData## . b) Choose the Properties tab, then choose the Data Type view.


199


c) In the Data Type field, choose DT CustomerBasicData - http://www. vendorOO. com by using the F4-Help. d) Repeat steps a through c for the data object DO_CustomerConsolidatedData##. e) Choose Save. Define Custom Mapping

1. Map the following CustomMapping objects to the corresponding nodes. Process Context, Left Column


DO_ CustomerBasicData Customer/D

Header ___..

DO_ CustomConso/idatedData ConsolidatedCustomerl D

DO CustomerBasicData Tax ID

Header___..

DO_ CustomConsolidatedData ConsolidatedCustomerl D

-

a) In the CustomMappingFunction## process, choose the CustomMapping## object. b) On the Properties tab, choose the Mapping view. c) As described in the table, map the objects using the left mouse button. Cl Properties ~""\.. ,:& Relations ] [s Problems ]~ Infrastructure Console J $

Deploy View Console

=CUstomMapping20 1G-eneral--1 Define the mapping for this mapping activity Process context

Process context

L~

Mapping

IIII.

~=============--~l li'a IE Q3 DO_customConsoidate
Q3 DO_CustomerBasicData20

l!::::::::============;-;;-n-~

+S

----1@

[!] ConsolldatedCustomerld

II: LargestOrder

&IE Header

I [!] Customerld- - - - - 4 - - _ . i ' m mi------~ em Orders

llJ Rating

1

--.. ,'·.

l±l

Q3 oo_customeonsolidate«>ata20

Gl

t6 00_Customer8asicData20

CB ProcesslnstanceAltributes

Figure 114: Resut of the Mapping

d) Double-click the Fx symbol in the mapping line to open the editor. 00_r1-"lom(ono;olid11t"°Oal
Figure 115: Condit ion Editor--Dragging t he New Function into the Condition

e) In the editor, delete the existing entry.

200



f) In the DO_CustomConsolidatedData/ConsolidatedCustomer!D text editor, expand Rules and Functions ---+ vendor##.org/po_enhanced-##/prlpm . g) Select Custom Map( string argl, string arg2) and drag it to the editor. Enter a editor.

11

(

11

into the

h) Open Context---+ DO_CustomerBasicData---+ Header. i) Choose Customer!D and drag it into the editor as argl. j) Add a comma after argl. k) Choose TaxlD and drag it into the editor as arg2 (after the comma). Insert a" ) of the arg2 into the editor.

fiii

at the end

£1

i1j DO_Cust:omConsohd.JtcdDat tJ20 1COMo!td...,tcdCustomcrld I CuslomMa p20

11

f DO_ Custo!IH!:rBas :ieData20/ H@adt!!r I CU3tomer Id, ~0-Cwst~r Bas 1c:Data20/ ff@'t::J l~t fttei- te.~t 1 ID c.n,-.de.>
•

Ratln9

e (5 DO_Cu•t"""llo"'°"'o20 s

a;i ,...a<1e<

ID CUStometld ID T0>
8

~ Onf
• ~) Ptote$$lnmlor Oe
'

~

Source Typo

rra

I

l axld •

l!J -

· W1>
I

Concel

Figure 116: The New Condition

I) In the editor, choose OK. m) Choose Save.

Create the Output Mapping for the Start Event 1. For the Start event, create output mappings for the following CustomMapping objects to the corresponding nodes. Process Context, Left Column


MT CustomerBasicData ---+ Header

DO CustomerBasicData ---+ Header

MT CusomerBasicData ---+ Orders

DO CustomerBasicData ---+ Orders

a) Choose the Start event. b) On the Properties tab, choose the Output Mapping view. c) In the Process Context column on the left, expand MT_CustomerBasicData . d) In the Process Context column on the right, expand DO_CustomerBasicData## . e) Use the data from the table to map the objects using the left mouse button. f) Choose the plus ( +) symbol on the mapping line, to compare your mapping with the result displayed in the figure.


201


liii

IL Problems

l:l Properties ~'- ,,.)! Relations

~ Infrastructure Console

$

M®

Deploy View Console

!;I >C ifi!li ... = El '

0 Start General Event Tri~ Output Mapping start Condition

Oeflne the output mapping for this element: Outputs of start

Process context

I~ El

I~

IE MT_CustomerBasicoata

8

E§J Header

I

IIl IIJ

I

El

'

IE

•El 1l3 DO_CustomerBasicOata20 "'8 IJil Header

Customerld

Taxld liiJ Orders IIl Date l IIl 10 ... . l' 1IJ Total

Q3 DO_CustomConsolldatedoata20

• I

.. . . ,.....

. . ...

IIl l 1IJ

Customerld Taxld

B 151 Orders .. 1IJ Oate

I•

-···· ·-· .....

.

. .. ..

... . ;

1IJ IO 1IJ Total

Figure 117: Result of t he Start Event Output Mapping

Create the Input Mapping for the End Event

1. For the End event, create input mappings for the following Custom Mapping object to the corresponding nodes. Process Context, Left Column


DO CustomerConsolidatedData Consolidated CustomerlD

~

MT CustomerConsolidatedData ConsolidatedCustomerl D

DO CustomerConsolidatedData LargestOrder

~

MT- CustomerConsolidatedData LargestOrder

DO_CustomerConsolidatedData

~

Rating

MT_CustomerConsolidatedData

~

~

~

Rating

a) Choose the End event. b) On the Properties tab, choose the Input Mapping view. c) In the Process Context column on the left, expand DO_CustomConsolidatedData## . d) In the Inputs of End column on the right, expand MT_CustomConsolidatedData. e) Map the objects using the table (with the left mouse key).

fiii

'Cl Propettles ~'- )! Relations I( Problems

,.0

liJ Infrastructure Console

$

3 ®

Deploy View Console

l.(,1

x ifi!li ... =

El

E.nd

General EventT~

I nput Mapping

Define the input mapping for this element: Inputs of End

Process context

1ll'a S- Q3 00_CustomConsolidatedoata20 III ConsorldatedCustomerld • .• Lar9estOrder . • III III . . •

ttJ ll3 00_CustomerBasicOata20 8- CB ProcesslnstanceAttnbutes

11?. •Et IE MT_CustomerConsolidatedoata

. III11:, · 1

CIJ

ConsorldatedCustomerld LargestOrder Rating

Figure 118: Result of the End Event Input Mapping

f) Choose Save. Assign a Principal User to the Pool

202



1. Assign Administrator## as the principal user for the pool. a) Choose the Pool header. b) On the Properties tab, choose the Administrators view. c) Choose the Choose one or more UME principals radio button. d) At the end of the Principals field, choose Choose. e) In the Principals dialog box, in the Principal Name drop-down menu , choose User. f) In the next text field , enter Administrator ## . g) Choose Search. h) If requested, log in with the user name Administrator## and your password (created in the first exercise). It may take a few moments for the results to appear. i) On the Principals screen, in the Search Results area, choose Administrator##.

j) Choose Add. k) Choose OK. I) Choose Save . Build and Deploy the Process

1. Build and deploy the process. a) In the Composite Explorer view, in the PO_Enhanced_## context menu, choose Deploy. b) In the Product Build Required dialog box, choose Build and Deploy. c) When the build and deploy process finishes, choose the Infrastructure Console tab and verify that the process completed successfully. d) If required, log on with the user Administrator##. a

~ Build

S ill Build

S

El

!'i

Update Project

l!'J

Refresh

D

po_enhanced_20/pr/pm

Building DCs(po_enhanced_20/!nfra/sgc [vendo...

M

Building DC po_enhanced_20/pr/pm

M. M.

Update Project Settings

M.

Refreshing project for po_enhanced_...

L':ii Build

Building DCs(po_enhanced _20/infra/sgc [ vendo. . . M.

&

Deploying DCs to J2EE Engine...

M.

po_enhanced_20/bl/ddic

DC po_enhanced_20/b~ddic does not contain a...

M.

po_enhanced_20/bl/caf/dictionary

DC po_enhanced_20/bl/caf/dictionary does not ... M.

Deploy

& ill & &

Deploy

D D

Deploy

D po_enhanced_20/ul/vc

DC po_enhanced_20/ul/vc does not contain an...

Deploy

D

DC po_enhanced_20/bl/caf/metadata does not . . . M.

Deploy

po_enhanced_20/bl/caf/metadata

L':il Deploy

M.

Deployment of 12 files ('N:\My Documents\JAxx... M.

Figure 119: Build and Deploy Results

Configure Inbound and Outbound Communication

1. Using SAP NetWeaver Administrator, find the Sl_CustomerData## service interface for vendor##.com. Connect to SAP NetWeaver Administrator using the following data.


203


a) In your internet browser, enter the following url: http: / / nwktdcOO . wdf. sap . corp : 50000/nwa b) If required, log in with the user Administrator##. c) On the SAP NetWeaver Administrator screen, choose the SOA tab. d) Choose Application and Scenario Communication. e) Choose the Application Communication link. f) On the Application Communication screen, in the Search field, enter enhanced ## and choose Go. g) In the search results, select vendor##.com/po_enhanced_##-pr-pm . h) Choose the Provided Services tab. i) Select Sl_CustomerData.

fiii

Application Communication: Configura tion seareh:..___ _ ____, Go Searcti:lvend«20

l

11Go I Type

V elue

•

vendof'20,,~~anced_20'"'Pf-.pm

•

SoftwaceC:onponeot

vendoaO/l>O_enhented~..,,...

Consumed Servke Groups ( 1)

Appka:ionNO
ProVlded Service• (11

·:x;....i

I Edi nw. n
ti 'iJ

Nerre

_..

Ra.~

~~e

:::sI

I;...

Figure 120: The Provided Services Sl_CustomerData in t he NWA

2. Assign the profile SAP_DEFAULT_PROFILE to the Sl_CustomerData service interface. a) After you select Sl_CustomerData, choose Edit. b) Choose Assign Profile. c) In the Assign Profile dialog box, choose SAP_DEFAUL T_PROFILE. d) Choose OK. e) Choose Save . f) Choose Refresh until the Processing State column shows the status Processed.

204


Lesson: Apply ing data transformations using functions

~ ...... Contd ! ~· ~_,.;,; ,jlO,_.; ; ,; ...... sB~l~Show---L;;;w_~"'T"'.""~~~~~~~~~--.,ro:-~91ow~~°"*=..J:~~~~~ ·~l

I

ll/l:J teme

a

N!l~ce

R-oe"shQ State

R'OfM

Coonect!VI)'

'ii! ws

[J

Figure 121: Results of Add ing t he Profile to the Service Interface

3. Assign the NWK on nw ktdcOO. wdf.sap.corp Consumed Service Group to the Sl_CustomerData## service interface. a) Choose the Consumed Service Groups tab. b) In the table, choose t he row that contains the value Customer, then choose Edit. c) In t he Provider System co lumn , in t he drop-down menu, choose NWK on nw ktdcOO. wdf.sap.corp . {

~

CoMumed S.Mce Group• (t) l·

~- s..v•os c11

I

' I+-)j S.ve 11Contd1 1l 0,,.,2!~ 11AutoAn!R!! 11!S-, ~I 'ti """"

•

~ l'itJIG&J R·oc:ess'no St&te

Rovi:Set Syttem

°""1e< .,,.,. l\>J)O$

"ii!

ws

cust.otrer

-

•

1-ne>

.,,..., .c:reale...>
1

NA'Konnw~OO.wdf.-sap.corp

Figure 122: Choosing the Provider System

d) Choose Save . e) Choose Refresh until the status changes from To be processed to Processed. Con1.unod SUvla Gtoups Ct) lA

/

I

A'ovijed 5er\ii:t$ ( 1)

I

@ 1.veJ C..,.,.11 l]or.r9"n I 'V'*' !:-!211 i I Show ' -~ L CL ti "8n"e • °"""" ilv'llY lYoes I

E2Bll~

II

A'ovl:fet Sys.~

F\-ocesshg State

~

'ii! cus~

ws

~.\t
0

Processed

I

Figure 123: The Processed Provider System

Test the Service Interface in Web Services 1. Connect to SAP NetWeaver Web Services. a) In your internet browser, ent er the the following url: http : I / nwktdcOO . wdf . sap . corp : 50000 / wsnavigator b) If requested , log on as the user Administrator##. 2. Find the Sl_CustomerData service interface for vendor##.com. Field

Val ue

Search Type

Provider System (select radio button)


205


Field

Va lue

Search for

SI_CustomerData

a) On the SAP NetWeaver Service Navigator screen, enter the data from the table. b) Choose Search.

Web Setvices Navigator

l Service te. t l

1+- {1 I Service '

I

~

A-evioos

nNext

Test scenario

I

2 I

'

'

3 I

'

•

'

~ I' I [ rivocalion Par81TetetS] I 1 k'lvol
.

4 !._-t

J

[Add to Test Scenario

Service Information

Sea rch Service Interfa ces

0

Search Type:

O VllSOL

Search for:

I SLOJstorner Oat~

Provider System

A-ovlder System !Local Jave AS

I Search I ~·.?~.,

I .•

0

Logic al Desmation

0

Service Registry

I ·I

Figure 124: WSNavigator (Search Here for t he Web Service)

c) In the search results, choose Sl_CustomerOata##. d) Choose Next. e) In the Operations screen, choose Next. A "chain" of four steps appears, showing which step you are on. 3 . Select the parameters for the testing using the data in the following table. Field

Value

CustomerlD

12-3

TaxlD

abed

Date

ID

1234

Total

2000

User Name

Requestor##

Password

Your password

a) Enter the data from the table.

206



Web Services Navigator

~

Service teat

Test scenario

I

l+--i

2

' Operation

1 ' Servlee

.

3

I

• Input Parameters

4

-

-1

Resut

I• F\'evlous II Next .• I J I 1nvocation Alratreters 1 11 rr.rM I !11 AddtoTestS
Parameters

[ l ~ IJlli:x~J I l lila lJI - EJ MT_OJstom;rBasicOeta: j/ - 6.1 Header: !/

J

J

D

OJstorrerld:

D

Taxld: • !abed

I ~.

* I12-3

I.?'.

- 6.1 Orders [1]: 1:¢ ~• - 6

Orders: ~.

D D

D: s 11234

0

Totat•

Oete: • !19.03.2014

I~

I ~. I ~.

I ~.

Figure 125: Entering t he Data in t he Web Services Navigator

b) Choose Invocation Parameters. c) In the Invocation Parameters dialog box, in the Authentication field, choose HTTP Authentication and enter the user name and password from the table. d) Choose OK. e) To start the process, choose Next. The results of the test appear in the Results screen.


207


Operation Mappings Import It is possible to import graphical, XSL T, and Java operation mappings defined in the ES Repository of SAP Process Integration (Pl) and assign them to automated activities in a BPM process. Values and parameterized mappings are not supported during import. After a successful import, the mapping can be used in an automated activity. Operation mappings cannot be assigned to message start events or intermediate message events. Following is the procedure for import: 1. In the NetWeaver Developer Studio, go to the Process Development perspective. 2. Choose a product, then choose Process Modeling, then expand Operation Mappings (Pl) . 3. In the context menu, choose Import Operation Mapping. 4. In the £SR Login dialog box, enter the user name and password for the system on which ESR is installed. NetWeaver Developer Studio connects to the ESR. The Enterprise Service browser is populated with content available in the ESR. 5. Expand a software component, namespace, and operation mappings, then choose an operation mapping to import and choose Finish. The operation mapping appears in the Operation Mappings (Pl) folder, while the WSDL file appears in the WSDL folder. It is now possible to assign the operation mapping to an automated activity in a process.

208




•


•



209


210


Unit 4

Learning Assessment

1.

What type of connections are used to link flow objects to each other?


D D D D

A Association B Data flow

c

Message flow

D Sequence flow

2. _ _ _ _ _ _ shows how information is moved between two separate process participants. Choose the correct answers.

D D D D

A Email flow B Context flow

c

Message flow

D Process flow

3. A task contributor can do which of the following activities?


D D D D

A Add notes to a task B Complete a task

c

Monitor a task

D Work on a task


211


4. Which statements about process context are true?


D D D D

A It is modeled in the business process. B It includes information from events and activities. C It includes information about roles. D An XSD file adds functionality and is optional.

5. Use JPA for standard persistence scenarios where highest possible performance is not needed and out-of-the-box conventions established by JPA are suitable.


D D

True False

6. It is necessary to declare an entity explicitly in order to distinguish it from other regular Java objects.


D True D

False

7. What is data mapping used for?


D D

A Transforming process context to a source context B Transforming target context to a source context

D C Transforming business context to a target context D D Transforming source context to a target context

212



8.

are out-of-the-box functions that provide data mapping and data transformation capabilities.


D D c D D D

A Custom functions B Expression functions Generic functions Process functions

9. _ _ _ _ _ _ are functions that allow for advanced data mapping and data transformation capabilities.


D D c D D D


10. _ _ _ _ _ _ are functions that define both input and return parameters.


D D c D D D


11. Values and parameterized mappings are supported during the mapping import.


D D

True False


213

Unit 4


1.

What type of connections are used to link flow objects to each other?


0 0 0 0

A Association B Data flow

c

Message flow

D Sequence flow

2. _ _ _ _ _ _ shows how information is moved between two separate process participants. Choose the correct answers.

D D c 0 D

A Email flow B Context flow Message flow

D Process flow

3. A task contributor can do which of the following activities?


214

0

A Add notes to a task

D

B Complete a task

0 0

c

Monitor a task

D Work on a task



4. Which statements about process context are true?


D 0 c 0 D

A It is modeled in the business process. B It includes information from events and activities. It includes information about roles.

D An XSD file adds functionality and is optional.

5. Use JPA for standard persistence scenarios where highest possible performance is not needed and out-of-the-box conventions established by JPA are suitable.


D

True

[g)

False

6 . It is necessary to declare an entity explicitly in order to distinguish it from other regular Java objects.


[g)

True

D

False

7. What is data mapping used for?


D D D 0

A Transforming process context to a source context B Transforming target context to a source context

c

Transforming business context to a target context

D Transforming source context to a target context


215


8.

are out-of-the-box functions that provide data mapping and data transformation capabilities.


D D

A Custom functions B Expression functions

c ~

D

Generic functions

D Process functions

9 . _ _ _ _ _ _ are functions that allow for advanced data mapping and data transformation capabilities.


~

A Custom functions

D c D D D

B Expression functions Generic functions Process functions

10. _ __ _ _ _ are functions that define both input and return parameters.


D

A Custom functions

~

B Expression functions

c D

D

Generic functions

D Process functions

11. Values and parameterized mappings are supported during the mapping import.


D

True

~ False

216


Business Process Management User Interface

Lesson 1 Generating a User Interface with Visual Composer

218

Exercise 10: Create a Visual Composer User Interface Component

227

Lesson 2 245 253

Creating a User Interface with Web Dynpro Exercise 11: Create a Web Dynpro User Interface Component

Lesson 3 Managing a User Interface with Adobe Offline Forms

262

Exercise 12: Manage a User Interface with Adobe Offline Forms

269

Lesson 4 Creating a User Interface with SAPUl5

291

UNIT OBJECTIVES •

Generate a user interface with Visual Composer

•

Create a user interface with Web Dynpro

•

Manage a user interface with Adobe Offline Forms

•

Create a user interface with SAPUl5


217

Unit 5 Lesson 1 Generating a User Interface with Visual Composer

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to generate a user interface with Visual Composer. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson , you will be able to:

•


Visual Composer Overview ' "' EOt

v..

""91• s..tdl il'O)ltt Run ~

r'. ·

:;,Cl~· ~

£i

~f'lojf ·''"'"'9 :Ill_

II

1

Tocls

m - ~- Mt\?

!\"'>!-' Qilll

~$

;> · O · Q. · GO' ·

~ 1'1>ui~ ~

~

.

•t> ~J~l
. . . [loo«l<1""""""J ~261/l
""""''

e ccmm

'Ii" .....

G R
• <; ~o"l''"'"I"'""'] l
~..

....,,,

"'

~y

ii ·c; [loalle\'ebpmen!} tebJ(l\r.Dn

•a [loallel_,,,Jf""ihcd~

9 ( 111'11•

•10 [\oall<

., ~

........- - -

UI Elements

-

.

-

-=1 ._,

.... ""

r:'.!

D ...

..... '"

;. ...J

~--

~

"~

....!J

0(~

j.

I Its;~

""' .

l' '"""""'

,0 ltl•9"1

IEI

0

@'"'

(

..

~1

(!)

I.,

Services -~~~~~~~~-=======- ..,4.:.! ) ·· j

Figure 126: Visual Composer Objects

Visual Composer supports creating applications by generating data elements, including data services and Web services, and UI elements including controls, forms, and tables. These elements are connected to define the business logic of the application. The runtime code is then automatically generated from the Visual Composer model.

218



, . tdC

I CJ •

' (j l

~

SC.v
I ..,

..

Pr~

~

I ? 11> I

~ -

.

~Ptl-~

Rvn Wh:IQw HdiP

I >'l ra J~ ~ q. · I t1 I l/!J '9

_,......,.--9....

@.-..-. ~·~

-

f

............. .... @

i...

' e (On ntttlW$

__,..

o··-

-- ,m,

: ? . L••.••i

..._ -~ © /'

/

'""""' ~D

-~

.... 0

~

/'o

DC ..,..,. *

vwo....

........ ~

IE IJperal:or.$

.,.

1-

··------..,......-.~""". • c·~-:-:.,-:.,-;:-_-·_·-------_.·>~1·-

.,,.

!J.._ 0.
o.

"~a~_.

:w

I 41

Jec::i[t

-

Figure 127: NWDS Integration of Visual Composer

Visual Composer exists as an integrated version in the NetWeaver Developer Studio (NWDS) as well as in a browser-based version. Both are entry-points to access the Visual Composer process models.

User Interface Generation Tasks To create a new VC UI, use the following steps: 1. In a human activity, choose Properties~ Task. 2. Choose New. 3. In the UI Component wizard, enter a name and choose Generate U/ Component. 4. In the UI Component dialog box, choose Visual Composer as the UI technology and choose the development component. 5. Add the component details. 6. Confirm the process context details.


219

Unit 5: Business Process Management User Interface

e

PO_Pt~..)(X (~XX .c;Om)

LJ Port<$1 El D Pw-oc:ess $

- 8

.~ (Loe~) POJ/lfodtxt_xx/or/pm

$

S

IP ConnocllVll:y

~ A-ocoss Modelno c;8- P~oc El ~ TM\'"

I If) 1g11•r•A"''''h444'11& e;

- - - - 1•». lr:tod....~...~COlllfmCOif9!0'*IE""flt

-

(t'ot..-PVt~ ~

xx-T(ldt

~(E) e:....~r~ «• ~Ce.'S 0 Rule ~ets '5 flunttlort$

Q!!j

Obto Tyttes

~ SOtvke Interface.: ~J •

OP R<

~r fnter1ac•

~ fiii1 (AA;~ l.09iC ~J

ff}

-J

L

;m ~........ ~~

ca f"*'•• •\olC""'•

•

Visual Composer Componen t

. ••

.

__./

~-

..

. •

'

iii!~ §' iO. lditciff (!lo- 1 " "' ~1~1!,_Swo(f; C-...._..:;. ~ .~":"""'-

-·........... __.... -,._

I·~

Input Mapping

l)llr,f.,.o

~~h-

_ --

·, -..__, ._. ....

..

"""'"'~'

II.

.. .,__ ·-

'.......ll} l .......... ...._

Ill OQ.~/A.

01 .......

"' ~· ,._ ,............, m ....

·ID

•

"

oS 11 .i.c

/

_

f.1J <-IO

,

"'.."'"'~·

ID-..u>

-

Figure 128 : Generated UI Component

The new task is created together with a Visual Composer UI component and assigned to the human activity. The component can then be opened to apply changes. The generated model is now available for configuration in BPM. Uls are generated during the creation of a new task for a human activity. As a resu lt the new task is created together with a Visual Composer UI component and assigned to the human activity. The UI component can be opened to apply changes. The generated model is then ready for configuration in BPM.

Existing User Interface Implementation You can also assign an existing UI component to a task in BPM. Using the Import Wizard, you can easily search and assign existing Visual Composer UI components to a task. It is possible to assign an already existing UI component to a task in BPM. To do this, make sure that the Visual Composer UI has a start and an end point defined.

Start Point

End Point

Figure 129: Visual Composer UI Component with Start and End Point

220



To assign the UI to a task, you have to open the task with the editor. You can do so from the project explorer or the Composite Designer product. Within the task editor, you can select Choose to start the Unified UI import wizard . .:>Pro)l!Cl El<

-

'C ~or ~ 0

~ Or-

~

Overview

8

.

• 6J (LOGll>lY
e COrlnn

• General I nlormatlon

Pr~~ , ~ Pr
.i

Open Task Editor

~ Or-

, .!' laSks

a"""'°"' Qeomm

aeomm 1

6)[!?' · '9 Event O!>
• .a- R
Rut
~Tosi<..

~ .a -)(~ ~

°"""

o.i.1..-----,-~

- user Interface

, n Sttv.« lnttriaus

-----~

Select Unified UI Wizard

\ . ~• U lwtr.Md

-·-

cc

ICo;;=J

Figure 130: St arting the Unified UI Import Wizard

Using the import wizard, you can search and assign existing Visual Composer UI components to a task.

Note: For the search to find the UI components, the containing Visual Composer development composer needs to exist in the workspace of the NetWeaver Developer Studio.

~

~.

;.

Ul Compon9ts ."""...., l«N:T ·~~c. lorM
~\IQxl_.c

•"'°"'~...i~ Osr-11•
.

NVTwrt

..

• MM ""''

.(I ~ - -

_,.,~..,..,

~ .. . .... -~.~r-cir • .Q ~Ml~( · ---~~'""'

•4

I ,...,., • I

I

~

I

Figure 131: Assigning an Existing UI to a Task


221


Generated User Interface Modification

liii

................................................................................................................................................................ jApprovePurchaseRequestxXComponent ~ l' Form ,..........., .

I

l

.

Ap?JOvel'urchaseRequestXXCot!flele4Evem

I

Approve?urchaseRequestXXErrolfvent

'

_________, ~

i

Buttons for Completion and Error

..:

r

I

'

I

""",~-----I -.....

Header Based on Component Name

!rtem

l Add I

-

I ..,.I Cele=- t"'""eJ

!'-------------------------~· Header ; Region• I I j PurchaseOrderld, ; = = = = = = = = = = ; I

. .; Seller!d*

! Currency • .i ApproverCom...

I

I

::I= = = = = = = = = : I ~-_,,..-----------...._~ 1 I Labels based on

Context Attributes

j Purchaseorder ... 1.___ _ _ _ _ _ ___,I

.; ..

r

'-

Approved

---------------------------'

Figure 132: Automatically Generated UI Component

Generated user interfaces contain the functionality required for interacting with the human activity they are based on. They are generic, although layout, controls, and labels are created based on the interface definition acquired from the corresponding human activity. Approve Purchase R equest Items Pf'oduct td

-- -Seller Info Id

I

N e me

[

Leoa.I f'or-m

r

S t l"e e t

I

cu1•ren0y

Product Pf'ice

Pl'oduct Name

-

-

- -

-

Quantity

-

-

-

I

~

-, ..._ New UI Elements J

I

Buildin 9

I

Postal C o de

I

Cit y

I

I

Countl"J'

I

I

Pur<:hosc Orde r Info Id

'

Total Amount

I

Cul"l'ency

l

l

.:!

I

J\eoion

r

~

I

Apl)r"Oved

Comm e nt'"'

~

-

New Texts

:.

I """""" I - -~ 1 New Actions

Figure 133: Customized UI Component

Sometimes it is necessary to customize the generated Uls to meet the requirements of the application. Configuration activities include deleting elements and changing labels, control types, and other control behaviors. Generated Uls are customized in the Visual Composer Perspective of NWDS. Customizing a generated UI is possible as long as the external interfaces remain compatible to the corresponding human activity.

222



Note: You can also access the Uls from the Composite Designer perspective, which then opens the same view as the Visual Composer perspective.

,_ Hejl 1-- _-___1 NmE6t.or

Sl-.w View

•

eus.torra Perip9(tive... Sa
W.

Open perspective .

>.

.

°"""' r,,.._..,,,

·~ . , . , , _ ,"'_ _

@ MOIN

~J Java

41'-

'°"""

•

litJ, Pet-farce

"°"""'"'-

~ ~Oi&v~ ~ Wfb~O

P.tY..ethrspcctf'le.. ,

-

M£1!§,14 r!ll{i

~Pl'CU'-S'~

'?•••«" Modeino

CbsePer~

~"-Modelo<

°"""-

~.._
•

.

!!!Rialto

'l's~...,,_.,.,

~SAP-

1§,!Sen
f,OtenS~

(!3-~

Visual Composer Perspective

i1j """"" '""""" "" ~Wob )tw.b°""'o

~

•

I ""

c.nc..

Figure 134: Opening t he Visual Composer Perspect ive

Selecting the appropriate Visual Composer component in the Model Browser (or Composite Designer Product) brings up the design board. From there it is possible to switch to the layout board to alter the visuals of the UI.

Design Board ~-~···

..........

~-

. ._.....,........_

..

~

o- ····- ··- ····-···- ··- ··---··--·- ······- ·- ··- ·- ···- ·- ·- ··.t.-·- ······- ··- ··- · ··- · . ···-·- ···- · -···- ······- ··- ·-, ..

jApprovePurchaseRequestXXCon1ponent I ""-...,•

i !

\

~--'...-T

~ l~ >

-------·-F
T·- - - L~

I 1 ..

II !

!.I'-'

00 la

~

e. ©. Q

., .,. :;o

~

•

!Ill

El Approv~sOOCCOf1.,onerit l
PO.P

t

Figure 135: Opening t he Visual Composer Boards

Clicking the Configure button brings up the task panel that allows you to manipulate properties of elements selecting in the layout board.


223


---~-:... · "°" 11r

Configu.re Input f'ldd B G-cncnl

I ..!..

ApprovePurchaseRequestXXCon1ponent Form

II I

I

~IMPIKdwnt~~d...ett ~~~lt'Ol'EYMI

I

r

Item

h...

r

9

1 IF.:' °" -....· " ' 1.

Header -..

sellerld ·

Purd'laseOrderld"'I

1:======~,

I

Currency •

I

I

Sl'lo<..,fl'Tt:x~

.\l91 ' ! Xt

JLe-ft

• j

'"'......oc

I

&-'.

~ 8 ValklaUOn

1

~·~n •

P
Figure 136: Configuration Entry Point

Typical activities in the layout board include deleting elements, changing labels and control types. These options can be accessed from the configuration pane or the context menu of the elements.

I Action.. .

0

•

Confi Urt 11\PUt Add

0.1

8 General

F2

label \'a\le

~ T099le a.er

~ Conflc"°

Reacf.OOy

t==== ..... J

""1lfed

~

~

_ Delete UI controls

1·~

T-'"°"''

I

ApproverCom .••

I

o ••~.~·-········-~·-·

°t•..•........• 0

0

'

A(tlOf\,, ,

..

PurchaseOrder ... "I rApprov

~ TQ99ie8'...._

-

..

..

~ Confq.>
.. .

F2

ffil '2J

,..

P' ivu. f7 [:rut

I

-'I r~:

-'"I t. i -'] -'] t. j

Ac!IOO tl!:!"lgth

.•

Me...S.to

-']

I

J

"~ .J ];!ll' O.!

.,,•.::ReQOn 17 1p- I true

I

\

>

Change CorVol Type

)( Oelele A
·- - -

'

RtQOO

•

Change Control Types C u l'l'e-1\C'f "

Change Labels

TOl
~

Alter Controls Behavior

O.opdoy.n L~!

lGtoup

-

-- -

Figure 137: Typical Act ivities in t he Layout Board

Any change to generated Uls is possible as long as the external interfaces remain compatible to the corresponding human activity.

Note: You can change the interface of the UI component. If you do, you must reimport this UI component in the task that uses it. Since the interface of the tasks changes because of the reimport, you might also need to adapt the mapping of human activities that use the changes tasks.

224



Ll X

Define Data (start)

The connector uses a clustered dataset. You can remove and rename nodes, define Relds, and initialize their val.les.

~o.t.

!Search for... ¢

c::11

A!)C

5.\::

8 ••8•start

ialtem

••9Header

~

¢,

=

View , A!)C

Fteld Name 1;j ffi) Quantity

Q

!fh,

!13Reco«l Set ( l .. n),

Default Value

'j !!l ProductName" !!l Currency"

IEJ ProduclPrlce" : !!l Productld"

I

I

__

Close__.

.

.....

Figure 138: The Inter face of a Generated UI Com ponent


225


226


Unit 5 Exercise 10 Create a Visual Composer User Interface Component

Business Example

You are a business process administrator. You have been asked to create a user interface for the Approve Purchase Request## human activity. In this exercise, you generate a user interface for the Approve Purchase Request## activity. Using this Visual Composer based UI, the approver user can review the purchase request and manually approve or reject it. After the generation step, you improve the generated raw version of this UI component. Finally, you define the data mapping for the activity. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you. Note: In this exercise, the process created in exercises 2-5, 7, and 8 is used.

1. In the Purchase Order Process##, create a new task for the Approve Purchase Request## human activity using the data in the following table. Dialog Box Name

Field

Value

New Task

Name

Approve Purchase Request ##Task

Development Component Details

UI Technology

Visua l Composer


Development Component

[Local Development] po_product_##/ui/vc_i mpl

UI Component Details

Name

ApprovePurchaseRequest## TaskComponent


Completion Event

ApprovePurchaseRequest## TaskCompleteEvent


Error Event

ApprovePurchaseRequest## TaskError Event

Process Context

Process Context

RequestData

~

Header

Process Context

Process Context

RequestData

~

Item


227


2. Rename the task to Approve Purchase Request## .

3. Open the Visual Composer and, from the Form View element, remove the title Form. 4. Delete the ApprovePurchaseRequest##TaskErrorEvent button. 5. Rename the ApprovePurchaseRequest##TaskCompleteEvent button to Confirm .

6. Align the Confirm button to the left. 7. Resize the Form View section to fit to the size of the Confirm button. 8. Rename the form header to Purchase Order Info.

9. In the Purchase Order Info section, move the ApproverComment input field below the Approved checkbox.

10. Change the control type of the ApproverComment input field to Text Editor. 11. Rename the ApproverComment input field control to Comment.

12. Rename the following input fields using the data in the following table. Current Input Field Name

New Input Field Name

PurchaseOrderld

ID

Sellerld

Seller ID

PurchaseOrderTotalAmount

Total Amount

13. Change the order of the input fields to match the following list.

1. ID 2. Total Amount 3. Currency 4. Region 5. Seller ID 6 . Approved checkbox 7. Comment 14. Make the ID, Total Amount, Currency, Region, and Seller ID input fields read-only and not required. 15. Resize the Purchase Order Info section to match the size of the fields . 16. Change the name of the Item table to Items and hide the toolbar. 17. On the Items table, increase the number of displayed rows to four ( 4 ). 18. Change the order of the Items table columns to match the following list.

11. ProductlD

228



2. ProductName 3. ProductPrice 4. Currency 5. Quantity 19. Rename the Items table columns using the data in the following table. Current Input Field Name


ProductlD

Product ID

ProductName

Product Name

ProductPrice

Product Price

20. Make the Items table columns read-only and not required . The approver should not be permitted to edit the displayed area. 21. Change the order of the three (3) Form View elements to match the following list . 1. Purchase Order Info 2. Items table 3. Form view, which contains the Confirm button. 22. If displayed, remove the scroll bar in the Purchase Order Info View element. 23. Validate and preview the UI component.

Define Input and Output Mapping 1. In NetWeaver Developer Studio, return to the Purchase Order Process## process. 2. From the Approve Purchase Request## activity, view the Input Mapping tab. 3. Use the automapping function to map RequestData to Tasklnput. 4. Configure Output Mapping using the following information. Map this Object

To this Object

TaskOutput ~ U IResponse ~ RequestData/HeaderI Approved ApprovePurchaseRequest## TaskCompletion ~ Header ~ Approved TaskOutput ~ UIResponse ~ RequestData/HeaderI ApproverComment ApprovePurchaseRequest## TaskCompletion ~ Header ~ ApproverComment


229

Unit 5 Solution 10 Create a Visual Composer User Interface Component

Business Example You are a business process administrator. You have been asked to create a user interface for the Approve Purchase Request## human activity. In this exercise, you generate a user interface for the Approve Purchase Request## activity. Using this Visual Composer based UI, the approver user can review the purchase request and manually approve or reject it. After the generation step, you improve the generated raw version of this UI component. Finally, you define the data mapping for the activity. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you. Note: In this exercise, the process created in exercises 2-5, 7, and 8 is used.

1. In the Purchase Order Process ##, create a new task for the Approve Purchase Request## human activity using the data in the following table.

230

Dialog Box Name

Field

Value

New Task

Name

Approve Purchase Request ##Task


U I Technology

Visual Composer



[Local Development] po_product_##/ui/vc_impl


Name

ApprovePurchaseRequest## T askComponent


Completion Event

ApprovePurchaseRequest## TaskCompleteEvent


Error Event

ApprovePurchaseRequest## TaskError Event

Process Context

Process Context

RequestData

~

Header

Process Context

Process Context

RequestData

~

Item



a) On the Purchase Order Process## modeling surface, choose the human activity Approve Purchase Request##. b) If the Properties tab is not displayed, in the Window menu, choose Show View Other~ General~ Properties.

~

c) On the Properties tab, choose the Task view. d) In the Task drop-down menu, select New. e) In the New Task dialog box, in the Name field , enter the data from the table and flag the Generate UI Component field.

fiii

l!!l~EJ

r:-:New Task - UI Con1ponent

New Task Create a new task

Name:

IApprove Purchase Request Task 20J

Documentation:

r;; language:

Generate UI Component

English

(Defined at DC leveO

< Batk

I

Next >

I

Finish

Cancel

Figure 139: New Task Dialog Box

f) Choose Next. g) In the Development Component Details dialog box, enter the data from the table (if not already pre-filled). h) Choose Next. i) In the UI Component Details dialog box, enter the data from the table (if not already prefilled). j) Choose Next. k) In the Process Context dialog box, expand RequestData . I) Select the Header and Item checkboxes.


231


liii

If[!)' £i

'":-: New Task - Ul Component

I

Process Context Specfy cortext attribUes to be displayed in ut cO
fProcess Context 11 e O llil

Process lnst9nceAt b OOtes

. 0 III

I D IED l!I

S

B

,

: ' .

Processlnstanceld [ii Procosslr«iata RtquestDot•

0 00 Heade< 0 !Il PurchaseO.-cle'1D IS1) ll!J PurchaseO
EJ l!I -oved El IIl -overComment

S 0 Q'.i

Item

IS1) IIJ ProdKUO

0 1Il ProdKtName

13 ~ ProdxlPrice ~ m c ....rency

0 1!!1 Quantity

< Back

Ne>
11 F'rish

Cancel

Figure 140: Com posite Explorer Tree

m) Choose Finish. The new task can be accessed from the Composite Explorer tree, under Tasks. 2. Rename the task to Approve Purchase Request## . a) In the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Product_## [vendor##.com] ~ Process [LocalDevelopment] po_product_##lprlpm ~ Process Modeling ~ Tasks .

~

b) To open the task, double-click Approve Purchase Request## Task. A new tab for this object appears. c) In the General Information section, after the Name field, choose Rename . d) In the Confirm Rename dialog box, rename the task ApprovePurchaseRequest##TaskComponent to Approve Purchase Request ## . e) Choose Finish. 3. Open the Visual Composer and, from the Form View element, remove the title Form. a) If not already open in a separate tab, open the product PO_Product_## by double-clicking it on the Composite Explorer tree. b) In the PO_Product_## tab, double-click the newly created task in the User Interface area. The Visual Composer opens.

232



r2 ico "Purchase Order Process 20

~ PlxchaseRequestData20.xsd &!

~

'CJ Approve Purchase Request 20

~ ~ I ~ PO_Product_20 [vendor20.com] ~

l

Portal (O) Process (2 )

&.Purchase &

Order Pro ...

©

Approve

Purchase ...

User Interface ( l)

...

WI

ApprovePu rchaseReq ...

Figure 141: Starting the Visual Composer by Double-Clicking t he Task

c) Choose Layout. This switch changes from the preview mode (how the UI would look) to the editing mode. ApprovtPurchastR.tqu ... - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Created By VC Model Generator

·- ...

"' ~ oF

·c.... ............ . .. .. . . ....................................

~I----~ 1

·........................................ .

Figure 142: UI Preview

d) Choose the newly generated UI element, then choose Configure from the task panel tool bar (that is, the icon on the right side of the tab). e) Change the entry in the Title field (under the main window) to Approve Purchase Request, then press Enter on your keyboard.


233

Unit 5: Busi ness Process Management User Int erface

liii

ApprovePurchaseltequ... • '

..

0: ··· ······ · ···-·····················~···-. ........................ ............................

lApprovePurchaseRequest I Form '

I

I

•-"C""' oil= flo'ure;;..:W~lndo = w-------'lc.;.i 'l> l ~

)(

e Genera l

9... ................... ...... .. ............. ........ . ~

, 'ti

~PPi"cnaseReques~

Ttie

ApproveRlrletefvent

"··I - -

~-~

r

I

~

Show Toobar

8 Layout

i Vert=;ioa~l- - - - - - ".J p

Fbvt

C«ltent S«lle !Auto-fl

9

;;] Configure

"... :: .

'' ' ci

: Item

HAdd 11Delete I i

I Region •

· ~··

..

Header

I

I

Figure 143: Changing t he Title

f) Choose Save. g) To turn off the display of of the word "Form" in the UI, choose the Form area.

liii

A~ptovePurdiMeflequ... ..

'-------------· °"""' x Configure Form View

~f!/!~~.'!.'!:~~~~~~!:~!~.~ !~~.........9.......................................... .

8 Ge-~ra l

•

Tlle

o..

~ For m

IFomi r

Sl>ow Tool>ar [start

ApprCNeF\JrcheseRequestTssk20CorroleteEvent Al)pf"OVe-RJrcha$tReqOl!'stTas~Ei'tot&ent

COnl>OSO

P' true P' tn;,

Ix .

fL: PriTary

·I

t.

8 Layout

'.,.. ., "

I

-scale [AW>-ft ~.dtti

[A.to-ft

I

Heoot>t

IAIAo-fi

I

~ I Configure

~

~

c;:y

Figure 144: Tu rning Off Form Display

h) In the Configure Form View task panel , deselect the Show Title checkbox. 4 . Delete the ApprovePurchaseRequest##TaskErrorEvent button. a) Choose the ApprovePurchaseRequest##TaskErrorEvent button. b) In the context menu , choose Delete . 5. Rename the ApprovePurchaseRequest##TaskCompleteEvent button to Confirm. a) Choose the ApprovePurchaseRequest##TaskCompleteEvent button. b) In the Configure Button task panel, in the Text fie ld, enter Confirm. c) On the keyboard, press Enter to apply the changes. d) Choose Save.

234


Lesson: Generating a User Interface w ith Visual Composer

ApprovePurchaseRequ ... x

_J

\

ApprovePur~ha~eRequest

J

o[:§.~i~~]o 0

D

0

Figure 145: Renaming the Confirm Button

6. Align the Confirm button to the left. a) Choose the Confirm button. b) In the Configure Button task panel, deselect the Indent checkbox. 7. Resize the Form View section to fit to the size of the Confirm button. a) Click the middle of the Approve Purchase Request section to select Form View. b) Use the handles to change the size.

.....~ *Purchase Order Process

[ID PurchaseRequestData20.xs

@ Approve Purchase Request ,..

I ApprovePurchaseRequ ... •

x

ApprovePurchaseRequest o ................................................... ~·······~·······~···············9···············~·······~···············~- ··· o!• [ eonrrm I

D ..•_.......... •-• • • ........ •-• •• • -• ........ • • • -• •-• • • • • .. • .... ·-

•-• • • .... _.. • • • •.•_. .... • • •• ........ • • • • ._. ... • • • •-• "i" •-•• •.... •-••-•.. ••-••-••-•.. ••-•.._. ••••• ••••-••• ............ _ ...,

Item

l llAdd ll

Delete

l

Figure 146: Resizing t he Form View Section

c) Choose Save. 8. Rename the form header to Purchase Order Info. a) Select the Header title. b) In the Title field, rename it to Purchase Order Info. Press Enter on your keyboard.

fiii

ApprovePurth.~u ...

...

•

ApprovePurchaseRequest

x

Configure form View

:...!

8 General

.

[Putchase 0rW InfCl_ _ _ _··· ....,I (7 Show Ttle Sl1owTool>ar

r

Item

'

l!Add 11Delele I 1Region•

I

I

.! Seller!o• .i PurchaseOr'der...

I

I

-i

I

1 Currency•

. .!: ApproverCom... 'I ..! PurchaseOrder.. . "I rApproved o: I

Source node Editable

IHeader

I

Visi>le

(7 Itrue

&J

Frarre style

["'"-"'-'P.:.:; •l•:.::::arv ,,__ _ _ _ __, •

(7=;:!1========~ ~ rue &]

El Layout

."",,

ParentS
[A.-o-fl [A.-o-Ft

Height

[Auto-Ft

I

Content scale [Fixed

I

Col.irms

11

Col. widths

@O"pccek

I

I

1 ~

"

•I

:) --· I

.

Figure 147: Renaming the Form Header

9. In the Purchase Order Info section, move the ApproverComment input field below the Approved checkbox.


235


a) Select the ApproverComment input field . b) Drag and drop the ApproverComment input field below the Approved checkbox. 10. Change the control type of the ApproverComment input field to Text Editor. a) Select the ApproverComment input field. b) In the ApproverComment context menu, choose Change Control Type

~

Text Editor.

Purc h ase Order I nfo

I Seller!D * I PurchaseOrd er •.• "I

Region *

I

C urrency *

PurchaseOrder ... i rApproved ApproverCom ...

1•,

•' ,:;

•

Figure 148: Changing Cont rol Type

11. Rename the ApproverComment input field control to Conunent. a) Select the ApproverComment input field. b) In the Configure Text Editor panel, in the Label field, enter Conunent then press Enter on your keyboard and choose Save . 12. Rename the following input fields using the data in the following table. Current Input Field Name


PurchaseOrderld

ID

Sellerld

Seller ID

PurchaseOrderTotalAmount

Total Amount

a) Select the appropriate input field . b) In the Configure Input Field task panel, in the Label field, enter the new input field name and press Enter on your keyboard. c) Repeat steps a and b for each field of the list above. d) Choose Save .

236



•;..-......... ................-.-.-...........................-.-·.....-. -.-..-.-....... ..................................-.-.-.......................... . .......•

! Purchase Order Info

-

..-..-.-.-.-.-.-.-..-.-.-.-..

.......-.-.-..-

l Region " ;

i Seller 10 •

I I

! 10•

I

l

I

!

Currency •

I

!

!; Total Amount•

I

•

!

••: I

rApproved Comment•

i

I I !l Figure 149: Renam ing Input Fields

13. Change the order of the input fields to match the following list.

1. ID 2. Total Amount 3. Currency 4. Region 5. Seller ID 6. Approved checkbox 7. Comment

a) Select an input field. b) Move the input field to the appropriate position. Note: It may be necessary to use the empty line as a "temporary position" for a field.

c) Repeat steps a and b for each field to be moved.


237


• .·-·........ ...... ..... ·-·-·····-..-·-·.. ···-·. ·-·... ·-·.. .........................................·-·•.... . ..·-·....... .·-··-·-·-·-·.·-·. J .•~ Purchase Order Info

liii

-.

~

: ID * ••

: Total Amount • •

: Currency • •

••

•

: Region •

.• .:• Se ller ID * •

I•

,.

-..

I~--------~ .__ I ___________, I I I rApproved

•

: Comment•

•:• •• ••

!

•

I

Figure 150 : Changing t he Order of Input Fields

d) Choose Save . 14. Make the ID , Total Amount, Currency, Region , and Seller ID input fields read -only and not required . a) Select an input f ield . b) In the Configure Input Field task panel, in the General area, choose Read-Only. c) In the Validation section, deselect the Required checkbox. d) Repeat steps a through c for each field used above. Note: Check to ensure t hat t he * behind the label (which indicates the required entry) has gone.

liii

Purchase Order I nfo ID Total Amount Currency Region Seller ID rApproved 0 . . . .... . . . . .... . . . . .... . . . 9...........................c

Comment*

...• ... o:. . • •

...• •

•• •• a ····• • ••••••• •. •••••• .. •••

...• ...• .• ..:.• ... ••• ••

e······· •...................•

Figure 151: Making Fields Read-Only

15. Resize the Purchase Order Info section to match the size of the fields .

238

© Copyright. All right s reserved .


a) Select the Purchase Order Info section. b) Use the handles to change the size. 16. Change the name of the Item table to Items and hide the toolbar. a) Select the Item table. b) In the Configure Table View task panel, in the Title field , enter Items. c) Deselect the Show Too/bar checkbox. 17. On the Items table, increase the number of displayed rows to four (4). a) Select the Items table. b) Use the table handles to make the window for the table larger. 18. Change the order of the Items table columns to match the following list. 1. ProductlD 2. ProductName 3. ProductPrice 4. Currency 5. Quantity

a) Select a column. b) Use drag and drop to move the column to the appropriate position. c) Repeat steps a and b for each column to be moved. d) Choose Save.

liii

•

•

..!• Items ...: Product!D .

..!•

0 ..............................•........................... . '?...............................................................

ProductName

ProductPrice

Currency

Quantity

a:

•• •• • ••• • •• ••

•• ••• •• • ••

.

0

...: .:•

•• .......••.....•••......••......••......••..............••......••......••......••......•••.....••......••...............•• •

•

Figure 152: Items Table

19. Rename the Items table columns using the data in the fo llowing table. Current Input Field Name


Product lD

Product ID

ProductName

Product Name

ProductPrice

Product Price


239

Unit 5 : Business Process Management User Interface

a) Select the appropriate column. b) In the Configure Input Field task panel, in the Label field , enter the new column name, and press Enter on your keyboard. c) Repeat steps a and b for each field to be renamed. 20. Make the Items table columns read-only and not required. The approver should not be permitted to edit the displayed area. a) Select a column. b) In the Configure Input Field task panel, in the General area, choose Read-Only. c) In the Validation section, deselect Required. d) Repeat steps a through c for each required change. 21. Change the order of the three (3) Form View elements to match the following list.

1. Purchase Order Info 2. Items table 3. Form view, which contains the Confirm button.

a) Select a View element. b) Move the View element to the appropriate position. c) Repeat steps a and b for all three form views.

Iii

•

( ApprovePurchaseRequ ... ·,. \._

x

-

A

ApprovePurchaseRequest Purchase Order Info ID

I

I

Total Amount

I

I

Currency

I

I

Region

I

I

Seller ID

L

I

~

rApproved ~I

Comme nt•

.:.l1 Items Product ID

11 Confi'm I

Product Name Product Price

Currency

Quantity

I

I

:" ".•

Figure 153: Form View Element s

22. If displayed, remove the scroll bar in the Purchase Order Info View element.

240



a) Select the Purchase Order Info View element. b) Use the handles to make the Purchase Order Info View element larger. Note: It might be necessary to enlarge the whole UI element. To do so, choose the header and the "box" for the whole UI, and use the handles that appear.

c) Choose Save. 23. Validate and preview the UI component. a) In the control panel, choose Deploy. b) In the Deploy task panel, choose Preview. Note: The build and deployment process for your UI component may take some time. Please be patient and wait until the process completes successfully.

c) If a confirmation dialog box appears, choose Continue .

Jiii Approve Purchase Request Pu J~ha•e

Orde r Info

C<>mrenl .

I o:.ir.-m l

Figure 154: Display of the New ly Created UI

d) If prompted, log on to AS Java with the User Name Administrator##. After logging in, a new browser tab opens containing the newly created UI. Define Input and Output Mapping

1. In NetWeaver Developer Studio, return to the Purchase Order Process## process. a) Either choose the modeling tab for the Purchase Order Process##. Or, if this process is closed, In the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Product_## [vendor##.org] ~ Process ~ [LocalDevelopment] po_product_xx/pr/pm ~ Processes . b) Double-click Purchase Order Process## .


241


2. From the Approve Purchase Request## activity, view the Input Mapping tab. a) Select the Approve Purchase Request## activity. b) On the Properties tab, choose Input Mapping view. 3. Use the automapping function to map RequestData to Tasklnput. a) In the Inputs of Approve Purchase Request## column (window to the right), expand ~

Tasklnput

UIRequest

~

Start.

b) From the Process Context column (window the left), right-click and drag RequestData to Tasklnput ~ UIRequest ~ Start in the Inputs of Approve Purchase Request## column and release the right mouse. c) In the dialog box that opens, choose Execute Default Matcher, and if necessary expand all nodes. 0

Approve Purchase Request OS

!-"" Gei""" ,.,,.,_ a1 -

Loo .

- - - I Define tile tlplt "'"Pl)ing for th~ olement:

~ Pr·oress cont·ext

~~==~.~l ~="'= ·l ==========-~I ~ Tm ,_ac1= ll) RequestDato

"====5 8 Input Mapping OlJtput Mapping

!Jo

Events

B

!il Header - - - - - - - - ; - - - . _ !!!I APProved- - - - - - - ; - - - . _ l!I AIJproverComment - - - - ; - - - . . . . l!I U..retlcy - - - - - - - - ; - - . . . _ l!I Pll'chaseOrderI0- - - - - ; - !!11 Pll'thaseOrderTotalAmount- - - ; - - - . _ III Regl0<1- - - - - - ; - _ (!) SelerlD- - - - - - t - .

Elm Item - - - - - - - ; - _ ~ III a..r""'y t III ProductIO- - - - - - - t - lII ProductName !Bl ProductPlke - - - - - ; - - - . . . . . !Bl Quantity-------t~

r

Inputs of Approve F\Jrchose Request OS

l'.8 Tasklnpta

*8

·~ IE Tasi
ra

----"t<<:H---8

IE Header

------!----·!ID Approved ------1----IIJ ApproverConvnetlt ------1----l!J Currency - - - - 1 - - - - IIJ PurchaseOrderID - - - - - - 1 - - - - IBJ PurchaseOrderTotalAmount - - - 1 - - - - I I I ROQion - - - - 1 - - - - III Seler!D ~~--B-iiiJ Item - - - - 1 - - - - III Currency - - - - 1 - - - - III ProductlD

- - - - 1 - - - - · I I I ProductName ----1-----'-IBJ ProductPrice - - - - 1 - - - - l l i l Quantly

Figure 155: Executing t he Default Matcher

Note: The algorithm used by the automapping option to generate mapping suggestions can be configured in the NetWeaver Developer Studio. To do so, choose Window~ Preferences and choose the sub-node Advanced Automapping on the left side of the screen.

4. Configure Output Mapping using the following information. Map this Object

To this Object

TaskOutput ~ UIResponse ~ RequestData/Header/Approved ApprovePurchaseRequest## TaskCompletion ~ Header ~ Approved TaskOutput ~ UIResponse ~ RequestData/Header/ ApproverComment ApprovePurchaseRequest## TaskCompletion ~ Header ~ ApproverComment

242



a) On the Properties tab, choose the Output Mapping view. b) In the Outputs of Approve Purchase Request## column (left side), expand TaskOutput U/Response ---+ ApprovePurchaseReqeust##TaskCompletion ---+ Header. c) In the Process Context column (right side), expand RequestData

---+

---+

Header.

d) Use the left mouse button to drag the Approved element from TaskOutput U/Response ApprovePurchaseReqeust## TaskCompletion Header to RequestData Header ---+ Approved. e) As above, drag the ApproverComment element from TaskOutput ---+ U/Response ---+ ApprovePurchaseReqeust## TaskCompletion ---+ Header to RequestData ---+ Header ApproverComment.

I0 Approve Purchase Request 20 ,_ Gener ...,,....,,. al- - - ; Deline tho output mopping for this element: Looping Outputs of Apptove Purchase Request 20

="='=~== ,'--=:==============----' ~ TMk ,..":=~==1

~g

Output M~pping

Bou1clary Events

~· Q3 ProcesslnstanceAttrit.Jtes

~· ll3 RequestDota 13

IE T•sla:ludedOwners 00 IE Potent1"'°""1ers li1 IE TaskAUri>utes 8 IE U!Re:;ponse El Ill Awrov
'

Process context

-a CB Request0ot• •I;!

Ill HeO
,,_--;-~..._ @ Approved

,,---t--;-~

I

III

Appt~rComment

, l!I Currency l!I PurchMeOrderlll , IEI PurchaseOrderTota!AmO\Klt IIJ R . ' 09IQll 1!J sellerJO

lil 151 Item

' l!J 1!J CLrre<>ey ' IIl PurcllaseOrderlD l l!ll PurcllaseOrderTowlAmo
.

lil li:lJ llem

Figure 156: Output Mapping

f) Choose Save.


243

---+



•

244



Unit 5 Lesson 2 Creating a User Interface with Web Dynpro

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to create a user interface with Web Dynpro. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

•


Web Dynpro Overview Declarative programming means specifying what should be achieved instead of specifying how to achieve it. In user interfaces, a declarative approach is especially profitable because there are so many services in a UI that can be standardized. This approach is driven by metadata. Once a good metadata model is established, it is easy to add more and more services that use the metadata. The Web Dynpro programming paradigm includes the following building blocks: •

Model-View controller architecture The model encapsulates the business logic and persistence. The view displays data supplied by controllers. The controller handles events, model interaction, and view navigation.

•

Generic UI services Offers value help and message management. Provides flexible tools for user selection of data.

•

Emphasis on declaration - UI coding virtually nil Declaration of Ul-design and screen flow (navigation). Declaration of runtime data structures and data flow between UI and controllers (data-binding, context-mapping)

•

Reusable components Integrated with the NetWeaver Development infrastructure. Construct web applications from reusable components.

Web Dynpro comes with a large set of standard controls that constitute common user interaction rules and a common visual design throughout the application. Each view defines a layout for part of the screen as an arrangement of atomic controls. Many controls automatically provide generic services on their data, for example the table control scrolls through the data it displays by itself. Input controls that can handle input values of different types use many services that hinge on repository-based type information. A control can be connected to this information through its data-binding. Based on type information, the Web Dynpro runtime automatically chooses the right way to provide value help. When there are only a small number of alternatives, a drop-down menu is the


245


solution of choice. If the number of alternatives gets larger, pop-up lists provide the best value help. If the input is a special type, for example a calendar date, a special calendar control helps the user to select the right input. After the user chooses an input value, the runtime validates and converts it. again using the input's business type. If the validation results in an error, the front-end can autonomously explain the problem to the user and help to fix it. In addition context-sensitive online help can be derived from the business type. Generic services are especially worthwhile as programming interfaces for Web browser-based Uls that are not completely standardized. By implementing higher-level services on top of the built-in, low-level capabilities of the browser, application developers save time because they do not need to acquire detailed expertise in Web programming languages and environments.

Web Dynpro Application ' I

URL

r-v Web Dynpro Component Root component

B

B

0 1D

[l

Web Dynpro Component

DI

D [I


Figure 157: Web Dynpro Components

A Web Dynpro application is one or more Web Dynpro components that function together to provide a complete business process. Within a Web Dynpro application, one component always acts as the "root" component. This is the starting point for all functiona lity and is the only component that can be accessed by a URL. Application data comes from backend services and are normally accessed from models. which are generated based on the backend service definition. These data models are mainly function modules. Enterprise Java Beans (EJBs), and Web services.

User Interface Generation Tasks A Web Dynpro Java UI is created the same way as a Visual Composer UI. Just select Web Dynpro instead of Visual Composer in the wizard. The new component is available and can be customized in the Web Dynpro Explorer.

246



-~:

lrinr1Vc1>r..e~.txx"T.r.1t(

.:.J

Ip,._...,_ , l~;

':-: "'°~ I in~ cfl

8

B·0 Pr0I> Process~ l!l ci; Proc<>sses

11@13

UI tOOlpOIM'nt

Development componunt data.its

e

S&
-

PO_Produd_XX (vendotxx.com]

ij!·LJ Portal

~

w'"""""''

lw...,.,..1

~tlopl1oe1(~f)(*•ot: l[l~1po.r06.c..e@fwi:tl ·I

l;J (8 Taslls

::J ~... 1

l!l

¥*1''''''''*"'

fl:r EVent Trf9clets 1€1 i:!1 Reporting Oata Sources

~ Rule Sets '5 F"'1c:Uons E!l C!J oat~ T_.,

. l!l (.!) 5ervlce lnt.,faces

. ti!

!l:l ~ '"

User Interface

ti>~ Business logk lll i;;J Exteznal Services rl! {§} lnfrostructU'e

Figure 158: Automat ically Generate Web Dynpro Java UI

Generation of Web Dynpro Java follows the same steps user for generating Visual Composer.

Web Dynpro User Interface Addition BPM Task (Web Dynpro Component)

--

1

-.

[

Expose Event

4. -

--

t

Interface Controller

t,

(,

.l,

,,.

~

~ '-.&

Event

\

+•

2.

1. .

''

Component Controller

Implement Fire Event

N_

Q ------. Add Component to Public Part

~

I

- ~3.

-..

,,.

4,-~

,4~

Event

~,

~

--

Expose Context Structure


Figure 159: Web Dynpro Component Enablement for BPM

To make an existing Web Dynpro component usable by BPM, you have to alter the interface of the component. You need two things in the interface: 1. The context structure consisting of the data to be transferred between Web Dynpro and BPM 2. An event to inform BPM that the user completed the work Then, use the following procedure:


247


1. Expose the needed context structure from the Component Controller to the Interface Controller. Only the context structure needed by BPM process must be exposed.

liii

6e t«

~

~

~ ~

l »a? d'e

WebQlol'PI>

!'J"

~ ~

.;lill
1> · 0 · 'l. ·

c.-

"' I-'

·'!E~~

• fdt tt:idol ~..•

J•• • r~-

I,

' (iJ

'" """ ·-· e 'I<

~- 1 = c: ~-

!:!

$> (i)

~ Context

Id ~) bclill60_~..'l'dJtJA

t!'!IO L~tf"ICL~ !Efd ~) ~el_dcW

rt !CJ (\.~)modlH_5_ r:i

_._,Jd

l.cJ ~) moOh_S~•..S B llwcb~

'" i::::-

Ejlc~n-ir:«f~

--

"~ ~":""'-

- - - - - ·nJ P aste Context Structure ~ °'*"'"'""'"<"""" ~=-J~==~§~~~=lr--'~ n!!!te[rfa ~ce~C:2o~nt~ro~u!!:er..r_ _J A{a ~~ lfV'fotee ---~41"4Wt,..

., ""

i.f ~Ctm~

-~

...

"8· 1~~ ,~

Figure 160: Expose Context St ruct ure t o Interface Controller

2. Define the event in the Component Controller and expose it to the Interface Controller.

fiii

r:i:W"'b Oynpto (lor<1IO.......,l11prnrot] ro1o0in. ~ ,.._,..,cl"°' S l>a~tifyt:ornp

w..b Oynpto COOlpOIW'llt roott<>ll<•r f·

I

Define Event in ~ l-._£omponent Controller

....--

""' ..._ ... , ..., •

rt+X

Oii~

rx;;;< -;_;;-c;-;;-!"""'~==d

Figure 161: Create Event and Copy it t o t he Interfa ce Controller

3. This event is started when the user has finished the work in a method from the Component Controller. When and where the method is called depends on the Web Dynpro application.

248

©Copyright. A ll rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a User Interface w ith Web Dynpro

•/ //8Bend

~la [localOeveJopment] bpmlf>O_exercise_w

pul>l.ic void wdDoApplicationStateCh

la [localOevelopment] find_material 00 la [LocalOevelopment] get_materfal_detad 00 la [LocalOevelopment] module_S_exercise_ S la [LocalOevelopment] module_S_exercise_ ' 8 ~ Web Oynpro 00

I

. I

1 1

{

//@@begin wdD0Applicat1onStateCh //(!@end )

00 If;! Appllcations ~Models , ·~ Component Interfaces

r

//@@begin javadoc : complete() -t

,.,... ...

-

• Method declared by application . •/ //@@end pul>1io void comp l ete ( ) { //B@begin complete() wdTbis . wdfireEventComplete() ; I //@Bend ..--: ~

G~ Components 8 ~ il2titl~lll-----.

, ~ Component Controller El Lo Component Inter a -1ijl lnnen'ted Interfaces

f

•

J

I

;*

lnterfate Controller HI~ lnterface Views

,../

---

-

r

Fire Event / in the Component Controller

Figure 162: Fire Event in Component Controller

4. Add the Web Dynpro Component to the Public Part of the Development Component so that the Web Dynpro component interface is visible to BPM .

g:; Ou

I@

Do

~

;i We

'iS: Na

s~l~lfu

""

El

<>..,.

l!l 9 [localOevelopment] bpmlf>O_exercise_w 00 la [LocalOevelopment] find_material 00 la [LocalOevelopment] get_material_detaS 00· 9 [LocalOevelopment] module_S_exerclse_ El ta [localOevelopment] module_s_exercise_

El

Iii Web Oynpro l!l·'i!!;l

I'

I I

. I,. 1

I

I

Applications

~Models 1- """ Component lnterfaces I

Add Web Dynpro

8 'laJl

Component to Public Part

~ Components

1:1~ PONot1f Com l ~ Open Data Modeler Add t o Pubhc Part

~~

, , X I . f

tii

r j.;t I

~----2 /: - ------~~~--

_,,,,.....-

Delete Copy

- - - - - -1 Edit UI Element llbr

!
Refactor

· [J

References

t ~ ------1

:

~ Repai' 00 i;ci-~----1

I I ~ Dictionaries oo 00

"°

00

Test Validation Composite Explorer

Resources

Figure 163: Add Web Dynpro Component to Pu blic Part

First, expose the needed context structure from the Component Controller to the Interface Controller. Only the context structure needed by BPM process must be exposed . Then define the event in the Component Controller and expose it to the Interface Controller. This event is started when the user has finished the work in a method from the Component Controller. When and where the method is called depends on the Web Dynpro application. Finally, add the Web Dynpro Component to the Public Part of the Development Component so that the Web Dynpro component interface is visible to BPM.


249


Web Dynpro User Interface Modification Web Dynpro Java modification is similar to Visual Composer. Generated Uls are generic and may have to be altered to change their appearance or behavior. item

Plea$e enter tho- desired prOducts

1

IAdoll Remcv• J

'tJ

Quantity

I Md II Remove I

ProduC!ld

@Ou••lllY ('ID @Proouctll

1----f'"'

~ @Ou¬y

-

Ul

'ti

Pn>duct Id

-

@?rO
@Ou&ntlly

C!;Productld

C!jOu&ntlly

..e:J -

@Productld

@Ou•nll!Y

EJ

; _

-

@Productlcl

C!jQuantity CT) @?rcductld

!-

___ [

__,./

!j

Quant«y

CJ

-,;');

.

-

I

Confirm 11 C.ncel

I

\'

i

Generated U I

[

J

Changed UI

Figure 164: Changing a Web Dynpro Java UI

In Web Dynpro, the generated Uls are accessed using the Web Dynpro perspective of NetWeaver Developer Studio.

liiiiii

• fp l}{) @ MOIN Cockp~ Open Pers-pectlva

•

QI Perforce

15 Composite Application

'3Planning

......, Show ,...,.Yi.iew ,,~,,.,,.,,,,,,,,,,~• ~ Composite Designer customize Perspective ... Save Perspective As ... Reset Po
4>Plug-in Development ~Process Development

~Debug ~ Oe
~Product Modeler lQRescuce (default)

~ Process Oeveiopment

la RFC Test P•rspective

§} Visual c - r

!i\lRialto ~Rules corn~ SAP Management

~Process Modelng

Navigation Prefer~

~Service Composer

t!jOreom Synchrorhing ti'!) Visual Composer «ii Visul!I Comp~ Kit o-iopmeni

---. .... Open Perspective

j

(f/web

1!l Web Dynpro OK

I

Cancel

Figure 165: Opening the Web Dynpro Perspective

Opening the appropriate Web Dynpro component in the Web Dynpro Explorer and selecting its view displays the View Designer. You can modify the UI from the View Designer.

250


Lesson: Creati ng a User Interface with Web Dynpro

..

I

(O.HistO
(I)

li:;l. Action

(I)

item

!BI]I R~mo•e I "l:J

•&Aton

B' s..ttonChoke

oouantcy

"lil linkehoi
@Quantfy

IS!!l

Ii! ta [LocolDevelopment) poJ>
Quanllly l'r<>lluctld

cauantcy

t.li*ToAction

l!'il Im llil

C?roductld

@Pro~uclld @?roductld

Complex

Ii!;! Aj>plicotloos

~ -~

1-~ Coo'Qonent Interfaces

'

Ef.~ Components

El .i::i EntetPurchaseRequestXXI Component {/: c~ CorArofe<

iii 01 Loc•I Component Interface

:f.i Custcm Cootrollers

Open View Designer

; @ Jmpiernmed lmrfa
, D Message Pool ~ Used Models

:

~ Used Ccmponents

13 ~Views ,

Ertetl'u'-equostXXIComponentView

00 \Cl Windows

1

e ei Di
Figure 166: Accessing the Web Dynpro Component

All UI elements contained in a view are also vis ible in an Outline view. Select ing elements in the View Designer or the Outline view allows you to manipulate them in the Property view. .

""' '

Jh Problemsj l:l Properties !:3

•

lo/ Docunentatlon View',

s-0 RootElement

llEo lnputfield

- =r

B-CJ Group

' I

I'

'

T GrOUJ>_H-*r [He4d
B

Gen~ral

0

Table TobleToolBar [Tool8a<) ' 'ir' ltemAdd 1 'ii" ltetity_heode' (Header] ~ - \ij'0 Qus>tity_editor I El Product!d s-0 Transporef1tContoiner ( - Ent..PurchaseRequestlOCICOO'ClleledEvent m Enter9\Jfd>oseRequestxxlErrorEvef1t I§ Context Menus

Events

s-

i ,'

I

'/ t

UI Element Properties

Pr~tv

8 Properlies[I'1ll
e0

I

bi Snippetsl ~ Irlrastructure Consolel ~ Err°' log] -9

-

oligvnent contextMeooBehavlour contextM
I vQuantity_e
false

true

tiistory imeMode lnP<*Prompt

false auto*

length

~

onEnterBehavior

SUQ90StVolJes textDlfectlon

def...it• false Folse normal"' Folse Inherit*

t~

.;.

value visible width

visi>le*

passwordFoeld readOnly state

20

a Item.Quantfy

Figure 167: Changing a UI Element

Significant functional changes may require you to alter or extend the generated coding of the Component Controller or the View Designer of the Web Dynpro Component.

© Copyright . All right s reserved.

251


)

el.se return; }

wdConte xc . c reateAndAddl temElement(); //@Bend )

Change Coding between @@begin and @@end

//@@begin Javadoc : itemRemove()

'--

/••

• Method declared by application. •/ //ll@end l•ulll.io void i temRemove ( ) { //8Bbeg1n itemRemove () int l eadSelection = wdContext.nodeitem() . getLeadSelection() ; i:f (wdCo ntext. node Item() . getE l ementAt (leadSelection) •• nul.l.) retui·n; wdContext.nodeitem() .removeElementAt(leadSelection); //131lend )

/• • The following code section can be used for any Java code that is • not to be visible to other contro l lers/views or that contains constructs • currently not supported directly by Web ~yn~ro (such as inner classes or

Figure 168: Changing Generated Coding

liii

~ Problems

. ~'-. §

::J

Snippets

fl] Infrastructure Consde

<* EnterPurchaseRequestxXlComponentlnterface

~ EnterPurchaseRequestXXlComponentinterf ace Edit\~w:

Gene
r.

Context Properties (' Context Mapping

Ref..-ences

ci d'

ConteKt

Methods

Events

B

0 8

Context

0 0

o rs

General References

oit

<* EnterPurchaseRequestXX!CompletedEvent '

1_

~ Exposed Data Elements

~ EnterPurchaseReQuestXX IEtrorEvent

Events

ProducUd Quantity

J

... l"ic

ltype filter text

Context Methods

[J Item

t3 '\.. 1:3 Snippetsl fill Infrastructure Cor

IL Problems ICl

.

"~ [ Exposed Events

J

Figure 169: Web Dy npro Interface

To ensure compatibility to the BPM process, the interface of the Web Dynpro component has to remain stable.

252


Unit 5 Exercise 11 Create a Web Dynpro User Interface Component

Business Example

You are a business process administrator. You have been asked to create a web Dynpro user interface for the Approve Purchase Request## human activity. Using the Web Dynpro UI, the Requestor user will enter the IDs of the desired products. as well as the required quantities. After the generation step, the raw version of the Web Dynpro UI component is improved. Finally, the data mapping for the activity Enter Purchase Order Request## is performed . In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you. Note: In this exercise, the process created in exercises 2-5 and exercises 7, 8 and 10 is used.

Generate a Web Dynpro UI Component

1. Create a new task for the Enter Purchase Request## activity named Enter Purchase Request ## Task using the data in the following table. Dialog Box Name

Field

Value/ Activity

New Task

Name

Enter Purchase Request## Task


UI Technology

Web Dynpro



[Local Development] po_product_##/ui/wd


Name

EnterPurchaseRequest##Ta skComponent


Completion Event

EnterPurchaseRequest##Ta skCompleteEvent


Error Event

EnterPurchaseRequest##Ta skError Event

Process Context

Process Context

RequestOata Product ID


~

Item

253

~


Dialog Box Name

Field

Value/ Activity

Process Context

Process Context

RequestOata Quantity

--+

Item

--+

2. View the new task in the Web Dynpro data modeler tool. Configure the Web Dynpro UI Component 1. Change the header title from Item to Please enter the desired products . 2. Change the order of the table columns to match the order in the following list. 1. ProductlD 2. Quantity 3. Rename the column header ProductlO to Product ID . 4. Remove the Reject button from the UI. 5. Change the name of the Approve button to Confirm. Define Input and Output Mapping 1. Map the following outputs of Enter Purchase Request## nodes to the matching Process Context nodes.

254

•

Item

•

ProductlD

•

Quantity


Unit 5 Solution 11 Create a Web Dynpro User Interface Component

Business Example

You are a business process administrator. You have been asked to create a web Dynpro user interface for the Approve Purchase Request## human activity. Using the Web Dynpro UI, the Requestor user will enter the IDs of the desired products. as well as the required quantities. After the generation step, the raw version of the Web Dynpro UI component is improved. Finally, the data mapping for the activity Enter Purchase Order Request## is performed . In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you. Note: In this exercise, the process created in exercises 2-5 and exercises 7, 8 and 10 is used.

Generate a Web Dynpro UI Component

1. Create a new task for the Enter Purchase Request## activity named Enter Purchase Request ## Task using the data in the following table. a) In the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Product_## [Vendor##. com] ~ Process [LocalOevelopment] po_product_##/pr/pm ~ Process Modeling ~ Processes .

~

b) Double-click Purchase Order Process##. Dialog Box Name

Field

Value/ Activity

New Task

Name

Enter Purchase Request## Task


UI Technology

Web Dynpro



[Local Development] po_product_##/ui/wd


Name

EnterPurchaseRequest##Ta skComponent


Completion Event

EnterPurchaseRequest##Ta skCompleteEvent


Error Event

EnterPurchaseRequest##Ta skError Event


255


Dialog Box Name

Field

Value/ Activity

Process Context

Process Context

Request Data Product ID

--+

Item

--+

Process Context

Process Context

Request Data Quantity

--+

Item

--+

a) On the Purchase Order Process## modeling surface, choose Enter Purchase Request## . b) On the Properties tab, choose the Task view. c) In the F4-help of the Task field menu. select New. d) In the New Task screen, in the Name field, enter Enter Purchase Request ## Task. e) Select the Generate UI Component checkbox. f) Choose Next. g) In the UI Technology drop-down menu, choose Web Dynpro . h) In the Development Component drop-down menu. select [Local Development] po_product_##/ui/wd (if not already pre-filled). i) Choose Next.

j) In the UI Component Details dialog box, enter the data from the table (if not already prefilled). k) Choose Next. I) In the Process Context dialog box, enter the data from the list above.

Process Context Specify context attributes to be displayed In UI component.

Process Context - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,

0 8 0 Gl

!'.§] ProcesslnstanceAttr1butes !'.§] RequestData 1±1· 0 IE Header 13 Item .... 8 00 Product!D i 0 00 ProductName • ! 0 !Bl ProductPrice . 0 00 Currency S IBI Quantity

sm

_<_Back _ · __.__ Next _~___.!

I

Finish

]

Cancel

Figure 170: New UI Component Creation

256



m) Choose Finish. Note: The task Enter Purchase Request## is now created along with a Web Dynpro component, and is assigned to the human activity Enter Purchase Request XX. You can view the task in the Tasks node in the Composite Explorer view.

n) Choose Save . 2. View the new task in the Web Dynpro data modeler tool. a) In the Composite Explorer view, choose PO_Product_## [vendor##. com]. b) In the PO_Product_## Layout view, in the User Interface section, double-click EnterPurchaseRequest##TaskComponent to open the Web Dynpro Data Modeler tool. (u.... ~

PO_Product_20 [vendor20.

cJb *Pu-chase Order Process __j lfil PurchaseRequestOata20.xs

&3'\

"

Process (3)

~

Purchase Order Pro ...

(!)

~

.gi Approve Purchase ••.

Enter Purchase ...

User Interrace (2)

~

~

ApprovePu rchaseReq ...

I

EnterPurch aseReque ...

.

-

Figure 171: Viewing the New Task (1)

.,._

::· PO_Product_20(vendo

Q

00 *P..-chase Otdet Proc _product_20/Ulfwd

El &

EnterPurch

aseRequ ...

© Approve P\Jrchase Req

======-===========; .i:i EnterP\JrchaseRequest20TaskCompcnent

l-+-F===i-1-

'G ...... ··~

~

&

Component Controller

~

~

EnterPurch aseRequ ...

Figure 172: Viewing the New Task (2)

Configure the Web Dynpro UI Component

1. Change the header title from Item to Please enter the desired products . a) Double-click on the first box, named EnterPurchaseRequest.


257


• .:••.......•......•..•..•........••......••......•......................••..•..•....•.......•.... .:• item ..•• .•• . • • l• I Add II Remove I l• .l• Ii[] Quantity A'oduct[) G .l•

liii

l

@Quanbly

151 @A'oducID

@Quantity

f;J

•

~

..;• • ..•••

@A'oduc

l

••

tlDI

~

@Quantity ~ @A'oduc Ito

..;• • b . ..•• . .................................................................................................•• D D •

• ••

•

I Approve 11 Reject I

Figure 173: Item Dialog Box

b) Select the header t itle named Item. c) On the Properties tab, in t he Text f ield, enter Please enter the desired products and press Enter on your keyboard .

Note: It might be necessary to choose the Group_header[Header] entry in the Outline box in order to display the text field . The header changes . d) Choose Save . 2 . Change the order of the tab le co lumns to match the order in the following list . 1. Product! D 2 . Quant ity

a) On the Outline t ab, choose RootElement

~

Group

~

Table

~

ProductlD .

b) In the ProductlD context menu, c hoose Move Up . '+'

1C.J \.0:.0 .. ~ ~~l~

B !O wsdl

[ID IE

•

User Interface

IB-fliil Business Logic

~ outline ~

S0 B

l

I

! I

Group T Group _Head Table l±J .,., TableTo

B0

0 l±J· 0 lB

Move Down Parameter Mapping Translatable Texts

..

rl ro

Bindngc:Min Expand Al Show Help Properties

Alt+Enter

Quantity TransparentContainer Context Menus

ffi 0

'' I§

MaveUp

Apply Template

RootElement

D

""''""

Figure 174: ProductlD Cont ext Menu

3 . Rename t he column header ProductlD to Product ID .

258



a) Choose the column header named Product/O . b) On the Properties tab, in the Text field, enter Product ID. c) On the keyboard, choose Enter to apply the change.

Pleas e enter the de aired produett

e Selectim

a rext

lll"'e>...,, Iack ,,,,__ _ 1 I .a.reove I

T Caption Genetal

__

,,

B Pf-ties (Caption] Id cOf'lte)ttl!ElhJBeha'l'lot.r context;t.ietVJld

eoatled hl6Qeflr$t

tnao;ieHolgi. i'nageSOurGe

"°'_. . mageWldth

text textorection

I Vdue

P1ocl.lctl0_heado1 lrherl"'

""' ""'

"'

f....

Froducl !D

icite1l"

Figure 175: Renamed Column Header

4. Remove the Reject button from the UI. a) Choose the Reject button. b) In the Reject button context menu, choose Delete. 5. Change the name of the Approve button to Confirm. a) Choose the Approved button. b) On the Properties tab, in the Text field, enter Confirm. c) Press Enter on your keyboard. d) Choose Save. Define Input and Output Mapping

1. Map the following outputs of Enter Purchase Request## nodes to the matching Process Context nodes. •

Item

•

ProductlD

•

Quantity


259


a) On the Purchase Order Process## modeling surface, choose the Enter Purchase Request ##activity. The modeling surface tab should already be open when you begin this step. If it is not, choose the process in the tree of the Composite Explorer and open it by double-clicking. b) On the Properties tab, choose the Output Mapping view. c) In the Outputs of Enter Purchase Request## column (left side), choose TaskOutput UI Response ~ EnterPurchaseRequest## TaskCompleteE vent.

~

d) Choose the right mouse button and click and drag EnterPurchaseRequest##TaskCompleteEvent to RequestData in the Process Context column. Release the mouse button. e) In the Default Matcher dialog box, Execute Default Matcher. f) Choose Save. 0 Pr-tios ~

..'l3' Rei.mns] JL Problems]~ tm-..cn..econsole] !lii!Coosdo

ct

(i) 19 M Iii "' ~ I:!

0 Enter Purchase Request 20 Gene
"(oop11g Task •ne!!~9 Output Mapping

-.,,E..,...

Oethe- the Ot.tpUt rn.appflg for this element: Oul:p.ts d Enter Pur~ Request 20

le-l:e, PtocesstnstanceAttrbi:es

~ l'i'l ~""·

6 IE rask
Process «ri:ext

1m,

Iii EX<>ers

f!llil ~s

Iii r- .w.. S-t:iJ UIR._...

&

El [S EnterPuclibseReques:t2~C_o~vent

I fj),

--

.a-1'13 C'.iJ

fit

Header

Elm Item III C...fenc.y 1

III

Po
1!11 ~

El {ii Jt
Figure 176: Output Mappings for Enter Purchase Request##

Note: To minimize effort, the automapping option can be used to define the mapping. This is done by using the right mouse tab to open the Default Matcher, which automatically maps fields from the left side to the right side.

260




•



261

Unit 5 Lesson 3 Managing a User Interface with Adobe Offline Forms

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to manage a user interface with Adobe offline forms . LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson , you will be able to:

•


Interactive Adobe Forms Overview Design layout

Deliver fonns Process data

SAP NetWeaver Developer Studio ABAP Workbench

(Q

UHr Front-tnd

SAP NetWeever Application Server

Java

ABAP

Capture data

Adobe LiveCycle Designer ·

-

Java

Adobe Document Services

(I ~ Adobe Reader

I

0 Figure 177: SAP Interactive Forms by Adobe

Interactive Adobe Forms are quick to build, deploy, and use. Forms can be imported or built in SAP Java and ABAP developer environments. Drag and drop form layouts and drag and drop integration between the form and SAP Web services makes design and integration easy. The forms are deployed using SAP NetWeaver where they can be accessed by SAP applications, the SAP Enterprise Portal, and routed to other interfaces such as e-mail. Forms are generated as needed with data populating the forms from the SAP system using Web services. When the user completes and resubmits the forms, the captured data is passed back into the SAP system. Forms are used as task/human activities inside a BPM process in the following way: •

262

Forms are distributed via email.



•

Users fill out the form a submit it back, replying to the email.

•

Form data is exposed to the process context.

•

The BPM process continues with the next activity.

Offline Form Design Tasks Use NWDS ___..XML Schema Designer View to define form XML data structure. Use Adobe LiveCyc/e Designer___.. Data Connection to import XML schema. Use Form Button Submit as PDF functionality to implement submit back to process functionality. You design an offline form using an XML schema and an Adobe XDP (XML Data Package) file that is bound to the XML schema. With the XML schema, you define the data structure of the form. With the XDP file, you define the form template, which is the design of the form and is based on the XML schema. The XML schema and the Adobe XDP file are created in NWDS. The XML Schema Editor in the Developer Studio is used to edit the XML schema and the Adobe LiveCycle Designer is used to design the form's appearance.

Offline Form Storage After you create the form XML schema and the form template, you have to store them both in a dedicated folder in the Enterprise Content Management (ECM) repository. To store the offline form, you have to connect the Portal Drive to a dedicated folder in the ECM repository. The ECM Repository is then accessed through the SAP Enterprise Portal Drive. The Portal Drive allows you to work with documents on the portal in the same way you work on any Windows drive. Communication with the server is done using the WebDAV protocol.

Note: The SAP_FPINFRACALLER role is required to access the ECM Repository.

Note: Although other Web folder tools can be used, we recommend using the SAP Portal Drive tool available on SMP. (WHAT IS SMP?)

Offline Form Task Addition An offline task is a task that does not require the user to log into the Universal Worklist to complete the assignment. When you want to assign an offline form to a task in your process model, you import the XML schema and template from the ECM repository through the SAP NetWeaver Developer Studio.


263


lfil PurchaseRequest.xsd

£

Purchase Request Approva Process

Overview ...,. General Information

Name:

IOffloneApp
T""'

Documentation:

Sharing:

... El Allow 4ctual owner to invite contrib
-.

-IOI~

Select a UI Wizard Select 4 UI Wizard

• User Interface '-"-~~-"'-""''nt to use to execute Instances of this t

Component: Type:

sk

IF-orms-/61'M2=--63-:-/Put-,c~,-----~-t. .Q>-,-----t -

,.,-I

.. m ..m.11------.. . .

Unified UI ~rt wiz¥d

, _,

forms

• Priority ~ the defaul priority for this t4Sk

Priority:

OI(

I

C40Cel

Medium

~-------------------------·

Figure 178 : Offline Form Task in BPM

In a process, the human activity illustrates an activity that triggers a task that needs to be completed by a person. One option for enabling an interaction between a person and the process is to assign an offline form to the task. When the task is triggered, the offline form is sent by email to al l potential owners of t he task. The form can be submitted back to the process only once and by only one potential owner. Steps to Assign an Offline Form to a Task

•

Design the form - Create a form template that is based on an XML schema.

•

Store the form - Store a form in the ECM repository. Browse the repository to use it in your business process.

•

Assign the form - Assign the form to a task, then assign the task to a human activity in your business process.

Offline Forms Task Configuration The Offline Form Wizard connects to the ECM Repository in order to load the Offline Form Template and XML schema.

264



rm Templ.ote Selection O(' .J«I>) f;&o from

the,_..., fi

I

.. (C\l'rently "f£2')

.........., IJF"'""J!IFl'lw1•'•"""""'"'••t.xdp sen.,,. ..,, I/f"'""_w_........,..""'

Figure 179: Creating an Offline Form Task

After you have assigned the offline form as a UI component to a task, you can define and customize the form . Defining Offline Form Recipients After you have assigned the offline form as a UI component, you have to define the recipients of the offli ne form. Recipients can be UME users for whom an email is entered in the UME, but you can also send the off line form to an external rec ipient. CJ ~ ~~

ft. Problems) ti'! Jder
!>!> Proce
.'5

Sear
x

(f,1

~ Send Offline Approval Form Ge
~

-·

<

lnptfi ol Send Offlne Appuwalf«m

Ptocess context I ti'.

8

Input Mapping

C6 oo_context l!! Name

-S C!} Tasl
\

m-

I

.a Ill III ....·-· 1u.n

'

l!!l Price ID Comme
~Events

-

-

l!il Pri
"\

I

Ill ~

llil T061
rl) X a"" <) Send Offline Approval Form

-

'*"'"' ~

. Process c~ext

Oltp\Jt• ol S.nd Offlno """""" f«r

I~

To
Dil l'«~• fil!il ~s

00

O\Jtput M-no

-•

S llJ l.llRO"..ponse 8 Iii PurchoseReaue
.

ll!l

i\pprovo

ID

E"'*' °°

·····.....

1Cll.

.......... -a····~~1:8 oo_c_ ru Nome

~ ~

m e~ I

.

-

ClJ

,

llem !bl Price

C!l Comment

w: -.i

•

Figure 180: Task Act ivity Context Mapping

Input Mapping defines data that will be mapped to an off line fo rm before the email is sent. Output mapping defines Offline Form context that is extracted after the form is submitted back to process context. You define recipients from UME as potential owners of the task, and external recipients using input mapping. When an external recipient resubmits the form , the respective task is completed on behalf of the SAP_BPM_Service user, which is a preconfigured internal user.

© Copyright . A ll right s reserved.

265


Oeneiel I n f -

Account klformetlon

co.tad lnfOl'motlon

_ 3__

LogonD:

Lest NMll!;

Manoget

I:::::~:.

M•,.,•tBI

I

!llant:taef'ft~m!i.rtx'll!

~

ActMlte Accessi>iity feat11~

0

Securiy PdCy:

Oofault

~ID:

USERPl
........---

Inputs of Send Offline Apptoval Form *B

•

IE

TasklnputExtension •i;J EmaiDeMvery I•

I

filii . . !!l template_country

~IQ;)

rn m

!!l

template_language AppllcationParameters

1 "external_re
Figure 18 1: Define Offline Form Email Recipients

Recipient Types •

UME Users These users are defined as potential owners of the task. They should have email addresses assigned to their user profiles in the UME.

•

External Recipients These recipients are defined by entering their email addresses and distribution lists as an input data or mapping element. Submissions by external recipients are completed on behalf of the preconfigured internal BPM user SAP_BPM_Service .

Customizing Offline Form Email Texts

266



l"Pl*< of Send Olfline Approval Form

------\!::========--•
• Task 7 User Parameterized Texts is used to customize e-mail Subject, Body Data

•13-ll"ti Emai()elivery 8+----+-- IIJ . f Ill template_country III template_language

iii-fill Ap~tiooP•r-tess l!J ,...-.ldd

1&. ....-~-""""'°""'-

~,

..

•V

,

·--------~

User Texts • Define the variab\!s you wart. to use to paramete:rizs the user tsxts below

• Paranll!terl2ed lexts

Stb;ect:

Purchase ~al

from

'sender> sent on {
De$crll>tl••" -~ase{pct~}. adp:kale this pixchase request. Responce Is expected by {de.adile} .

.. . .... .. .. .. . .. .... .. .. ... .... . ............ :: .... -;"

~-: ;.~.

:-. ..... ::.. ........ :

... :-.. :-:-.......................................................... .

Figure 182: Custom izing Email Template

You can customize the subject and the text of the email to which the offline form is attached. You define user texts in the task that the offline form is assigned to. If a translation is available, the email can be sent with translated user texts. For external recipients, the email language is defined through input mapping. Countries are defined in compliance with ISO 3166 and languages in compliance with ISO 639-2. If the recipients of the form are UME users, the language is defined in the UME. An Adobe offline form sent as an email attachment can only be provided in one language and cannot be translated. Automatically Completing Offline Form Fields You also have the option of automatically completing form fields with data. You can only autocomplete fields that are bound to elements of the XML schema you used to create the form. Fields bound to the XML schema appear as mapping nodes and can have input and output mappings defined to them.

Mail Server Configuration Properties of Application tc-bpem-base-ear •

mail.mailbox.reader.timeout - Default value 60 seconds to 10 minutes

•

mail.mailbox.address - Email address

•

mail.mailbox.username - Email user

•

mail.mailbox.password - Password of email user

•

mail.mailbox.folder - Email folder, such as lnbox

•

mail.mailbox.protocol - Values, such as imap4 and pop3

•

mail.mailbox.server - Mail server address


267


Extended Details

~ 1- • loOetd ft -ty RSl>owOeleib I Ir. Nome

OeldV-

'i! •UW>•••

I

995

""'~

--"' ° " .....__,.

..... _ _ _d """~l><>'I

~

......

Rl Rl

25

_....,,.....,

l . . _. . . .

li1J !?)

·-

• .... ......u ..

Figure 183: Mail Server Connect ivity Properties--Sending Emails with Attached Forms

The email sending functionality for the notifications in BPM is reused. The Java Mail Client service SMTP properties are used along with the authentication and connection properties. The sender of the email is set to the value of the configuration property mail. ma ilb ox . addre ss . Extended Details / Pr..;;.los ]

l etails about CE Com ete Slack deve PJ1! Kemel Servlc"' .... AAlk~ 1-· VM I

I S.:.e ) RMtoreto0e1...•i1 Modify II Sl>owDetai$ I 0

e;, '~

'"'

~·-·-

1')i! te-b,,..,-baS<1·ear

r

·-··

llefNV-

~ .from

,_ meil.mailbox.ectteu I•

..

moil,maibox.foldel

,_

IMll-X~d

~ ""'AM'

,_

mallJllOibox pror-

im8p

,_ rn811.mailboxseader .tirr.ecM I•

60

msll.malbox.~sername mall.received.t'ltt&Chrniet'CS'Jogging true

~

mall ..... ...,~•.-

'""'

Oniio Modl-

OJSComVetJe

D 0 0 0 0 D 0 0 0

leched@sl"femrnall leched@sy>!em,mall

lnbox

••••••••• pop3

10 teched

'

'

'

·'

>

' '•

Figure 184: Mail Server Con nect ivity Properties--Receiving Em ails with Attached Forms

When the form is submitted by the user, a new email is created with the submitted form as an attachment. The receiver of this email is a configured mailbox used by BPM. Email forms in a BPM process help retrieve input from users not directly involved in the process due to various reasons. For example, an external collaboration where a firewall is sitting between the user and the system or collecting survey results. The e-mail functionality for notifications in BPM are reusable. The Java Mail Client service SMTP properties are used along with the authentication and connection properties. The sender of the email is set to be the value of the configuration property mail.mailbox.address. When a form is submitted by a user, a new email is created with the submitted form as an attachment. The recipient of this email is a configured mailbox used by BPM . All properties for receiving e-mails are also incorporated into the "CTC Template" for BPM Process Server.

268


Unit 5 Exercise 12 Manage a User Interface with Adobe Offline Forms

Business Example

You are a business process administrator. You recently notated a new business process model in BPMN 2.0 and now have been asked to extend the graphical layout of the business process by using the Adobe Live Cycle Tool. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you.

Note: In this exercise, the process created in exercises 2-5, 7, 8, 10 and 11 is used.

Create the ECM Content Project ECM_Project_##

1. Create the ECM content project. Create and Edit the FormData##.XSD XML Schema

1. Create a new XML schema in the folder src/content named FormData##. xsd. 2. Change the target namespace of your XML schema to http://www.vendor##.com/ Form Data##. 3. Create a complex type named PurchaseRequestHeader. 4. Add two string elements named Region and SellerID to the PurchaseRequestHeader complex type. 5. Create a complex type named PurchaseRequestitem and add the two elements in the following table. Element Name

Element Type

Quantity

Decimal

ProductlD

String

6. Create a complex type named FormData and add the two elements in the following table. Element Name

Element Type

Header



269


Element Name

Element Type

Item

PurchaseRequestltem

7. Set the multiplicity for the Header element to 1.. 1 (Required) . 8. Set the multiplicity for the Item element to 1.. *(One or more) . 9. In the Schema Index View, create a new element named FormElement. 10. Change the FormElement element type to FormElement (if not already pre-filled).

Create a Form Template and Design the Form Layout 1. Create the Form template PurchaseRequestForm##.xdp. 2. Create a folder in the file system. 3. Export the files FormData## and PurchaseRequestForm## . 4. Use the Adobe LifeCycle Designer. 5. Create a heading on your form called PurchaseRequestForm. 6. On your form, create a table with the following attributes. •

Body rows vary depending on data

•

Number of columns: 2

•

Has a header row

•

No footer row

•

Has body rows and no sections

•

Alternates row color

7. Rename the column headers Product ID and Quantity. 8. Associate the elements ProductlO and Quantity to the Purchase Request table. 9. Make the table read only. The supervisor shall not be allowed to edit the product IDs and quantities entered by the requestor. 10. Add two input fields named Seller ID and Region. 11. Make the Seller ID and Region fields mandatory. 12. Add a button and name it Submit. 13. Change the control type of the button to submit. 14. Change the submit type to PDF.

270



Store an Offline Form in the ECM Repository

1. Import the file PurchaseRequestForm##.xdp .

Change the Content.xml File 1. Change the Content.xml file . Assign an Offline Form to a Task

1. Check the files in the ECM repository with the ECM Explorer: http: I I nwktdcOO.wdf .sap.corp:SOOOO/webdynpro/resources/sap.com/ tc-ecm- view- ecmexplorer/ ECMExplorerApp 2. Create a new task named Add Additional Purchase Request Information ## Task . 3. Open the PurchaseRequestForm##.xdp template. If prompted, log onto AS Java with the user name Administrator ##. 4 . Verify the user Supervisor## has an email address so that you can email the user the offline form. 5. Make the user Supervisor## a potential owner of the Add Additional Purchase Request Information ##Task. 6. Write an email and attach the offline form using the data from the table below. Field

Value

Subject

Purchase Request for Review

Description

Please review the attached purchase request and add the required Seller ID and Region information. Thank you.

7. Assign the task Add Additional Purchase Request Information## Task to the human activity Add Additional Purchase Request Information## in your business process. Define Input and Output Mapping

1. From the Add Additional Purchase Request Information## activity, view the Input Mapping tab. 2. Use the automapping function to map RequestData nsl:FormElement ~ nsl:ltem .

~

Item to Tasklnput

~

UIRequest


To this Object

TaskOutput ~ UIResponse ~ nsl:FormElement ~ nsl:Header nsl:Region

RequestData


~

Header

~

Region

~

271

~


Map this Object

To this Object

TaskOutput ~ UIResponse ~ nsl:FormE/ement ~ nsl:Header nsl:Sellerf0

RequestOata

~

Header

RequestOata

~

Item

TaskOutput ~ UIResponse ~ nsl:FormE/ement ~ nsl:ltem

272

~

Seller/0

~


Unit 5 Solution 12 Manage a User Interface with Adobe Offline Forms

Business Example

You are a business process administrator. You recently notated a new business process model in BPMN 2.0 and now have been asked to extend the graphical layout of the business process by using the Adobe Live Cycle Tool. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you.

Note: In this exercise, the process created in exercises 2-5, 7, 8, 10 and 11 is used.

Create the ECM Content Project ECM_Project_##

1. Create the ECM content project. a) In the Composite Designer perspective, choose File~ New~ Project. b) In the New Project: Select a Wizard screen, select Development Infrastructure ~Development Component. Choose Next. c) In the New Development Component screen, choose

Content~

ECM. Choose Next.

d) In the Select Software Component screen, expand LocalDevelopment, then select the software component PO_##_SC. Choose Next. e) Enter ECM Project ## as the name for the development component pr/content. Choose Finish. The system changes to the Resource perspective. If a notification appears, choose Yes. Create and Edit the FormData##.XSD XML Schema

1. Create a new XML schema in the folder src/content named FormData##. xsd. a) In the Resource view, expand [LocalDevelopment]ECM_Project_## ~ SRC

~Content.

b) From the context menu, choose New/XML Schema . c) In the New XML Schema dialog box, expand src

~

content (if not already opened).

d) In the File Name field, enter FormData## . xsd. e) Choose Finish .


273


The XSD Editor opens in a new tab. 2. Change the target namespace of your XML schema to http://www.vendor##.com/ Form Data##. a) In the XSD Editor, choose the Design tab (if not already open). b) On the Properties tab, choose the General view. c) In the Target Namespace field, enter http://www. vendor##. com/FormData## and press Enter on your keyboard. d) Choose Save . 3. Create a complex type named PurchaseRequestHeader. a) In the XSD Editor, select the Types section. b) In the Types context menu, choose Add Complex Type.

[ID Scnema : http://.,,,,w. vendor20.corn{FormO&a20 i;::; Directives

d5)Elements

[':;J Add Complex Type

IE NewComplexTyt>§ C)Acld SOnple Type IE PurchaseReguestHeader tJ Show properties . Refactor

•

References

•

Figure 185: Adding a New Complex Data Type

c) In the Name field , enter PurchaseRequestHeader. d) On the keyboard, choose Enter to apply the name. 4. Add two string elements named Region and SellerID to the PurchaseRequestHeader complex type. a) Double-click, PurchaseRequestHeader. The editor for adding elements opens. b) In the PurchaseRequestHeader context menu, choose Add Element. c) Name the element. d) On the keyboard, choose Enter to apply the name. e) Repeat steps b through d for the second element.

274



= oia !El PurchaseRequestHeader (!] Region

string

(!] Seller!O

string

Figure 186: Adding an Elem ent to a Complex Data Type

5. Create a complex type named PurchaseRequestitem and add the two elements in the following table. Element Name

Element Type

Quantity

Decimal

Product ID

String

a) Choose Show Schema Index View to return to the XSD Editor. b) In the XSD Editor, select the Types section. c) In the Types context menu, choose Add Complex Type . d) In the Name field, enter PurchaseRequestitem. e) On the keyboard, choose Enter to apply the name. f) In the PurchaseRequestltem context menu, choose Add Element. g) Name the element Quantity. h) On the Properties tab, in the Type drop-down menu, choose the element type. To find the decimal element type, from the Set Type drop-down menu, choose Browse ~ Decimal. i) Choose OK. j) From the context menu of PurchaseRequestltem, choose Add Element. jfil *Form0ata20.xsd

~

'TB PurchaseRequestl -

(!] Quantity

decl

EJ Add Element

iW-J Add Element Ref ~Add Any

Figure 187: Adding the Quantity Element

k) Enter the name ProductlD. I) On the keyboard , choose Enter to apply the name. m) Choose Save. n) If the XSD Reimport screen appears, choose Automatically accept all changes to the reimported document, then choose Accept.


275


6. Create a complex type named FormData and add the two elements in the following table. Element Name

Element Type

Header


Item

PurchaseRequestltem

a) Choose Show Schema Index Viewto return to the XSD Editor. b) In the XSD Editor, select the Types section. c) In the Types context menu, choose Add Complex Type . d) In the Name field, enter FormData . e) On the keyboard, choose Enter to apply the name. f) In the FormData context menu, choose Add Element. g) Name the element Header. h) Choose the entry String. From the F4-Help drop-down menu, choose Browse and then the element type PurchaseRequestHeader. Choose OK. i) Choose the form data header, and from the context menu choose Add Element.

ID "'Form0ata20 .xsd

~

fB For·~~= = ~== I] Add Element

-· _ 00_ Header Pure .....__ __ --! ~ Add Element Ref ·~Add Any

[EJ PurchaseRequestHeader

-

@ Region

string

00 SellerlD

string

Figure 188: Adding t he PurchaseRequestHeader Element

j) Repeat steps g and h for the second element. k) Choose Save.

276



(ffi *Form0ata20.xsd

&:!,"""'

c::::>

OQ

IEJ FormData

-I

[!I Header

IEJ PurchaseRequestHeader


gi~;---····-~r~J;~eRequestltem

·-

!

!.-----.----·-·----·-·----·-·----·-·--··-··-··-;

[!I Region

string

[!J SeUerlO

string

[El PurchaseRequestltem

·-

[!J Quantity

decimal

[!J ProductlO

string

Figure 189: Result of Adding Elements to the Complex Data Type Form Data

7. Set the multiplicity for the Header element to 1.. 1 (Required) . a) In the Header element context menu, select Set Multiplicity

~

1.. 1 (Required) .

8. Set the multiplicity for the Item element to 1.. *(One or more) . ~

a) In the Item element context menu, select Set Multiplicity

1.. *(One or more).

b) Choose Save . 9. In the Schema Index View, create a new element named FormElement. a) Choose Show Schema Index View to return to the XSD Editor. b) In the Schema Index View, in the Elements section, choose Add Element from the context menu . c) Name the element FormElement. d) On the keyboard, choose Enter to apply the naming.

Jfil *Form0ata20.xsd

~"'

IQl

[ID Schema : http://www.venclot20.com/Form0ata20 (C:;; Directives

@Elements

J

[r!fi:ormEleffient : string -·-· - -·------·

-

~Types

IE FwmData IE PurchaseBeguestHeader IE PurchaseR!!Questltem

Figure 190: Adding a New Element

e) From the context menu of the Form element, choose Set Type~ Browse. f) From the Set Type screen, choose Form Data, then choose OK. g) Choose Save .


277


liii

ID "'FormData20.xsd

&3" ..

IOI

~Schema: http://www.vendor20.com/Form0ata20

i;:;; Directives

~Types

QYElements

lr~i"E2riml~m~t :-f:omiOata]

""" './•::''.

[El FormOata [El PurchaseReguestHeader [El PurchaseR~uestltem

Figure 191: Resu lt of Changing t he Type of the FormElement Elem ent

10. Change the FormElement element type to FormElement (if not already pre-filled). a) Select FormElement. b) In the Properties tab, choose the General view, and in the Type drop-down menu, choose Browse. c) In the Set Type dialog box, choose FormData, then choose OK. d) Choose Save. Create a Form Template and Design the Form Layout

1. Create the Form template PurchaseRequestForm##.xdp. a) Go to the sub folder src/ content of the newly created [LocalDevelopment]ecm_project_##. From the context menu , choose New~ File . b) In the New File screen, in the Name field, enter Purchas eReques t F o rmXX . xdp. Choose Finish . 2. Create a folder in the file system. a) Choose the explorer. b) Choose Libraries

~

Documents

~

My Documents.

c) From the context menu, choose New~ Folder. d) Name the new folder SAPBPM ##.

-

3. Export the files FormData## and PurchaseRequestForm##. a) Go to the NWDS. b) In the Resource view, choose [LocalDevelopment]ecm_project_##

~

src ~ Conent.

c) From the context menu of FormData##.xsd, choose Export.

278



Composite Explorer ~

~? Search Console

GI

PO_Enhanced_20 [vendor20) 8 ~ PO_Product_20 [vendor20.com) i· 0 Portal 80 Process 8 ~ [LocalDevelopment) po_product_20/pr/pm ' ~ ·~ Connectivity $ DD Process Modehng El~ src 1±1 ·~ bpmn .-~ brms

!

•

·~ tasks El·~ wsdl

. l!I I .• .i .. (fil Purchase -----------------< I

I

a

rootwsdl Open F3 ' ·~ PurchaseReq Open With ffi User Interface 1----------------! l\i Copy Ctrl+C IB flliiil Business Logic Paste; Ctrl+V 8 c:;J External Services )C Delete Delete tJ createRequest I f1 releaseRequest ~ Refresh FS {§} Infrastructure i'-plmport ... LJ Export ...

•

Figure 192: Exporting the Form Data Object

d) In the export screen, choose

General~

File system, then choose Next.

e) In the Export File System screen, choose both the FormData##.xsd and the PurchaseRequestForm##.xdp files, and in the To directory field, choose Browse. f) In the Export to Directory screen, choose your newly created folder SAPBPM_## under Train-##~ my documents, then choose OK.

File system Export resources to the local file system.

·-D ID tasks 131D wsdl D ID test Eil" Ota [Loc.ae>evelopment] po_product_20/l.O/vcjmj)i l$l Ota [LocalDevelopment] po_product_20/tA/vc '

•

0 lfil FormData20.xsd 0 !ID PurchaseRequestD«a20.xsd 0 8rootwsdl_SimplifiedPu'chase0rder5ervice_PurchaseOrderBean.wsdl

rti-Oial [Loc.ae>evelopment] po_product_20/l.O/wd

Ora [Loc
Filer Types ...

I

select AD

I

Deselect Al

I iJ

To dl'ectory: f\\wdflbmtS078\CommonTraininq_Fence\train·20\My Documents\SAPBPM_20

Browse ...

Op!lons ~--------------------------------~

r OVerwrlte existing files without warning r Create directory strutture for fies r. Create otiy selected directories

__ < e_ac_l<.__,'--r~ei
Finish

I

cancel

Figure 193: Choosing the Location for Storing t he Exported Object

g) Choose Finish.


279


4. Use the Adobe LifeCycle Designer. a) Choose Start---+ All Programs---+ Adobe---+ Adobe LifeCyc/e Designer 9.0. b) If a We/come screen appears, choose Exit. c) Choose File

---+

Open .

d) In the Open dialog box, choose the newly created folder SAPBPM_## . e) Choose the file Purchas eReques t Form## . xdp (which is still empty), then choose Open. lD Adobe LiveCycle Designer · [PurchaseRequestform.xdp] 'rrj File

li

E
Tallie Layout

~~:

New...

D! rx:··· x . f.'!Save • · liltSave As ...

~•

Tools Window H._,

.-!l ~,. ...,..o _,,,, 1 o=--~....,...B.... • ""'a=r

iC' ~ !Ii ., • • {#

Ctrl+S Ctrl+Sll~t+S

Vie w

();
':a Preview POF

---

®

1

;l(New Dato ComO
r'f~m Pr-ties ... --------1 ,..---·~·-~---·----

toiPrint...

Ctil+P

I PLrchaseRequest~m.x._,

I '

Figure 194: Opening t he Newly Creat ed Pu rchaseRequest Form.xdp

f) If a warning message appears about a more recent version of the Adobe LifeCycle Designer appears, choose OK. g) Choose File

---+

New Data Connection .

IP,.firrm d:?e« Ccled»ns...

...

"""'°""Pl'~

""

Figure 195: Setting t he Data Connect ion

h) In the New Data Connection dialog box, keep the given name and select the XML Schema radio button, then choose Next. i) In the New Data Connection dialog box, choose Browse . j) Choose the displayed FormData##. xsd file, then choose Open.

280


Lesson: Managing a User Interface w ith Adobe Offline Forms

S*
Ii Qt,Y.$C• ••

"'"""

UMi llJtt. C>6i..t Root ae~ ~:

r

twt.cc1»ot ~

r

Trnf~ tn:orrhJ OIM xstrFk:

r

o:J

IF'cnrtlemert

.. ..

fr.-fmnCUgotigDllt"

"'""" ' 8a
I

Fh$h

e..c..

I

Hel>

Figure 196: Open the FormData## Object

The New Data Connection dialog box appears again. k) Choose Finish.

- --- -·p---

-~~

::J ~ u ~-.. >Ji!n":

8$r
a

~t.1"-

t.f~Ctl!llt~n ~

11nfl•

IC 11,tt•lll

Ii) .

';

ll:] Sd:ctl4

•B"" IO ..

N ..<'!4 ~ ~ ·"14'

.

,,.

Figure 197: Result of Creat ing a New Data Connection: The Fields are Displayed

5. Create a heading on your form called PurchaseRequestForm. a) In the Object Library palette (found on the right side), choose the Standard tab. b) On the Standard tab, choose the Text object and drag it to the form template. c) In the text box, enter Purchase Request. d) On the Text Formatting toolbar, change the font size to 28 and the font style to bold .

2

I•Purchase Reques 3

•R•mnoi. @!l Rtjtt Button

Ti=tsubform

'i i

table Text ~Jn,..... c:: ......

Figure 198: The Newly Created Form, Header


281


Note: It may be necessary to resize the window in which the AdobeliveCycle manager is running. If the text tool bar is not displayed, click somewhere in an empty space within the toolbars, then choose Text Formatting from the context menu.

6. On your form, create a table with the following attributes. •

Body rows vary depending on data

•

Number of columns: 2

•

Has a header row

•

No footer row

•

Has body rows and no sections

•

Alternates row color

a) In Adobe LiveCycle Designer menu bar, choose Table

~

Insert Table.

b) In the Insert Table dialog box, select Create Table Using Assistant. c) Choose OK. d) In the Table Assistant dialog box, select Body Rows Vary Depending on Data . e) In the Number of Columns field , select 2 . Table Assistant

Steps 1. Body Layout

r

Body Has Fixed Dimensions

Preview (65°/o) --~

f•fumber rt, Columns;

2. Header Row

3. Footer Row \.' Body Rows Vary Depending on Data 4. Sections

Number of Columns: 5. Row Shading

~B

Figure 199: Creating t he Table in t he New Form

f) Choose Next. g) In the next Table Assistant dialog box, select Has Header Row. h) Choose Next. i) In the next Table Assistant dialog box, select No Footer Row. j) Choose Next. k) In the next Table Assistant dialog box, select Has Body Rows and No Sections.

282



I) Choose Next. m) In the last Table Assistant dialog box, select Alternating Row Color. Adjust the row using the applicable buttons. £1

Table Assist ant

~ Alternating Row Colors

Step.s I . Body Layout

r:a r:a

First:

2 . Header Row

Next:

j

Preview (65°/o) --~

Rows Rows

3 . Footer Row

4. Sections

Heacter

S. Row Shading

Figure 200: Creating t he Table in t he New Form: Row Shad ing

n) Choose Finish. The two columns now appear in the form . 7. Rename the column headers Product ID and Quantity. a) Place the cursor in the first column header text, double-click, and rename the column Product ID .

b) On the keyboard, choose Enter to apply the change. c) Repeat the steps for the second column named Quantity. d) Choose Save .

JCl Design View I

o

1

l.._~ .:::_P_ re_ vi_ ew_P_D_ F _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _• 1

2

3

4

5

7

6

8

~Purchase Requestf • • • Product 10

Quantity

2

Figure 201: The New Form: Result ot Adding t he Table

8. Associate the elements ProductlD and Quantity to the Purchase Request table. a) In the Purchase Request table, select the empty cell in the Product ID column. b) In the Data View palette (left side), expand Data Connection


~

Item.

283


c) Select ProductlD and drag it to the selected Purchase Request table cell. d) In the Data View palette, select Quantity and drag it to the empty ce ll below Quantity in thePurchase Request table. 9 . Make the table read only. The supervisor shall not be allowed to edit the product IDs and quantities entered by the requestor. a) Select the empty cell under the header Product ID in the Purchase Request table. b) Below the Object Library palette, select the Object tab. From there choose the Value tab. c) In the Type drop-down menu, choose Read Only. d) Repeat steps a through c for the Quantity cell. e) Choose Save .

fiii

Ir[)

Design View 1

o

I ~ Preview PDF 2

!l!lj 3

5

4

6

7

8

• )

--

__ -_-_

····-·1

---·--·--··-

iPurchase Request!

I

Figure 202: The New Form: Setting the Types for the Fields of the Table

10. Add two input fields named Seller ID and Region. a) In the Data View palette, expand DataConnection

~

Header.

b) Select the Region element and drag it to the form template and place it to the right of the Purchase Request table. c) Repeat the step for the Seller ID element. D Design Viev1 r o 1

~ Preview PDF

2

®

3

4

6

5

8

7

0 ···~····-....-.····-..---····--······--······~······~······~······~······~·······-·······~-······~-···-···-···-·······-············

•

!Purchase Request!

1 PIOduct ID

()\gntity

2

[se1er10

'Region

[

I]

II

Figure 203: The New Form: Adding Two More Fields

11. Make the Seller ID and Region fields mandatory.

284



a) Select the Seller ID and input field. b) On the Object tab, select the Value tab. c) In the Type drop-down menu, choose User Entered - Required. d) Repeat steps a through c for the Region field . e) Choose Save . 12. Add a button and name it Submit. a) In the Object Library palette, choose the Standard tab. b) Select Button and drag it to the form template and place it below the input fields. c) Place the cursor in the button label, double-click, and change the name to Submit. 13. Change the control type of the button to submit. a) On the Object tab, select the Field tab. b) In the Control Type list, select the Submit radio button. c) Choose Save.

Jiii

!Purchase Request! lse1er 10

Procluct ID

•

I •

•

Sulri

•

[

ij

•

I•

Figure 204: The New Form: After Formatting

14. Change the submit type to PDF. a) On the Object tab, select the Submit tab. b) In the Submit As drop-down menu, choose PDF. c) Choose Save.

Note: A warning appears at the button about a return URL. It is not necessary to submit a URL here; it will be pre-filled at runtime.

Store an Offline Form in the ECM Repository

1. Import the file PurchaseRequestForm##.xdp. a) Go to the NWDS.


285


b) In the Resource view, choose [LocalDevelopment]ecm_project_##---+ src---+ Content. From the context menu, choose Import. c) In the Import screen, choose General---+ File System, then choose Next. d) In the Import File System screen, in the From directory, choose Browse. e) Choose Train-##/My Documents/SAPBPM_##. Choose OK. f) In the File System screen, choose PurchaseRequestForm##.xdp. g) Check that the Into Folder field reads Local Development-pr-content-vendor## .com/ src/content. Choose Finish . h) Choose Yes to confirm the overwrite warning. Change the Content.xm/ File

1. Change the Content.xml file. a) In the Resource view, choose [LocalDevelopment]ecm_project_##---+ src---+ META-INF. b) Double-click the file content.xml. c) In the editor, expand ecm_content---+ repository. d) In the Name field, enter BPM. e) Expand mass_import. In the Target_Path field , enter / Forms. f) Save the entries. Assign an Offline Form to a Task

1. Check the files in the ECM repository with the ECM Explorer: http:// nwktdcOO.wdf .sap.corp:SOOOO/webdynpro/resources/sap . com/ tc- ecm- view- ecmexplorer/ ECMExplorerApp

a) In your internet browser, open a new tab. b) Enter the url above and , if requested, log on as Administrator## . In the ECM explorer, change the entry in the Connector field to BPM and check if your newly created files are available. 2. Create a new task named Add Additional Purchase Request Information ## Task. a) Choose the NetWeaver Developer Studio. In the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Product_## [vendor##.com] ---+ Process ---+ [LocalDevelopment] po_product_##/pr/pm ---+ Process Modeling. b) In the Tasks folder context menu, choose New Task. c) In the New Task dialog box, in the Name f ield, enter Add Additional Purchase Request Information ## Task .

d) Choose Finish. 3. Open the PurchaseRequestForm##.xdp template. If prompted , log onto AS Java with the user name Administrator ##.

286



a) In the Task Editor, in the User Interface section, choose Choose . b) In the Select a U/ Wizard dialog box, choose Offline Technologies (Adobe Forms) . c) Choose OK. d) In the Offline Form Details dialog box, at the end of the Template File field , choose Browse . e) Log on to AS Java if prompted. f) In the Form Template Selection dialog box, expand ecm_Project_##

~

BPM .

g) Choose PurchaseRequestForm##.xdp . h) Choose OK. i) In the Offline Form Details dialog box, at the end of the XML Schema File field, choose Browse. j) In the Form Template Selection dialog box, expand ecm_Project_##

~

BPM.

k) Choose FormData##.xsd. I) Choose OK. m) Choose Finish . 4 . Verify the user Supervisor## has an email address so that you can email the user the offline form. a) Log onto SAP NetWeaver Administrator from the URL http://nwktdc##.wdf.sap.corp: 50000/nwa. The user ID is Administrator ## . b) In SAP NetWeaver Administrator, choose the Configuration tab. c) Choose the Security tab. d) On the Security tab, choose Identity Management. e) On the Identity Management screen , in the Search Criteria field, choose User. f) In the next text field , enter Supervisor##. g) Choose Go . h) In the search results, open Supervisor##. i) In the Details of User Supervisor## screen, find the user's email address. 5. Make the user Supervisor## a potential owner of the Add Additional Purchase Request Information ## Task. a) In the Task Editor, choose the Ro/es tab. b) In the Potential Owners section, choose Choose One or More UME Principals. c) Choose Choose . d) In the Principals dialog box, from the Principal Name drop-down menu, choose User.


287


e) In the next text field, enter Supervisor##. f) Choose Search . g) In the Search Results table, choose Supervisor##. h) Choose Add. i) Choose OK. 6. Write an email and attach the offline form using the data from the table below. Field

Value

Subject

Purchase Request for Review

Description

Please review the attached purchase request and add the required Seller ID and Region information. Thank you.

a) In the Task Editor, choose the User Texts tab. b) In the Parameterized Texts section, in the Subject and Description fields, enter the data from the table. c) Choose Save. 7. Assign the task Add Additional Purchase Request Information## Task to the human activity Add Additional Purchase Request Information## in your business process. a) In the Composite Explorer, choose PO_Product_## [vendor.com] [LocalOevelopment] po_product-##/pr/pm ~ Process Modeling

~

Process ~ ~ Processes.

b) Double-click Purchase Order Process## . c) On the Purchase Order Process## modeling surface, choose Add Additional Purchase Request Information## . d) On the Properties tab, choose Task. e) On the Task screen, in the Task drop-down menu, choose Add Additional Purchase Request Information## Task. f) Choose Save.

Define Input and Output Mapping 1. From the Add Additional Purchase Request Information## activity, view the Input Mapping tab. a) Select the Add Additional Purchase Request Information## activity. b) On the Properties tab, choose Input Mapping. 2. Use the automapping function to map RequestOata nsl:FormElement ~ nsl:ltem.

288

~

Item to Tasklnput

~

UIRequest

~



a) In the Add Additional Purchase Request Information## screen, in the Process Context column, expand RequestData ~ Item . b) In the Inputs of Add Additional Purchase Request Information## column, expand Tasklnput

~

UIRequest

~

nsl:FormElement

~

nsl:ltem.

c) From the Process Context column, right-click and drag RequestData ~ Item to Tasklnput ~ UIRequest ~ nsl:FormElement ~ nsl:ltem in the Inputs of Add Additional Purchase Request Information## column. d) In the context menu, choose Execute Default Matcher. 3. Configure Output Mapping using the following information. Map this Object

To this Object

TaskOutput ~ UIResponse ~ nsl:FormElement ~ nsl:Header nsl:Region

RequestData

~

Header

~

Region

RequestData

~

Header

~

SellerlD

RequestData

~

Item

TaskOutput ~ UIResponse ~ nsl:FormElement ~ nsl:Header nsl:SellerlD

~

~

TaskOutput ~ UIResponse ~ nsl:FormElement ~ nsl:ltem

a) On the Properties tab, choose Output Mapping. b) In the Outputs of Add Additional Purchase Request Information## column, expand TaskOutput ~ UIResponse ~ FormElement ~Header and TaskOutput

~

UIResponse

~

FormElement

~Item.

c) In the Process Context column, expand RequestData RequestData

~

~Header

and then expand

Item.

d) In the Outputs of Add Additional Purchase Request Information## column, left-click and drag the appropriate object to the matching object in the Process Context column. e) Repeat the steps for the remaining objects. f) Choose Save.


289



•

290



Unit 5 Lesson 4 Creating a User Interface with SAPUIS

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to create and enable a user interface with SAPU15. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

•


UI Development Toolkit for HTML (SAPUl5) Technology Overview The UI development toolkit for HTML5 (SAPUl5) is a user interface technology for building and adapting client applications. This toolkit consists of libraries and a framework. The SAPUl5 runtime is a client-side HTML5 rendering library with a rich set of standard and extension controls. It provides a lightweight programming model for desktop as well as mobile applications. Based on JavaScript, it supports RIA-like client-side features . SAPUl5 complies with OpenAjax and can be used together with standard JavaScript libraries. SAP UIS Features

•

Support for CSS3, which allows you to adapt themes to your company's branding in an effective manner

•

Extensibility concept based regarding custom controls

•

Use of the open source jQuery library as a foundation

SAP UIS Platforms

•

SAP Hana Cloud platform

•

SAP Hana Platform

•

As User interface add-on for SAP NetWeaver ABAP AS

•

As User interface add-on for SAP NetWeaver Java AS

•

Static Open Source Web Server

Note: For information about implementing SAPU15, refer to note 1747308


291


SAPUl5 User Interface Development Different Platforms for UI Development The following options are available for using SAPU15: •

Creating SAPUl5 applications in an HTML page

•

Creating mobile apps

•

Creating applications with SAPU15 tools

To get started with SAPU15, you can simply create an HTML page (even in Notepad, for example) , or you can start directly using SAPU15 tools in Eclipse. Creating Simple SAPU15 Applications The easiest way to work with SAPUl5 is to include a set of JavaScript libraries in your HTML page. Then you can use all the controls provided by these libraries to construct one or more control trees and include them in your HTML page. The framework also supports the JavaScript Object Notation (JSON) to initialize controls with a reduced typing effort. Creating Mobile Apps with SAPU15 SAPUl5 provides an additional control library called sap. m, which is optimized for mobile devices. Create Applications using SAPU15 Tools Using the SAPUl5 application tools in Eclipse allows you to create sophisticated SAPUl5 application projects based on the Model View Controller concept. The too ls provide additional features such as SAPUl5 Snippets or JavaScript Templates. The tools also provide wizards to create SAPUl5 applications for desktop as well as for mobile devices. The tool set supports most of the standard browsers. After you have created UIS objects, several options to deploy and run the SAPUl5 applications are available. All applications can be tested in Eclipse.

SAPUl5 User Interface Enablement SAPUl5 is a client- side web UI library, which means that it runs in a browser. Therefore, an SAPUl5 application is composed of an HTML page and, if required , many additional files. The minimum steps required to create a SAPU15 object in an HTML page are the following: 1. For loading the SAPU15, the bootstrap needs to be included (with a <script> tag). This can be enhanced with attributes. 2. In the code, the SAPU15 elements are created and modified. 3. Properties are added using JSON. 4. Add the UI controls. 5. Add the uiArea code. 6. Add the CSS class.

292


Lesson: Creating a User Interface with SAPUIS

Note: For more information about SAPU15 user interface enablement, refer to the SAPUl5 developer guide at: https://sapui5.netweaver.ondemand.com/sdk/#docs/guide/ 95d113be50ae40d5b0b562b84d715227. htm I


•



293


294



1.

What is Visual Composer used for?


D D D D

A Configuring events B Creating applications

c

Creating a business process

D Viewing process context graphically

2. _ _ _ __ _ achieve it.

programming means specifying what should be achieved instead of how to


D D D D

A Custom B Declarative

c

Expression

D Generic

3. Web Dynpro uses what kind of data model?


D D D D

A Context data B Data mapping

c

Metadata

D Process data


295


4. Which elements are required to build an offline form?


D D D D

A XDP files B XLSM files C XML schema D XSD files

5. Where are offline forms stored?


D D Dc D

A Business process B ECM repository SAP Enterprise Portal Drive

D Universal Worklist

6 . Which statements are true about email forms?


D D c D D

A Emails are managed by BPM. B Email forms help retrieve input from users. Email functionality is reusable .

D Email forms are sent as attachments.

7. The SAPUl5 runtime is a server-side HTML5 rendering library with a rich set of standard and extension controls.


D D

296

True False



1.

What is Visual Composer used for?


D

A Configuring events

~

B Creating applications

D D

c

Creating a business process

D Viewing process context graphically

2. _ _ _ _ _ _ programming means specifying what should be achieved instead of how to achieve it. Choose the correct answer.

D

A Custom

~

B Declarative

D D

c

Expression

D Generic

3. Web Dynpro uses what kind of data model?


D D

A Context data B Data mapping

c ~

D

Metadata

D Process data


297


4. Which elements are required to build an offline form?


0

A XDP files

D

B XLSM files

0

c

D

D XSD files

XML schema

5. Where are offline forms stored?


D 0 c D D

A Business process B ECM repository SAP Enterprise Portal Drive

D Universal Worklist

6 . Which statements are true about email forms?


0 0 0 0

A Emails are managed by BPM. B Email forms help retrieve input from users.

c

Email functionality is reusable .

D Email forms are sent as attachments.

7. The SAPUl5 runtime is a server-side HTML5 rendering library with a rich set of standard and extension controls.


298

D

True

0

False


Business Rules Creation and Management

Lesson 1 Managing Business Rules

300

Lesson 2 Creating Rules with Rules Composer

307

Exercise 13: Integrate Business Rules Management into a Process

313

Lesson 3

352 359

Managing Business Rules with Rules Manager Exercise 14: Modify Business Rules using Rules Manager

UNIT OBJECTIVES •

Manage business rules

•

Create ru les with Rules Composer

•

Manage business rules with Rules Manager


299

Unit 6

Lesson 1 Managing Business Rules

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to use and manage complex business rules. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

•


Business Rules Overview Business rules represent the constraints on behavior of the business and the policies and guidelines which drive business decisions. Business rules are owned by LoB and not by IT. Business users participate in and control rule definition and change, while business process experts model, validate, deploy, update, and archive business rules through their lifecycle. This enables IT organizations to work with business users to manage the business rules that drive process flow and execution. Application Rules and Business Rules A business rule is not the same as a rule defined and used in software applications. It is important to understand the difference between rules and business rules. Rules used in software applications are a set of conditions with associated actions. These are typically introduced in the form of an If/Then statement, for example database constraint rules and object model rules. The rules are owned and managed by IT and not by the business. Business rules represent a set of standard business practices and policies that need to be applied consistently across business activities and are owned and managed by the business. Examples of business rules include Loan Product Eligibility Guidelines and Product Configuration Rules. Business Rules in an Organization Business rules are the most dynamic component of any application. Using business rules consistently improves an organization's adaptability to industry changes and competition. Externalizing business logic in the form of simple rules ensures that these rules are easily communicated across the organization and managed separately from the application code: business adaptability and flexibility via IT stability. Business rules are an integral and inherent part of an organization's daily operations. When introducing business rules, organizations have to consider the rules inherent in the follow items:

300

•

Corporate charters

•

Management practices



•

Regulatory forces

•

Human resources management

•

Marketing strategies

•

Pricing policies

•

Products and services offerings

•

Customer relat ionship practices

BRM Offers SAP BRM contain rules modeling capabilities targeting business analysts and rules implementation capabilities targeting business rules developers. Technical capabilities of SAP BRM for business rules composition and modeling use the following guidelines: •

Business analysts are enabled to model complex business rules in an appropriate format of their choice.

•

Both business analysts and rules developers are capable of inspecting business rules consistency and resolving conflicts.

•

Developers are able to use rule models with data definitions of their choice for implementing executable rules.

•

A seamless navigation from business process to business rules through integrated modeling for processes and rules is used.

If-Then Rules use the following guidelines: •

Simple English like statements joined with and/or

•

Priorities for specifying sequences of execution

•

Rules overrides to declare mutually exclusive rules

Decision tables use the following guidelines: •

Tabular representation of rules

•

Integration with MS Excel

•

Features such as returning multiple rows of values and dynamic invocation


301

Unit 6: Business Rules Creation and Management

Student Grading Flow - Rule Flow

SI rt

~stoTota

C&lculate Percentage

Alternative Grade to FAILt+----+-<

Gal

W([lf

Pass

~ O'eate Report 14----1 "~ · Set Grade

End

Figure 205: Flow Rules Example

Flow rules are laid out in a flow-like structure. Complex rules can be modeled using the following methods: •

Gateways to branch out into different paths

•

Rule scripts to hold a set of actions

•

If-Then rules

•

Decision tables

•

Other flows and rule sets

Flow rules can interate through flow elements until some condition is satisfied and make it easier to get an overview of the rule implementation .

302



Figure 206: End-to-End Change Managem ent

End-to-End development support is provided through the Eclipse-based Rules Composer, a user interface with role-based access to manage and deploy business rules at runtime, manage access permissions and versioning, and trace business rules reports. Rules accelerates BPM by providing the following features: •

Clear decoupling of process logic from decision logic

•

Automated decisioning

•

Reusable business rules services

•

Rules-based correlations for real-time business events

Use cases for rules in BPM include the following examples: •

Complex rules-based decisions (for example, pricing and credit decisions)

•

Responsibility determination

•

Recognition of business events

•

Routing rules

•

Parameter thresholds and tolerance (constraint rules)


303


.

\

-.. ...

Composition Environment 7.1

SAP Applkmllan C:O..PIUClllll ....__,,,~

Process Integration 7.1

:

Figure 20 7: Tight Integration with SAP BPM

SAP BRM provide complete lifecycle change management capabilities for securing, governing and managing business rules. Rules versioning, permissions, alerts, and so on is provided with the Rules Repository, containing data types, service interfaces and service operations for composition and reuse. SAP BRM provides both design-time and runtime rules repository services. Business users are able to completely coordinate management, review, and change approval activities in a collaborative fashion using a secure and protected web based business UI. Access management, reporting services, traceability and change approval mechanisms enable organizations to perform rules asset management, having the security of managing their business rules as concisely as any other organizational asset. •

Tabular representation of rules

•

Integration with MS Excel

•

Features such as returning multiple rows of values and dynamic invocation

Reusability of Rules Technical usage scenarios for rules with BRM include the following:

304

•

Model rules driven decisions from within a composite business process model.

•

Model rules in SAP Composition Environment independently and reuse them across a variety of edge composite applications and BPM functionalities.

•

Model rules in SAP Composition Environment and call these rules from an ASAP business application through the Business Rules Framework Plus--Java BRM Connector.



•

Call a rule driven decision modeled as a web service in SAP Composition Environment from within the SAP Business Warehouse component.

Rules Composer and Process Composer Business rules can be created in the Rules Composer or the Process Composer.

Rules composer "

Rules Manager •

Rules engine

+ : ~ 0 ..... J;

~

Figure 208: BRM Components

Business rules describe the operation, definition, and constraints on the behavior of a business and enables decision automation. Business rules represent the core business logic of each organization and guide and control the basic business processes that form the back bone of any business transaction. •

Rules Composer - Business rules modeled the Rules Composer can be used in any other business application or business process.

•

Process Composer - Business rules modeled in the Process Composer can only be used in a business process context.

Rules Composer allows a separation of business rules from the application code and from a complex business process workflow. Rules Composer also reduces the complexity in maintaining constraints, which affects the business process. Process Composer helps you centralize the entire process. It shows the business process and the constraints affecting the process in the same development component.

Complex Business Rules Implementation Tasks SAP BRM contains rule modeling capabilities targeting business analysts and rule implementation capabilities targeting business rule developers. SAP BRM business rules composition and modeling includes the following technical capabilities: •

Business analysts can model complex business rules in different formats, for example: complex guidelines using inference rules, involved decision sequences using graphical modeling, and rule-based responses to complex patterns of business events, like fraud detection.

•

Business analysts and rule developers are capable of inspecting business rule consistency and resolving conflicts.


305


•

Developers are able to use rule models with data definitions of their choice for implementing executable rules.

•

A seamless navigation from the business process to business rules through integrated modeling.

Business Rules Management Components BRM consists of three components to help you model your business rules. Rules Composer Rules Composer is a user-friendly interface that enables you to create rich rule formats. It supports multiple data models for rules implementation and business vocabulary independent of the data model. Rules Composer provides validation of business rules, testing and refinement of rules based on test results, and report generation for rule results. Rules Manager Rules Manager is a Web-based tool used by business analysts to maintain rules. Rules versioning, repository service, permissions, access control, and rules governance all can be managed through the Rules Manager. Like Rules Composer, Rules Manager can validate, test, refine, and generate reports for rules. Rules Engine The Rules Engine is a high-performance, stateless EJB engine. It includes Rete-based inference and sequential engines.

LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to: •

306



Unit 6

Lesson 2 Creating Rules with Rules Composer

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to use the Rules Composer to create flow rulesets and use rulesets as a Web service. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

•


Rules Composer Overview

Rules composer

Rules Manager

Rules engine Figure 209: Rules Composer Overview

Rules Composer allows you model, implement, test, and refine rules . In Rules Composer you can define the following rules-based objects: •

Flow rulesets including rule flow elements, rule scripts, and gateways

•

Common definitions

•

Rule overrides

•

Activities

•

Enumeration types

Rules Composer comes with the following features : •

Integrating rules with Microsoft Office Excel

•

Testing XSD ru lesets

•

HTML reporting of entities within rulesets and decision tables


307


•

Storing different versions of rulesets in DTR using addition, modification, and deletion data

•

Generating Web services for rulesets

Flow Rulesets Task Modeling

(

-

SI

~rt

~Calco~e Total

~lates % o f t he

-·

-

-

t-----·

~lates t ot ..1of all t he subjecl --

ks

~ Calculate Perc entage

x G a<

~

Wet(

S et Grade

Pass

Fail

~Grade as Fait

(

.,. End

.

Figure 210 : Flow Ruleset s··Overview

A flow ruleset executes rules as designed in the Composite Explorer flow chart. Flow rulesets always have a single, main flow with potentially many other rule flows. The execution of the ruleset starts with the main flow. A rule flow is a reusable entity within a flow ruleset and is based on activities associated with artifacts including rule scripts, rule flow, rulesets, rules, and decision tables .

Flow Rule Elements

308

•

Start and end events and error elements - A rule flow has a single start event and can have one or more end events and error elements.

•

Rule scripts - A rule script is a reusable artifact within a flow ruleset and is a sequence of actions.

•

Exclusive choice gateway - An exclusive choice gateway has at least two named branches, one being the default branch. Each named branch has a condition associated with it.

•

Ruleset - Rulesets are a collection of multiple rules related to a specific business situation .

•

If-Then rules - If-Then rules use the following syntax: IF the conditions are satisfied, THEN the action is started.

•

Decision tables - Decision tables are a collection of If-Then rules that have conditions with the same structure. These can be viewed in as a spreadsheet.

•

Connectors - Connectors join all activities and elements in a rule flow to each other.



Decision Tables and Rule Scripts Implementation An exclusive choice gateway has at least two named branches, one of these being a default. Each named branch has a condition associated with it. A rule script is a sequence of actions. A rule override helps resolve conflicts between two satisfied If-Then rules by suppressing execution of lower priority rule . Date effectivity can be used to specify the time period during which a rule is effective, and can thereby be executed. The rules composer provides the capability for rules, decision tables to use restricted value from a list of drop-down choices in conditions and action. These restricted drop-down choices are enumeration types, or groups of values of a standard primitive type.

__

,

I Enutner
A+

e 50000

c

A+ 8

50000

cC+

cc+

FAJL

FAIL

•

c

J) .,crt .(<>H Tn.b.)...

'":-:set Effectiv1ty Name:

~

:

.-.

> O.e;uon....,t..U..., ....d .,,...,,.,...-1ci.;

~Grodo

peot<«*

>-90 ~- 00

- '(Str!t'>Q}

A+ ti

P' Effective Date Pm>d

•c

C-

P° End On:

j 2008-12-19TOO:OO:OO

Sec. c;l'" ..0

Ic..-... I 1--... J Ic._ ,._ I I"°"'""'"""'··· I I"'-•··· I I•-"·· I

IChristmas Effectiv~y

start On :

;

C.

I2009·01-02T23:59:59

Figure 211: Rule Overrides and Enumeration Types

The Rules Composer provides the capability to export a decision table to a spreadsheet. Users are able to seamlessly edit and analyze data using the capabilities of Excel. It is possible to import these changes back into the decision table without any loss of data. t'.l M1Crosoft EKcel - Set Grade_28Jan20 i ~ Elle tdit ~ [nsert f!llmot

peoision Table : Set Grade • Documentation and Properties

: t!_ata

Student/Grade • {stmg}

percent >-90

A+

>=80

8

jExpc>t Oecisi:ln Table to Exe~ 2007 doatnent

...J

- 6

d ,lt) .

x

\@

...I ..::, :J H15

I

!ools

~

Window

~ J 1B fiil l0 ~

- @~

•

A

P,

B Student/Grade= {Stri ng}

1 percent 2 >=90

A+

3 >=80 4 >=70

B C+

5 >=60

c

6 >=35 7

A+

8 9 10 11 14

-c • >I

Se:t Grad~

J• I NUM

Q.

Figure 212: Int egration with MS Excel

The Rules Composer provides a capability to generate a printable report for ruleset and decision tables. The reports include information about all entities within a ruleset.


309


The Rules Composer also allows you to compare different versions of rulesets in the DTR in a text format. Diff captures three types of edit operations between two different versions of ruleset, name addition , modification, and deletion . ~~

- lftulesei General lnJorn1ation

t

l~GradeOeterr11lna1ion

Ruleset Hame

Oescrietion !Project located In

!istud e nt:g rading llzji.01.ioo9:nme: 1J:o4:J9:Wo~

!Report Generated on date: ..!Flow Sununary Section : ~)

.i;Pricdy: so:oo

1~al!W;Ldal1: TQt § I

II I•

IOC11ter.t ~

(RuleScriets ..JOeclsion Table Sun1marv Section :11\

!IDocumentation

l'l~ ::

!Decision Tables

llo ocumentation

1~gLGIQdg

I•

:

w !

'mo.

Su1nmary Soctlo'Ll.®

s

•rtsi

·1c•1eQJ.)
I

·thr_,

I 1rttcondtions:

1

t

f::J

N !i~W<.-..'f't1>.•«~~t-:~h-~,it_

'~l'l'"l'f~Mf':).

s "' c.Pre
!loocumentatlon

IMaiaElu~

'""'lt"l l OO> 3

l

IFlows -]Ru lc ~cr lpt

,,....,,,.,

n Rult : ~lle:I

II>.~ b,' .~

......

'

9 bU

[

I !~C!t~dthttw -'$~tr:i ~). IO

''

-

;iTlien

IS~t: PfrtMrw

6

6

•••

1

"

L

- ]Rule Sumn1a!Y Section :@)

!Rules IAdd l\lac~£ 12 Total !Calculoto perc'!ntogo

!loocumentadon

I

~

au1 £i•odq as E~il

Figure 213: HTML Reports of Rulesets, Diff Between Two Ruleset Versions

Rules Composer provides a simple menu driven fac il ity to provision a web service for a ruleset written on XML schema. When the rules are deployed on a server, the web server also gets deployed. It can be verified using the SAP NetWeaver Admin istrat or.

liii

9rQtt f.xPorer

.:ta

0 c._-__ ..;......i._ _ _ -lo

s~

Web S..rvl<>es Navigator

8 )ii' { l . 0 < - - ' ° " 9

$' 'llf&?a """Ptoje
1

e

ir :~c•:aa:a::s

I

CQA'OOl'O With

I ol{ 8~ , $, tiH

~""""···

,_Rt.AeSOtpt,,.

. --

.. .

~.....

"""°''... °''*'....1"t-

NcwDe
....... s.-

Haw~...

.>9l

l i H ' " - - , - - - -1

fin

..

r..- 1~~

e-• --

•

-- ---

- - - - - -°'

-

=· ••·· • _ _ _ _ _ __ ___..,._

Figure 214: Web Service Generation for a Ru leset

•

Rule override - Resolves conflicts between two satisfied If-Then rules by allowing the rule with the highest priority to start.

•

Date effectivity - Used to specify the time period during which a rule is effective and can be executed.

The Rules Composer provides the capability for ru les and decision tables to use restricted condition and action va lues. Rest ricted values are available from a drop-down menus. These restricted drop-down menu choices are enumerat ion types, or groups of standard, primitive type values.

Rulesets as a Web Service Rules Composer provides a simple menu driven UI to create Web services for rulesets written using an XML schema. When ru les are deployed on a server, the Web service is also deployed. Web services can be verified using SAP NetWeaver Administrator. To set ru lesets as a web service, use the following procedure: 1. In the Project Explorer view, expand the Rules Composer DC and the Rules Modeling nodes.

310

© Copyright. All rig ht s reserved.


2. In the context menu of a ruleset or flow ruleset, choose Web Service Create WSDL Artifact. 3. In the dialog box that appears, in the Ruleset Name: Service Attributes area, accept the defaults values or makes changes. Then, choose Next. 4. In the Ruleset Name: Service Signature area, the input and output types appear and the checkboxes are selected. Choose Next. 5. In the Ruleset Name: WSOL Preview area, the contents of the WSDL artifact appear. Choose Finish. 6. Deploy the rules composer DC. The web service is now ready for use.


311


312


Unit 6

Exercise 13 Integrate Business Rules Management into a Process

Business Example

You are a business process administrator. You have been asked to add rules to the business process. Use the Rules Framework to add the new rules. Using the automated activity Determine If Approval is Required XX, Business Rules Management is incorporated into the process in this exercise. Here, it is determined whether or not manual approval is required . If the total amount of the purchase request is less than a certain amount, the purchase request does not require manual approval. In this case, the process can proceed and the purchase request is released in the backend system. Otherwise, the approving user has to view the purchase request and must manually approve or reject it. Based on this scenario, you learn in this exercise how to create and use enumeration types and how to work with flow rulesets. You also get to know the rules testing feature that allows you to check the correctness of rules before they are deployed and executed. Finally, you integrate your business rule into the process by exposing it as a Web service. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you.

Note: In this exercise, the process created in exercises 2-5, 7, 8, 10, 11, and 12 is used.

Define Dependencies Between the Rules Composer Development Component and the Process Composer Development Component

1. Open the Development Infrastructure perspective. 2. In the Rules Composer Development Component tab, open po_product_##/bllrules . 3. Add the dependency def_cmp to po_product_##/bllrules. Add the Purchase Request Element to the Rules Component Composer 1. Add the PurchaseRequestElement.xsd file to the Rules Composer Development Component. Create Enumeration Types For the incorporation of BRM into your process, you create a business rule wh ich approves a request depending upon its total amount, the region, and the seller ID. To begin, you create enumeration types for the region and the seller ID to capture the valid values in these types. That way, you avoid entering the cryptic seller IDs and region keys in your rule, allowing you to use the more meaningful and less error-prone alias names.


313


1. Create a new Enumeration Type using the information from the fo llowing table. Field

Value

Name

Region

Java Type

java .lang.String

Enumeration

Americas=North, Central, and South America, AP J=Asia Pacific and Japan, EMA=Europe, the Middle East, and Africa

2. Create another Enumeration Type using the information from the following table. Field

Value

Name

Seller

Java Type

java.lang.String

Enumeration

l=ITelO Inc., 12=Asia High Tech. Inc., 26=Russian Electronics Trading Company z.a.o, 34=Brazil Technologies, S.A.

3. Change the Enumeration type for PurchaseRequestE/ement/Header/Region to Region and PurchaseRequestElement/Header/SellerlD to Seller/Dusing the data from the following tables. Alias Name

Note

Enumeration Type

PurchaseRequestElement/ Header/Region

Return Type: [java.lang.String]

Region

PurchaseRequestElement/ Header/Sellerl D

Return Type: [java. lang.String]

Seller

Alias Name

Note

Enumeration Type

Purchase Req uestElem ent/ Header/Region={String}

Parameter: [java.lang.String]

Region

PurchaseRequestElement/ Header/Sellerl D={String}


Seller

Create a Business Rule Named NeedsApprovaf FlowRuleset## To implement the rule-based decision that determines whether manual approval is required for the purchase request or not, you create a flow ruleset that groups two decision tables and one rule script in its main flow. The first decision table (AutoApprova/LimitDecisionTable##) is used to determine a regionspecific limit for the automatic approval. To do this, the decision table assigns a value to a variable named approvallimit, which depends on the purchase request's region information

314



(Americas, AP J, EMEA). In general, there are different limits for the individual regions. The used variable is created using a variable common definition . The second decision table (DiscountDecisionTable##) computes the discount allowed by a seller. This discount not only depends on the seller but also on the region. That is, the sellers allow different discounts for the individual regions. The discount granted is stored in a second variable named discount, which is also created by means of a variable common definition. In the rule script, the discount calculated by the second decision table is then deducted from the purchase request's total amount. Afterwards, the discounted total amount is compared with the region-specific threshold determined by the first decision table. Depending on this comparison, the purchase request is either approved or not. 1. Create two common variable definitions using the data in the following tables. Use the data in the first table for the first common variable definition. Definition

Value

Return Type

Double

Definition Name

ApprovalLimit

Use the data in the following table for the next common variable definition. Definition

Value

Return Type

Double

Definition Name

Discount

2. Create a flow ruleset 3. Create a decision table using the data from the table. Element

Value

Field: Decision Table Name

AutoApprovalLimitDecision Table##

List: Available Conditions

PurchaseRequestElement/Header/Region

List: Available Actions

ApprovalLimit

4. Add the following condition values to the AutoApprovalLimitDecisionTable## decision table. North , Central , and South America Asia Pacific and Japan Europe , the Middle East , and Africa

5. Enter values for the ApprovalLimit action for the AutoApprovalLimitDecisionTable## decision table using the data from the following table. Entry

Approval Limit

North, Central, and South America

2000

Asia Pacific and Japan

1000


315


Entry

Approval Limit

Europe, the Middle East, and Africa

5000

6. Create a decision table using the data from the following table. Element

Value

Decision Table Name field

DiscountDecisionTable##

Available Conditions list

PurchaseRequestElement/Header/Region and PurchaseRequestElement/HeaderI SellerlD

Available Actions list

Discount

7. Add the following condition values to the Region Condition of the DiscountDecisionTable## decision table.

Asia Pacific and Japan Europe , the Middle East, and Africa 8. Add the following condition values to the SellerlD condition of the DiscountDecisionTable## decision table.

Asia High Tech . Inc. Russian Electronics Trading Company z.a.o . Brazil Technologies , S . A. 9. Enter values for the DiscountLimitDecisionTable## decision table using the data from the following table. PurchaseReques ITelO Inc. tElement/ Discount Header/Seller ID

Asian High Tech Inc Discount

Russian Electronics Discount

Brazil Technology Discount


0.20

0

0

0.20


0.20

0.20

0.10

0


0.20

0

0.20

0

10. Create a rule script named NeedsApprovalRuleScript##. 11. Add the following script to the NeedsApprovalRuleScript## rule script.

Local Definitions: double checkLevel = O

316



Actions: Assign : : checkLe v el = PurchaseRequestEl ernent/ Header/ PurchaseOrderTotalArnount * (1 - discount) If checkLe v el Less Than Equals Approva l Lirni t Then Execute :: PurchaseReques t El ernent/ Header/Approved =Bool ean , TRUE Execute :: PurchaseRequestE l ement/ Header/ApproverCornrnent Automatically Approved Else Execute : : PurchaseRequestE l ement/ Header/Approved =Bool ean, FALSE Execute : : PurchaseRequest El ernent/ Header/ApproverCornrnent Requires Manual Approval 12. Define the flow of the NeedsApprovafFlowRuleset## process. 13. Connect the elements in the main flow together. Create and Run a Test Case

1. Open the Rules Composer. 2. Create a new XML test case named PurchaseOrderTestCase. 3. Set the Target Ruleset for the PurchaseOrderTestCase XML test case to NeedsApprovaf FlowRuleset##. 4. Create an XML document named PurchaseOrder. xml. 5. Add the PurchaseOrder.xml f ile to the test case. 6. Create a CSV file named PurchaseOrderDataSource . csv. 7. Add the following data to the PurchaseOrderDataSource.csv tab and save your work. Region, Seller, TotalAmount, Comparator, Approval APJ , 34 , 1000 . 00 , Equals , false Americas , 26 , 3000.00 , Equals , false APJ , 12 , 1200 . 00 , Equals , true EMEA , 1. 6000 . 00 , Equals , true

8. Add the data source src/brmstests/PurchaseOrderDataSource.csv to the test case. 9. Map the following XPath input data elements. •

tns:PurchaseRequestElement [ ... ] --> tns:Header --> tns:PurchaseOrderTotalAmount

•

tns:PurchaseRequestElement [ ... ]

•

> tns:Header --> tns:SellerlD

•

tns:PurchaseRequestElement [ ... ] --> tns:Header --> tns:Region


317


•

Note: In order to run the test case, you must map the XML elements used in your business rule to the header names in the data source. Having implemented this mapping, the values from the data source can be taken as input data and expected output data when you run the test case.

10. Implement the required input using the data in the following table. Mapping Element

Value

tns:PurchaseRequestElement/tns:HeaderI tns:PurchaseOrderTotalAmount [double]

T otalAmount

tns:PurchaseRequestElement/tns:HeaderI tns:SellerlD [java.lang.String]

Seller

tns: Pu rchaseRequestElement/tns:HeaderI tns:Region [java.lang.String]

Region

11. Add the XML element tns:PurchaseRequestElement --> tns:Header --> tns:Approved to the Output Mapping table. 12. Set the values for the definition tns:PurchaseRequestElement/tns:Header/tns:Approved [boolean] using the data in the following table. Column

Value

Comparator

Comparator

Value

Approval

13. Run a test case and view the test report.

Integrate the Flow Ruleset into the Process In this part of the exercise, you integrate your flow ruleset NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset## into the process. To do that, you expose the flow ruleset as a Web service and deploy it to the AS Java. After deployment, you import the respective service interface definition into your Process Composer DC and consume the rules service using the automated activity Determine If Approval is Required##. 1. Create a WSDL Artifact for NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset## using the data from the following table.

318

Field

Value

Target Namespace

http://www.vendor##.com/ Approval Rules##

Input

PurchaseRequestElement{http:/I www.vendor##.com/ PurchaseRequestData##}



Field

Value

Output

PurchaseRequestElement{http:// www.vendor##.com/ PurchaseRequestData##}

2. Deploy the Rules Composer Development Component. 3. Import the service interface definitions using the data from the following table. Element

Value

URL field

http:/I nwktdcOO. wdf. sap. corp: 50000 I NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset##/ NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset##Port?wsdl

Create New radio button

Select

Name

PurchaseRequestServiceGroup##

Description

Purchase Request

4. View the new service group. 5. View the new service interfaces. 6. Open the service references . 7. Assign the imported user interface NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset##PortType to the automated activity Determine if Approval is Required##. 8. Create your input mappings using the automapping function to map RequestData to Requestvendor##. com-po-product-xx-bl-rules-NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset## Port Type --+ nsl:PurchaseRequestElement. 9. Create your output mappings using the automapping function to map nsl:PurchaseRequestElement and drag it to RequestData.


319

Unit 6 Solution 13 Integrate Business Rules Management into a Process

Business Example

You are a business process administrator. You have been asked to add rules to the business process. Use the Rules Framework to add the new rules. Using the automated activity Determine If Approval is Required XX, Business Rules Management is incorporated into the process in this exercise. Here, it is determined whether or not manual approval is required . If the total amount of the purchase request is less than a certain amount, the purchase request does not require manual approval. In this case, the process can proceed and the purchase request is released in the backend system. Otherwise, the approving user has to view the purchase request and must manually approve or reject it. Based on this scenario, you learn in this exercise how to create and use enumeration types and how to work with flow ru lesets. You also get to know the rules testing feature that allows you to check the correctness of rules before they are deployed and executed. Finally, you integrate your business rule into the process by exposing it as a Web service. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you .

Note: In this exercise, the process created in exercises 2-5, 7, 8, 10, 11, and 12 is used.

Define Dependencies Between the Rules Composer Development Component and the Process Composer Development Component

1. Open the Development Infrastructure perspective. a) In the Window menu, choose Open Perspective

~

Other.

b) In the Open Perspective dialog box, choose Development Infrastructure . c) Choose OK. The development infrastructure with the Component Browser opens. 2. In the Rules Composer Development Component tab, open po_product_##/bl/rules. a) In the Component Browser, expand LocalDevelopment

~

PO_##_SC [vendor##.com].

b) Double-click the Rules Composer DC named po_product_##/bl/rules . 3. Add the dependency def_cmp to po_product_##/bl/rules.

320



a) On the Component Properties tab, choose the Dependencies tab.

liii

f:D corr.p'lfiestBrowser

t3

e1

0

'l'"=r==='91"-.-~:-ll

[iCornponentPropertles ~

1 l-------::::-;:i.-=-:=::=:'9':::-:-19=::.!.....i...., -=·"--'ffl.::..·-'-'IC:::::'.l:.._"'.-ll EP~MOOO.J~[sap.com]

8

00 ~ EP·R.UNllJl't'. [sap.com] @ ~ EP_BUJLOT (sap.com) 00 11:\l ESCCffJlUILOT [s.p.
l:lft

Ir:

ll-"-"~C!..:.::=~ """'-'P"'-art,,_, s '-"' co,,,,ld_,,, oc"-' ' -"" Per,_,,,m,,,,sSiOns~F_,,, old,,,,ier:
Required OCs Specify the Et cl OCs requied for ttis DC

Gl Iii !!l-

00-- 11:\l @

P'~~~•20/bl/rules

fAAMEWOIU( [sap.
~ GP•CORE [sap.com] Iii ~ J2EE.fRMW [sap.com] @ ~ ,,..1R_SERY£R [sop.com]

D• bie/sca/scdl/corttibutors/rules

o. t>e/sc•/«dl/oen

D• tc/bporn/contm/predelsjtyoes

Add ...

@

$ 11:\l l!I 00 El

GlI

I

RemoYe

l ~•AI

MOIN_BUILOT [s.p.corn]

I

MyCornponeots [demo.s•p.com] ~ Pl·SCP·BUILOT[sop.corn] ~ P0_20_5C[v•ndoo'20.com]

~I ;:;o;_20/bll•~·· ~ \ . ;tM 00 DI d o

0

f:ltdel

Figure 215: The Dependencies Tab of po_product_##

b) Choose Add. c) In the Choose DCs to be Referenced dialog box, choose Loca/Development [vendor##.com].

~

PO ## SC

d) Select the po_product_##/pr/pm checkbox.

fii

l!!I~ Ei

~:Add Dependencies

Choose DCs to b e referenced

IType text to filter (,.=any string, ?=any character) D · ltJ D ~ 1±1 D ~ [tJ D ffi1 e D~ 8 D £f1J [tJ

...

COMP_BUILDT [sap.com] ENGFACADE [sap.com) ESCONF_BUILDT [sap.com] FRAMEWORK [sap.com] MOIN_BUILDT [sap.com) P0_20_SC [vendor20.com) 0 20 SC po_pro uct_20 ul w SAP_BUILDT [sap.com) SERVICE·COMP [sap.com] WD·RUNTIME [sap.com]

Refresh

...

I < Bad<.

Next

>

11

Finish

l

Cancel

Figure 216: Adding Dependencies: Step 1

e) Choose Next. f) In the Configure Dependencies dialog box, choose po_product_##/pr/pm > def_cmp and flag the Build Time checkbox.


321


liii

1!100 EJ

r~: Add Dependencies

Configure Dependencies Configure detail.s of new dependencies

I

Dependency Detaas:

New Required OCs:

B

~ft po_product_20/pr/pm

I§

~ Bu~d Time

def_cmp

Next

>

11

JI

Finish

I

Cancel

Figure 217: Adding Dependencies: Step 2

g) Choose Finish. Add the Purchase Request Element to the Rules Component Composer

1. Add the PurchaseRequestElement.xsd file to the Rules Composer Development Component. a) To open the Composite Explorer, choose Window Designer.

~

Open Perspective

~

Composite

Alternatively, choose Composite Designer on the upper right side of the NetWeaver Developer Studio. b) In the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Product_## [vendor##.com] ~ Business Logic ~ [LocalDevelopment] po_product_##/bllrules ~ Rules Modeling. c) Double-click Project Resources . d) In the Project Resources editor, choose t he Aliases tab.

322



IS PO..P
~"'\.

0

El

Aliases [ XSD Elements (from XS Os and WSDLs). Common Definitions. J ava Classes [

IType Text to Filter

set Filter:

IAll Aiase>

I I I Alias Name Gl GJ

0

0 Gl 0 Gl 0 ltl 0 ltl 0 Gl ' 0

Add

Alroyllst ( java.u11.Art•yllst ] Calendar ( iova.uti.C
Romovo Reload

._•...__ l _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____,1

.!.l

I

.I .I .I

SetSmortAlioses

l(ot e; Press SPACE to toggle visllility; FZ to rename alias

Figure 218: The Aliases Tab

e) Choose Add. f) In the drop down menu, choose XSD Element. g) In the Select an XSD Element dialog box, expandhttp://www.vendor##.com/ PurchaseData## ~ PurchaseRequestElement. h) Choose Finish .

Create Enumeration Types For the incorporation of BRM into your process, you create a business rule which approves a request depending upon its total amount, the region, and the seller ID. To begin, you create enumeration types for the region and the seller ID to capture the valid values in these types. That way, you avoid entering the cryptic seller IDs and region keys in your rule , allowing you to use the more meaningful and less error-prone alias names. 1. Create a new Enumeration Type using the information from the following table. Field

Value

Name

Region

Java Type

java.lang.String

Enumeration

Americas=North, Central, and South America, AP J=Asia Pacific and Japan, EMA=Europe, the Middle East, and Africa


323


a) In the po_product_05/bl/rules editor, choose the Enumeration Types tab, which is located below the modeling area. b) Choose Add. c) In the Add Enumeration Type dialog box, enter the data above.

r:-: Add Enumeration Type

fiii

£i

I

Name: Region Java Type: -iia-va-.la-n-g.5-tr-ing------------~::J Enter enumeration values and atiases in the form of k.ey values pairs in each line ... = For instance: IO= A+ 9mA·

[or] Enter values only, one value per line For instance: Americas=North, Central, and South America AP J=Asia Pacific and Japan ;MA=Europe, the Middle East, and Africa

OK

I

Cancel

Figure 219: Adding Enumeration Ty pes (for Region)

d) Choose OK. 2. Create another Enumeration Type using the information from the following table. Field

Value

Name

Seller

Java Type

java. lang.String

Enumeration

l=ITelO Inc. , 12=Asia High Tech. Inc., 26=Russian Electronics Trading Company z.a.o, 34=Brazil Technologies, S.A.

a) On the Enumeration Types tab, choose Add. b) In the Add Enumeration Type dialog box, enter the data above.

324



r:-: Add Enumeration Type Name:

£f

Seller

Java Type: hava.lang.Sl:ring Enter enumeration values and aliases in the form of key values pairs in each Nne • - For instance: IO~A+

9=A-

[or] Enter values only, one value per Nne For instance:

.:J

l=ITelO Inc. 12=Asia High Tech. Inc. ~6=Russian Electronic Trading Company z.a.o. 34=Brazil Technologies, S.A.

OK

J

Cancel

I

Figure 220: Adding Enumeration Types (for Seller)

c) Choose OK. d) Choose Save. e) Expand the entries and assure that they appear properly.

liii

S

po_product_20/bllrules Project Rescuces ~ '

Enumeration Types

I Enumeration Values 13 Region [ java.lang.String] Americas APJ EMA 13 Seller [ java.lang.String ] I 12 26 34

•

I A&as Name

I

North, Central, and South America A.sia Pacific and Japan Europe, the Middle East, and Africa ITelO Inc. Asia High Tech. Inc. Russian Electronic Trading Company z.a.o. Brazil Technologies, S.A.

Overview @ Common Definitions ~ Enumeration Types ~ Aliases J ~ Effectivities J

Figure 221: Result of Adding Enumeration Types

In order to use the newly created enumeration types in the business rule, you must now update the appropriate XML schema elements. 3. Change the Enumeration type for PurchaseRequestE!ement/Header/Region to Region and PurchaseRequestE!ement/Header/Seller/D to Se/ler!D using the data from the fo llowing tables.


325


Alias Name

Note

Enumeration Type

PurchaseRequestElement/ Header/Region

Return Type: [java. lang.String]

Region

PurchaseRequestElement/ Header/Seller! D

Return Type: [java.lang.String]

Seller

Alias Name

Note

Enumeration Type

PurchaseRequestElement/ Header/Region={String}


Region

Purchase Req uestElem ent/ Header/Seller! D={String}


Seller

a) On the po_product_##/bl/rules Project Resources tab, choose Aliases. b) Expand PurchaseRequestElement[http://www.vendor##.com/ PurchaseRequestOata##]. c) Do not deselect the selected lines. In the Alias Name list. select the first alias name from the table. d) In the Note text field, select the entry for the Return Type. A dialog box appears.

ra 0 ~

. -· -·· ---··--.------ ···-···t· ·-- --·1· -·-·---· --· · -·-······--··· urchaseRe uestElement Header Req1on

0 0 0

PurchaseRequestElement/Header/Region = {string} PurchaseRequestElement/Header/Sellerl D PurchaseRequestElement/Header/Sellerl D = {String} PurchaseRequestElement/ltem.getXmlElement

C:;J

t'\.

,----·-1

,,,.,...,,...,........,n.....,.... ._,..,,..~r: L-.-..-....J.lt~ - 1r. ...... ""'.....-'.

Note: Press SPACE to toggle visibility; F2 to rename alias

Return Type : Region ( java . lang . St.ring] XPat.h : nsll : PurchaseRequest.Element./nsll : Header Element. Name : Region

Figure 222 : Ret urn Type for PurchaseRequestElement/Header/Region

e) In the dialog box, choose the enumeration type from the table. Note: Press SPACE to toggle visibility; F2 to rename alias

Return Type : java . lang . St.ri1 XPat.h : nsll : PurchaseRequest.I Element. Name : Region Operation : gecChildElement.V(

Region Seller

Al ias Name : Purchase Request. I Visibility : true

Figure 223 : Ret urn Type for PurchaseRequestElement/Header/Region{St ring}

326

© Copyright . All r ights reserved.


f) Repeat steps c through e for the second alias names and enumeration types. g) Choose the third entry of the table. h) In the Note text field, choose the entry for the Parameter. i) In the dialog box that appears, choose the entry named in the table.

j) Repeat steps h through i for the fourth entry of the table. k) Choose Save.

Create a Business Rule Named NeedsApprovafFlowRuleset## To implement the rule-based decision that determines whether manual approval is required for the purchase request or not, you create a flow ruleset that groups two decision tables and one rule script in its main flow. The first decision table (AutoApprova/LimitOecisionTable##) is used to determine a regionspecific limit for the automatic approval. To do this, the decision table assigns a value to a variable named approvallimit, which depends on the purchase request's region information (Americas, AP J, EMEA). In general , there are different limits for the individual regions. The used variable is created using a variable common definition. The second decision table (DiscountDecisionTable##) computes the discount allowed by a seller. This discount not only depends on the seller but also on the region. That is, the sellers allow different discounts for the individual regions. The discount granted is stored in a second variable named discount, which is also created by means of a variable common definition. In the rule script, the discount calculated by the second decision table is then deducted from the purchase request's total amount. Afterwards, the discounted total amount is compared with the region-specific threshold determined by the first decision table. Depending on this comparison, the purchase request is either approved or not. 1. Create two common variable definitions using the data in the following tables. Use the data in the first table for the first common variable definition. Definition

Value

Return Type

Double

Definition Name

Approval Limit

Use the data in the following table for the next common variable definition. Definition

Value

Return Type

Double

Definition Name

Discount

a) In the po_product_##/bl/rules tab, choose the Common Definitions tab.


327


liii

'dQ! po.Jlf'oduct_20/bl/rules Project Resru-ces ~" ,,

I

••

Fixed De£initions

+

I Varial>l.e De£ini t ions

.•

+

I

_!..! Overview @) Common Definitions ~ Enumeration Types ~ ARases

I

Figure 224: The Ru le Script Editor

b) Under the Variable Definitions entry, choose the+ icon to add the definition. c) In the drop-down menu, choose Double . d) Choose common daub/el. e) In the pop-up dialog box, enter the data from the table. Note that the value =O remains . •

fiii

lltl1:!I

'"

"·

F ixed De£initions

.•

0,

+

..

Varial>l.e De£initions Double

Approval Limit.

:

I!£1§.Jt.M!iiflitj

+

0

Press 'Ente~ to set the Definition Name or 'Es<' to

~ Overview @) Common Definitions

JJ=i o..""'"'o..o•i-

a 9 Dol~,...,_.frf'

11 =l Enumeration Types

o,.,J.Jo,_..

I

~ Aliases ~ Effectivitie.s

M~ trS..__.,..,.,.,..,. ...o

r,.._...Jo'\

Figure 225: Common Definit ion, First St ep: Adding Double

f) On the keyboard , choose Enter. g) Repeat the steps for the second definition. &i!l po_product_20fblfrules Project Resources ~ ""'Fixed De£initi ons

..

+

Variabl.e De£initi ons Double double

.. ApprovalLimic. Discount. = 0

=

O

+

_!..I

,...

I ~;·~;'

I

Overview @) Common Definitions J~ EnlM'Oeration Types J ~ Ariases #

-

-

-

-

j ~ Effecti\lities ]

I.

Figure 226: Resu lts of Entering t he Variable Definitions

2. Create a flow ruleset

328



a) In the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Product_## [vendor##. com] Logic ~ [LocalDevelopment] po_product_##/bl/rules .

~

Business

b) Select Rules Modeling. c) In the Rules Modeling context menu, choose New Flow Ruleset. d) In the New Flow Ruleset dialog box, enter NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset## . e) Choose OK. 3. Create a decision table using the data from the table. Element

Value

Field: Decision Table Name

AutoApproval Lim itDecision Table##

List: Available Conditions

PurchaseRequestElement/Header/Region

List: Available Actions

Approval Limit

a) In the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Product_## ~ Business Logic [LocalDevelopment] po_product_##/bl/rules ~ Rules Modeling.

~

b) From the NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset## context menu, choose New Decision Table . BQ

Business Logic El-~ [LocalOevelopment] po_product_2.0/bl/rules El ~ Rules Modeling : O?i!l Project Resources

! r±l1

. IE' Q r±l

@

~

-

I

; I.

I

-

IP , -

-! l ____.IL_----,

IE CC. src

Paste

External Services lnfrastructure

Open

Compare With

Web Service 01.JtHne ~

- ~ Overview ·@ Definitions ·~ A6ases ·~ Rule Flows [ I ]

•

New Flow... New Rule Script ... New Decision Table •.. New Rule ...

Figure 227: Context Menu: New Decision Table

c) In the Enter the Name and Comments for the Decision Table dialog box, enter the data for the name of the decision table from the table. d) Choose Next. e) In the Select the Conditions dialog box, select the data from the table. f) Choose the down arrow to select the condition.


329


liii

II[!] 13

,...:-: Oecaston Table Creation Wizard

Select the Conditions

Approvallimit Boolean.FALSE Boolean.FALSE Boolean. TRUE Boolean. TRUE Current Dote Cur'rent Date

Current Hour of Day Current Hour of Day

_J_J P\Xl:haseRequestElement/Heoder/Region

< B«k

I

Next >

I

Finish

Figure 228: Select t he Condition of t he Decision Table

g) Choose Next. h) In the Select the Actions dialog box, choose the down arrow to select the Approval Limit action.

riii

II[!] 13

,...:-: Oecasion Table Creation Wizard


Approvallimit Boolean.FALSE Boolean.FALSE Boolean. TRUE Boolean. TRUE Current Date CurTent Date

Current Hour of Doy CurTent Hour of Day

_J_J P\Xl:haseRequestElement/Header/Region

< B«k

I

Next >

I

Fimsh

Figure 229: Select t he Action for the Decision Table

i) Choose Finish .

330



4. Add the following condition values to the AutoApprovallimitDecisionTable## decision table. North , Central, and South America Asia Pacific and Japan Europe , the Middle East , and Africa

a) On the decision table, on the line containing the values North, Central, and South America, right-click , then choose Add Condition Values by PressingCtrl++ from the context menu.

fiii

Decision Tab1e: AutoApprovalLirnitDecisionTable20 • Documentation and Properties

ICondition I IAction... I IChange Layout I IContext Menu I IExport.. . I Iimport... I PurchaseRequestElementfHeader/Region Approvalllmit Nor b-..CPJlb:Al_,.nd South .o."""...,·:a...__ __.__~ Add Condition Values by Pressing Ctrl++ In/Not In Delete Delete Move Up by Pressing O;rj+up Move Down by PreSStng Ctrltoown Copy

Paste

Figure 230 : Condition Table: Addi ng Furt her Conditions

b) In the Add Condition Values dialog box, enter the condition values listed above. To add all values, you must create three (3) lines. A new line is created when a value is chosen and confirmed by pressing the space key on your keyboard. £1

~:Add Condition Values

Add New Condition Values In Selected C~on: 'PurchaseRequestElement/Header/Region' (Return Type - 'java.lang.String') North, Central, and South America Asia Pacific and Japan uro e the Middle East and Afnca

Press 'Spac.e' key to edit the selected eel

OK

I,

Cancel

Figure 231: Condition Table: Result of Adding Further Conditions

c) Choose OK. 5. Enter values for the Approvallimit action for the AutoApprovallimitDecisionTable## decision table using the data from the following table. Entry

Approval Limit


2000


331


Entry

Approval Limit


1000


5000

a) In the Decision Table: AutoApprovalLimitDecisionTable## table, double-click the - button for the entry you want to change.

fiii

Decision Table: AucoApprovalLimicDecisionTa:ble20 ~ Documenta tion an d Pr op erties

I

Condit'oo

II

Action ... ,

I

Change layout J

I

PurchaseRequestElement/Header(Region

Context Menu

II

Export... J

I

1mport ...

1

Approvallimit

North, Central, and South America Asia Pacific and Japan Europe, the Middle East, and Africa

Figure 232 : Entering Values for t he Further Conditions

b) Enter the new approval limits for all regions using the data from the table. c) Choose Save . 6. Create a decision table using the data from the following table. Element

Value

Decision Table Name field

DiscountDecision Table##

Ava ilable Conditions list

Pu rchaseRequestElement/Header /Region and PurchaseRequestElement/HeaderI SellerlD

Ava ilable Actions list

Discount

a) Choose NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset## . b) From the NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset## context menu, choose New Decision Table . c) In the Enter the Name and Comments for the Decision Table dialog box, enter the name for the new decision table from the table. d) Choose Next. e) In the Select the Conditions dialog box, select the data from the table. f) Choose the down arrow button to select the condition. g) Repeat steps e and f for the second condition.

332



r:-.: Decision Table Creation Wizard

I!~ EI


Available Condifoons

Approvalimit

Boolean.FALSE Boolean.FALSE Boolean. li\UE Boolean. TRUE Current Date Current Date Current Hour of ~ Current Hour of Day

.::.J _J_J

Selected Conditions

_J _J _J _J

HC: PurdiaseRequestElement/Header/SeierID PurchaseRequestElement/Header/RE!Qion

HC: > Horizontal Condition

P°

Table has horlzootal condtlon

r

Table has other condition

< Back

Next

>

I

msh

Cancel

Figure 233: Adding Conditions for t he Second Decision Table

h) Select Table has horizontal condition (HC) i) Choose Next .

Note: With the aid of the Move Condition buttons, assure that the alias PurchaseRequestElement/Header/Sellerld ranks first in the Selected Conditions section.

j) In the Select the Actions dialog box, enter the data from the table.


333


liii

Bl!J 13

:-: Decision Table Creation Wizard

Select the Actions

Available Actions

{Booleon} as sbinO {Booleon} as string {Double} as stting {Double} as string {Float} as string {Float} as string {Integer} as string {Integer} as string {Long} as string

•

..:.J

_J _J Selected Actions Discount

r

Tobie has Other Action

< Back

I

Next\.

11

Finish

Figure 234: Adding Act ions for t he Second Decision Table

k) Choose the down arrow button to select the action. I) Choose Finish. If the checkbox Table has horizontal condition is unchecked, all condition headers and the corresponding values appears in vertical columns in the decision table. Alternatively, if you choose to have a horizontal condition, one of the condition headers and the corresponding values (PurchaseRequestElement/Header/Sellerld) get arranged in a row. 7. Add the following condition values to the Region Condition of the OiscountOecisionTable## decision table. Asia Pacific and Japan Europe , the Middle East , and Afri c a

a) In the North, Central, and South America context menu, choose Add Condition Values by pressing Ctr/++. b) In the Add Condition Values dialog box, enter the information above.

334



£1

~:Add Condition Values

Add New Condition Values in Selected Cond~ion: 'l'urchaseRequestElement/HeaderfRegion' (Return Type - 'java.lang.string') Asia Pacific and Japan uro e the Middle East and Afnca

__ [;:J

Press 'Space' k.ey to edit the selected cell

II

OK

I

Cancel

Figure 235: Adding Further Conditions for t he Second Decision Table

c) Choose OK. 8. Add the following condition values to t he SellerlD condition of the DiscountDecisionTable## decision table. Asia High Tech . Inc. Russian Electronics Trading Company z.a.o. Brazil Technologies , S.A .

a) In the /Te/O Inc. context menu, choose Add Condition Values by pressing Ctr/++ . b) In the Add Condition Values dialog box, enter the conditions in the list above.

r:-: Add Condition Values

El

Add New Condition Values in Selected Condition: 'PurchaseRequestElement/Header/Seler!D' (Return Type· 'java.lang.String') Asia High Tech. Inc. Russian Electronic Trading Company z.a.o. raz1I Technolo 1es S. A.

Press 'Space' k.ey to edit the selected cell

OK

I

Cancel

I

Figure 236: Adding Condition Values for the Second Decision Table

c) Choose OK. 9. Enter values for the DiscountLimitDecisionTable## decision table using the data from the following table.


335


PurchaseReques ITelO Inc. tElement/ Discount Header/Seller ID

Asian High Tech Inc Discount

Russian Electronics Discount

Brazil Technology Discount


0.20

0

0

0 .20


0.20

0.20

0.10

0


0.20

0

0.20

0

a) In the OiscountOecisionTable## decision table, double-click the entry you want to change.

Note: The values must be entered with a period, not with a comma.

b) Enter the new discount values using the data from the table.

Decision Tal11e: DiscouncDecisionTable20 ~

Documentation and Properties

I Cond~ion] I Action ... ] I ChanQe layout 11 Context Menu 11 Export ... 11 lmport ... 1

' ... .~'!

Purch<'lseRequestElementfHeader/SelerlD

ITelO Inc.

Purch<'lseRequestElement/Header/Region North, Central, and South America Asia Pacific and Japan Europe, the Middle East, and Africa

Discount

0.20 0.20 0.20

Asia High Tech. Inc. Russian Electron! ... Brazil Technologi ... Discount 0 0.20 0

Discount 0 0.10 0.20

Discount

0.20 0 0

l

Figure 237: Result of Adding the Discount Values to t he Second Decision Table

c) Choose Save. 10. Create a rule script named NeedsApprovalRuleScript##. a) In the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Product_## [vendor##.com] ----+ Business Logic ----+ [LocalOevelopment]po_product_##/bl/rules ----+ Rules Modeling. b) In the NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset## context menu, choose New Rule Script.

336


Lesson: Creat ing Rules with Ru les Com poser

8 ~ PO_Product_20 [vendor20.com]

• Oocum

e ·O Portal 00 0 Process e ill User Interface 8 'illil Business Logic

ICondition

El-IS [LocalDevelopment] po_product_20/bl/rutes 8 ~ Rules Modeling ,·· ¢'li! Project Resources

B ~ -.

I

I

I.

I

•

I

e ~ Rule Flows

I

PurchaseR Purchasei: North, Cen

~p:lllll!l!l!.!L_JL=~::;

1 Paste -------

r (3 Rule Scripts Open @ Decision Tables • - - - - - - . -~ AutoApprov Compare With ~ I . c~ DiscountDeci Web Service •"-~ Rules . New Flow ... 00 !2:7 src New Rule Script... ~ External Services New Decision Table ... 8 · {§} Infrastructure New Rule . ..

B '

i

j

.

$

Delete

Paste Generate Report Clone ... Validate

Figure 238: Adding a New Rule Script

c) In the Create New Rule Script dialog box, enter NeedsApprovalRuleScript## . d) Choose OK. 11. Add the following script t o the NeedsApprovalRuleScript## rule script.

Local Defini t i ons : do ub l e c heckLe v el = 0 Act i on s : Ass i gn :: c hec kLe ve l = Pu r chaseRequestEl e rnent/Heade r/ Purch as e Or d erTotalArnount * (1 - d iscount) If c he ckLe v el Le ss Tha n Equals App r ovalLirnit Then Ex e cute :: Pu r c h aseRequestElement/Header/Approved =Boolean , TRUE Exe cute : : Pu r c h as eReque stElement/He a der/Approve rCornme nt Au t omat i call y App r oved El s e Ex e cute :: Pu r c h aseReque stEl e ment/He a der/Approved =Boolean , FALSE Ex e cute :: Pu r c h aseRequestElement/Header/Approve rCornme nt Re qu ires Ma nua l App r oval a) In the Local Definitions area, choose the+ button. b) In the drop-down menu , choose double. The assigned synt ax is created automatically. c) Choose the entry doublel . d) In t he dialog box, enter checkLevel, then press Enter on your keyboard.


337


liii Ru1e Script : NeedsApprovalRuleScripc20 L o c al. Definitions double +

checkLeve l

=

0

Acti ons

•I •

Figure 239 : Exercisel 3_Fig27.pptx

Note: To edit the coding generated by default for an action, choose the respective value and select an alternative in the drop-down menu . You can also enter your desired value in the inline text box available from the drop-down menu.

e) In the Actions area, choose the plus (+)button . f) In the drop-down box, choose Assign , then choose checkLevel. g) In this line, select the

o and in the drop-down box choose PurchaseRequestE/ement.

h) In the dialog box that opens, choose PurchaseRequestE/ement/Header/ PurchaseOrderTota/Amount.

liii

Actions : Assiqn : : checkLevel = 0 + 0 lE Oefintions 8- PurchaseRequestElement [http://www.vendor20.com/Purch PurchaseRequestflement.size(Huller) ,._ PurchaseRequestE!ement.size(Item)

Return Type: double XPath: ns! I :PurchaseRequestE1ement/ns11 :Header Aias Name: Purch~equestElemert!Header/PurctieseOrclerTota!Amount

Purd-.aseRequestElement/Hedder fPurchaseOrder Totdl

lE FunctlonsUtil [com.S<1P.brms.pub.Jtlls]

Figure 240 : Exercise13_Fig28.pptx

i) Place the curser at the end of this line and enter * . A 0 is added automatcially. j) Choose the 0 and enter 1 , then press Enter on your keyboard. k) Choose the 1 , then choose Add expression . I) Choose the+, and from the context menu choose a-. Then choose the 0. From the context menu choose Definitions , then choose Discount. m) Choose Discount, then choose Add close bracket.

338



n) To add the open bracket, choose the 1 , and in the box choose Add open bracket. o) To add the if-statement, choose the+ button, and from the context menu choose if-else-if. p) To enter all the conditions and values in the if-statement, select a value and choose the relevant entry from the drop-down menu (or enter it directly). q) To choose the Then expressions, choose the + button and then choose Execute from the drop-down menu . r) To create the Else branch, choose Add Else, then choose Execute~

PurchaseRequestElement [ .. .]

~

PurchaseRequestElement/Header/Approved

[ ...]from the drop-down menu.

s) Choose the+ button to add the last row. Proceed as described in the previous steps. t) Choose Save. 12. Define the flow of the NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset## process. a) In the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Product_## [vendor##.com] Logic ~ [LocalDevelopment]po_product_##/bl/rules NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset## ~ Rule Flows .

~

Rules Modeling

~

Business

~

b) Double-click Main Flow. c) In the Rule Flow editor, choose the connection between the start and the end elements. From the context menu of the connector, choose Delete to remove the connection between the Start point and End point. d) In the Composite Explorer view, choose PO_Product_## [vendor##.com] Logic ~ [LocalDevelopment]po_product_##/bl/rules NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset## ~ Decision Tables .

~

Rules Modeling

~

Business

~

e) Expand Decision Tables . f) Drag the AutoApprovalLimitDecision Table## and DiscountDecision Table## decision tables to the Rule Flow editor so that they are between the Start and End points in a vertical line. g) In the Composite Explorer view, choose PO_Product_## [vendor##.com] Logic ~ [LocalDevelopment]po_product_##/bl/rules NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset## ~ Rule Scripts .

~

Rules Modeling

~

Business

~

h) Drag the NeedsApprovalScript## rule flow to the Rule Flow editor so that it is between the DiscountDecisionTable## decision table and End point in a vertical line.


339


liii Rul.e F1 mr : Ma inF lo'!J

0

start

~oApprovalLlmlt DecisionTable20

rafscountDecisionT able20

~edsApprovalRu eScript20

0

End

Figure 241: The New Rule Flow

13. Connect the elements in the main flow together. a) In the Rule Flow editor, select Start. b) Choose the Create Connection speed button and drag it to AutoApprovalLimitDecision Table##. c) Choose AutoApprovalLimitDecisionTable##. You can use drag and drop to arrange the elements. d) Choose the Create Connection speed button and drag it to DiscoutDecisionTable##. e) Repeat the steps to connect the rest of the elements.

340



Ru1e F1ow : Mainflov

I

SI rt

r~utoApprovalUmft DecisionTable20

~countDeclsionT able20

~edsApprovalRu eScript20

I

End

Figure 242 : Connect ing t he Objects in NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset##

f) Choose Save. Create and Run a Test Case

1. Open the Rules Composer. a) In the Window menu, choose Open Perspective

---+

Other.

b) In the Open Perspective dialog box, choose Rules Composer. c) Choose OK. 2. Create a new XML test case named PurchaseOrderTestCase. a) In the Rules Composer, expand [LocalOevelopment] po_product_##/bl/rules

---+

Modeling---+ Test Cases.

b) In the Test Cases context menu, choose New XML Test Case. c) In the New Test Case dialog box, enter PurchaseOrderTestCase. d) Choose OK. 3. Set the Target Ruleset for the PurchaseOrderTestCase XML test case to NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset## .

a) In the Test Case editor, in the Target Ruleset drop-down menu, choose NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset##.


341

Rules


liii Test Case: PurchaseOrd erTestcase

Isrc/brmsl:e:;ts/PurchaseOrderTestease.brmstc

Path:

Documentation:

• Target ------------------------~

Taroet R\Aeset:

r

I

AS on: 201+03·21T! 0:37: 13

Figure 243: Assigning t he Target Ruleset

4. Create an XML document named PurchaseOrder. xml . a) At the top right of the Test Case: PurchaseOrderTextCase screen, choose the Create XML button

~.

b) In the Create XML dialog box, select the Create XSD radio button. c) In the field below, select src/wsdl/PurchaseRequestData##.xsd{http://vendor##.com/ PurchaseRequestData##}. l!I~ Et

'}:Create XML

SeleciXSD

I SelectXSO

lo Create XSO

OK

l

Cancel

I

Figure 244: A New Test XSD

d) Choose OK. e) In the New XML File dialog box, in the File Name field , enter PurchaseOrder . xml . f) Choose Next. g) Choose Finish . The generated XML document PurchaseOrder.xml opens automatically. Close this window and return to the test case editor.

342

© Copyright . All ri ghts reserved .


5. Add the PurchaseOrder.xml file to the test case. a) In the Test Case editor, in the XML Documents for Test Input section, choose Add XML . b) In the Select XML Files to Add dialog box, choose src/brmstests/PurchaseOrder.xml . c) Choose OK. • XML Oocunlents ror Test Input

I

Xr>I. Ooco..rnents for Test lnN•

AddXl1.

src/brmstests/PIJrchaseOrder. mil [tns:P.,chooel\eQUestflement) Open

Figure 245: The Test XML Added to the Test Case

6. Create a CSV file named PurchaseOrderDataSource. csv. a) At the top right of the Test Case: PurchaseOrderTextCase screen, choose the Create Data ~<>.

Source L~ button.

b) In the New File dialog box, in the File Name field , enter PurchaseOrderDataSource . csv. c) Choose Finish . The data source opens in a blank editor window. 7. Add the following data to the PurchaseOrderDataSource.csv tab and save your work. Region, Seller, T otalAmount, Comparator, Approval APJ , 34 , 1000 . 00 , Equals , false Americas, 26 , 3000.00 , Equals , false APJ , 12 , 1200 . 00 , Equals , true EMEA , 1 . 6000 . 00 , Equals , true

a) In the PurchaseOrderDataSource.csv editor, place your cursor in the clear working area enter the values above. ' B, *PU'chaseOrderOataSource.csv &3 Region, Seller, Total Amount , Comparator , Approval APJ, 34 , 1000.00, Equals, false Americas, 2 6, 3000 . 00, Equals, :false APJ, 12 ' 1200 . 00, Equals, true EMEA, 1 . 6000 . 00 , Equals, cruel

Figure 246: Adding t he Values for the Test Case

b) Choose Save .


343


Note: Be sure to list the headers in the first row and the respective values in the rows below the header row. Also. double-check to be sure the values are seperated by a comma.

8. Add the data source srclbrmstests/PurchaseOrderDataSource.csv to the test case. a) In the Test Case editor. in the Test Data section, choose Set Data Source . b) In the Set Data Source dialog box, in the Select Test Case Data Source drop-down menu, choose srclbrmstests/PurchaseOrderDataSource.csv. c) Choose 0 K. d) Choose Save . .... Te:st Oata

Test Data Sotwce

I

ISet Data Source I

+

I I I

B stc/brmstests/P\JrchaseOrderDataSO
Seier Tot
Approval

Open

I

Refresh

I

Rol)lOV•

I

Figure 247: Data Added in the Test Case Editor

9. Map the following XPath input data elements. •

tns:PurchaseRequestElement [ ... ] --> tns:Header --> tns:PurchaseOrderTotalAmount

•

tns:PurchaseRequestElement [ ... ]

•

> tns:Header --> tns:SellerlD

•

tns:PurchaseRequestElement [ ... ] --> tns:Header --> tns:Region

•

Note: In order to run the test case, you must map the XML elements used in your business rule to the header names in the data source. Having implemented this mapping, the values from the data source can be taken as input data and expected output data when you run the test case.

a) In the Test Case editor. choose the Detailed Configuration tab (found at the bottom of the modeling screen). b) On the Input Mapping table, select srclbrmstests/PurchaseOrder.xml. c) Choose Add XPath .

344



d) In the XPath dialog box, open the displayed path and choose the first data elements listed above. e) Choose the Select Action button to transfer the element from the list of available paths into the list of selected paths. l!I~ £4

':-: XPath Available XPaths

B I!] tns:Header [!] tns:PurchaseOrderID D tns:PurchaseOrderTotalAmount [!] tns:Currency

I!] tns:Selter!D I!] tns: Region ....... . .

_QJ_J Selected XPaths tns:PurchaseRequestElement/tns:Header/tns:SellerID tns: PurchaseRequestElement/tns:Header/tns: Region tns: PurchaseRequestElement/tns:Header/tns: PurchaseOrderTotalAmount

OK

l

Cancel

Figure 248: Adding the XPaths

f) Repeat steps for all three elements. g) Choose OK. 10. Implement the required input using the data in the following table. Mapping Element

Value

tns:PurchaseRequestElement/tns:HeaderI tns:PurchaseOrderTotalAmount [double]

TotalAmount

tns:PurchaseRequestElement/tns:HeaderI tns:SellerlD [java.lang.String]

Seller

tns:PurchaseRequestElement/tns:HeaderI tns:Region [java.lang.String]

Region

a) In the Test Case editor, choose the Detailed Configuration tab. b) In the Input Mapping table, choose the value you want to change. c) In the drop-down menu of the Value field, choose the appropriate data source. d) Choose Save.


345


liii

Detailed Configuration • I.nput Mapping

Value

AddXPoth

efintions

I Add Defrion I c::m I Remov• I

rc/btmst~ts/Purchaseor~r.xml

tns:P11"1aseRequestElement/tllS:Header/tns: P\lrchaseOrderTotalAmount(double I tns:P11"1.,eRequostEl
TotalAAlou'lt Seller

mn

•

• Figure 249: Adding Values to t he XPat hs

11. Add the XML element tns:PurchaseRequestElement--> tns:Header --> tns:Approved to the Output Mapping table. a) On the Output Mapping table, choose src/brmstests/PurchaseOrder.xml. b) Choose Add XPath . c) In the XPath dialog box, choose tns:PurchaseRequestElement [ .. .] --> tns:Header --> tns:Approved. d) Choose the Select Action button.

fiii

BOO Et

':-: XPath Available XPaths

[fil (!) [fil [fil

tns:Currency tns:SellerIO tns:Region tns:Approved

1!J tns:ApproverComment 1±1 [fil tns:ltem

Selected XPaths tns:PurchaseRequestElementftns:Headerftns:Approved

OK

)

Cancel

Figure 250: Adding a Value to t he Output Mapping

e) Choose OK. 12. Set the values for the definition tns:PurchaseRequestElement/tns:Header/tns:Approved [boolean] using the data in the following table.

346

Column

Value

Comparator

Comparator



Column

Value

Value

Approval

a) In the Output Mapping table, choose the cell for which you want to change the value. b) In the drop-down menu, choose the appropriate value. It might be necessary to first select the value column, before the value comparator is offered in the Comparator cell . .., Output Mapping

Ma.............,EJement

IC

ator

I Value

I Formatter

Defintions

9

srcjbrmst~ts/PurchaseOrder.xtni tn•:P1¥cha,.Reque.WementJtns:Headerltns:Appro~[boolean)

Co"l)¥ator

t

•I

I Addo.ltton I

Approv4I

I

.!.I

Figure 251: Result of t he Output Mapping

c) Choose Save. When you map the output data, you compare the expected output with the actual output using a comparator. This indicates if the test case has passed or failed . To map the XML element you added in the previous step, choose the corresponding cell in the Value column of the table, then select the header named Approval from the data source in the drop-down menu. 13. Run a test case and view the test report. a) Choose Run Test Case at the top right of the Test Case: PurchaseOrderTextCase screen. b) On the Rules Testing Console tab, choose the Report File Name link and open by doubleclicking.

Integrate the Flow Ruleset into the Process In this part of the exercise, you integrate your flow ruleset NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset## into the process. To do that, you expose the flow ruleset as a Web service and deploy it to the AS Java. After deployment, you import the respective service interface definition into your Process Composer DC and consume the rules service using the automated activity Determine If Approval is Required##. 1. Create a WSDL Artifact for NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset## using the data from the following table. Field

Value

Target Namespace

http://www.vendor##.com/ Approval Rules##

Input

PurchaseRequestElement{http:/ I www.vendor##.com/ PurchaseRequestData##}


347


Field

Value

Output

PurchaseRequestElement{http:// www.vendor##.com/ PurchaseRequestData##}

a) Open the Composite Designer perspective. b) In the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Product_## [vendor##.com] ~ Business Logic ~ [LocalDevelopment] po_product_##/bl/rules ~Rules Modeling. c) In the NeedApprovalFlowRuleset## context menu, choose Web Service Artifact.

~

Create WSDL

d) In the NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset##: Service Attributes dialog box, enter the data for the Target namespace from the table. e) Choose Next. f) In the NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset##: Service Signature dialog box, select the checkboxes listed in the table. g) Choose Next. h) Choose Finish. 2. Deploy the Rules Composer Development Component. a) In the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Product_## [vendor##.com] Logic.

~

Business

b) In the [LocalDevelopment] po_product_##/bl/rules context menu, choose Development Component ~ Deploy. c) On the Deploy DCs screen, choose OK. d) If requested, log on to the SAP JEE engine with the user Administrator##. You can check the success of the deployment in the Infrastructure Console. 3. Import the service interface definitions using the data from the following table. Element

Value

URL field

http://nwktdcOO. wdf.sap.corp:50000/ NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset##/ NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset##Port?wsdl

Create New radio button

Select

Name


Description

Purchase Request

a) In the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Product_## [vendor##.com] [LocalDevelopment] po_product_##/pr/pm ~ Process Modeling.

348

~

Process

~



b) In the Service Interfaces context menu, choose Import WSDL . c) On the WSDL Import dialog box, choose Remote Location/File System. d) Choose Next. e) On the WSDL URL Access dialog box, in the URL field, enter the data from the table. f) Choose Next. g) On the Service Reference dialog box, enter the data from the table. h) Choose Finish .

Note: To check the WSDL url of your rules service, open a browser window and enter the the url http://nwktdc00.wdf.sap.corp:50000/inspection.wsil. If prompted , log on with the user Administrator##. In the WSIL that appears, search for your rules service and for the respective tab. Append the suffix ?wsdl to the found endpoint URL to get the required WSDL url.

4. View the new service group. a) In the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Product_## [vendor.##.com] ~ Process [LocalDeveloopment] po_product_##lprlpm ~ Connectivity ~ Service Groups .

~

5. View the new service interfaces. a) In the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Product_## [vendor.##.com] ~ Process ~ [LocalDeveloopment] po_product_##lprlpm ~ Process Modeling ~ Service Interfaces. 6. Open the service references. a) In the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Product_## [vendor.##.com] ~ Process [LocalDeveloopment] po_product_##lprlpm ~ Connectivity ~ Service References.

~

b) Open Service References . 7. Assign the imported user interface NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset##PortType to the automated activity Determine if Approval is Required## . a) In the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Product_## [vendor##. com] [LocalDevelopment] po_product_##lprlpm ~ Processes .

~

Process

~

b) Double-click Purchase Order Process##. c) On the Properties tab, choose Interface. d) In the Service Interface drop-down menu , choose NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset##PortType. e) In the Operation drop-down menu, choose lnvokeRules (ln:Request-vendor##.com-poproduct-XX-bl-rules-NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset## Port Type) . 8. Create your input mappings using the automapping function to map RequestData to Requestvendor##.com -po-product-xx-bl-rules-NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset##PortType ~ nsl:PurchaseRequestElement.


349


a) On the Properties tab, choose Input Mapping. b) In the Inputs of Determine if Approval is Required## column, expand Requestvendor##.com-po-product-xx-bl-rules-NeedsApproval FlowRuleset## Port Type . c) From the Process Context column, right-cl ick RequestData and drag it to Requestvendor##. com-po-product-##-bl-rules-NeedsAppro valFlo wRu leset## Port Type ~ nsl:PurchaseRequestElement in the Inputs of Determine if Approval is Required## column. d) Choose Output Mapping. e) In the Outputs of Determine if Approval is Required## column, expand Requestvendor##.com-po-product-xx-bl-rules-NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset## PortType . f) From the Outputs of Determine if Approval is Required## column, right-click nsl:PurchaseRequestElement and drag it to RequestData in the Inputs of Determine if Approval is Required## column. 9. Create your output mappings using the automapping function to map nsl:PurchaseRequestElement and drag it to RequestData. a) On the Properties tab, choose Output Mapping. b) In the Outputs of Determine if Approval is Required## column, expand Requestvendor##.com-po-product-xx-bl-rules-NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset## PortType . c) From the Outputs of Determine if Approval is Required## column, right-click nsl:PurchaseRequestElement and drag it to RequestData in the Inputs of Determine if Approval is Required## column. d) Choose Save.

350




•



351

Unit 6

Lesson 3 Managing Business Rules with Rules Manager

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to manage rule changes, reporting, and versioning using the Rules Manager. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

•


Rules Manager Overview

Rules composer

Rules Manager

Rules engine Figure 252: Rules Manager Overview

Rules Manager allows rule testing, rule refinement, and end-to-end change management. With Rules Manager, business users can observe and change business policies that are deployed in an application without needing to stop the application . The provides complete management of the business rules life cycles.

352



Rules H anager

-.......-• :".-

________

u;;~

~

·. · -

.. ..._

.....-

--

---

Figure 253: Rules Manager--Overview

Rules Composer comes with the following features: •

Business user-friendly rich rule formats

•

Support for multiple data models for rules implementation

•

Data model independent business vocabularies

•

High performance rules engine

•

Stateless EJB engine

•

Rete-based inference and sequential engines

Rules Manager Rule Changes Rules Manager Capabilities

•

Role-based access to rules projects created with Rules Composer or Process Composer

•

Create, duplicate, and edit If-Then rules, decision tables, and definitions

•

View and compare version histories

•

Generate reports for rulesets, rules, and decision tables

•

Show usage of decision tables and definitions

•

Check consistency for If-Then rules and decision tables


353


.......... ,

Identity Hanagement1 Business Rules Access control Hanagement

°"9.....,_

u ~ ...._ '"

. ...

_

"'OC "'- -

• "*"• I

-

, .... o..

._ I

•

.... -~.IS!)

OS.~ =-----

....... _ _ ,..._t __

e--

ac.... ...,...,.._.,..._....-

.

9

'V*-tl . . . .

I'

....

'b ' ll Tl

-

,,.. • s . ....

-.,,

Figure 254: Rules Manager--Roles Based Access

Role-based access can be assigned for BRM entities by using SAP NetWeaver Administrator. Permissions range from read-only to edit. Different access permissions can be given to different entities of a rules project.

fiii

Rules Manager

L.a!!

I ~ni! Pro,ita I L

.~G..-1

It.roi:• O 11.,..,. I RUies

•

11,~:or

Decision Table: "EMI Table'" Genef'lll lnl0
• 0 Ccmrrion Oefnuns

tla"™!':

f:Vtlable

oocum•nwli-On:

I

Retul'n t.tuhlp!e l.l•tcflet

0

Rowt Art ..1\llUd)' {U;IUI M

G?l

· f!)

filwoera!l:n Ty;ies

• § •eeoulllTrtfl.t'.fot • ij. Ordfl'Cho~t • ~ Lcar.fJ,tl

.

I!]

~f ittt..N$ co~:~o•nt

I

• I!) Ot!.neo.ia "' ~ \1t-t4ie11 l lQIU

.

[U

• e ~A-s

( Oon:i«in.- j.,j _lf(".i0n - j .. ! l ~tla~o1,1: j fi00tljlel~C0.'it."IOUl!l

c

IU!»

l..cc..l Resl'ltd

tlc.n t.c:::...RelM"'·

lf'Utf$1. ff!t

..i~niie..

' >

t07S

11.15

IC.!

11,f

3

10-zs

•

..."

11 . .

2

10.2:5

11.25

'' '

"' "

t7S-

10,;s

1

·~ l!i'.2'S

11.2!

>

IP

II

'•

97$

10 75

" 'a ,.,. "

.....

E)l!Qll.f(t.Of(T~

'

8trwt..., 15000 a110 SCOOO

!l~·ttn ~ alld

-

I 5.Mlw wertnett I

!~i:t~.dtn:

• at#

-

t!C«IO

a ttwtttt 1!0000 a11d f'°'100

1

•

' 2

~

II

H!.,5 II 0 11

HI~

10 .~

l I 2S II

Figure 255: Decision Table Experience in t he Rules Manager

354



' ,' ' }& t .t;i

,. ,,. •

:.::$

Olp~

(MO..

- 11

.. ;

!l • A. ,.-

_ -"'· A -

•

~

•-a

Sjl

w-

•••

"' _, ,. ] •

'""'

~-

3 EM10bf_1ttt.go1"rinc.l~IA.m-1

4 $

..

JI,_...,,

'J.

1~

.'

11 i.f,t\V.+tt 1$000 Ind S000C

'3

2

J

. '

•

5

2

12 ~

~

"

__!!: t•:"""'"'SOOOO •ncl asoooo 11 19

,;s. ~

a

5

1J

ot

flU r.t.W

P•ncw

C.nie• • I

A,

-

•

I ~ . '%

,.....-

·1""

~1..

~

; .. 1~r
.

•

1: •

... .

ti)·

,Jii-. _.1~

OI. '

~!t0:.';.,,..- 4-- ~r\':111«· , .. -- .... \ 2~~

\

\..• .. ,..

...... -

... -~.,

\

D lnt•i>nr.ilo

- i:nt4'rost r;uo 0

10.15 ..tO.$

... 0

10.25

•

'·" 10.s

0

0

·,.'$.1s ••., •

J.0.'25

t0.25

•••

°1L?) ..t 1..$ -lL~

·u

•10.75 0

11.s

"u.2.-5 "1! 0

10.75

1.o.s

·u." ·u

'"3

"9.7)

•10.?S

't .S

..,."2$

'io~

.,

a

<\

m,._lS'>-' ..,.t"4!1 ho.d

··::;s~~~c-e ~ .---~·

=='-==~'~ .\~.l 0

6 <1$QOO

•

"

1:wt1c.-. W.Cfoo6n t.o
!7A~

i lt (IC • ·

" "' 9.2S

O.t•

1...,u11 •

., :!

..

'

~ rw1t.-C?O~

...

1:)2~

0

10.~

•

Figure 256: Excel Integration

Integration with MS Excel enables business users to make changes in decision table rules by exporting decision table data to MS Excel, modifying it, and then importing it back into the decision table. Feature parity with the Rules Composer is provided so that business users are able to make changes to values using MS Excel 2007 and upload the changes at runtime. Rules Manager enables decision tables to be exported to Microsoft Excel for easy editing. After changes are made to the decision table, you can reimport it back into the ruleset.


355


Rules Reporting and Versioning

liii

--- --- ' --,---- 3 " \' 1- ; --. . . . --.,. '-- -- ----~

Project Details ~nllame:

....

Io - · ·'

I

ttslM?.CClll"!est•~O" fl:IW

Latest Versi>n

J AdweVer~

l

lloculr.etilaliln: RIAesets ~NaMe

-

r

~Type

llocu1rtol&lill

fRS_A

I

Fi>w Rlitset

3

- '' ....... ---- --,-- 2. ' \' 1. --. . . . ---' '-- -- -----~

Rules Manager

I

I

\

1Ve~1Cliinla Sa/111\osh

Iu. ~ ] Searcn..J fr]

RU!ts NMgator

- Overview of Project: " flow"

· ~row

6 Latest Version

,

-

General Information

•0 Coim:onllefilmns

IChar.ge PloM I

Appllcation !lame: teslsep CCITl'!est-s4o·Oow

•Bfn~n Types

Docwnell'•non·

> ~ fRS_A

·-

Figure 257: Rules Manager Versioning: Latest and Active Version

During versioning, the user is asked to choose between an active or latest version of the product, and will keep working on the chosen version until Change Project or Logoff is chosen . This enables users to work on active or latest versions of rules artifacts and perform changes incrementally without activation. I Compare Decision Tables " New Decision Table" Between " Working Copy" And "Version 1" IV
Vonkwl 1

Genet'll lntorrnrrion

Gener.i tnform1uon 1'9w o.c.b\ T~

Harne

r:~w

tr..me

o.c.bn Tabae

1

J

Comme-ntt Retum Multlple Matthea

Rows •r
0 G'.l

Commen11 Ro1um Mufbple UateM•

0

Rows ire Mvtu.Uy twuslve ~

Dedston T•ble

I

Oedtlon Tlble

C«rette HOIK ol Oty (O>ll) .. _ >S

51

>&

10

>7

II

eurr.,1

"°"' orOty

(flot0 .. -

-:J.

0

';'!

jl

I a.ct I Figure 258: Rules Manager Versioning : History

Rules Manager shows the version history of a rules project. Business users can compare the different versions of rules by added data, modified data, deleted data, If-Then rules, and decision tables. Changes are color coded to easily see the differences in rulesets, rules, and definit ions.

356



Conditions If {

0

EMIOb,ieclgetfl.UType

0 0

G

Equals

EMIObiectl.IOlf'"HLY

ind

ElllOb,ect getPr-n~ai;.mount Greater-nan

ind

El •rObiect getPrvlC11>alAmounl Less Than

~~-~~--~

Group Conddion

>

Ungroup Cond~IOn

Grouping conditions Condilions IF {

0

El.llOb.iect getfl.llType Equals El.llObiect MOtlTHLY and

<

0

ElllObiect getPrinC1PalAmount Greater7llan

'.Ql

and ElllObj&CI ge!Pnnccia!Amount Less lhan

>

}

Group Condibon Ungroup Condition

G Figure 259: Refactoring Rules

Refactoring rules enable users to create complex conditions for rules and then group the conditions logically. Reports of Rulesets Business users can generate reports of rulesets. The reports contain details regarding the rules; decision tables and other rule elements contained in a ruleset. 0...l'ritw.i Rulntll~

--...... -,,.._ _,,,.

r:Jl

GMlt11I~

t1:1 ....

011' rs• ?I

Okw.nlt!Mtln~-

0.C.•'IM ........

~liH Ill ~lff

--

........

o.nalllon. 1n dhc0111111rut.s

i;iJ

-..............

·-.....

--

t:l

........... 0

tl

..

Figure 260: Rules Manager--Report Generation

Rules Manager allows business users to find usage of a decision table or a definition, making it easier to track the effect of changes.


357


Decision Table : ""New Decision Table""

OocumentatiOn;.

ftetum U vtbple M•\cM-s

0

Rowe Aro r.iutualty ExehJ••ve

~

J

•• ••

•

••

• 1

II

Reference•

........ . ...... •

KeW Rule

l a- I

Figure 261: Rules Manager Show Usage

Rules Manager also provides a consistency checker feature to check syntactic properties of rules and decision tables. The consistency checker can also be used to check for overlapping conditions and missing ranges in decision tables.

. ..... .. . .;. 0. () - ·
~-

•

..,,,. .

'-l . 0 . ... . , ,.. .

...... ,... . .

Rulfts Manager

-·-----

™ ..

••

OKl:tlon Tab.at: '"Ntw Otcltk>n T1blt·

'--*"'~

. 'ft .. .....

OONl!wn

? '71

.

..____._ ·a -s ........

v..~

. & "-'""'' o.c.- - .

"'c.c:i-·..........

~- ~

I

'·

~ lfi•..,_)

..••

~-.,°"

..

.....•_ .."

0 . . - f'"I. .... :
&f)~-.-~ t-t ..... ). 0.-llJOrw--.. . . . fP• ·~ cf)O.C...-T. . . . . ~ I_,.~ ),C--Ol- Olo~..,._ IPt •~

Figure 262: Rules Manager--Consistency Checker

358


Unit 6

Exercise 14 Modify Business Rules using Rules Manager

Business Example

You are a business process administrator. You have been asked to change the rules added to the business process. Use Rules Manager to change the existing rules . In the process step containing the automated activity Determine if Approval is Required XX, the decision is made if manual approval is required or not. If the total amount of the purchase request is less than a certain amount, the purchase request does not require manual approval, and the process can proceed and releast the purchase request in the backend system. Otherwise the approving user must review the purchase request and manually approve or reject it. In this exercise, you want to increase the limit for the automatic approval for only one region . Therefore, you change the respective decision table of the flow ruleset. In this exercise, the process created in exercises 2-5, 7, 8, 10-13 is used. Also in this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you. Note: Using the Rules Manager, you can add, edit, or delete any rule artifact (for example, rulesets, decision tables) without stopping the Rules Engine. The changes made to the rule artifacts take place instananeously in the Rules Engine. The ruleset containing a decision table and rule script was already created with the Rules Composer in a preceding exercise. Grant a Rules Manager user Full Access to the Rules Composer Development Component Access to the Rules Composer DCs in the Rules manager is based on an access control mechanism. A user needs permission for a Rules Composer DC to open it in the Rules Manager. Therefore, you must grant the Administrator user full access to the Rules Composer DC before modifying your decision table using this user in the Rules Manager.

1. Log onto SAP NetWeaver Administrator from the URL http://nwktdcOO.wdf.sap.corp: 50000/nwa. The user ID is Administrator ##. 2. Create a new role named PORulesAccessor##. 3. Assign the user named Administrato r## to the new role . 4. Assign the action SAP_BRM_APPROVE_RULE to the PORulesAccessor## role . 5. Configure user role access settings for the role PORulesAccessor## .


359


Modify the Business Rule Using Rules Manager

1. Log onto the Rules Manager from the URL http:/ /nwktdc##.wdf.sap.corp:50000/ rulesmanager. The user ID is Administrator## . 2. Open the AutoApprovalLimitDecision Table## decision table. 3. Edit the AutoApprovalLimitDecisionTable## decision table so that the approval limit for Asia Pacific and Japan is 2000. 4. Upload the decision table to the repository. 5. View the changes to the AutoApprovalLimitDecisionTable## decision table in the Web Services Navigator.

360


Unit 6 Solution 14 Modify Business Rules using Rules Manager

Business Example

You are a business process administrator. You have been asked to change the rules added to the business process. Use Rules Manager to change the existing rules . In the process step containing the automated activity Determine if Approval is Required XX, the decision is made if manual approval is required or not. If the total amount of the purchase request is less than a certain amount, the purchase request does not require manual approval, and the process can proceed and releast the purchase request in the backend system. Otherwise the approving user must review the purchase request and manually approve or reject it. In this exercise, you want to increase the limit for the automatic approval for only one region . Therefore, you change the respective decision table of the flow ruleset. In this exercise, the process created in exercises 2-5, 7, 8, 10-13 is used. Also in this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you. Note: Using the Rules Manager, you can add, edit, or delete any rule artifact (for example, rulesets, decision tables) without stopping the Rules Engine. The changes made to the rule artifacts take place instananeously in the Rules Engine. The ruleset containing a decision table and rule script was already created with the Rules Composer in a preceding exercise. Grant a Rules Manager user Full Access to the Rules Composer Development Component Access to the Rules Composer DCs in the Rules manager is based on an access control mechanism. A user needs permission for a Rules Composer DC to open it in the Rules Manager. Therefore, you must grant the Administrator user full access to the Rules Composer DC before modifying your decision table using this user in the Rules Manager.

1. Log onto SAP NetWeaver Administrator from the URL http://nwktdcOO.wdf.sap.corp: 50000/nwa. The user ID is Administrator ##. a) Open your internet browser. b) In the address bar, enter the URL above. c) Log on as user Administrator##. 2. Create a new role named PORulesAccessor##. a) On the NetWeaver Administrator screen, choose the Configuration tab.


361


b) Choose Security (if not already selected). c) On the Security tab, choose Identify Management. d) In the Search Criteria drop-down menu, choose Role. Search Search Criteria:

.•

•

I• l IA1 Data Sol

I Qeate Role 11 I Delete 11 I Exe!!!! I Figure 263: NWA Ident ity Management··Changed Buttons After Choosing a Role

e) Choose Create Role . f) In the Details section , in the Unique Name field, enter PORulesAccesso r## .

g) Choose Save. 3. Assign the user named Administrato r## to the new role. a) In the Details section, choose the Assigned Users tab. b) Choose Modify. c) In the Search Criteria field of the available users area , enter Administrator##. d) Choose Go. e) In the search results, choose Administrator##.

f) Choose Add, then choose Save. I

General tnforrretioo

Assigned Groups

I/ Assigned Users

J

Available Users Search Criteria:

, •

-".,.

:iata So!Kc es

~ 'iQ ...

Logon 0

l.J B

Adrmis1retor01

A

Nan-e

IAdlrlnisltetor01 Data Source

I LJ

J '•

AdrrinistrelorOl ,. .. l.t.E Database

t Add I

18

Figure 264: Assigning t he User to the New Role

4. Assign the action SAP_BRM_APPROVE_RULE to the PORulesAccessor## role. a) In the Details section, choose the Assigned Actions tab. b) Choose Modify. c) In the Available Actions section, in the Get field, enter * BRM*. d) Choose Go.

362



e) In the search results, choose SAP_BRM_APPROVE_ROLE. f) Choose Add. g) Choose Save. Using the role you created, you will now grant the Administrator full access to your Rules Composer DC. Note that a user cannot approve (that is, activate) a Rules Composer DC or a ruleset even if one has full access to the DC or the ruleset. Although the user can edit the DC and upload it in the repository, the changes are not automatically approved as the production version. Therefore, the action SAP_BRM_APPROVE_RULE is required, which allows a user for approving a particular version of a rule to be the production version. 5. Configure user role access settings for the role PORulesAccessor##. a) Choose the Business rules Access Control Management tab.

Jiiii

Ove
I

Corrposrte App&calion Fr8Jre\Vor1< Authorization Tool

llJs lne11 Rules Access Control Management

List of User Role with Rulesets Access

I

Find: jPORulesAccessor20 .

'IO

I

Dela SourcdAI Dela Sources

Use< Role

,.

·I

for OC Narrel vendor20.eom-po_prOdU<0]

I Go)

I

Dllta Source

OCNarre

UhE Dela.base

vendor20.com-po_produc t_21H>t-rules

~

I

l'ORulesAc c essor20

Figure 265: NWA Security--BRM Access Control Management

b) In the Find field, enter PORulesAccessor##. c) At the end of the For DC Name field, choose the F4 Help to open the Find Development Component dialog box. d) In the Find Development Component dialog box, choose vendor##.com-po_product_##b/-rules. e) Choose Go. f) On the Identity Management: Business Rules screen, in the Detail of PORulesAccessor##user role access settings section, choose Edit. g) In the DC Access Type drop-down menu, choose Full. h) In the Ruleset Name table, in the NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset## row, in the Access dropdown menu, choose Full . Details of PORulesAccessor20 - user role access settings DC Narre:: vendor20.eom-po_p
OCAceess Type: fFul

Entity Nstre

• 11I Save II Cancel I Acc ess

lP

• ~~lll!OV!!~&~~

Same as Parent

!Add o r me 1

...

I

Figure 266: NWA Security--Adding t he Full Access to t he Entity

i) Choose Save .


363


Modify the Business Rule Using Rules Manager

1. Log onto the Rules Manager from the URL http:/ /nwktdc##.wdf.sap.corp:50000/ rulesmanager. The user ID is Administrator## . a) Open your internet browser. b) In the address bar, enter the URL listed above. c) If requested, log on as user Administrator##. 2. Open the AutoApprovalLimitDecision Table## decision table. a) On the Rules Manager screen, open vendor##.com-po_product_##-bl-rules . b) In the Project Details section, choose Open Project . If requested, choose the latest version of the project. c) On the Rules Manager screen, in the Rules Navigator, choose Rules NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset## ~ Decision Tables.

~

d) Double-click AutoApprovalLimitDecisionTable## decision table.

liiii

Rules Manager Welcome,Admini1tratoro1 System

0Acttve Vers ion

I Search I Rule 1 Navigator

:=:!

I!!

• ~ rules • @ Comroo Def11tions

I Download ~les Conlenl II Save

~ II °'"""" f'r""" I

Decision Table: "AutoApprovalLimitDecisionTable20"

-

General Information Nam e:

AutoApprovaLiritOec isionTable:ZO

• ~ &>umeration Types

• ~ arectivities

Oocu me ntation:

• .$; ~leedsApprovaFlow~lesel20

Return Multiple Matche3:

.

@ Defi'ltions

Rows Are Mutuall_ y Exctusive:

0 0

• ~ ~le Ao<.vs (1) • ~ ~leSc~s (1) • ~ ~le$ (0) •

I

@ Oeles (2)

I Conddion... • I I I Action ..• • I I I Ol•!!i! iaiout 11 I Show ref«encas J 11 E>cJ)OOn••• I F\src haseRequast8e1re11t/HeaderiR<91>n

I ApproveLirit

• fi\l) CiscountOecislonTabie20

Nortl>, Ce
2000

• ~AutoApprovat.mlDecisionTable20

Asia f'llcWlt and ~n

1000

Eiltope, ttie Mdd1e Ells~ and Africa

5000

Figure 267: Rules Manager--Changing the Values of the Decision Table

3. Edit the AutoApprovalLimitDecisionTable## decision table so that the approval limit for Asia Pacific and Japan is 2000. a) On the AutoApprovalLimitDecisionTable## screen, in the General Information section , choose the ApprovalLimit table cell for Asia Pacific and Japan. b) Enter 2000 .

364



I

6

Active Version

I Download Rules Content!JI Save II Olange A'ojel: I

Decision Table: "AutoApprovallimitDecision Table20" General Information Name:

AutoApprovatiri!Dec isiooTable20

Documentation: Return Multiple Matche s: Rows Are Mutually Exclusive:

D 0

I Condition... .. 11 I Action... .. 11 I Olange layout 11 I Show references 11I C
Approvallirit

North, Central. and South A rreric a

~

Asia Pat iftt and Japan

5000

Europe, the Mddle East, and A frica

•

Figure 268: Rules Manager--Saving Values Changes in t he Decision Table

c) Choose Save. The system automatically opens the Rules Manager, Upload Project screen. 4 . Upload the decision table to the repository . a) In the Rules Manager, Upload Project screen, check that the changes object appears in the Flow Ruleset section . b) Enter a comment in the Comment field and flag the Activate Changes checkbox.

liiii

El

Flow Rulesets

Select

[ 0

l

Nsrre

Status

Nee
l'vlOOIFB>

';:J

:n El

Reusable Ruleaeta

~~~~~~~~~--==~

Select

Nsrre

Comrents:

Status

I

Mf fi'st changes using the Rules Manager

~ Rulesets modified usino Rules MaMger are not activated automaticBlly. To cJo so, sel ect the ' Activate Changes· checkbo1< Only active version of ruresets are displayed in the Rules MatlBger and i1?YOked by the Rule Engine

d

I Subrrit C!!anQes I

Figure 269: Rules Manager--Adding a Comment

c) Choose Submit Changes.


365


5. View the changes to the AutoApproval l imitDecisionTable## decision table in the Web Services Navigator. a) In a new tab of your internet browser, enter the following url : http: I I nwktdcOO . wdf .sap.corp : SOOOO / wsnavigator b) Verify the Asia Pacific and Japan Approval Limit is updated.

366




•



367


368


Unit 6

Learning Assessment

1.

What do business rules describe?


D D c D D

A Constraints B Definitions Operations

D Process flow

2. What do application rules define?


D D D D

A A set application tasks and sequencing. B A set of restrictions placed on the process model. C A set of conditions with associated actions. D A set of standard practices and policies.

3. What do business rules define?


D D D D

A A set of application tasks and sequencing. B A set of restrictions placed on the process model. C A set of conditions with associated actions. D A set of standard practices and policies.


369


4. Business rules can be created in which applications?


D D c D D

A Process Composer B Rules Composer Visual Composer

D Web Dynpro

5. Which of the following are BRM components?


D D Dc D

A Rules Composer B Rules Engine Rules Server

D Rules Manager

6 . What rules-based objects can you define?


D D c D D

A Common definitions B Enumeration types Flow rulesets

D Rule overrides

7. What rules-based actions can you define?


D D c D D

A HTML reporting B Integrating rules with Microsoft Excel Generating Web services for rulesets

D Testing XML rulesets

370



8. What is Rules Manager used for?


D Modeling business processes D c Storing rules D D Testing rules D A Creating rules B


371

Unit 6


1.

What do business rules describe?


0 0 0 D

A Constraints B Definitions

c

Operations

D Process flow

2. What do application rules define?


D D c 0 D

A A set application tasks and sequencing. B A set of restrictions placed on the process model. A set of conditions with associated actions.

D A set of standard practices and policies.

3. What do business rules define?


D D c D

A A set of application tasks and sequencing. B A set of restrictions placed on the process model.

0

372

A set of conditions with associated actions.

D A set of standard practices and policies.



4. Business rules can be created in which applications?


0 0 B Rules Composer c Visual Composer D D Web Dynpro D

A Process Composer

5. Which of the following are BRM components?


0 B Rules Engine 0 c Rules Server D D Rules Manager 0

A Rules Composer

6 . What rules-based objects can you define?


0 0 0 0

A Common definitions B Enumeration types

c

Flow rulesets

D Rule overrides

7. What rules-based actions can you define?


0 0 B Integrating rules with Microsoft Excel c Generating Web services for rulesets 0 D Testing XML rulesets D A HTML reporting


373


8. What is Rules Manager used for? Choose the correct answers.

0

A Creating rules

D D

B Modeling business processes

0

374

c

Storing rules

D Testing rules


Service Handling

Lesson 1 376

Calling a Web Service f rom an Automated Activity

385

Exercise 15: Import and Assign a Service Interface Definition

Lesson 2

395 413

Configuring Application Communication Exercise 16: Configure Inbound and Outbound Communication

UNIT OBJECTIVES

•

Call a Web service from an automated activity

•

Configure inbound communication

•

Configure outbound communication


375

Unit 7 Lesson 1 Calling a Web Service from an Automated Activity

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to call a Web service from an automated activity using service interface definition task assignments and principal propagation. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson , you will be able to:

•


Service Interface Definition Introduction to Service Interfaces A service interface (SI) is used to describe operations that are required later for an implementation in the application, independent of platform or programming language. Depending on the category of a service interface, the following use cases are possible: •

Inbound (Provider Role): A service in an application system, which can be called by a user.

•

Outbound (Consumer Role): A call from a service of a provider is required. To do so, you require the outbound service interface that matches the inbound service interface.

•

Abstract: In enhanced communication using the integration server, you want to exchange messages with a buffered integration process.

In the application system , a proxy generation is used to generate development objects for implementation based on the service interfaces. Proxy generation generates the following objects automatically: •

Proxy objects (for example, classes, methods, and data types)

•

A service definition for communication using the web service runtime

Note: In the case of the stateless (XI 3.0-compatible) interface pattern, a service definition is only created if the operation is a synchronous operation. In general, the interface pattern in the ES Repository is used to determine which protocol is used by the service interface. As with all design objects, service interfaces are organized using Repository namespaces, which are assigned to a software component version.

376



You can construct service interfaces using the following methods: •

Through message types and data types. This two-layer structure uses WSDL (Web Service Description Language) and is oriented towards maximum reusability. Customers can also use data type enhancements to add their own fields to a message. To handle application-specific errors, you have the option of using fault message types.

•

Through RFC or IDoc messages as counterparts for an RFC or IDoc in the SAP system for A2A or B2B integrat ion

•

Through external WSDL, XSD, and DTD definitions, and the message schemas contained in them

These objects, as well as business objects and context objects, are referred to as interface objects.

Note: The introduction of an intermediate message type layer seems at first glance unnecessary; however it is required in XML so that a message can be handled as a separate instance. Data types in XML schema do not yet define an instance of this type because a data type does not yet define an element. Building a Service Interface In general, service interfaces are built in a service interface editor. In the editor you can switch between the design and the source (code) tabs. Category and Interface Pattern The interface pattern determines the type of communication. Service interfaces of the categories outbound or inbound are used for the implementation of communication in the application system. In this case you can select all interface patterns. Service interfaces of the category abstract are intended for communication with an integration process on the Integration Server. In this case you can only use the interface patterns stateless and stateless (XI 3.0 compatible). Abstract Service Interfaces Abstract service interfaces are required for the execution of cross-system integration processes. The execution of such processes enhances communication using the Integration Server as follows: an integration process on the Integration Server can relate messages to each other according to a specified model (also known as orchestration). An integration process is therefore executed after a message has been sent and before it has been received by a receiver. An integration process receives and sends messages by using abstract service interfaces. In an integration process, a service interface in this category can take on the role of an inbound or outbound service interface depending on whether it is used for sending or receiving a message. For this reason, no direction is specified during definition. In integration processes, you can use the same abstract interface to receive and send a message. Abstract service interfaces generally receive the message from an outbound interface of a sender system and send it to an inbound interface of a receiver system, thus performing a complementary role.


377

Unit 7: Service Handling

You also use abstract service interfaces for particular adapters. You cannot generate proxies for service interfaces of this category since abstract interfaces are not designed to be implemented in an application system. Interface Patterns and Operations Each service interface can have multiple operations. Depending on the interface pattern , the service interface editor provides you with appropriate operation patterns and modes from which to select. Table 3: Service Interface Operations Interface Pattern

Operation Pattern

Mode of Operations Available

Security Profile

stateless

normal operation

Synchronous and Asynchronous

No Low Medium High

stateless (XI 3.0 compatible)

normal operation

stateful

normal operation

Synchronous and Asynchronous Synchronous

Basic Strong No Low Medium High

commit operation

Synchronous

rollback operation

Synchronous

TU@C/C

normal operation

Synchronous and Asynchronous

No Low Medium High

tentative-update operation

Synchronous

confirm operation

Asynchronous

compensate operation Asynchronous

378



Note: Data may be lost if you change the interface pattern of a service interface, because not every operation pattern is available in every interface pattern. Furthermore, the change may require you to make a change to an existing implementation. You must therefore commit to one interface pattern at the start. The structure of the data to be exchanged is defined by the reference to a message schema. Depending on the mode, in the service interface editor you can reference message types, RFC messages, IDoc messages (for requests only), or external messages for the relevant direction of message exchange (compare with the information under Overview in the Mapping section). Table 4: Mode and Message Types Mode

Messages

Asynchronous

Request, fault (optional and only for inbound service interfaces)

Synchronous

Request, Response, Fa ult (optional)

From the ES Repository release of 7.31 SPll and 7.4 SP06 onwards, it is also possible to model services based on mode Asynchronous Best Effort. For more details, please refer to SAP note 1928204. Services modeled using this mode cannot be used in Process Integration for BPM use cases. If you want to handle application-specific errors or persist them in monitoring, assign corresponding fault message types to the operation. Fault messages transfer errors on the receiver side to the sender or to monitoring. For this reason, it is not possible to define fault messages for asynchronous operations of abstract service interfaces or for asynchronous operations of outbound service interfaces. Security Profile You can assign security levels to the service interfaces in the ES Repository. These values form the metadata descriptions which influence the behavior during implementation of this service definition. This feature is applicable only for point to point communication. You can assign different sets of values to security profiles. Depending on the type of interface pattern selected, you can choose from a different set of values for the security profile. If you select the interface pattern as Stateless (Xl30-compatible), you can choose from the following values: •

Basic-Basic Authentication using user ID and password and no transport security

•

Strong-Strong Authentication (SSL or SSO) and transport security

If you select the interface pattern as Stateful, Stateless, or TU&C/C, you can choose from the following values: •

No-No Authentication and no transport security

•

Low-Basic Authentication using user ID and password and no transport security


379


•

Medium-Basic Authentication using user ID and password and transport security

•

High-Strong Authentication (SSL or SSO) and transport security

Note: The Security Profile field is available only if you select the Point-to-Point Enabled checkbox.

Service Interface Definition Task Assignment Start Event

Human Activity

Automated Activity Service Call Service Call

)

Service Call

<

Service Call

Automated Activity

End Event Figure 270: Service Interface Definition Task in the Process

Services are called by integrating automated activities into the process and assigning the service and operation to be called. When the execution of the process reaches the automated activity, the service is called. As shown in the figure entitled Assign the Service, services are assigned in the Interface view.

'i

•. I

•

"'

•

:;

'i

Cteete P11ch8se

I

11,

Request

_!J

•

'°" . . )j

Cl Properties I:3

I"

1,

Relations

[t Problems 1~ Console

~ Errorlog ~ InfrastructLre Console

II

~ Create Purchase Request

I' 11

General L~

Interface

Select the service operation that you want to invoke. Enter the service reference as endpoint information:

Operation:

I IcreateRequest (In:createRequest, Out:createRequestResponse)

s.....

I

:iervice Int!lrfac!l: SimplifiedPurchaseOrder

II I': I'

Input~g

Output Mapping

oR rer r·

~Events

,,

'

380

Figure 271: Assign t he Service



Service Group Details v

--;.r l'-.U:I

•

~ Select

• ~

....

-

c.....

,,,..

J

•

~:~ Marquee

Ccme f1ow Objetts

•0

•

0 ~

~• - IL ""'~"'"' !:! Con>olo

e Create Purcl\8se Request

St:~1t Event

Artfatts

f"I Oat.a Obiett:

"'

..

Service Reference

•

..... "''"l>bon

'""-"""'"'""""' -...~..,oo:;;iCii

Loe.I Prow:Mr Sy.stem:

r

voot•" "Of"''

1...

lc~1 ..~..1""

Figure 272: Creating a Service Group

By assigning the service and operation, you do not specify from where this service is provided. This mapping of the service call to a system providing this service has to be done in the runtime configuration. To ease this runtime configuration, you additionally have to assign a service group. Assigning multiple service calls to one service group enables you to do the runtime configuration for all of them together instead of having to configure each service. A common case is to use one service group for each provider system from which the process is consuming Web services. This way, the runtime configuration can quickly be configured to call the right system for the Web service calls. If the Web service to be called is provided by an application that is running on the BPM system, you can also mark the local provider system flag for the service group to be able to skip the runtime configuration completely.


381


I@_ C"""°s'~e E .E3

21

g

8

<);,

.

~ ~-·

..,.

El 0 8 I;i.f!~w!ill~ I

Purc:Noe R

est

wdflbrnl:2267

D Local Provider System D Closslfled

Connectivity

S

Purcha.seR~est:ServiceGroup

Name De$(ription Origin

l'<>ftai Process ·

.E3

..,. Service Group Details

•

ooU

!:ii PurchaseRequestService
~Search Cons = El ,fj Pll'choseOrd°""ocessStart.wsdl

Servite Gr«Jps

I - ti PurchaseRequestServi

..,. dassifications

, ~ S~vice References &DD Process Modmg t;J ~ Processes -&, Purchase Ot $ (8 TO
!

;,. l;9 Functions

I

l±l fS Data Types CB

c9 Service lnterf ores

W~ src tiJ. User Interface IE ~ Susiness L09ic f±l-&i;l External Services

ill

00 {§} Irirostructure

Service References ([LocalDevelapmentj poJ>r~t/pr/pm)

.E3

Service References • Li.st or Service References ~

13

El l3 1

l3

SamplerrnerServiceGroup

Pll'choseRequestServiceGrO
!!I !B

htQ>://w-.vendor.com/ApprovalRtAes ~ NeedsApprovalFlowl\uleSetPortType htQ>://sap.com/trainingJbpm/service
G> S'omploftodPurcllaseOrder

Figure 273: Service Groups

You can find the existing service groups and their references to services below the Connectivity node in the project tree.

Principal Propagation Overview

liii

Start Event Intermediate Message Event

Principal Information

.- Automated Activity

Human Activity Figure 27 4 : Principal Propagation Overview

You can forward user contexts using principal propagation, which means you can transfer principal information from start events, intermediate message events, and human activities to an automated activity. The automated activity is then executed with the given user information.

Principal Propagation An incoming message that is transferring principal information can come from a start event, intermediate message event, or a human activity. Messages from a start event or intermediate message event are triggered by an incoming request. The incoming request provides the principal information, which is copied to the main token of the process flow. When a human activity is transferring principal information, the information is only transferred when the task is complete. Owner information is taken from the active task. The main flow token is then populated with the principal information.

382



C

!:3 '

Prcpelties

~ BPMl 1Erter a name for this element and a description (cpllonal):

General

LBPMI

Name:

Appearance

Oocumentatlon:

A<*nlnlstrators Potenbal ~rs ExWded Ov«lers

User Texts

<

0 0

Make this nnnl active (other pools become ln!lttive)

~~inq)al °PropagatlonJ

Release

~ *BPMI ~ "\.._

~

Stat../Released to Build

I

-s --

S1 Ir!

Service cal

1i:i l J ~

End

Figure 275: Principal Propagation

•

With Principal Propagation, the user context is forwarded Principals from incoming events and human activities are transferred to an automated activity The automated activity is then executed with the given user information

•

Principal Propagation is enabled in the properties view of the process

Incoming Principal Information The incoming message transferring the principal information can be one of the following: •

Start event or Intermediate message event Triggered by an incoming request The principal information is given by the incoming request The principal attributes are copied to the main token of the process flow

•

Human activity The principal attributes are only propagated when a task is completed The actual owner information is taken from the involved task The main flow token is populated with the principal information

Service Call Users •

When an automated activity is reached in the process flow, it consumes the principal information


383


•

It switches to the user that is set in the principal attributes for the time when calling the Web . service

•

Default hierarchy of used credentials to start an automated activity: Principal propagation If principal propagation is activated for the process flow and the token contains a principal , this is consumed by the automated activity Connectivity If no credential is provided by principal propagation, the user and password that is used to set up the connection in the NetWeaver Administrator SOA Management is consumed by the automated activity BPM Service User If no credential is provided by principal propagation or connectivity the default user BPM Service User is consumed by the automated activity

Propagation of Principal Information in the Process Flow •

When modeling a process with active principal propagation: Consider when in the process flow the principal information is forwarded Consider when it is removed

•

Behavior of a token (with principal information) in a process flow: Exclusive choice - The token is forwarded including the principal information Parallel split-The token is forwarded including the principal information. If new tokens are generated the principal attributes are set accordingly for them Uncontrolled merge-The token is forwarded including the principal information Parallel join-Any principal information is removed Loops-Due to token merge semantic, the out token flow does not propagate the principal Boundary events-Due to cancel semantic, the out token flow does not propagate the principal Embedded sub-process-The token propagates the principal information from the main process flow into the embedded sub-process (and back) Referenced sub-process-Due to independency semantic, the in and out token flow for referenced sub-process flow does not propagate the principal

Embedded sub-process The token propagates the principal information from the main process flow into the embedded sub-process. The principal information is also effective in the sub-process flow. There, the principal can be set by task activities and can be used by automated activities. When a token leaves an embedded sub-process flow, it propagates the latest principal information into the main process flow.

384


Unit 7 Exercise 15 Import and Assign a Service Interface Definition

Business Example

You are a business process administrator. You have been asked to enhance the business process by Service interfaces. An automated activity is a type of flow object that illustrates an activity that the system performs. When you use automated activities in the process, you must assign service interface definitions and operations to them to make them work. When the process flow reaches an automated activity, the respective Web service is called. For the sake of simplicity, the exercise scenario does not use an external ERP system for the creation and release of the purchase request, but uses a Web service that is implemented on the Java system running on your training server. The used service interface is named SimplifiedPurchaseOrder and offers two operations, named createRequest and releaseRequest. The former operation is assigned to the automated activity Create Purchase Request##, the latter to Release Purchase Request## . As the used service is published to the Services Registry on your training server, you import the required service interface definition into the NetWeaver Developer Service from there. Using the wizard for the import of the service interface definition from the Services Registry, you create a service reference for the service interface and assign this service reference to the service group PurchaseRequestServiceGroup##, which you created in a previous exercise. The created service reference is selected automatically when you assign the imported service interface to the automated activities Create Purchase Request## and Release Purchase Request XX in the process. In a later exercise (after deployment of the process), you configure the service group, and with it all included services using the SAP NetWeaver Administrator. At the end of this exercise, you define the input and output data mappings for the automated activities Create Purchase Request## and Release Purchase Request##. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you.

Note: In this exercise, the process created in exercises 2-5, 7, 8, and 10-14 is used .

Import and Assign a Service Interface Definition

1. In the NetWeaver Developer Studio, configure the Services Registry using the data in the following table.


385


Element

Va lue

Server field


Port field

50000

Enter User Credentials checkbox

Select the checkbox

User Name

Administrator##

Password

Enter your password for this user

2. Import the service interface definitions from the Service Registry. 3. Assign the operation CreateRequest of the SimplifedPurchaseOrder service interface operation named CreateRequest to the automated activity Create Purchase Request## . 4 . Assign the SimplifedPurchaseOrder service interface to the automated activity Release Purchase Request## .

Define Input and Output Mapping 1. Define the input mapping for the automated activity Create Purchase Request## . 2. Configure Output Mapping using the following information. Map th is Object

To this Object

CreateRequestResponse

~

Return

CreateRequestResponse Currency Code

~

Return

RequestOata ~

RequestOata

~

Header

~

Currency

3. Fix the mapping error for the PurchaseOrderTotalAmount element. 4. Finalize the mapping for the activity Create Purchase Request##. 5. Implement the input mapping for the activity Release Purchase Request##.

386


Unit 7 Solution 15 Import and Assign a Service Interface Definition

Business Example

You are a business process administrator. You have been asked to enhance the business process by Service interfaces. An automated activity is a type of flow object that illustrates an activity that the system performs. When you use automated activities in the process, you must assign service interface definitions and operations to them to make them work. When the process flow reaches an automated activity, the respective Web service is called. For the sake of simplicity, the exercise scenario does not use an external ERP system for the creation and release of the purchase request, but uses a Web service that is implemented on the Java system running on your training server. The used service interface is named SimplifiedPurchaseOrder and offers two operations, named createRequest and releaseRequest. The former operation is assigned to the automated activity Create Purchase Request##, the latter to Release Purchase Request## . As the used service is published to the Services Registry on your training server, you import the required service interface definition into the NetWeaver Developer Service from there. Using the wizard for the import of the service interface definition from the Services Registry, you create a service reference for the service interface and assign this service reference to the service group PurchaseRequestServiceGroup##, which you created in a previous exercise. The created service reference is selected automatically when you assign the imported service interface to the automated activities Create Purchase Request## and Release Purchase Request XX in the process. In a later exercise (after deployment of the process), you configure the service group, and with it all included services using the SAP NetWeaver Administrator. At the end of this exercise, you define the input and output data mappings for the automated activities Create Purchase Request## and Release Purchase Request##. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you.

Note: In this exercise, the process created in exercises 2-5, 7, 8, and 10-14 is used .

Import and Assign a Service Interface Definition

1. In the NetWeaver Developer Studio, configure the Services Registry using the data in the following table.


387


Element

Va lue

Server field


Port field

50000

Enter User Credentials checkbox

Select the checkbox

User Name

Administrator##

Password

Enter your password for this user

a) In NetWeaver Developer Studio, in the Window menu, choose Preferences . b) In the Preferences dialog box, choose Web Services

~

Services Registry.

c) On the Services Registry screen, enter the data in the table. d) Choose Apply. e) Choose OK. 2. Import the service interface definitions from the Service Registry. a) In the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Product_## ~ Process ~ [LocalDevelopment] po_product_##/pr/pm >Process Modeling~ Service Interfaces. b) In the Services Interfaces context menu, choose Import WSDL . c) In the WSDL Import dialog box, choose the Services Registry radio button. d) Choose Next. e) In the Services Registry dialog box, choose Next. f) In the Services Registry dialog box, in the Found Services Definitions table, choose SimplifiedPurchaseOrder. g) Choose Next. h) In the Service Reference dialog box, select the Create New radio button. i) In the Name and description field, enter PurchaseRequestServiceGroup## .

j) Choose Finish. The service interfaces can be found in the Composite Explorer under: PO_Product_## [vendor##.com] ~ Process ~ [LocalDevelopment] po_product_##/pr/pm ~ Connectivity ~ Service References 3. Assign the operation CreateRequest of the SimplifedPurchaseOrder service interface operation named Create Request to the automated activity Create Purchase Request## . a) To open the process in the modeling area, in the Composite Explorer view, expand PO_Product_## [vendor##.com] ~ Process ~ [LocalDevelopment] po_product_##/ pr.pm~ Process Modeling~ Processes. b) Double-click Purchase Order Process_## .

388



c) On the Purchase Order Process_## modeling surface, choose the automated activity Create Purchase Request##. d) Choose the Properties tab, then choose the Interface view. If the Properties tab is not displayed , in the Window menu, choose Show View

~

Other/

e) In the Service Interface field drop-down menu, choose SimplifiedPurchaseOrder. f) In the Operation field drop-down menu , choose CreateRequest (ln:CreateRquest, Out:CreateRequestResponse). g) Choose Save . Ll Properties ~

):) Relations

IIL Problems


~ create Purchase Request 20 r - - - - - - - - i Select the service operation that you want to invoke. Enter the service reference as endpoint information:

General

Lc:>oJl!ng

Service Interface:

Interface

1-----~

Output Mapping

Operation:

I= ·= ··=·===-- - - - - - - - - - - - - createRequest (ln:createRequest, Out:createRequestResponse)

Service . , . f erence: SimpfifiedPurchaseOrder: PurchaseRequestServiceGroup20

Boundary Events

Figure 276: Assigning a SI to the Create Purchase Request ## Object

Note: When you assign an imported service interface to an automated activity, the service reference created during the import is automatically entered in the Service Reference field. To assign a particular operation of a service interface to an automated activity, drag the operation from the Composite Explorer view and drop it onto the applicable automated activity in the modeling surface.

4. Assign the SimplifedPurchaseOrder service interface to the automated activity Release Purchase Request## . a) On the Purchase Order Process_## modeling surface, choose the automated activity Release Purchase Request## . b) On the Properties tab, choose Interface . c) In the Service Interface field drop-down menu, choose SimplifiedPurchaseOrder. d) In the Operation field drop-down menu, choose CreateRequest (ln:ReleaseRequest, Out:ReleaseRequestResponse). e) Choose Save. Define Input and Output Mapping

1. Define the input mapping for the automated activity Create Purchase Request##.


389


a) On the Purchase Order Process_## modeling surface, choose the automated activity Create Purchase Request## .

b) On the Properties tab, choose Input Mapping. c) On the left side of the screen, expand the nodes RequestData/Header and RequestData/ Item . On the right side, expand the node createRequest (to see which fields occur on both sides). d) Right-click on the node RequestData and, keeping the mouse button depressed drag it onto the node createRequest (on the right side) . When the mouse button is released, the context menu opens. e) Choose Execute Default Matcher. f) Choose Save .

liiii

0

Properties

'3

:J Relations !:.£ Problems

~ Infrastrutture Consde

~ Create Purchase Request 20 1 - - - - - - - 1 Define the input fY18PPinq for this element:

Genet'al Loot*>Q

1;..==.c."-"--'------~

Interface

I===============--~

......~"====!!!!!!!!!~

Input Mapping OutpYt~

Booodary Events

Process context

Inputs of Create Purchase Request 20

12".

f!:::=:=============--~ •El IB createR~st

IE (lJ ProcesslnstanceAttributes

~ft--ttl ~ items .--;-~....[t sellerld

81:8 RequestData El

C".

Iii Header 1 llil Approved Cil ApproverComment • Ill Currency '. IIJ Pll'chaseOrderlD ll!1l PurchaseOrderlotalAmount l!J Region . Ill SelerlD-----~_,,

l

a-rn 1tem- - - - - - - 1_,., Ill ' !Il

Currency ProductlD- - - - --1-/

! ll'.l ProductNatne

. ll!1l ProductPrice I ll!1l Quantlty- - - - - - V

Figure 277: Result of t he Mapping: Seller ID and Item


To this Object

CreateRequestResponse

~

Return

CreateRequestResponse Currency Code

~

Return

RequestData ~

RequestData

~

Header

~

Currency

a) On the Properties tab, choose the Output Mapping view. b) From the Outputs of Create Purchase Request## column, right-click and drag CreateRequestResponse

~

Return to RequestData.

c) In the context menu, choose Execute Default Matcher. d) Expand all nodes on both sides of the screen.

390



CJ Properties E3 ~ Relations ft. Problems ID Create Purchase Request 20


11-G- ener - al --~ Define the output mapping For this element:

t;L~·b~~ Outputs ol Create Purchase Request 20

~ !==:::::::::===========-----' El-03 aeateRequestResponse

i=

Interlace

El!E 1!1 currencyCode

Output Mapping

8

BOl.Jldary Events

li:il items- - - - - - - - t-....

I ITl currencyCode - - - - + - . . . . . CTl itemld ; IHI ItemTota!AtnW>t I I III productCategory l!l productld - - - - - ; r - - _ 1 l!l productName- - - - - t - - . . IHI productPrice- - - - - t - . . _ _ , IHI quantity - - - - - - t - - - . _1

I mmessages

• ID '. IHI 8 IE

purchaseOrder!d - - - - - + - ' purchaseOrderTotalAmount - - - + - '

Process context

~ !==::::=:=============---' '8 [5 RequestData

.S- IE

Header . 00 Approved • •· III ApproverComment 00 Currency .--t-~~· l!I Purcl>aseOrderlD IHI Purcl>aseOrderTotalAmount ; III Region , . . - - t - - - l!l Seller!D

I

,.-fjr,;J+----T-+;

/'-1~-S 6J Item ......_-+-~· l!I

Currency

._-+--+;- l!J Product!O -----4-----+' II! ProductName ' -----1-~;

IHI ProdJctPrice ------+- - ' - IHI Quantity 1

seller

l!l bulking III city , !!I companyName . l!l country ' l!l legal'orm l!l postalCode 1 III sellerld- - - - - - + - ' l!l street

e [5 ProcesslnstanceAttributes tl3

1l3 RequestData

Figure 278: Result of t he Mapping: Seller

3. Fix the mapping error for the PurchaseOrderTota/Amount element. a) Double-click the fx symbol with the error -£!;)+ . which occurs on the mapping line between PurchaseOrderTota/Amount on the left side and PurchaseOrderTota/Amount on the right side. The Expression Editor appears. b) In the Expression Editor, choose CreateRequestResponse/Returnl PurchaseOrderTota/Amount and on the keyboard, press CTRL+l. The Expression Editor offers to cast the source data type as the target data type.

Note: In some cases, it is not necessary to choose the line to start the cast.

c) Double-click the suggested expression. The error notification disappears and the mapping line is highlighted. d) Choose OK. 4. Finalize the mapping for the activity Create Purchase Request##. a) Using the left mouse key, drag createRequestResponse--+ return--+ currencyCode to RequestData --+ Header--+ Currency.


391


liii

e Create Purchase Request 20 General

--1

De&e the O
~L~·~~""~""~~ ~
Process context

e IB O'eatoRequestReSPQnSe

~

8 Ii!

Output Mapping

-S

ret\m

III

III wrrencyeoc1e- - - - - r - . . . . III lemld ml RemTotalAmount III product
1

IIl produ<;t~ -----t--.....

' III product:Name - - - - - + - - . . . ' ml productPrice ml quantfy - - - - - - - 1 - - l

.._, "-

mme.sages IE

P,pproved APP<"OV!l'Commont Currency

PurchaseOrderlO PurchasaOrderTotalAmount Region

SefferlO ~~-S61 Item

. ID purchaseOrderld - - - - . i - . . . . ml purchaseOrderTota!Amo<.nt --........8

-.e Cil Header

!ID III ---+--+-+; l!l ....--+----!---"-1 l!l H----,--+ ml l!J ...--r--;--' II!

currencyCode

~ ~ i:ems- - - - - - - + - . . .

Event$

q3 Requestl>ate

....._-+--~ II! Currency f

---'--~ IIl Product!O ---1---~ l!l ProductName

- - - ' - - -ml Productprice

---1-----[BJ Quantity

se1er

l!l bJi1dino l!l cfy . l!l c~ ' III cOLntty ' III legalForm I III post"1Code III sderld - - - - - - 1 . / III street

e' ll3 Proces.lnstanceAttnbutes @-1'.5 RequestData

Figure 279: Finalized Mapping

b) Choose Save . 5. Implement the input mapping for the activity Release Purchase Request##. a) On the Purchase Order Process_## modeling surface, select the Release Purchase Request## automated activity. b) On the Properties tab, choose Input Mapping. No output mapping is required. c) In the Process Context column, expand RequestData

~

Header.

d) In the Inputs of Release Purchase Request## column (right side), expand ReleaseRequest. e) From the Process Context column, left-click and drag RequestData ~ Header ~ PurchaseOrderlD to ReleaseRequest ~ PurchaseOrderlD in the Inputs of Release Purchase Request## column.

l'iii

Properties El

;& Relations IL Problems 'iJ Infr6SO"uttll'e Console

e Release Purchase Request 20 l-Gen - e-ral- - - - 1 Define the Input mapping for this element: 1 = = = = = = ' 1 Process context Looping

Interface Input Mapping
Inputs of Release Purchase Request 20

1~----'--------~

Events

fii

1l3 Proce.slnstanceAttrib<.tes

8

l'.\3 RequestData

-S· IB releaseRequest ,,-----t-- purchaseOrderld

' [i) Header SI

' I

I

ru

r ·li!l Approved · l!l

IIl

I ,..,

ApproverComment

Currency

I ...,_, PurchaseOrder ID

· , fBl PurchaseOrderTotalAmount CTl Region III SellerlO

I

iii~

Item

Figure 280: Mapping in the Release Purchase Request## Object

392



f) Choose Save.


393



•

394



Unit 7 Lesson 2 Configuring Application Communication

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to configure inbound and outbound communication. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

•


•


Web Service Provider Configuration Overview Provider system

Provider system

-

+

Web service definitions

Policy

Callable Web service endpoints

I

Figure 281: SOA Provider Configurat ion . Basic Principle

Scenario A scenario is a group of service definitions. You can assign policies to one or more services in a . scenario. Policy Policies contain runtime configuration settings (for example for security and re liable messaging), that are enforced during consumer-provider communication. Policies, also called communication profiles, are reusable. Service Group


395


Consumer system

Consumer system

Consumer app

Consumer

Service Croup

L L

> >

Service Croup

--( + --(

Group of references to Web services

-

Policy

> >

@

@>

Configured consumer endpoints

Figure 28 2: SOA Consum er Configuration . Basic Principle

A service group is a development artifact that is part of the consumer application configured at runtime. When configuring a service group, you can configure the consumer endpoints of the consumer application. A service group is a group of consumed services that run on the same system provider, for example for data integrity reasons on the provider side. For a consumer, a service group is a bundle of references to services that must be provided by the same provider system. A consumer can contain many service groups. The service groups in a composite application developed in SAP Composition Environment are published to the service registry so that you can easily see which consumer applications can use by a service at runtime.

Provider Application Search You can apply runtime configuration settings to multiple service definitions of a provider application all at once. You decide which service definitions to configure in a provider application and then expose those service definitions for consumption through runtime settings. You can search for and choose the provider applications that you want to configure in the Composite Explorer.

Services Registry

Consumer system Consumer app

Provider system

r-

(

Service Group

>> >>

Service Group

Provider system

>> >>

...______

_, ~

'------------<©)FIN

--c~o~nflfl:g:u:re:.:co:;n;;s:;um;;;e~r~s-- ---cc:;;o~nn;;:e:;:s ct :ys:ite~m~s- - - ~Configure provide s

----

Figure 283: SOA Configuration for Connectivity, Basic Principles

396


Lesson: Configuring Application Communication

Configuration of Consumers The following are the main elements required to configure services for consumers: Configure Consumers When configuring consumers as follows, the system automatically creates logical ports and publishes service groups to the Services Registry: •

Group consumer proxies in service groups

•

Associate policies and service groups

Connect Systems The following shou ld be created to connect systems: •

Create policies

•

Create connections between the consumer system and the provider systems

Configure Providers When configuring providers as follows, the system automatically generates endpoints and publishes them to the Services Registry: •

Group Web services in scenarios

•

Apply policies to the Web services in the scenario

Create Service Groups A composite application can make use of a multitude of services. Configuring those services individually would: •

Require a large initial effort

•

Make configuration changes expensive because all affected services have to be touched

•

Increase the chance of configuration errors and inconsistencies

Grouping the services eliminates those issues because configuration is done only once for a set of services, and changes can be applied quickly at a single point. A general approach is to: •

Create Service Groups at design time in NetWeaver Developer Studio

•

Configure the groups in NetWeaver Administrator after the deployment onto the application server


397


Consumption

liii

r-.,_~ Import

,~

•• Cr eate Service Reference

Create a SetVke Rele
--

Project Explorer

W new.undelined..>11.I

Services:

El

(' Choose eldstt)o:

r. Create new Name:

:s;? [Test (0)) bpm264/proc B ~ Connectivity 1$1 i[:p Service Groups .

I•

(def....it) &-~..

Pod\o9e:

~"\ 9o. Navigator

t.l

address_sg · ·~ Service References

I

...

J address.sg

Descril)t;on:

Create In project: !crest (OJ] sap_demo

_<....;!!ac'-k -'--'~ -?__.I

._I_ A.,_11s11_._ _,l _Co1icet _ __,

Figure 284: NetWeaver Developer Stud io

Service Groups are defined in NWDS when import ing service interfaces. Once deployed to the AS Java, the Service Groups need to be configured in the SAP NetWeaver Administrator.

liiiii

SAP NetWeaver Administrator 7 SOA Management ...

... 7 Technical Configuration 7 System Connections My \>Vo11i.s.pace

[

'

Tectmlcol Configuration

AYalab~y and

Pert0f1Mnce IJanaoement I

AppbcatJOn and Scenano Comrnunleat,on

Operation 1Jana9ement

LC9S and iraces

~ sv,ttm CO!ln•Cl!O•• J,!anage the polcies that you tnforce on tt)e runtrne cornmunbtlon between consu-.mers and p.rcvdfl'S. t.tamtall'! ecnnecticfts tc sys!ems Wl'lici't provide !iervicff to consumers runnlno on me IOcal applteaoon s.erver. ~ SQA M!dd~war& G!Gbal Se:l'h'fC-J

Configuratton IJana9emen1 ,

~~ l!Ml!ltt!!n Ttrrs>"'le l~onoo•MN ·

d:~ ·

Serym Brom Uanucmen1 Idanage the Se.Nices- Registry and UOOl server con6guratJOn seMgs tot sfCUr«y, pubbtion, repicaton. and so on.

SOA Mlinagement

f,tonllOJ'Wl.g

Configure settings tlta1affed tile beh1111Crof the v1hole syste~ su.ch as HITP proxy. Yteb Servicu Havlga1o.r v1hte Isl. reverse pro~ se!tn g$, and so on.

130 OIL!

Prol>le.1'1 Managemen1 ~ I

DO OCJ

J.lanage tempfate.-J for the~nfiguratlon of Java Wet- 1~fet t;Qn1umers tt'¢1l!:'M1lted t>efcrt SA.P enban~t pac.k a;t 1 fot SAP fle:Weaver 7. 1.

DestYlot!on• AoptcarJDM or services can es1abbh conne-ct»ns to ott:er seMces. ~Vh tn u-st19 such connectJOns~ yo.U net'd to speofy 11\e remote servloe 6dd1ess and the user authefltka11on wiformatJon to us.e for the connection, Many appkation."S uM ttte Oe:stna!ien s!t\ltee for Ehrs ptJrpcse.

Jco RF' Pr2:tidr:r iqe JCo RFC Provider Service proce-.stet ASAP to Java requests. and dispatches tne caDs to Java appbtions. So. 5.eeo from a,n AeA.Psysiem. It prcvJdff a.n RFC
Figure 285: SAP NetWeaver Adm inistrator

The settings for assigning system are found under SAP NetWeaver Administrator~ SOA Management~ Technical Configuration~ System Connections

398



Communication Profile Creation System Connections: Communication Profiles Commun~llOn

Activate Ce:a.ccr..a:e •

'1ipon

Ven.o..i

Profllea

• Security policies • Messaging settings ~ansport ,. s_ett_in_g_s_ _ _...-

Expott

S:at1.1s

1 Acwe

111.. IS• P"'fie wCh det•u• le_

_..._ _""

,...,eo..,..,,.,.t.0•Protc

n profile

-ff, Cofl'IYUnaton Prof~ v

--~-------

flew Profile I+--;

1--

I

General Details AbOut Communication Profile comm_proflle v.1

S.C..rty

"eu.a9ag

•raoapon Se""llS

Authentication Aut'tlffltat.cn &l~l'lod:

Trans port Security

LJ t.:one

0 Un< lliL'Tlt!Pauword (BHlcJ 0X509 Cle111 ~!IC4te 0 SAP logoo T-t 0 User ll•mel!'•Uword O
JJow On~ Seeo~e. Co.nm;Aca:..on

Ptotw

i;!J SAJJLAs~

0

~~fie

Profit ll•ll'IO •

X ~9 C.n.fa:e O
Otta'o"•"

-

::J

""'~· ec-ruc.- Ptot/.e

'

-

Enter name and description of the communication profile

Figure 286: Communication Profiles

When creating communication profiles, you will need to specify the following: •

Security policies

•

Messaging settings

•

Transport settings

•

Name and description of the communication profile

When a communication profile is assigned to a service definition, the system creates one or more service endpoints for the service definition. Each endpoint represents an alternative policy in the communication profile. For example, the system can create separate endpoints that require basic authentication, X.509 Client Certificate, and SAML Assertion for HTTP communication. If checked, Allow Only Secure Communication radio button enables only HTTPs communication. Each communication profile has a version, which is automatically assigned to the profile when it is created. Each time you edit a communication profile a new version is created. Multiple versions of a communication profile can exist, each version with its own settings. Version numbers start at 1. and each subsequent version number is increased by 1. When you assign different profiles to the same service definition, the system creates service endpoints that contain the configuration settings of each profile assigned to the service definition. When you assign a profile to a service definition, all of the profile versions are assigned to that service definition. The system then creates a service endpoint for every version available in the active profile.


399


Communication Profile Assignment to a Provider Application

liii

Set up a connection between the provider and consumer systems System Connections: Provider Systems

Create a connection

On the next steps, enter the following: • Credentials to t he system backend • Communication profile • Search method on the provider system • Messaging settings

::::::::::====:::;!

lfew Provider SyS(em

,.

~!---- ,

••

Provider S'fltcm

---

O.uils AtH>vl Sy•~•m lllJl(IOO)on lwmHl:lO

liitf s. .lt\il 0

Sftttm~

(o);i.W

System1.ame-: •

Ml.12

O J11va

If a connection to the SR is avdable, the value help lists its systems

O no11!iJI'

- - - - - - - -

$\-•..........

~ 0.J(ri;tJatl-

S>ttlt>"' ~'*" 1o l'lt12reco· of !ht Sit

Pftl~fl••

co.MU!f'C'*

~~~

I

OJ'ol)fC•~

Tett~fl«"M' Oro~

a

!!Ur :re cr~l•'-'*1'. 1 ~• oser !ot tt>e s~ l'Mt l'
9CJ

" 'fl:H1"ttrt

"'

.......

"'w

"' "'

!hie"'' II!~ s;t"'"'f,;r.t :~ ecan ~' ~~.i.11\e '°JSCI'..

1 I

• n 1:1}

01;«Q111

..iitttl ..l'u n

C-IX~Co:•U

..t
l!!:ttCec! •

OIX~ll

•• ..... ....

.. "'

..... ..... :.~

Enter system details and description

••••• ••

Figure 287: Connect ions t o Provider System

When you assign different profiles to the same service definition, the system creates service endpoints that contain the configuration settings of each profile assigned to the service definition. When you assign different profiles to the same service definition, all of the profile versions are assigned to that service definition. The system then creates a service endpoint for every version available in the active profile.

Consumer Application Search Application Communication:... ............

1 4>•~

~ ._,, 1 -

1 -

1

&

-i:=-;:;-=:::::::;-;E:::::~..._ Search for an application j v.w

,,,.

. ..,

• Expand the software component and select the application

Browse the provided services

lli!l . i@I _

~~~~-~~~~~~~~ ~

tJ

~«~

'°""" •

W.c.O't<.c

~cy

.......,,~ 'tQ..•---•.t ....

~-s..-..:.

f9'1HOl'tot-Cllt' f~" ~~-~~-~~---~-

Figure 288: Configuring Service Groups: Find Applications

You can apply runtime configuration settings to multiple service definitions of an application. You decide which service definitions in an application to configure and expose for consumption with applicable runtime settings. Find and choose the application you want to configure. You can find applications by entering a string in the Search field .

400



Appl/cation Communication:...

.......~..

1 4>•...

Assign a provider system

v....

• •» ~.._...-c•-<•Mr._~t •

~ ~"'ft-.U,..trw,.~ut

r-i

C72

on-

DS4('

L - .,,.,.._ •ys!Ml wtn wsi

~-""'3286 DS4-wev<111onpr
"

1.=-~elect a provider system

Open the service . _group for editing

J_

Select a .............. service group ..........;.;..;;.;;..;;~~""""---'=:.;.;.;;;;.;.;;;;:....._ AH

-

Sttt.« "4'tt-1u

ti ,......

•

,..~l(t s.-.-ic.~ 'L~·- "'

Figure 289: Configuring Service Consumers: Configure Service Groups

Provider System Connection SAP NetWeaver Administrator -7 SOA Management .. .

... -7 Technical Configuration -7 System Connections Lty,..vc~oac.e

Ava!laW{ Ml6 ~ltUhla...iog~1 (

Technieal Conflguretlon

[p__.

Al)*atbtl ano Sefo.nal'IO Coll'M>tl~a.1ior

Operauon.Wanlgemenl (

l09' and 'ittl~

Conll~urabOD-1~118gtmtt'!t

COMlll't'IPrs a"ld proll'ldets. Mu:a.,, connediO~ io syst!'ll"Jl wilie~ ptevi:fi! S!f\liCI!'.!

10 CO!!~ rvonfl.g on 11'-* 10c.aJap9k:t~a Ul'Yff, ~ SOA llQO.wlfl G'PbQ! Sfmr?al

"

d'-3 '

C~~~-ro $Cl¢ttl91 th•l •lfeathc btf.:IO'ilClr ot lt:c wl\oic' iYSlom. tt:.th 0.$ K1TPor01)'.

Stt
stM~s

ol.lbkotlon. tc;ibtion. alld so OA

I

SOA P.•~R"Wmt

l>nti!l:l!Q!l TEQ!IJ§; llR"'ISltrot:!S J11aogetc110111e1 fer :lie c;-onfJ;ut•llOl'I ot 1•~• \\e111'11l'l~I ~ac«age l torSJJ> i:~e11 1!t 7 1.

!ln!ilt!!Ot!

c.a"

Ap;>leatJOe• or seMc*S est•bbl'I OCMf'tt411t to o
\'leb SetYiu.t •aa~a:l)rwrtu lis1. te~ecu ~roxy ~s. and so en..

!flO 0[]

Pro?ltin ~•~lleme."!l

Monie-Mg

f!/'~

$Mm Cc1111t®n1 Llorie9c tM PoklH 1f!.at )'Ou enforee OC' 1r..e l'\ln.11'!1'Je. ~t'fr'(l.ln.«IJCln tatwetn

r

for sec.utty,

l!lO O[J

.IS B~ ftitt:~ Ttte JCo ~re Provi1'9r Ser.~ oroce»» AB.o..?;Q J1lft rtQ..,nlt.. •nd So. s~n. ~m •~ .c.BAP S}'S'!!fl\ 1 MOvfCltt '" RiC dH!i'illiOn. TeehtlicaJ)'. mt $eNIOe ts CIM'd Otl tne lCo lSAP J1v1 Con~QOf'). n or#et to recer.'e~ tl'orr...t:..!AP. J Co Servc--1"$ tre started • NI rt;$:f"fed 1: ll"t ~l!eways o.f-?M .ti.!.c.? sys:eir.s. Tiie con~ra:io.n oftlle.se JCo-teNe!'$ iS dot1e l!ere.

.clSSQoateh~ !l'5e cab to Ja..-a a;iQbllOns

Figure 290: The SAP NetWeaver Administrator

The settings for assigning system are found under SAP NetWeaver Administrator~ SOA Management ~ Technical Configuration ~ System Connections .


401


System Connections: Provider Systems

" s:.:...

---c~~

$)'l!Wt CO"a'"I

*" to !"!IJ-~ I Cf

~~tthLOUI

• • • •

Credentials to the system backend Communication profile Search method on the provider system Messaging settings

Create a connection ltew Provider Syswm

..

•i----1---·---·---·-

Pr
Et!::er "'°'Ott tyt~« WM ... w N O to mnt•• or..14 V

s,_.,.,.., ,,.,.,.,,..,. •

">...., '""

qt.:..... Ollrt* 'J,;I"_ _...,__ _ _~L-,,.

o,... '"'•,..SAP

If a connection to the SR Is avalmle, the vllue help lists its systems

'°l_._

U•

....... <'>

....."

~

........

--

Enter system details and description

,...

.....

--

-

-

-

@O

-...

..

...-1&1.M!•

_,,, .,..,

-~4»

•tMt:t

,,~~" .,~,,

l':O:OC~•U

fl2'*)4t1

•••• .... ..."' .... ..."'

--

Figure 291: Connections to Provider Systems

To establish a connection from a consumer to a provider system, you have to specify the following configuration settings: •

Credentials to the system backend

•

Communication profile

•

Search method on the provider system

•

Messaging settings

•

System details and descriptions

The system connection contains specific information about the provider system in the landscape, such as host name and port number, as well as information about the communication profile defining the policies for communication with that system, the mechanism for the discovery of Web services on it, and the concrete authentication credentials to access the WSDL or WSIL sources. You can create only one connection for every provider system in the landscape. At a later stage, you identify the configured provider systems in the SAPNetWeaver Administrator applications by the system landscape directory ID (SLD ID) which you provide in this stage. Create a System Connection When creating a connection, you browse provider systems on the wizard that opens by choosing the button next to the System Name field . To use this value help, you must have established connection to the Services Registry. The value help displays all systems whose Web services are published to the Services Registry. As a next step, you provide a metadata user with which you can access the backend of the system. On the next step you choose the communication profile, which you want to use. Note that the system connection is established over the highest active version of the profile. Finally, you can choose a specific search mechanism for services on the provider system (WSDL or WSIL documents, or Services Registry).

402



Connections to Provider System: Editing Export a connection anti then reuse it on another consumer system

System Connections: Provider Systems

~

Import Provtder System

fife: brovlde.rt.y•tem_lHS on bcalhos-t.xml l

I

Browse...

[][! [ Cancel ) r.;:i..-----~----

Edit the connection to the provider system

oniner;ticnto11!e l

-

! Ser...er

·

..... Check whether the connection is set correctly Sys!
soo .s~~tn:..~.11ns~1!o'tfl11~.o 12cC0!• 1 1 .s~t~o1i:t .1Wc111 o~

•

A~A~

~~ Onericltio11: [!ts!em. Cotll"~dion ~ .iti12(800J of !!'>e SR Pl'ofie flame::

~'

Ping PfOVlder Sy&tem

CCIY\...~rtfit

D

ound 80 Service lt'tetfaces n~rlJce. r.o.mc

~ £nte:r ;.'le c.<"~O.lJ o~ ' str.·;i:e t1ur lor ~ sy.~em :'ia~r.as lte :itmti$s.011c5 to .t«H4 s.ertiee me:.Mts!a !Qo.V1$0L

~1•PC_eucm_GETUST

i.:seme.~

·ils.!!:4l

rRPWPC>_cor~CEPT_UIOOfY

F1'$.$VIQ~'

t•••••••

1.R.PIJIPtl_!TfPl_ GETGU:O

CO!\~Pf.UWCri:

' • ••••••

t'R?WPD_ITEM_ MODIFY

]

•

/RPf',!.'PDjORTfOL10_GfTUST ACflCe!'l)CCOUr&ehloCu'eBytl~QueryRtsj)OBSe.)l

Ser.;

3 1 •••

AOJC•1NCCc1.1rse-MOCv~Ctt.a :.Cnect01.(f1)'R8$~CJlte_~ Act> Ac.Oe1NCCounel.l0<11.1icCreo;eRcc;i;o:s;ConfirmotjQf'_'1

•

Aco~

[>]

Figure 292: Ed it a Connection

To edit a connection to a provider system, do the following: 1. Open the connection for editing and update the relevant settings. 2. Ping a connection. Use Ping Connection to test the created system connection . If the connection is set correctly, the framework displays all service definitions running on the provider system. 3. Import/Export a connection. The framework allows you to export an established connection to a provider system from a consumer system and then reuse it on another consumer system.

System Connection User Assignment Services are often called in the context of the user that currently runs the SOA application. In that case, the credentials of the user are passed on from the Java application server to the backend system using SAP logon tickets or similar methods. In some instances, it might be required to call backend services using a fixed technical user. The credentials can be specified in the NetWeaver Administrator. Those credentials can then be added to provider systems or service groups to make sure that all related service calls are executed in the context of that user.


403


SAP NetWeaver Administrator -7 SOA Management .. .

... -7 Application and Scenario Communication -7 User Account Management My Worl;spsoe

f

Tecnnlcal CcnfiguratJOn

~

l.,,\'&Mbllity and Perfonnance-1.~a.nageme.nt ' Application and Scenario Communication

lo~s an~f""'l"raoes

-

Q-t 0

~t5

Problem .,lanagemefll

SOA Man199ment

IAonloMg ~ PlfbjeahOll Rulfs Creat.e publcat10n rule.s tttat defiie 'he set of s-.efllices and SeMCe Groups. - ........... !'" ·~ "" ·;, ~ Jl c'"--•j.. "-·• . ti .... r-,. •-·

Slnqle Strv!Ce l'd.,nstr4!10n

Provides functions for admr1istratlon and ccnfiguratlon of sln~le web ~Mees and \Vet> service clients

~

Ccr!figutation l.fanagement

Operation t.'ana9emet1I J

L

. . .. . . ,

l!H' Awun1 '·'•"A~!m:"l

A oolj<;lf!!!n Co""'""'C!ltloO Ccnfigure the inbound and outbound communcation Qf an appHce-tion. ~rcviskl ned $e1Vkes and servicerefereoce-s, gr
®, f,~anage

user

a~unts an-6their 11tt.ignmen1to U1'Vices lr'l~erlaet".$

8u111'1~s.s Sctnanc communieaton

Configure the communication of a whole tiusttess s~na.rlo

Figure 293: SAP NetWeaver Administrator Communicat ion

The configuration for the technical user is found in the NetWeaver Administrator under SOA Management--+ Application and Scenario Management--+ User Account Management. Create a user account

,------------------------11 us er Account Management: Maintenance

.......

- - - - - - -

::u,;

ff.WU..tAC(Oufl•

._...

t+- f

1

!---

. .. ----, Activate or deactivate a user account

Enter name and description

Provide credentials f+- .

t

>-

...

Enter authentication .._ credentials

..

c.-.,.. aw.•• ..,.,..

•••••••

""°~·~

._....... c.:-,,_......_.

~v..-.,....-.ssc:

~11-W.-

==:::: .......·-'::::'.:=::' ········-

l

Enter WS Security settings

.........

"""· ~·WS&l-

Figure 294: Create User Accounts

The procedure for adding user accounts follows: 1. Enter a name and description. 2. Enter authentication credentials. 3. Enter WS Security settings. 4 . Enter HTTPs settings. Create a User Account If the Web services that you want to consume require authentication, you can provide this authentication in entities called user accounts. When you create a user account, you specify different authentication methods in the same entity. At a later stage, you can reuse and assign this account to one or more than one Web service on a provider system. When you assign the

404



user account to a Web service, the system uses the authentication credentials in the account to invoke the Web service at runtime Depending on the authentication profile which you used in the service reference to the Service Group during design time, we recommend that you create one of the following user account assignments at runtime: •

No Authentication If this option is set during design time, the system does not require mandatory security configuration at runtime, however you may still provide such configuration. If at runtime you create and assign a user account, its authentication mechanism overrides the authentication settings (NoAuthentication) provided at design time.

•

Technical User You configure the concrete service user settings (user name and password or certificate) at runtime by creating and assigning a user account. In this case, all service calls from the consumer application authenticate to the service with that user assignment

•

Business User At runtime, you only have to establish a SSO connection between both systems. In this case, you do not have to create and assign a user account.

•

Business or Technical User You determine the authentication level and provide the concrete security mechanism. If you create and assign a user account at runtime, the system takes into account the Technical User authentication. Otherwise, if you only establish a SSO connection between the systems, Business User authentication is taken into account.

Settings for the User Account Provide a name and description of the account and then specify the exact authentication mechanism. Later, you can edit the account and update the settings. For the Credentials, enter the following settings: •

To set basic authentication over the HTTP protocol, enter the user name and password in the provided fields .

•

To set authentication over the Web Service Security protocol , proceed as follows: In the Keystore View for WSSE drop-down menu, specify a key storage of signatures. In the Private Key for WSSE drop-down menu, choose the exact authentication key.

•

To set secure SSL communication over the HTTPS protocol, proceed as follows: In the Keystore View for HTTPS drop-down menu, specify a key storage of signatures. In the Private Key for HTTPS drop-down menu, choose the exact authentication key.

You can specify one or more authentication methods in the user account. An application on your client system can consume the Web service to which the account is assigned, if at least one of the authentication methods is allowed in the authentication mechanism for the service endpoint of the Web service. Activate/Deactivate a User Account


405


The framework allows you to assign the active user account. The system activates the assignment of the user account. When you deactivate user accounts, the system considers them deleted. However, the account and its assignments keep existing in the system, and you can activate and use it again at a later stage. The framework does not allow you to assign the inactive user account. The system deactivates the assignment of the user account. The system creates a user account with status Active. As a next step you can assign the account. The assignment specifies a set of Service Groups and the corresponding web services, which are runn ing on the same provider system. User Account: Assignment User Account Management: Assignment

~

loaOtr

Create a user account assignment Details AbOut User Accoun1 HU2_user Assignment

llew User Account Assignment

I! d• lsa.• 1·ea:-·1

1+--111 li - - -

2 --- '

User Account

,,...,,

' SeMC«lroop

-i

HU2 t800) Oft lwdf1030

Select user 1ccoun1ioce 1ss.c;ned

• ~-----------------l

llame: Oes~ton

HU2JJse<

u...- Accoun1 lot HU2(8CO) System

Figure 295: Assign User Accounts (1)

To consume Web services, which require authentication and to consume them using a dedicated service user, you have to assign a user account to them. You can assign user accounts to one or more than one Web service running on a provider system. In addition, you can assign the same user account to one or more than one Service Group that contains a reference to the Web service. The consumer application invokes the business logic on the provider side using the authentication methods, which you provide in the user account. The user account assignments which you create are also used by the system when you configure Service Groups.

406



Assign the account to a rovider SY§tem flew Us.er Accounc Aulgnment

· --

-

~~ · --

~-/.==~ ~~• Assign the account to service definitions • Pft'...IOCI*

tr.. •I )d

1 1 , flew User Aceoun.t A"lgnmtnt

. . .,L'""' ~•"-'!'III

•• ____, ' , _ ___, ' \ . - - - - 1 l ' I - - - - • -

_, Choose a provider system from the configured connections

~

• Pff-, C>.it

-1

I r.cx1 • I

OlooN 1' YO\I w1
Str..Ut'!tfft•~

0 A."!'f

~ to t.'flf ~ l'.".tft•ot or• cctlCtti:t 0

r.'Cr.crt-:t

Assign the account to a Service Group flew User Account ASJ19nment

1+- - l ' l - - - - - i ' 1------1 3 ;....---i •

r--·-41

.-

r

Browse and specify concrete services on the provider system Specify a concrete Service G roup

Figure 296: Assign User Accounts (2)

You can narrow the user account assignment in one of the following ways: •

Assignment to a provider system In this case, you apply the user account to all Service Groups and the corresponding web services that are running on the provider system.

•

Assignment to service definitions on a provider system In this case, you apply the user account to the Service Groups and the corresponding web services, which are specified explicitly in the assignment.

•

Assignment to a concrete service group and concrete service definition In this case, you apply the user account to a specific Service Group and specific web services, which are referred by this Service Group.

If there is more than one assignment to services on the same provider system, the framework uses the most concrete assignment with priority.

Service Group Configuration in NetWeaver Administrator "Containers" for service groups (that is, multiple service groups) can be bundled within a single entity. This is relevant for applications accessing services provided by multiple systems, for example: •

One service group for consuming services from an ASAP ERP backend system

•

Another service group for calling services provided by a local Java application server

To set the business scenario, use the following path: SAP NetWeaver Administrator___.. SOA Management___.. Application and Scenario Management___.. Business Scenario Communication.


407


Business Scenario Communication: Co

Specify the Business Scenario Settings

Business scenario Communication.

~

I CCOFOSltEfi'FIJCAnoi1!~ .,,.....-..SIC9WO() ...,.... ~.
-

New Business Scenario

1+--1 1 ,___ _ , - - - , -

-1

Ge:nef..

• .,.....,, (!-

•I)

I ms..l lc.- 1

Ereer 1:lu$he$s sc:entrio nerne encl~

-

•

@AF

c.iot:.oN

I

@"@iOI

llostion'

Figure 297: Creating a Business Scenario

f'iii

Business Scenario Communication: Configur,

ffew Ot$ness Scn11atio

..

2

1

I

Add cC1vi
,, _

•

llrow.o

,

l!j'. ......

comMe:set .cn.ttst.cet.sg.sg_cet_CIOIMIOe,

Figure 298: Adding a Service Group

Business scenario communication: c

Now Business Scenario 1

I+

2

or61

Co1111<'""" Side

I r.-1 ~ SoMco 0 . -

Add

6'. -

-

ind..--• '""

( ;. l!J>Pr""

rS~e

toor conl.,..otion - . o

) o.

'Wl.,.,_5' '"'

Ass.tgn P1oulder System

[iJ

v- ._·_ _ _ _ __.l eo l

E11 (OOl)one11-ZI

Figure 299: Assigning a Provider System to the Service Group

408



Business Scenario Communication: Configuration 0 Col>llgurecion seenerlo "<;AF_COMMON_SCENARIO" cre«ed suece3$IUI)' I New 11 Delete I Nome

IAcWote II OeectWete I -

Stetus

'\P

I

I COMPOSITl:_APPLICATIONS_CON"~TION_SCENARIO

-

Active

CN_COMMON_SCENARIO

~

Stele

-

l!IPr~

0

Active

-

To be processed

CN_COMMON_SCENARIO

-

Figure 300: Service Grou p Processing

To set provisioning, use the following path: SAP NetWeaver Administrator~ SOA Management~ Application and Scenario Management~ Application Communication . Web Services Configuration Appl/cation communication: configuration -

~r.......... ::::33--~=:::::::.:.._

--

Search for an application •

~

• -·~~

.., . ..... .c.

•..,..

$4~ •..Cl 11...,.

m i.Wtl

j ~~--r

"!rt....

- --

-

Expand the software component and select the application

---~

Browse the provided services

.

Figure 301: Configuring Web Service Providers: Find Applications

You can apply runtime configuration settings to multiple service definitions of an application at one go. You decide which service definitions in an application to configure and expose for consumption with which runtime settings. Find and choose the application, which you want to configure. You can find applications by entering a string in the Search field .


409

Unit 7: Serv ice Hand ling

Appl/cation Communica tion: configurat i on

·-·

.,..

-------T

Assign a communication profile

Vall<. ._f_ _ __.JIGoj

'iii

Open the application for editing

I

....

r...__

s'AP_Df.FAUlT_PROfU

ti\• d a PRI~ WC.t\Cletaut t~a~tt

CO~Jlo:>f~

~tt! CCf!'m.l"iCl:<>n Prof..e

~---...

Select a communication profile

.._ Select a service definition

J

[£f)lwce1I

·--

Figure 302: Configuring Web Service Providers: Configure Applications

Service Group Sharing in NetWeaver Administrator Shared service groups are defined with a dedicat ed development component. Shared service groups have t he follow ing properties: •

They can be deployed seperately from the rest of the application .

•

They can be refe renced and used by mult iple BPM, WDJ , and CAF development component s.

r:-: New Oevelopn1ent Component (Project)

l!ll!J El

N ew D ev elopme nt Component Select type for Development Component

Type:

B

sap.con1 •

e1

Composite Application

r±l l;g

Content

r±l

OC Build

l

Dictionary

•

r±l

Enterprise Portal

. r±l

External Library J2EE Java Mobile UI Component for Laptops

•

I-

DD Process Composer

i- ~ i-· ~ •

Rules Composer Service group configuration

Figure 303: Shared Service Groups (1)

Development component s that make use of shared service groups need to have a reference to the service group development component. For CAF development components, the following applies:

410



•

Deploy time and runtime dependency from CAF ear DC to service group DC

•

Design time dependency from CAF ebjmodule DC to service group DC

BPM/WDJ development components must have. design time. deploy time. and runtime dependencies from the BPM/WDJ development component to the service group development component. l!I~ 13

':-:Adding Dependencies

Configure Dependencies Configure details of new dependencies New required DCs B

D
Dependency Details

D Design Time

8

Deploy Time

8

Runtime

I

Figure 304: Shared Service Groups (2)

Troubleshooting The processing of a service group in the provider system ABAP can fail when some of the services contained in the group are currently unavailable in the backend system (for example, due to a failed mass configuration run) . The processing of a service group in the provider system Java can fail due to the fo llowing situations: •

Services that are provided by a Java server initially do not support authentication.

•

If an authentication method is specified for the service group, the processing fails because the services do not support the required security features.

•

The authentication methods the Java services are meant to support have are not configured in the NWA after the services have been deployed. If this configuration does match the service group, the processing succeeds.

The path for troubleshooting is SAP NetWeaver Administrator~ SOA and Scenario Management ~ Single Service Administration.


Management~

Application

411


Single Service Administration: Service Definitions

servtce oermi1fon•

Sea~h by:

\'iSOl PQr1

Namt •

Search Result f ound Service Oefln16ons: 1

{O \';SOL Port Type ffa~ ~

r

CUtuimetFn:ltf:ts_AS

~Hi'TP

() KTTPS Authen11eauon HTTP Authentication

Ii) Ustr Cl?4ssword

D .

'

~ Logon Tleket

f.1es$age Authentication

0 User DIPa&sWO«I

D X.!49 Client Certif1C.11:e

0

SAML AfWl>Oo

I 0et•• I Ge1lerat

WSDLt

Figure 305: Troubleshoot ing

412

© Copyright . All r ight s reserved.

Unit 7 Exercise 16 Configure Inbound and Outbound Communication

Business Example

You are a business process administrator. You have been asked to enhance the business process by adding inbound and outbound communication capabi lities.

Note: In this exercise, the process created in exercises 2-5, 8, 10, and 10-15 is used.

In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you. 1. Deploy PO_Product_## [vendor##.com]. If prompted to log onto AS Java, use Administrator##. 2. Using the NetWeaver Administrator, check the connection from the process (consumer) to the services (provider). If requested, use the user Administrator##.

Note: To establish a connection from the process to the services, a system connection to an appropriate provider system is required. A system connection contains specific information about the provider system in the landscape, such as host name and port number, as well as information about the communication profile that defines the policies for communication with that system, the mechanism for the discovery of Web services on it, and the concrete authentication credentials to access the WSDL or WSIL sources. The system connection required for the exercise scenario is already configured on your AS Java. To check the configuration settings of this connection, log on to the SAP NetWeaver Administrator through the url http: I /nwktdc. wdf. sap. corp: 50000/nwa as the user Administrator##.

3. Create a user account for your services using the data in the table. Element

Value

User Account field

PurchaseRequestAccount##


413


Element

Value

Connectivity Type drop-down menu

ws

User Name

Administrator##

Password

Enter your password

4. Assign the user account Administrator## to the service group PurchaseRequestServiceGroup## using the data from the table. Element

Value

Name field


Provider field

NWK on http://nwktdcOO.wdf.sap.corp

Service Interface radio button

Any

Service Group radio button

Concrete

Service group name


5. Check if the communication profile SAP_DEFAUL T_PROFILE is assigned to the SimplifiedPurchaseOrder service. 6. Assign the communication profile SAP_DEFAUL T_PROF/LE to the NeedsApprova/FlowRuleset##PortType service. 7. Assign the Provider System to the PurchaseRequestServiceGroup## service group.

414


Unit 7 Solution 16 Configure Inbound and Outbound Communication

Business Example

You are a business process administrator. You have been asked to enhance the business process by adding inbound and outbound communication capabi lities.


In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you. 1. Deploy PO_Product_## [vendor##.com]. If prompted to log onto AS Java, use Administrator##. a) In the PO_Product_## context menu, choose Deploy. b) In the Product Build Required dialog box, choose Build and Deploy. c) If prompted, log on to AS Java with user Administrator##. 2. Using the NetWeaver Administrator, check the connection from the process (consumer) to the services (provider). If requested, use the user Administrator##.

Note: To establish a connection from the process to the services, a system connection to an appropriate provider system is required. A system connection contains specific information about the provider system in the landscape, such as host name and port number, as well as information about the communication profile that defines the policies for communication with that system, the mechanism for the discovery of Web services on it, and the concrete authentication credentials to access the WSDL or WSIL sources. The system connection required for the exercise scenario is already configured on your AS Java. To check the configuration settings of this connection, log on to the SAP NetWeaver Administrator through the url http: I /nwktdc. wdf. sap. corp: 50000 /nwa as the user Administrator##.


415


a) In your internet browser, enter the following url: http: / / nwktdcOO . wdf. sap . corp: 50000/nwa b) In the User Name field, enter the Administrator## user name. c) On the SAP NetWeaver Administrator screen, choose the SOA tab and remain on the Technical Configuration tab. d) Choose System Connections . e) On the System Connections: Provider Systems screen, choose the system listed. f) Choose the Connectivity tab. Check if a connectivity of the type WS is established. Check if the entry for service source reads WSIL and the entry for the profile name reads SAP Default Profile.

-

-

fiii [E(@l """• I 1......,... II o..c0v11a I I I ""1Si"""11 1!rfO!! II "'"°"I 1tJ

...

tt5rre

.a.

Sts1us

Oes't r~

Oea!eci 8y

Created On

Details about system NWK on nwktdcOO.wdf.sap.corp General

Con,..3 R Ofl! N$in'I!

R'Ofilt DestlC'.>riOn

SAP_a:FA~i_PAOFl.E

ttie IS a prof~ wtn dl!f&Jt fe
SA.P_DEFAULT_RFC_MOFl.E

ttli5 Is a prclile w«ti oefeull RFC feal\lrl!S

Figure 306: Provider syst em s: The NWK

3. Create a user account for your services using the data in the table. Element

Va lue

User Account field


Connectivity Type drop-down menu

ws

User Name

Administrator##

Password

Enter your password

a) Choose Home . On the NetWeaver Administrator screen. choose the SOA tab. b) On the Application and Scenario Communication tab, choose User Account Management. c) On the User Account Management: Maintenance screen, choose the connection NWK_WS. Choose New.

416



Maintenance

!fh

New

Assignrreot

HIDelete 11 [Activate I[ Dea1:tivate I

Na.rre

,. T Connecwiy

1

Status

Description

~

ws

1-M'K_WS

Ac we

Details about user account NWK WS

C@I Save I[c:ance1 I I

Oesc ription:

Connectivity Type: • WS

l

Metadata User Username: Password:

~ovkl~Systell'll\dm

]

I

••••••••

Figure 307: Adding a New User Account

d) In the User Account field, enter the data from the table.

I,.

/

Maintenance

1

Assignrrent

New User Account

••

...

2 l

1

J

General

pe

ConneellV

' • R-evaj l Nel(I • I

I

1

J I cane et I

Finish

Enter a name and desc riptioo for the user account

Name:"

[ PIJrc haseRequestAccoun!Q§I

Description: I

I I

Figure 308: Adding a New User Account: The Name

e) Choose Next. f) Complete the New User Account Information section using the data from the table.


417


liii

I••

Maintenance

Assignrrent

•

New User Account 1

2

General

Connectivity Type

I+

L

I ~ A'evioos I Ne_!t • I

~

I Frlish 1 1 cancel I

Oloose connec tivity type and specify Pfoperties for it Connectivity Type: •

lws

... 1

Metadata User Usemarre:

IAdninis trator05

I

Passw ord:

[ ••••••••J

I

Web Service Security Keystore \riew for V\'SSE:

I I

Private Key for WSSE:

... .... ,

HTTPs Keystore V iew for HTTPs:

I

A'ivste Key for HTTPs:

I

,

....

... ,

,

Figure 309: Adding a New User Account: The User

g) Choose Finish. A notification appears stating that the new account has been saved. 4 . Assign the user account Administrator## to the service group PurchaseRequestServiceGroup## using the data from the table. Element

Value

Name field

Pu rchaseRequestAccou nt##

Provider field

NWK on http://nwktdcOO.wdf.sap.corp

Service Interface radio button

Any

Service Group radio button

Concrete

Service group name


a) On the User Account Management: Maintenance screen, choose the Assignment tab. b) Choose New. c) In the New User Account wizard. in the Name field, select the entry for the Name field using the F4-help. Choose OK.

418



New U•r Account Assignment

l+- - 1 .....__ __

1- - - -' 3 - - - - - - ' 4 - --1

Uler Account

-----------Choose User Account L1 X

I cance1 I Select a user account to be Hsigned

Va rue:

-----~

~

!Sll~

Nalre: •

'iO

=.

Name

Description _]

~ N1NK_~vs '~

L.J

PurchaseRequestAccoun«>S

[Qg) I Cancel I Figure 310: Assigning t he New User Account: Name

d) Choose Next. e) In the Provider field, select the entry for the Provider field using the F4-help. Choose OK.

Tiiii New U.r Account Assignment

I+- -

1 _ _ __, 2 1 i-- - - - 3

User Account

1- - - - -i

4

'-----1

Provider

--------------Choose Provider System

Selec t a provider of seivice Interfaces

Va~e:

A'ovider: •

-----~

-

'iO !lame --·-----

:"."'.

x

! Go !

5ll~ "Tj

D

Description

~ NWK on nwktdcOO.wdf.sap.corp

.

1c::J OK

11Cancel ]

Figure 311: Assigning the New User Account: Provider

f) Choose Next. g) In the Service Interfaces field , select the Any radio button.


419


liii

11.!Ultenanc e

Assignment

New User Account Assignment

••

II

3

A"ovider

Service Interfaces

I I

User Account

~ A"evious

4

2

1

I I Next ~ I

I

Fnish

--

I I

-4

--~

I I caneel I

Specify whether you went to assign a user account to any service interf.e ce ore specific interface from this provider

I Service Interface:

0 Any

lo eoncrete

I Add I Relrove 1 ...

lnterface Name

'\P

;;;~ -.~::

mNo

Interface Narrespace •

service interfaces ad
Figure 312: Assigning the New User Account: Service Interface

h) Choose Next. i) In the Service Group field, select the Concrete radio button and assign the service group PurchaseRequestServiceGroup## using the F4-help and a search. Choose OK. j) Choose Finish. A notification appears stating that the user account has been assigned.

liii

User Account Management: Assignment (?) User account assignrrent saved successfuly Favorites ..

ff..

eCf Lil cs ..

Go To..

Support Oetais

Figure 313: Successful Creation of the User Assignment

5. Check if the communication profile SAP_DEFAUL T_PROFILE is assigned to the SimplifiedPurchaseOrder service. a) Choose Home. On the NetWeaver Administrator screen, choose the SOA tab. b) Choose the Application and Scenario Communication link, then choose the Application Communication link. c) On the Application Communication: Configuration screen, choose training.sap.com/ TRAIN_BPM_UTL-EAR ~ training.sap.com/train-bmp-util-ear.

fiii

I •

-.... ,_

trailin;...s!P.tOOl'tran-bpm-utj.e~r

1 ScftwareCoa'ponen1

• !!9'!!'9 • 811 com!(~

AAJketbnl'leme

• vendot00.com'po_~od_0>-pr"'Pf1l

•

ven0of'20.com'l)O_prOClKL2~

Softw ate.Q)tfDQDen1

!lill(SE(o.::o1 I

'JI' .._ .

s...-. ,,, 1

ffi...,.i>o;l0oos•..,.A'•,., Urn;,. t.ooJ

'ti """ 'i,l

Skrplf'Jl!!6R.tf( has-eOtdef

•

•

Softw6t~

• ven0of10.ccm'po_prodl.llCU°"1>r"ill'l'I Cot-.surred Service Grcxips (0)

I

$oftNateC.on'ponen1

N&tre$pate

O>nMe:Wly

httl):Jlup.comtr.Hllnglttcln'rliervees/

ws

r"'"'" S.O.P_CEfAU..T_MOFl.E

°''... r.!115ll~ .... -

9A'oc e:sslng Slate

O Ftoc ess t!O

Figure 314: Communication Profile for t raining.sap.com/train-bpm -util-ear

d) Choose the Provided Services tab.

420



e) In the SimplifiedPurchaseOrder row, verify that the SAP_DEFAUL T_ PROFILE is listed in the Profile column. 6. Assign the communication profile SAP_DEFAUL T_PROFILEto the NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset##Port Type service. a) On the Application Communication: Configuration screen, choose vendor##/ ~

po_product_##-rules

vendor##. com/po_product_xx-bl-rules.

b) Choose the Provided Services tab. c) On the Provided Services tab, choose NeedsApprovalFlowRuleset##PortType. d) Choose Edit. e) Choose Assign Profile. f) In the Assign Profile dialog box, choose SAP_ DEFAUL T_PROFILE.

Note: These steps apply runtime configuration settings to the service definitions. This allows service definitions to be consumed. Assigning a communication profile triggers the configuration of the respective service definition. This means that you trigger the creation of an end point for every service definition to which you assign a communication profile. The service endpoint required for the service interface SimplifiedPurchaseOrder is already configured.

g) Choose OK.

fiii

.. vendor20 eorr(l)O;oduc1...20..bk11et

SOfM' at~l

• \oencJor20 Ce>m'OO...,PrOIJUCt_~f

Ai:ipt';.ati:Wlatre

> ven!JoaO.c crrfpo§oduct_20..pt"1)m

so:rtw~t

>

SO.ftwllt~l

I

ven61:1t~_e:Manced_20"1lf..pm

con&l.fteel S&NkeGroups {O)

:J

"" PrO'llded semce• (1> )

t!!.l S..• I! C...d 11IAu~ Ro11e Jj o...,lE Rorie I [,_t~I 'ti ...... • """"'*.

°""" [§)~~

COnnectivly

...,..

R'oces.tl'lg State

VI'S

SAP_OEFALl.T...PROfLE

0

~

Show

~

'iii

r

Mlp'.lflr WW .veMSO:t.20.t«l'IAPl)l'OYaftllH.20

tleedSAC)pl'ortaf'b• Ra.lle:SffX!Fbrt'l)'P!

To be ptotess!d

Figure 315: Assignment of t he Default Profile Before SAVE

h) Choose Save. i) Choose Refresh until the entry in the Processing State field reads Processed.

-

• vendor20 C~_ptocM:I,.~

...

• vend0t20 com'po_oroduct_~"1)1'1'\

S01t,.,. ateo:itll>OMf"lt

vendor2Qrpo_ertierv;ed_20-i>r~pm

Soft.v arcCot• ipone11t

•

COOWn"ed setvice Qoupt (O)

-

= •

Prowkted servces (t) I

1&i• 1s;... 11 eon... • 1fA• ...,"-11,_,.3"...,., 111-.. l!!i! r

r

'1

N8n'e

NeedsA.pprovof=l::lw'IWle$~2.0Poffly~

J.

Nal'res"9C4!

fttlp:Jlwww

vendof'20cotrlAciprov~20

Aoeess~ S!e.1e

-

D FttX CJ.scd

Figure 316: Assignm ent of the Default Profile After SAVE

7. Assign the Provider System to the PurchaseRequestServiceGroup## service group.


421


a) On the Application Communication: Configuration screen, choose vendor##/ po_product_##-pr-pm---+ vendor##.com/po_product_xx-pr-pm. b) Choose the Consumed Service Groups tab. c) Choose Edit. d) On the Consumed Service Groups tab, choose the PurchaseRequestServiceGroup## row. e) lin the Provider System column drop-down menu, choose NWK on nwktdcOO.wdf.sap.corp.

A'ovicler System

I

... l

t>tM< on nwktdcOO.wdf.sap.corp

-

N'M< on nwktdcOO.wdf.sep.c orp

Figure 3 17: Choosing t he Provider System

f) Choose Save. g) Choose Refresh until the entry in the Processing State field reads Processed.

-

fiii

~

_

....._.....- .... ....,..._. ........._. . . ........

....... .............. ......

• ven.1of20 c:CITiPo,JlfOducl.20-1x"-pm

APDk• lioc'll\ltfTI)

Cont""'"

S.rvlel GfollPt C1J ,..

-

F>...~.. - ... coi

-

~

•

l

!

IElf• [S.... lcwo1I fc;.,,g I ! lutoAu\rl (,sr- i;1 ·I

'b ...... ~

111

r

A,.-crin~~tServiteGroup20

•

Comee !lvl!y Types

WS

~~~ Rtwid!f Sf"stem

N.\'Kon r.w"*'c:OO,wdf sap.corp

~otffShg Stale

0

R"ocesJeO

Figure 3 18: Assigned Provider System after Processing

422




•


•



423


424



1.

What is assigned to an automated activity?


D D D D

A Operations B Roles

c

Service definitions

D Tasks

2. Principal propagation is transferred from what objects?


D D D D

A Human activities B Intermediate message events

c

Offline forms

D Start events

3. What are the features of the Web Service Provider


D D D D

A Notification B Policy

c

Scenario

D Service group


425


4. To establish a connection from a consumer to a provider system, which of the following do you have to specify as configuration settings? Choose the correct answers.

D Credentials to the system backend D c Search method on the provider system D D Communication profile D A Messaging settings B

426



1.

What is assigned to an automated activity?


0 B Roles D c Service definitions 0 D Tasks D A Operations

2. Principal propagation is transferred from what objects?


0 B Intermediate message events 0 c Offline forms D D Start events 0 A Human activities

3. What are the features of the Web Service Provider


D 0 c 0 D 0

A Notification B Policy Scenario Service group


427


4. To establish a connection from a consumer to a provider system, which of the following do you have to specify as configuration settings? Choose the correct answers.

~ B Credentials to the system backend ~ c Search method on the provider system ~ D Communication profile ~ A Messaging settings

428


Process Start

Lesson 1 Starting a Business Process

431

Exercise 17: Start a Business Process from the Process Repository

433

Lesson 2 Starting a Business Process as a Web Process

441

Exercise 18: Start a Business Process as a Web Service

447

Lesson 3

455

Administering Business Processes Exercise 19: Test a Business Scenario

463

Lesson 4 Troubleshooting Running Processes

472

Exercise 20: Debug a Running Process

479

Lesson 5

485 489

Managing Process Desk Tasks Exercise 21: Visualize a Business Process

UNIT OBJECTIVES

•

Start a business process from the Process Repository

•

Start a business process as a Web service

•

Manage processes with NetWeaver Administrator

•

Monitor processes with NetWeaver Administrator

•

Troubleshoot running processes

•

Debug a running process


429

Unit 8: Process Start

•

430

Manage Process Desk tasks


Unit 8

Lesson 1 Starting a Business Process

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to start a business process from the process repository. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

•


Business Process Start Overview There are several ways of starting a process, depending on its purpose and starting point. In order for a process to start, it must have an active version. The methods for starting a process include the fo llowing: •

Starting processes from the Process Repository Start the process from the Process Repository tool that is integrated in the SAP NetWeaver Administrator. This method is mostly used for test purposes.

•

Starting processes by Web services This method can be used to start a process from the Web Service Navigator, Web Dynpro applications, or from a Web service client.

•

Starting processes from the Debugger You can start a process from the Debugger that is integrated in the SAP NetWeaver Developer Studio.

Business Process Start from the Process Repository For testing purposes, BPM processes can be started using the Process Repository in the NetWeaver Administrator. To start a process in the NetWeaver Administrator, use the following method: 1. Start the NetWeaver Administrator by going to the fo llowing url and providing your user name and password: http:// :/nwa 2. Choose SAP NWA Repository.

~Configuration Management~

Processes and

Tasks~

Process

The system displays the development components of the deployed processes and their details. 3. Choose the development component (DC) of the process you want to start. 4. Choose the Processes, Tasks, and Rules tab.


431


5. Choose the applicable process, then choose Start Process. Process Repository: Overview -

Lis.t of Con1ponenl'S ~ Cocni::il)~ (Ve~crl

~

-

Last Cf'plo)'t~ Vm !OO

---

.

--

tc..1;;:~cc-11ttn1~ac- (1--1;>.co-m}

7,2G03.2010012513'017 OCCO (SAP AG)

tc--beo!m..cc,'lt!-it..!V!e 11..,_,.p~c~ss rsa;>.ccm)

;.2ee~.20100t2Sl~O'l7.00C~ t SAP AG)

?C-'"b11tm..CCi'lttl'll"'tlftdt!•..deft-'ll'1 ( SIP ¢Ctn)

7.2CG3.4:0t0012Sl$.t~l7.0CC~ ( SA? AG)

tst ..a ..lO"'"~ll'r'i>tOC°'rdl!tal (Up.com "\

2CC9111512S&..~ (CE1~CEtr.'1CS2~0i

Selectind the Process Definition 1

~ Processes. r•s,ancflWe:s: It

R$SIOl.l'ceS" •

I P10C:C~$ f:bw MStat! Pto«'$$ I

-•

......

•

'\ii

,._....a-hdMao.iflT•Slt ~~en

·-

ldDe l~

\.....

Pfocen Oe.!h!Aon

Starting the Process

-

Selod Steri Oper.tion~elion1

I-

......

•

•

Slirt Prooe.ss ~ J

--

SIM~ProoessR~

•

Figure 319: Process Start from the Repository

For testing purposes, BPM process can be started using the Process Repository in the NetWeaver Administrator. Although users typically do not use the NetWeaver Administrator BPM processes, this application provides a Web service that allows you to start a BPM process through a standard Web service call. This includes processes with Uls built in Web Dynpro, Visual Composer, and similar technologies. These Web services can be used by any application. The Web services can include data, which can be passed from the Uls to the processes that are started. The data stored in the process context can influence the process flow or be processed in process activities.

432


Unit 8

Exercise 17 Start a Business Process from the Process Repository

Business Example

You are a technical expert in business management processes. In the previous exercises you created a process. Now this process must be "started." Staring a process can be done in several ways. In this exercise, you will start the process with the process repository.


In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number assigned to you by your instructor. 1. Start the process Purchase Order Process## in the product PO_product_##-pr-pm(demo.sap.com). 2. Monitor the process in the Manage Processes screen. 3. Check the business logs. 4. Check the Log Viewer for errors. 5. Cancel your process.


433

Unit 8 Solution 17 Start a Business Process from the Process Repository

Business Example

You are a technical expert in business management processes. In the previous exercises you created a process. Now th is process must be "started." Staring a process can be done in several ways. In this exercise. you will start the process with the process repository.


In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number assigned to you by your instructor. 1. Start the process Purchase Order Process## in the product PO_product_##-pr-pm(demo.sap.com) . a) In your internet browser. enter the following url: http :/ / nwktdcOO . wdf . sap . c o rp : 50000 / nwa b) If requested, log on as user Administrator## . c) In the SAP NetWeaver Administrator. choose

Configuration~

Processes and Tasks.

d) Choose Process Repository. e) In the Process Repository, search for your group number by entering*##* in the first free line and choosing Enter from the keyboard. f) From the search results. select the line that contains the following: PO_.Product_## - pr- pm(demo.sap. c om) The details of the process appear at the bottom of the screen, as shown in the following figure:

434



-

II A
~

A~~e I VorsOI

'd!

fi~

2014-012210 1621 (b:-eD!vet1prrentJ

0112'2120141 1.l0;'8AM4lf0Q

20140121MS156 (b:aOev!bpmeot)

01'21/2014 10:52:12AM.i0100

Details or Component po_product_OO.. pr-..pm (demo.sap.cetn) and Version 20140122101621 (localOevelop1nent)

,,/ Proce•••••ndl••k• ,,

..

~ou_ "_...,1_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

I Pr0te.~s fbw 1(-S&artA«ess .. I

!l!l ....... ~

-

Apf;ltcwe Axe hase Reque:st 00 last

Enter F\nheS-e ReQues,100 Tas.>: F\nhese O"der ~~ 00 I

Figure 3 20: List of Versions of Components

g) From the details of the Component area, choose Purchase Order Process##, then choose Process Flow to prepare the Start process. A new tab opens in which the process appears.

Note: If the Start Process button does not activate, make sure you are logged on as Administrator##.

h) If necessary, go back to the Process Repository screen. In the Details of the Component area, choose Start Process . The BPM Process Startup: Process screen appears displaying the starting parameters for the process. In the case of this example, the starting request is an empty request, and therefore requires no values.

Jiii

-.- -·

·1

BPH Process Startup: Process

·rauon:

ed Input Fite:

Go To..

RM.lore D!ileu

_,.,,_

1--·

·J

1[ - . ....

I

1

Jl ror Proceaa Pureha• • Order Proceat GO (VeralOf'I.: 201.at22101621) ~ef'd· J~ VDtles-

.,.,,..

I . .,,..,,

•I

i

I !£"0d I

I """"'lr>a• Ll °"""°"'!tlJ°'." v...., !! 1"""-~" LR

Wll>Cor.tgbc/

Ni:>IA~~

Vakle

D

I

I ViSD.. \.Rs

It111p$'w1y'l'w~.,.,_JJCi:y Figure 321: BPM Process Startup: Process Screen

i) Choose Start Process . The BPM Process Startup: Process screen changes and a Details link displays at the top:


435


liii

I

~ '7

··· ·r •• ··· · · ··---- ··· - · --.- · - -· .- · · - · · · • ·· ---,·-r· ., . · · · - ···1·-r- ••..., .• -··

I

)O.com] !!:I" Process Reposiory • SAP NetW...

I :?::r

BPM Process Startup • S/ll' N... X

LJ

-·- - ··

-

···-·--· - ··- ·· -···--·· ---·.--.-- - ·-··-

BPM Process Startup: Process 0

Process f\Jrchase Order Process 00 started wilh process ins lance 10 6637ceb6835611e397d30000006240ee Delals .. ~edl.D 4

Favorites 4

GoTo4

Support Del&is

Operation:

IOperetion1

Saved Input File:

I

·I 11 BRmse... _I

,

1~1

Input for Process Purchase Order Process 00 (Ve r sion: 20140122101621)

I

Co4'flx>nent: No V wes

lr=

...

(1.dd ~ I l§iiete ~DI Oe&r Values 11 I Start Process I Not Appic able

I.RI

Narre

• Errpty

Value

D

sap.com'gbc/

Figure 322 : BPM Process Start up: Process screen. Details Link

j) Choose the Details link. The screen changes to a new view:

m ~

•l:?:T

~-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

http:lf1"111ktdc00.W.s4p.corp SOOOO/~/tesouccs/sap.a:imftc~1t~m9'nfr«ne""Wd,/Roo1Pl.:inA1»1btawsttWlndowID-bwlD_,

F ~ Proce:;s Repository-SAP NetW.•• )-z:r BPM Pr'OCess Startup- SAP N... X lO

:om

BPM Process Startup: Process

en -. 0Rot~ i::urctiase Order

F\"oc;e$$ 00 $lMcd w~l'I Pf~e:s.s il:slance 06637ceb6835611el97
Re•

l..J ....,..., "" ~(! ()peretfoo:

"ii'•,

Go To,

-

°'"" •I

(0pe-.reOOn1

Saved 1npu1 Fite:

[

BfowM,.,]

I Wk*! I

Input for Proceaa Purchase Order Proceaa 00 (Vera ion: 20140122101621)

'""''

0om>onent:INo:Va1ue$ ... f

''•.ddeot•e;w:ntl r~o:1r1p;otlb'll(OcM voJue$ )l lstattA-ote$s l I.ft

Not AR>kolllo

VM!e

0

boul

...

-

Figure 323: BPM Process Startup: Process screen. View started processes Link

k) Choose the link View started process. 2. Monitor the process in the Manage Processes screen. a) If you have already opened a tab with the NetWeaver Administrator, choose Home . Otherwise, in your internet browser, open a new tab and enter the following url: http : I I nwktdcOO . wdf .sap . c o rp : SOOOO/nwa b) In the NetWeaver Administrator, choose Operations~ Processes and Tasks. c) Choose Manage processes with a predefined selection. d) In the Tasks screen, choose the History tab and confirm that the task has been created (as shown in the figure entitled History Tab).

436



•

~

t

Qi(

l'IA'

0e'1111.s o4 !M

II*'"' •

~-·OIOiM~

,...

~u

o.c.

&

......

...·= - - - -

~

r

:

m

l11cnc• Pu1ct111w Ord•1 Ptoce.uOO

~-?":!"

'"""'""'?

...,.,

I

1 --i

~cw-

Figure 3 24: History Tab

3. Check the business logs. a) In the NetWeaver Administrator, choose Home . Otherwise, in your internet browser, open a new tab and enter the following url: http: I /nwktdcOO. wdf. sap. corp: 50000 / nwa b) In the SAP NetWeaver Administrator, choose

Troubleshooting~

Processes and Tasks .

c) Choose the link Business Logs (as shown in the figure entitled Access to Business Logs) .

....

~

Zl' Pt!XOS$1\epoo!Oly•Sl>PNetW... O!:r llPMPto
~ ~ ""'""' ·Sl>PlletWe...

2::'

"'"'"''--ol 'Pltchos... z::- - ·Logs. Sl>PNetw..... x LJ

SAP NetWeaver Administrator

,,~ Wo!l:lpott

Avoialilliy and~o"'""'"

L
°""""""

COnfllluraoon

TroublH bOOtifto

__________________,.

..__~

Java

1:1111baso

ti 0 0 la

The l!us.,..s Lie< ye~ Leg Is usecl to and analfze oosiless evems 6fl~ and BR\IS. The
Bill!!!$! LOQI

Proce11e1 and Tath

Allv..-
"""'°'

ol

vltw !best ~ bai!d oo categories, h'tnts, contailm, Wd!le rangtS.

{Rl awns TrcutfQshQO'ltJ

n:m.u To trate tl:,e pc0ble1T'$ r&led to c~nt avaWity. a:dni"listratots tan U0 Q

the .s1arus cl al EA.ltltstH nodts, v'lf'\11 the Isl or subsyslt11• •nd adapters ·• ilh '"'"'· and 08V'gale to ~"' epploa1ion lo slal1 and •"'1> lhe Java '"""· \'if'.¥

Figure 325: Access to Business Logs

d) In the Business Logs: Log Viewer screen, in the Global Log Level field, choose Full. In the Show (level) field choose All.


437


-

liii

-

llUsiness Logs: Log Viewer ""..... u.~..-

--·91$-••

U!o.~tloi~-\Of4

"9-,;r:;

: ••o.o.. l""~

•

,...,..,t>'O_, ...._ ........__,,.. ff'lO'!Wi• ~~

• f ::: f ~-

OMt•tt . .

£ -

-

tl;fii11~1:!i

____

-·

_,

__

,__,""

"°'....,. p,_..

.

'5 ,.,;;u-o:i,1~..

-·°""

'P\i~....

,..,....

o.i•• "-'GO' 11.~. . .

.......... o ,,,.,..._,~Ql_,.S.. -Cl"

,,.,.

.c:ri-.-!~lt~h~-

-tf'M'~

--· 11110<-

,....,,.~,, ..,..

------~-

Figure 326: Business Log Viewer Screen

e) Choose Go. f) Check the history of your processes in the grid of the screen. 4. Check the Log Viewer for errors. a) In the NetWeaver Administrator, choose Home. Otherwise, in your internet browser, open a new tab and enter the following url: http: I / nwktdcOO. wdf . sap. corp : 50000/nwa b) In the SAP NetWeaver Administrator, choose

Troubleshooting~

Logs and Traces.

c) Choose the Log Viewer link. d) In the Log Viewer: Overview screen, choose View~ Open View~ Developer Traces (as shown in the figure titled The Business Log Viewer Screen).

-

[ven

Log Viewer: Ovetview

Voew •

Log Fies •

Open View ...

--.------...----------.., •

Ex

Open Expert View

SAP Logs

Con nee t to Rerrote System

System Logs and T,_ces

Al

I Related l =

- - - - - - • DeveloperTraces Sel As Default View Unstruc lured Log Fies

Olange Log Save View As ...

Uploaded Log Fies

Http Response

- - - - - - 1 Authentitation Logs Security Log O,----'---"-----''er: uw !_service P

6.Mr•~
t n ?? 11? ?n'

Figure 327: Log Viewer: Developer Traces

e) Choose the plus (+)button to open the list and check for errors.

438



I .,..•

•

" """' ..,....,

"•

@ @ @ @

·-·-~~

---

. .. ttfO'

°""

• YY'f1·rrm
tti• ~

Gtobeil(t~~)cipi:ni:~ot-*i:O:nisep.corti:~I fnalled with Mors 1«1I081 m=i

f

~ wrt.cu em:n <<>wt!'# <<~

w«N'91

°"

'f.erter IW'Ote5..

f.-Octwllh c:rrcn on $~ettwOC:ffl (64391501

corn"llP «.,e ff'r.1tm..c1ePOr.Mn'ff TIS'll«~

~\4-i:l1·:U

1:Z ' " '6'3'.AI

Cllollei!Sl~Ai:ipJOQCfO?lonC( ~8llor'l(t11Pt~ ~I

:ro\4~ 1 -2'1

(QJl'ISflP ~ Htvlc91-.
1t '21"'01'318

aot1111lsi.tr!NlliltJAl:iP)Ol)er11U0ttot ~~(sap.ccrlt.W:-tote__, fll'llshecfwtl'lerrors f« !t4 fl ,,. onser."ef j:f'()Ctts(&'l!l t ••• corn sap~ i.er..kcs.ctec:fOf HWV« n---.~~ »> w~~·
;Qt4~1~22

t 1'211J1 J17 0Jobel[•l*1~"'1PJCICW81~ot ""'*Ol.IOfl(ttOC~-1"'(~ffllg(fwll\ tf'IOll on tf/llVff

20!«1 1 ~

11·:z1-«1:$'1

PtOC•• ~150t

G7oOtl l•~A;o)OQCtfllan ct ~$Dl;f'l(
(«!'IMO~ ffM• ~ WVtr T'f*"ltc!lotM!l='IOOW

orrori !Qr f171JI l'T5 en ttriet ,. corns11p tnjlir'lt "Mt"~ MIVtt Tr4t'l$f!C,~!16~

_.» wfJ-MllllOl't ««Jf -»l> wf.._,. ............. _...,

Figure 328: Error Log

5. Cancel your process. a) In the NetWeaver Administrator, choose Home . Otherwise, in your internet browser, open a new tab and enter the following url: http: I / nwktdcOO. wdf. sap. corp : 50000 / nwa b) In the SAP NetWeaver Administrator, choose

Operation~


c) Choose Manage Processes . J

~ 0-~ =7'

""'

• I~

'-t/ftw.t.tdcoo.wtJ ,S<)p.corp ~~o/resour-cf.JS[s.ap.((1Mft(-~nv-~r~loorf'1tMpp?bfowse:Wr-odowro--bl

Pt~ss ~ory ·SAP NelW•.. ( ~ 8PM Proc~ St«tup • SAPNct. ..

I :" Mal"laoe, ProciKSM • SAPHet,,, >< ( ~ Ptoces~ Yisucfi:otlon of'Punh,

Manage Processes: Process Instances

~IOdif'li!
Sllow-

-

If~

A'ICf R'o.;$t• lnJt.tntes:l§637c~S41te3971

S&otw

t~ .

t.'~yclc $tsh;I$

OK h P"ootMS

A-oci¢t•

StlCHt R-oc.st R:Mo

.._~

[Show ~IOltd Tulll I I _.,.A«,;;,;;,;;;"";.;.•......... . ,..... ..,... ~ ( ecpon Proeu't 1

(Go I

N{_ Canc:ef

PIA'tl'*e Ord« Roces.s 00

Detziils of the Process lnstonce Porch:CSISie Order Process 00

-

Proce•• Dlfinttlon

Oc:l~illon 0: .03$6o04428"61 1 $b54 1"1 -.3$7oeCOS0$61 ~

VWSIOn Ct 74710360c:l54613c0991tc143til'46c:$1

Shqott A-ixq.s Oef!!!ibor! Plow

Figure 329: Cancel Process

d) In the Manage Processes: Processes Instances screen, choose your process. e) Choose Actions~ Cancel. f) In the Show field, choose All running processes. A list of all running processes appears. Hint: Do not choose Go. The refresh of the list starts automatically.


439



•

440



Unit 8

Lesson 2 Starting a Business Process as a Web Process

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to configure a business process to start as a Web process. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

•


Service Enablement of Business Management Process Tasks To start a BPM process with a payload provided from a Web service, the Start event has to be service enabled. Start Event Service Enabling Opportunities

•

Specifying a Web service interface by creating or importing a WSDL file

•

Configuring the Start event to implement the desired Web service interface

•

Mapping the payload provided by the service interface to the process context

Web Service Interface Creation


441


[(J Project Explorer ~

-

= EI°'

'ts- Navigator

s El

~I

0

[LocalDevelopment] demo 1±1 - ~ Connectivity El ·DD Process Modeling

1±1 ~ Processes 1±1 C2' Tasks . $ (9 Event Triggers ' 1±1 ~ Reporting Data Sources • 1±1 ~ Rule Sets 1±1 ·@ Functions • 1±1 ~ Data Types

'9 Service Interfaces i1±1 ~ src· -~ --New WSDL... j El

Import WSDL ... Import RFC

1\

':,i

Figure 330: Defining a Web Service Interface (1)

Web Service Definition Methods •

Importing an existing WSDL file

•

Creating a WSDL file from scratch

Typically a WSDL file includes a Web service operation that contains both input parameters (the request) as well as output parameters (the response). The request message of the operation is assigned to Start event and defines what parameters are passed to the process. The response message can be assigned to the End event of the process, which allows the process to return data to the caller. Because BPM processes may take quite a while to complete, the provided web service is asynchronous. This means the response is not sent immediately after the request is received. The Web service appears in the system as shown in the figure entitled Defining a Web Service Interface (2)

liii

~ DemoWSOLF~e

~

0 • NewOperation

G> DemoWSDLFileSOAP http://www.example.org/ -

-

-

r

/ Request

DemoWSDl.File

J

l)J input

[? parameters

[!] NewOperation

[? parameters

[!] NewOper ationResponse

~

L

Response

J

Figure 331: Defining a Web Service Interface (2)

442



Web Service Interface Import Many UI technologies that could be used for starting BPM processes only support synchronous Web service calls. When this happens for a long-running process, an exception occurs on the side of the service consumer. The exception is configured to return a response message. The process will still be started successfully, but to avoid exceptions when starting a BPM process from a UI. it is suggested to use a service operation without a response message. If a WSDL file is created from scratch. simply delete the service response. When the service response is deleted, the BPM process End event uses the predefined DefaultService_Empty interface.

@d

.a. DemoWSDLFlle

0 lQf NewOperation

G DemoWSOLFlleSOAP htt~: //WWW .example. orgl_

0

DemoWSDLFile

Ii'

l)J input

parameters

I!} NewOperation

End

-'f""'al

J Select a trigger for this event

Event Trigger

Trigger Type:

lfl>\t~

Trlooer;

0

Message

0

TWr

0

Error

0

Esc.&lltion

0

None

j~faultServke_E~y

El

•

' '-.. ___.\

DefaultService_Empty '

Interface Figure 332 : Def ining a Web Service Interface (3)

Start Event Configuration Input Parameters After a WSDL file has been created or imported, a service operation can be assigned to the Start event. 0

Start

0

M
0

Tomei

0

Error

0

£s<•l$>n

0

Nono

New Message Trigger SeAect operabOn Defne pi·-

s."""'

0

Entei ·name ptefbc or i>atternr, ?,

,1>t•t1;;:

sum.,
[D,,;.W5w~

@-ows~

··

....

El El

or cMnet case)

Figure 333: Configuring t he Start Event ( 1)

After a WSDL file has been created or imported, a service operation can be assigned to the Start event.


443


0

Sta rt

General Event TrlgQer

Output Mapping

Start Condition

'· '<

Define the output """"'"'9 for this element: Outputs of Start

Process context I l:i'lt

El

CB NewOperotion I

min

l?i,

1

ll'l 00_OemoString

Figure 334: Configuring the Start Event (2)

Finally, the input parameters defined in the Web service interface have to be mapped to the process context.

Output Mapping Creation in a Start Event The input parameters defined in the Web service interface have to be mapped to the process context.

Web Service Testing with Web Service Navigator For testing purposes, the process can be started using Web Services Navigator after it has been deployed to the application server. Only users with the appropriate roles may start BPM processes.

User Roles for Process Starting •

com.sap.bpem.Enduser

•

SAP_BPM_SuperAdmin

•

SAP_BPM_TRIGGER_EVENT

The user executing the UI must have these roles and his/her credentials must be passed on to the BPM process through the Web service call through a SAP logon ticket or a similar method. Otherwise, the process has to be started by calling the Web service with a fixed technical user having those roles. The Start UI When the input interface has been defined and the process has been exposed as a Web service, this Web service can be used by a process start UI. With Visual Composer, you can easily create a start UI for the process.

444



?.!·,.-.............. ~-~··§g·~~·~~~·;;;:~::::::::::::::'.::::::'.~~::;;;:;;~;;;;;;:::~~Jl1 I'·~·~·~ 0 ~,~-~·~lffi~·~·~--~~ :-~~..... ~,.,..,. . ., p . A

>I

4f

. .ko...

:O '
i)·

~-· .......c~ • .___

~

-----------

--•

... _.. _;.__ """_.. ___

-.

------·----"'--·----...... ~.....

· -

....,-~,.,,.

·-~ ~

dTl)9i1•oll1~11So~·'fr'in*"'"~m<1 l.ti~

~a. "eo- lmp1~n~._ ...., -.......~~'*"~"t''~-'· · ~

'1

l:;o T~~~vo.S,i""°n

tg: _

Iilx I'~,..~,..,. .q. •

Q • ii •

fii1 p •,

•:1

e•9' • 0

fJlfk • ..

start a l'rocess Instance

"

l'to!l- ~ v

-·· ....,.

tw'rr0.••01u,...,_~

- .I m

"*""'I

..:

:i

,_,___

.........

J

n.!!JCl1

Figure 335: Integrati ng t he Web Service in a Start UI


445


446


Unit 8

Exercise 18 Start a Business Process as a Web Service

Business Example

You are a technical expert in business management processes. In the previous exercises you created a process. Now this process must be "started." Staring a process can be done in several ways. In this exercise, you will start the process as a Web service. Up to this point in the training, the starting service is an empty service, so there is no WSDL file in http://nwktdc00.wdf.sap.corp:50000/inspection.wsil. Therefore, the process cannot be started using a web service client. In a previous exercise you tested your service with the wsnavigator. Now, the service is tested again to gain a deeper understanding of the start process. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number assigned to you by your instructor. Note: In this exercise, the product PO_Enhanced_##, that you created in Exercises 6 and 9, is used .

1. Check the settings in your BPM process, PO_Enhanced_##. 2. Copy the WDSL url from the WSIL list. 3. Start the webservice with the WS Navigator. 4. Check the call in the Log Viewer.

Note: It may be necessary to use the buttons Go to Next Page and Go to the Newest Records, located at the end of the table.


447

Unit 8 Solution 18 Start a Business Process as a Web Service

Business Example

You are a technical expert in business management processes. In the previous exercises you created a process. Now this process must be "started." Staring a process can be done in several ways. In this exercise, you will start the process as a Web service. Up to this point in the training, the starting service is an empty service, so there is no WSDL file in http://nwktdc00.wdf.sap.corp:50000/inspection.wsil. Therefore, the process cannot be started using a web service client. In a previous exercise you tested your service with the wsnavigator. Now, the service is tested again to gain a deeper understanding of the start process. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number assigned to you by your instructor. Note: In this exercise, the product PO_Enhanced_##, that you created in Exercises 6 and 9, is used.

1. Check the settings in your BPM process, PO_Enhanced_##. a) In the Composite Designer perspective, open your process PO_Enhanced_##. b) Choose Process~ [Local Development]po_enhanced_##/pr/pm CustomMappingFunction .

~Process

c) Choose the Start event. d) Choose the Properties tab, then choose the Event Trigger view. e) In the Trigger field, confirm that the entry reads Start SI CustomerData Trigger (as - shown in the figure entitled Check the Start Event).

448



•

:>_fr~_OO (..-:b00.«111]

} Pot
Jf'ro(e$o$ i

'iiJ ~o.:.sDewlo;ael'lt}po...c-thiince
»

Connectt\(ty

Ii! .lfP S.--.!Co Gro..os

-it Ser';bi:ttf~

fl-l& F'I'«~ MOO!'n9 e~ ~s

...

Jl, ~

-A H..n'J~~~s r~st$

'9

!!!-~ t~ friOQe!'S

till ~o.it.o~es

+

3 1'.i.h Sets

Ii! g; An:rlcm ijl $

rut• lyptS

lil .d) Setvlu lr~t(e$

Ii>~ "'

I~ rrtAtf.c•

I &.lsintsstoi;;c I Ut$1N! str~

ab'f•
......

,_PrtJd;J,.-:.._00(~00.«wnj

•

•

) p,l lMl'!rteri~ce

v ustomr.w~

=

01

Sta, 1 ~~t~ IOI' lh.sevcllt

J Cl.Stor~i.v;t:on

J ~St1.tl
f¥t!nl T"'9S1Ct'

I~§-~~

?IS ~Or©

TrQ:er l)Wt

0

~

0

'rt• 0 1i1

OI'

0

t~

0

Hollt

""""'

Figure 336: Check t he Start Event

f) Choose the Trigger link. g) Confirm that the trigger is based on the SI CustomerData service interface (as shown in the figure entitled Start Event Settings).

-

liii

v .............. ..___ ...... , ..... .............. ........,

Dtfine geoer~infortMtion such as the trigger Mme and doc:umentbtion

J P«lll

Name:

;:J Proc.., 3 :,;I (loc...,.,ebpment] po_enth,,.,ed_OOJPllPlll

IS!M_5l_Cost.....Oot6_1r'9Qt!

Documentabon:

8 ~ C"'1n
$ fjjjl ~· Grol.!>•

1

~ Sef.Ace References

e DD PrO«Ss ModelnQ

e 111 Processe•

Erq,Ol'lt Name:

dl, CUst-phrf\lnctkln

~ HandeEvtnts

Locale: £n9lsh

'8 r..i.. 8 r£) Event Trlooers 8

!hup:fl:Jbpm/vondo!Olkom/~ncedOOJptJprnJgor1s1customerOot•Trigg"?

• Settings

c:; """*' ® il Sl¥t_sl_CUstomelOot6_Tr9i1er

Dtfine prq:ierties suh as strvtt lntietface Md operatiOn: 5e
G:; Eocalalion<

Opeta!lon:

'1!:I -tng Dot• Sources 0 RlkSets

ISl_CustamtrOot•

:==~~~~~~~~~~~~~-=== St. CustamtrOat• (In :fllT_Custo•~rB..scData, ~,Mr_cust"1letCon::dldate.n.ta)

a9 flllCtlons ©@ Oot6 Types liH9

iii .~ '"

S
-

Figure 337: Start Event Settings

2. Copy the WDSL url from the WSIL list. a) In you r internet browser, enter the fo llowing url: http: I /nwktdcOO. wdf. sap. corp : 50000 / inspection.wsil b) Log on as User Administrator##. c) Search the WSIL list for the entry SI CustomerData using the search function in your browser.

-

For Internet Explorer, use CTRL+F to perform the search. Otherwise, use Tools~ File~ Find on this page. Performing this search shows you how often the entry Sl_CustomerData appears in the Ii st.


449

Unit 8 : Process Start

liii

-

.> ilJ '311ii!!lll!li!llt ,Jm!i.t§1~ oata_vendorOOcon\2Fpoenthancedoo2Fpr2Fpm2FStartSICustome~tanigC}flr

• -

S LCu stomeroata_vendorOocon1 2FpoenthancedC){]2Fpr'2FpmlfStal1SICustomeroataYrig~r

http://www.ve11dor00.corn<{wsdlHarrespace> ~ >SI_CustomerDataService <,/wsd!K.arre>

http://nwtctdcOO.wclf.sap.corp:SOOOO/bpm/vendorOOcom/poenthancedOO/fW/pm/startstcuston1er0itaTrl99e.t? wsdl&.mode: ws..policy

-

po_entt\an(ed_OO..,pr,...pmJLCustomerOcita_vendorOOcum2Fpoe.nthanced002Fpr2Fpm2FSt&rtSlCus-l(lmeroataTri99er_sLCustomerOot:a< <~5PiCe>http://www.vendorOO. com

SJ_.CustomerDllita

http://nwtctdcOO.wdf.sa p.corp:SOOOO/bpm/vendorOOcon1/poenthancedOO/JW/pn1/StartSICustomer1'.>ataTri9get?location=META· INF/wsdl/vendorOO<:om2Fpoe.nthanc:ed002Fpr2Fprn2FStertSICustorneroataTrl99er/ src/ wsdJ/pt_tmpLSLCustome.r0ata.wsdl&..wsdl&rnode• ws_poUcy -

- d> htt p://www.vendotOO.com<{wsdlNarre;pace>

<.'WSdl!Qrre>SLCustomeroataBlndlng http :// nwktdcOO.wdf.scip.corp:SOOOO/ bpm/vendOIOOcom/poenthnncedOO/pr/ pm /St~rtSIC·ustomerOa t.oTrigger1

wsdl=blndingamode=ws_pollcy

qxirtNime>SLCustomeroataPort http:/ /nwktdcOO.wdf.sap.corp:SOOOO/bpm/vendorOOCom/p0t.nthllncedOO/pr/pm/startSJCustomerOataTrig9er qendpo1nt>

Figure 338: Locations of Sl_CustomerData in the WS IL List

d) In t he WSIL list, search fo r the line http : I / nwktdcOO . wdf . sap . corp : 50000/ bpm/

vendor##com/poenthancedOO / pr / pm/ StartSICustomerDataTrigger. e) Right-click this line and choose Copy from t he cont ext menu. 3. Start the webservice wit h the WS Navigator. a) In you r internet browser, enter t he following url : http: I I nwktdcOO . wdf. sap . corp:

50000 / wsnavigator Note: In the previous exercise you searched with in t he provider system . Here you will use t he WSDL.

b) Log on as Administrator##. c) In the Web Services Navigator, under Search Type, choose the radio button WSDL . d) Choose the WSDL URL fie ld and paste the WSDL url by right-clicking in the field and choos ing Paste from t he context menu. e) Add ?wsdl at the end of the url you just pasted, then choose Next. If the URL is co rrect , Sl_Customer Data appears.

450



~

-

............ ....

I

- -- -.· . ..... --··· · - - - ----- - --.··· ... _._,.......,

Web SetVlces Navigator

/

Tosi stMario

Service ....

·- '

-

~

' 2 .o.. '

3

Operation

t\C>l.d Para.,.,.tets

r

Service

4 [ --I

I • Previous II Next •I I I 1nvoc•tlon Alrornet... 11l

"'""'l

Inv..., 1 I I Add to r..1Sc_., I

servtce 1nrorma1ion

Operation• 'tJ

J

Operaiion Noire

I

'iP SLa.s torre
·-

Figure 339: The Entry Sl_CustomerData in the Web Services Navigator

f) Choose Next. g) In the Parameters screen, enter the fo llowing data: Field

Va lue

CustomerlD

12-3

Taxid

abed

Date

Today's date in the format: dd-mm-yyyy

ID

1234

Total

2000

fiii

/

Test scenano

Service le. t " '

·- ·

' ~ice

I•

l'revlous

2

•

I 3

'

I

j• -

Input Patemetera

OpfflltlOn

II Next >I J I 1nv0
-1

Rosul

I :I AdcUo Test Steneno I

l Service Information

Parameters

I1

1

lnp0<1 I • II e.pon I I I &lit I • I

- eJ

MT_Cllston'e(llas~Dete:

#;

- a -#· D CU•lon'erkj; •I I•2-3 0 Taxl:j: • llebcd I - E3 0.de
- e a.• .

.

~

.

D o e: • ! 12.12-2008 D ID • 11234 D T< •t. l20cx:I

I

•# · I# .

I# . I# • L~.

Figure 340: Entries in the Parameters Screen

h) Choose Invocation Parameters .


451


i) In the Invocation Parameters dialog box, in the Authentication field, choose HTTP Authentication, and in the User Name field enter your user name (Requestor## ) and your password.

j) Choose OK. k) Choose Next. The results appear in the Parameters screen containing 12-3 and abed.

liii It- '

>•

-~ l 1----, ••J-~

Rtailt

ln111A P111amett1s 11H Vtt•

Xlol.o:mtitt

Hil?~

-e

Aoli_o..~....-~

:i

,p.

.,,,,,,,...,,,_,,I"'*• 1 ·'·

j W'PMIO'# M J Patna. !IUI - ':j °'*9:

L)

#.

te:~: 12-1~~

0 " .,:;;J 1eat :oooJ

.R,,

if. , ,

Figure 341: Result of the Sl_CustomerData Operation

4. Check the call in the Log Viewer. a) In your internet browser, enter the following url: http: I / nwktdcOO . wdf. sap . corp: 50000 / nwa Alternatively, you can choose the tab that shows the NetWeaver Administrator. b) Choose Troubleshooting---+ Logs and Traces, then choose the Log Viewer link. c) In the Log Viewer: Overview screen , choose View---+ Open View---+ System Logs and Traces. In this screen the authentication entry of your service call appears.

452



g

'Ii

~

o~

•): '.' tl'WJ~,lft(f,$110,(lr.I I ;:'.:"

.::- wsu~

tw'..J

-e*1"V'Ql'f~~ «"fr~-t-(»rf"',,..rt
lff"ll'l>ao.u:St.,.tvP· w>HM•.•

J.:71.og~ ·~~it...

l(

t:J

"'i;: Log Viewer: Ovetv/ew

"'""1mit°"'*"v- 1 4>t\9e«l".,.-.eo11~

Abo'--'Q.irrtm\lie.

@ GJ~o @ , (!)onio

n

19J.l 1SEaT J011~• (0:.ma:..;an;111e~~.A60 0?7{).0010CL'O.XllX01.0

IS)t1~m'Sbl¥t1

t_t..,_eil(I

201..01·:2

Jl :\31t"62 Jo:t!R-.t>~erM (O ~&~tlle~tO~• .AISO onreo1oo:O:JXC~l1.0.- 1Slt!tfl'I-~

1,"30t.t1S 1.000llfOll

.l$r't~l.l'l'f!.A'11NMI:

~ot11.u1p.eo-9

'°14-41-#

COllllMP..,,

IS)'~Uff!Jf/1$

COl"l•S>~'J

User Ad:?r.*¥1m!OO AIA'lt11X-5latl!~,....',;wt ~llJQI) SIKkAwert:W au:JUl'll!!'Od *~SC

@

®

ro"'

('.014.C.1·22

OJti:o

201~.0j.t',2

1S->::1 Qe ~) ~llk!r>IO!••~t$1J)4~-~,._.~llG~.. Aft~ A~llelUOO(IJ.d'letlxO:ioP.fl'dlccl ·~(~

' 3 .3.Jtlol:fei t.OOttOK ~

Ad'rr.,l(Qr00

IWll"f!:10; ~13\: It e..5C-MOZ'_•_" ' ' AIM"!lSc#Xlft SUllelA-~:et l)l,tl!_ltlilt'W .. $o\$C

PMS•

®

GJ;nio

:;(114.C.1·2?

13 ~.59 1;.)

t.OOOl.'iOI(

--

Figure 342: Entries in t he Log Viewer : Overview Screen

d) In the Log Viewer: Overview screen, choose

View~

Open

View~

Http Response .

e) In the next screen, in the Display Log File field, change the entries using the F4-Help. Your http requests appear in the results grid.

fiiii

--

[Jan 22, 20141:40:26 R.1 I· 10.22.112.96: POST tlvebdynprolresourceslsap.can1c-tn-ftsall1'1Ji-rrei'lfraw.vdi'FborAanA119HTTRl.120016475 [561 [Jan 22, 2il141:46:27 FM I· 10.22.112.96: POST tlvebdynprclresourceslsap.can1t-1n-ilsa111'11i•ll'6i'lfr81Te"',vdi'FborAanA119HTTRl.1200 16..~7 [661 [Jan 22, 2il141:46:27 FM I· 10.22.112.96: FOST /11ebdynprc/resourceslsap.cccr11c-tn-nsall1'1Ji·ll'6i'lfra1re·wdirl:lorAanA119HTTRl.120016354 [351

[Jan 22, 20141:46:27 FM I· 10.22.112.96: FOST tlvebdynprolresourceslsap.can1c-tn-ltsanMJi"IT6i'lfraJre".vdirl:lorAanA119HTTRl.120016361 [611 [J8n 22, 2il141:46:29 FM I.10.22.112.96 :POST lllebdynprcllesourceslsep.canlc -tn-ilsallMIMrei'lfr1Jre".Vdi'FborAanA119HTTRl.120016365 [102] [Jan 22, 2il141:40:32 R.I I· 10.22.112.2il3: POST lsap.cOll'r'tc-bpel11"hnM1wtonll"proviJer".veb/bpemr1v~oon HTTRl.1200 237 (291 [,Jan 22, 20141:40:32 R.I I· 10.22.112.96: FOST Avebdynprclresourceslsap.canlt-1n-ltsall1'1Ji-rrei'lfraire".vdi'FborAanA111> HTTRl.120016412 [901 [Jan 22, 2il141:40:37 FM I· 10.22.112.2il3: RlST 1bpnYvendOIOOcOO'lpoenthancedro'pllpm'StartSOlslOIT'frDataT~er Hlll¥1.1 200 429 [1101 [J8n 22, 2il141:40:37 FM I· 10.22.112.96 :FOST Avetxlynprcld'~palclter/sap.comlc-esi-esP"•VSll!Y'1liV.~1~tor Hlll¥1.1200 90..'\2 (1SSI [Jan 22, 20141:40:40 FM I .10.22.112.96 :POST tlvebdynprcllesourceslsap.canlc-tn-ilsall1'1Ji·ll'6i'lfr1Jre·wdirl:lorAanA119HTTRl.120016470 [1591

[J8n 22, 2il141:40:42 R.I I.10.22.112.2113:FOST /sldkirom HTT11'1. I 200 92 (7J [Jan 22, 20141:40:42 FM I· 10.22.112.2il3: POST iskfl(irom HTTRl.1200 62121

Figure 343: Http Responses in t he Results Grid

Note: It may be necessary to use the buttons Go to Next Page and Go to the Newest Records, located at the end of the table.


453



•

454



Unit 8

Lesson 3 Administering Business Processes

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to manage and monitor processes with NetWeaver Administrator. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

•


•


NetWeaver Administrator Overview The development of BPM and CE projects is supported by an integrated monitoring and configuration environment that is accessible through the NetWeaver Administrator. All other aspects of the Java engine can be set up from this environment as well, such as the following: •

Backend system destinations

•

User and roles management

•

Security topics

The main uses regarding CE BPM development are the following: •

Runtime monitoring of processes and their instances

•

Design-time and runtime troubleshooting

•

Accessing logs and traces

NetWeaver Administrator comes pre-installed on AS Java, so no installation is required . NetWeaver Administrator (NWA) allows you to develop BPM processes and other Composite Environment (CE) projects. NWA projects are supported by an integrated monitoring and configuration environment. All other administrative aspects of the Java engine can be set up in NWA including backend system destinations, user and roles management, and security. The main advantages of developing BPM processes in CE are the ability to monitor processes and their instances during runtime, design and runtime troubleshooting, and logs and traces. NWA comes preinstalled on AS Java. NWA includes several features to help you navigate to and manage your projects. •

Favorites - a list of your most used screens

•

Profiles - a set of NWA functions that are available for each user


455


•

Site Map - a list of all available NWA screens

•

Search - a way to find specific NWA entries by name

liii

~ ~

~

UyVlc.tbpt ~~s se-t •ndT1

•

M•I'\

~~

fl

I I

~ • l;iJ •


User: Adl'*11Str• tor

Q-t

--

~ SAP tltrA't•~~ A~=r"~

Active Profile: BN B..is111MSA.dmlt4

r

I System: C72on11.aw

~......

Co~leteUJt

Avo~o bi

••

ue~oj 1t0~••• a;:ipie drr*"llUttort c.1

~

HtS!cry4

I

S:t! IJJ':I

I

I

w

~OH

Sf-•~ lur.ca

I@

~

..-

~

~ BPll

Aytgmtjopn yYet!d Aqmi!trt!:cz!!

'·'•it•«1'62!.J

The atJ1119e Ta#s tp.pkt :ion ls 1 ce~ir•l trea fortn0l'll!otr1; ll'!O ""'na-;tlg l!'lt £1Pf,f lati;s.. .c.dl'Jlt:tttrt:oi1 caa vitw tl'lt ttak 4e-:ab, detdfoc dtt.b. t\4:Qry, 1a1l .owner$, 1ruJ10 oo l'IO!l'WWI~ vsers {'!ult ii. •cl11-ttowne..-sJfor Cli-etttl't: and

"" '

•n 1;i~ropna:e 1ct.:;o on• pcc;ceu W~

4:J Sid: FOMtlf'd ~

.,

TQO
j

'SOA 4'1~1<•:ion aro S(tr.af
Otvtfc-omtit S.ippcrt

I

v7 20

.,,.goment

SOA Ted1.rx11Adllin..$t!\\t-On 9PfA Technical ,;<1mn Java C!-~'@'IOj)!/

••

Tht proc:eua defritio"

Ptf'SCrtl lz! 4

ii!J • '!!} ~ • J

n• ~•!• to die re!a:ed proceu

N11nu.

lf'lt aoministrt1or 10 alttni'lll~C1" A41totnt:ion wi:•m

Figure 344: Using NWA Prof iles

Since different users on the same system usually need completely different subsets of the functions available in NetWeaver Administrator, there is a pre-selection of useful functions grouped in Profiles. On the top right of the screen are handy features for quicker navigation around NetWeaver Administrator. Site Map Use the Site Map feature to see a list of available screens available in NetWeaver Administrator. You can even display the quick links needed to access a screen directly (such as /useradmin for user management). Search Box Use the search box to f ind all NetWeaver Administrator entries if you do not want to bother with the hierarchical categorization.

Business Process Management Engine Technical Overview

fiii

SM


PtffOfltii:t.,

I

•he.,

fotV1at0 ~

AVlll!abMify• nd Performance M~mem

,;.$

J•t• 0--t f'w......

~u~ LlonC0'111".g

Pf'ot:H'5 J./ontQol'l?\1

~•!JO" l.(1f'• 9emtnt

r

Cor.fV'Jnt.::Oll llall•C$1!W'n

f

~Utl!.lg'9nM:"ll

ril R41...~

BPM Sys.tern Stotut .f"l-;i;

31oro;~~ F'-lllf.•T

I

-

I t.ogCft

I' o.

$0AM•n•~

Ct! -dJ\ .:9. :010

r:0: :15 Pl.I G'-.IT

~?t~fti"+
J1!'1:S'

;~1:i-~;:eF'IGJ.IT

E°dR•1'H"'90 0fl

~~ :-:l10-o.::-,F~JGf,li

!lumber Of Ptotess~s

Serter AV11!14bili tY

,.,.,

To!a! Ptoetss·ll:t!anOH I 0 )

0 S1Jb Sylt!m StoweO 1,01

..... '"°'

0 Ada:!ert S~F9t'O ~-0) t.'oi~crs s~ 10

J 1v1 APC)llet tfon• Avallabllhy To Jt. • $t~ '~ Sloo A;ota~-i To EiPM Cenflgj,,r•to'I: Temo.ot~e

Process E1'191ne Confi9',tratlon ¢-Engine 1 esting

I

Processes ~ Ft"""'"+
0

SU !Je:i

8Pf,. S:Y••em Ov•rv1ew

Overvle\•/

eJ Proce ss

I

~fO:l\. 1

U•er: ~stta~r I Aetivt> Profile: CQmOleteW,. I Syst.m: Cno!'list ..vmo....·s,v 7 20 U)' V.f
Hlltof)',.

.t.:110

-

I 01

Co~te:~ii

C$110fle0

(OJ I0 >

In ;trQgrest

(GI

Tosks '"-t-~M

4

Susc~ll

V.

l*l!C Ter:ta !II' c•.11: !it$..~'>

llumbo:r ot T••ks

'l'c:11Taslt ln.tt.t!l«t

0 Proeess lna.tanc:e f,tenu)fy ltveshOld

v~w 1 C(l(lr~

!rro.r S11s,;e11c HI

(0 I '01 I 01

Co~~:to

IO I

C.wiceie:s Rt-•llY

101

~ ?teore-ss

(.,

,• J

Figure 345: Technical Overview of BPM Engine

456



The screen shows the health of the different BPM engine subsystems and statistics on the existing process instances and their status. An engine testing function is available as well. The Availability and Performance Management feature in NetWeaver Administrator (NWA) provides a BPM system overview. It shows the health of the different BPM engine subsystems and statistics on the existing process instances and their status. An engine testing function is also available.

Process Repository Process Repository: Overview

List of cornponents

last tns'lalled Vers.cn

120Cl t 20091CISlo0102.0000 iSAP AG)

S.•.OC1 IS. 2009. ll9:20:36.JJ.I

1c..09errf'"co.n!t t1l"'eV er.tu.s .. ;tro~s°' (sap.com)

7 2001.20G9101Sle.Gl02 OOtlC lSA? A.G)

Sun, Oct IS. 200$, 09: 2-G'.-~ AIJ

tC...bO'~OC)l'l~tfll..OrtO"tft '"'6tfaul (U :>,COtll/

7 200 1.2G09101St60102 tie® (SAP AG}

S\ln. OC: 18. 21103 09:2G 10 AM

List of Versions of Component tc...·bpem ..contant ....so (sap.com)

Delllils of Componem 1c- bpem-con1en1-so (sap.com) and Version 7.2001 .2~1015160102.0000 (SAP AG) Proceuet end "'asks

t

~CK

Slrmt:f'li.mll"IPfcGKS s~~~ons

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

?rooes.s Ce M 1UOn

Figure 346: The Process Repository

The main overview for deployed processes is the Process Repository. It is accessed through NWA ~Configuration Management~ Processes and Tasks . The three tables in the screen correspond to a list of deployed SCs, a list of the deployments, and a list of the processes contained in the SC version. In the second table, the processes contained in the SC version can be deactivated. In the third table, you can start a new process instance. The Process Repository is the main overview of deployed processes and software components (SC). Processes contained within an SC version can be activated and deactivated from this view.


457


Process Management

liii

Man age Processes: Process Instan ces Scwch for:

r=

_ _,110o1

... t Actions·' ' IShow Process Flow II Shl1wRcletectTei• I' IAlctWve IR~ nEJCport Pl'oc:"' OetDll I FMPtoce$$tlStance: ~------~

' OK ' OK ' OK ' OK '

()!(

l0o I

.......

_

........ 981 e88ftAi59111 e1 &SdJOO)l()(l4.4dt82

011'l31'20t209:5Z 36 AM ca

~otor ,

$9b7b4e0 1 batl1•t~I~

11'30/20t1 09:30.t9AM CfT

Admiii$~,

Pwctme Ordtt Procen ZZ

Pl.rcMM Order Pool ZI 1•10'36otb2d11e187830000004i27;20AM CEJ

AdtrWV3ttaot.

tlProf,1$$$

Purehe$$CW~Procen34

Plxctiese Or6'r Pool 34

b23900flbt68611e0846d00000044d161

10'14/2011 01:05.:19PM~T

ln~~s

Plx~OJderProcett34

Plxehese ~- Pool 3'

4-'02dbe9t6831 1~4d162

IM-4/2011 Oft.40:47 PMCEST

ln~OU

~c>Ce$$

... PrQSJ"C$$

Pl.#c:hMc Order Proc.»

W'l~cn

zz

Pwchoise Or~ Pool ZZ

Det~its of the Process Instance SimpleHumanProcess

f o;'ti4 ~

ProceuDefinlJon

~or$

,

,

~ ..,, -°"' ~

t

~oat~

Proe@st nstance. D: 981 e88fM59t11 el a3d30000CX>4.4d1 62

Oc$triJ1iOre

Sjcd·

Arclived:

err•

.........

oO

0

Figure 347: Manage Processes

The Process Management view provides detailed information about available processes. If your process runs into an error because of invalid data in the process context, you can view and correct the data and resume the process from the Process Management view.

Task Management The Manage Task view provides detailed information about available tasks. Mana ge Task s: Task Ins tances Favorites,.

Aeloted L.Wt.:s,.

Oo Jo,.

~ ~~

Seerch few: ~--------<) 00 J

lilst of Task lnstanc&5 Show: l...o.toffl VioWJo

[ '""]

I Oo I

F.nd 14':k lns1~

~' Slfll..n

11 Aetlons"' MStlowProaes:s I ( NoriieleOwner. I Reserd,.cxm I

Uteeyel$. Stetus-

T.st Oeii'ibon

l ask ~ O

---.......

Started At

Proce"°'

~'-------------"'-----"'-----"'-----------~-"'------'

Details l'tboul CM k inst;,nce: Enter Pur,hase Recauest lZ Task / ~ ~ 0$9l!lh$ Owner$ ( l't$CO(y Cctlle:d: 0.&

I

~- P\"ttentotielnN'Ml«" ~ntcr Purcfle;e Requoit :ZI TCISlr

89d74~71~ 1IC"fceS400000044d1 &2

T&* [)efN)onNarne'.

Enlet' PvetMml R~sl ZZ Ta~

eeb&eeoe981'bo6ec9999o1 ta~de'l&I

Lil~

Roocty

$Ullus:

CM&g0ry.:

...........

flu~hi&s-TMt

Created orr ,,.,~

0

Figure 348: Manage Tasks View

To find out more about tasks, you can use the Manage Task View which can be reached through NWA ~Operation Management~ Processes and Tasks~ Manage Tasks.

Process Visualization The Manage Task view shows each deployed process in the system as a graphic. This view is linked with the Process Repository and Process Management views. The process can be visualized at runtime and through the task execution UI.

458



-~

I.ISi or VerSiOnsOI Component bPm.263les1-pm (dee

J'Gt;;'tj ........... , · , e.

.....

A.CU•#

...

~

-

-

i~~OOQO.Cij !ti)C9Clt•'t~l1

.. 1"11 D ,._.. D D D

J:Zil07Z.;,2J~:t l'l'C.-Ot'•~II

2«11C7.t.;.?3$1)1 !~Ct'•~"'tl'!I!

....

o.=

2!leie7?~22!!$6- i~ea1lr•tlO:i..'!(ltnl1

to_Orlli!f~

<>

Ot1alls ot Con1p
_,,

~·~ -~...

y~oces·~!FflProcen

..... ... -- ,........

-

1

x Ap~'l'e

~~ns

o-

-

fl•Je
A.tecllll'C.. '

-

-

-

-

"

Subjec t

St.:.tu.s

Approve

Completed

l

D

~2'l""°2 \•t•lle.,f!~I

--

Oetaitt: Approve

x"-

Pr006$$0f':

"'6263_m••>.

Mo
-..,,

Adivotedon·

7128A)9

S!Med on

7118Jf19 12:10;3'3 PM

St!llr1 Deadne:

Nodednettl

12J16;S3 PM

0 9'1• Clnl9f

7128A)912'10.45PM

....

... ...........

"""""'"' Cit

~Oe8dlile:

"'"' Figure 349: Process Visualization (Designtime and Runtime)

Each process deployed on the system can be visualized graphically. In the NetWeaver Administrator, this view is linked with both Manage Processes and Process Repository. The process can be visualized at runtime as well through the task execution UI. This means visualization of a process instance instead of a process definition. The current task will be high Iighted.

Java Applications You can manage Java applications that provide Web services from the NWA Java Applications view. Use the filters to find the application, then use the tabs to show detailed information about the application.

Start & Stop: .Ja va Ap plications

~Cl'19\:!'e,,

I

q:a 8&c.1'

q

i"!IS?ot)',,,

I Ho"'°" I

-.-.

I t.e90tt

Relltf
J1v11..,-1t1ncu

Apelicodon List Retrieve Statua:J Of\'

lltJ 'i1

~

Stop ,,, II A.est.en I · 1 t S;art "' n '

•

1-:.1--ne

j $~11~~~l$.C-Crtal~4'2

-

-

J1v1 A.ppt.e.tions

I•'I• Services

-

~R11EJ

vendor

A

f tmctiOl'ISlt)'

S1a!.J3

I idet.c.om

0

$0t..~'"$tC"'CfftHYC:C'llf

ilfes~m

0 Stoppeo

te11 ..C:tl'\P ..,.,..cre1trJl'!O 1

iCff C.Ol'l'I

o s11r:t<1

1: ces."'¥:il

tap..COf!\

0 Sianed

te.COS Vt!N.11

sa;l.CCtA

0 Stt1pp!d

Sl:lrttd

...

I

'

L -;;

I

Detells About soa...cmP. ...ssc- createsvconr

, / s..... ft

Refl!rt.1'4cu

llcdum

R....,rct0

Ce:tefa

~1'17~

l09t

tJ

i!.Sl.a!'\Qt' t•~r .__..

.i-~ •

.._. ,

H~l

' i:l""'""i ,.,_.,. --...~~~ ...- -,..... ...,. ..

4

. . ..

~~..... -

S~o,1us

-~-~~~-

..

_

._.

.... .... . . . . . . .

~...~··""*-"-..-..:....~-~~-- "'

, . , ....

Figure 350: St art ing and Stopping Java Applications

You can manage the properties of Java applications in the NetWeaver Administrator. To do so, use the following procedure: 1. Choose Operation Management---+ Start & Stop . 2. Choose the Java Application tab. 3. Using the filters , choose your application. The tabs below the application list show details for your application.


459


NetWeaver Administrator User Roles There are several administrator roles that must be assigned to one or more users in order to use NWA effectively. You must create and assign the following roles :

Table 5: User Roles Role

Purpose

Every user role

Access to the UWL lnbox

BPEM end user

Participate in processes and tasks

SAP_BPM_Debug

Process debugging information

SAP_BPM_SuperAdmin

Start processes, assign default administrator privileges

SAP_BPM_Navigation

Use NWA BPM applications for their own processes

SAP_BPM_TRIGGER_EVENT

Start processes

SAP_BPM_SuperDisplay

See all process and tasks in NWA in a read-only . view

SAP_BPM_CTX_SUPER_ADMIN

Access to Enterprise Content Management

Business Process Management Engine Configuration The NWA Configuration Wizard helps you set up the BPM engine.

fiii

Configuration Wizard: Overview

Pen.coa[ze.,

I 4-Boeli

HIS~ory .,

I

Hom<

-

l. Automation Tasks

I

Holl I L09 Off Re~:ed t.W'llcs.,

~El

Fn! dlose tne view, then s~1ect a l•slt and the act.on yotJ wa.,t to perform Sttow-: IA1Conr:21.1ratlon Tatks

•I

To ~erte-tm I.Tit ti.WltEcl'lnietl COl'\fl!w!atic.n of J1i,·a fE

tutl~l'lalunts,

set: tl\e fu!'?d1121u11 Unt conhQurctlOl'I Ul

~li@I ~me I ~~~e.I 'lb • rastlla"l'le

SW:llJI

~

.....,

•_ , 61 hal&l Setup fer ASAP

-=

fxe(Cl:e
r

t:xecu:IJOn Time

•

I

r;

~

.,,ial

BPl'J Confiituroton- o,_,_, Conhgc.irati0n or me ACIO'>t-o:Jo~ment tef'\tiees as o riub

.,.,., .,.,.,

Confi91.1re, SAP Ht!\.'/ea¥er A.4.nWustratc-r (Jfi'IA) Arclllvln9

lnlial

Conflgw-ation of ES Rl!";cs.coty., CE-Pt l&OO'Sccape

3 El

Description OefaultText

Cctrbfl~

conf19i.ratx'ln le!1'1?1a
Figure 351: In itial Configuration of the BPM Engine

You can use the Configuration Wizard for initial configuration of the BPM engine. To do so, use the following procedure: 1. Choose Configuration

Management~

Scenarios

~

Configuration Wizard.

2 . From the list that appears, choose BPM Configuration Tasks .

460



3. Choose Start . 4 . Follow the steps of the wizard to set up your engine.


461


462


Unit 8

Exercise 19 Test a Business Scenario

Business Example

You are a business process administrator. You will test your newly created business process. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you. Check the Windows Live Mail Configuration The email accounts for the requestor and supervisor users have already been set up. Verify that the accounts are set up correctly.

1. View the properties of the Requestor## account. Note: To check the email addresses used in the NWDS for the users Requestor## and Supervisor##, refer to Exercise #1.

2. Verify the properties and server account name for Supervisor##. Run the Purchase Order Process ## Process

1. Log on to SAP NetWeaver Administrator from the URL http://nwktdc##.wdf.sap.corp: 50000/nwa. The user ID is Administrator ##. 2. Open the Process Repository. 3. Select your process Purchase Order Process## to run . 4. Start the process. 5. In the NetWeaver Administrator, display the Universal Worklist screen for the user Requestor## and open the Enter Purchase Request## Task. 6. Assign and confirm the following product IDs, names, and product prices to the Enter Purchase Request## Task. Product ID

Quantity

Product Name

Product Price

HT-1000

1

Notebook Basic 15

956 USO

HT-1011

1

Notebook Professional 17

2,229 USO

HT-1030

1

Ergo Screen

230 USO


463


Product ID

Quantity

Product Name

Product Price

HT-1040

1

Laser Professional Eco

830 USD

HT-1060

1

Cordless Mouse

9USD

HT-1065

1

Media Keyboard

26 USD

HT-1069

1

Notebook LCD Display

800 USD

7. View the email sent to the Supervisor## with the new Enter Purchase Request## information and open the attached file PurchaseRequestForm##.pdf. 8. Edit the PurchaseRequestForm##.pdf file and send it back to the user Supervisor## . Use the following data to edit the Adobe form . Seller ID

Regions

1

Americas

12

APJ

26

EMEA

34

APJ

9. Log onto SAP NetWeaver Administrator from the URL http://nwktdc##.wdf.sap.corp: 50000/nwa. The user ID is Administrator ##. 10. Open the Log Viewer. 11. Search for and filter log entries that include I Applications/Training. 12. Verify that the SimplifiedPurchaseOrder Web service was processed. 13. Log onto the SAP Enterprise Portal as Approver## from the URL http:/ I nwktdc00.wdf.sap.corp:50000/irj. The user ID is Approver## . 14. Display the Universal Worklist screen for the user Approver## and open the Approve Purchase Request## Task. 15. Enter an arbitrary comment for the Approve Purchase Request## Task and approve the purchase request. 16. Check the successful release of the change using the Log Viewer. 17. View the conf irmation email sent to the Requestor## to see if the change request was approved or rejected.

464


Unit 8 Solution 19 Test a Business Scenario

Business Example

You are a business process administrator. You will test your newly created business process. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you. Check the Windows Live Mail Configuration The email accounts for the requestor and supervisor users have already been set up. Verify that the accounts are set up correctly.

1. View the properties of the Requestor## account. a) Choose Start~ All Programs~ Windows Live Mail . b) Choose Requester## , then in the context menu choose Properties. c) Verify the entries for the user Requestor##.

Note: To check the email addresses used in the NWDS for the users Requestor## and Supervisor##, refer to Exercise #1.

2. Verify the properties and server account name for Supervisor##. a) Choose Supervisor##. b) In the context menu, choose Properties. c) Verify the entries for the user Supervisor## . Run the Purchase Order Process ## Process

1. Log on to SAP NetWeaver Administrator from the URL http://nwktdc##.wdf.sap.corp: 50000/nwa. The user ID is Administrator ##. a) Open your internet browser. b) In the address bar, enter the URL above. c) On the logon screen, enter your user Administrator## and password. 2. Open the Process Repository. a) On the NetWeaver Administrator screen, choose the Configuration tab.


465


b) Choose Processes and Tasks. c) Choose the Process Repository link. 3. Select your process Purchase Order Process## to run. a) On the Process Repository: Overview screen, in the list of components, choose po_product_ ##-pr-pm. In the details area for the component po_product_##, the process appears. Choose Purchase Order Process ##.

fiii

Deta ils of Component po_prod uct_20- pr- pm (vendor20.com) and Version 20140321105719 (localDevelopment) Proce11e 1 and Tn k1

-ces

I Roe~ Flow II Slort Recess... I 'iD I Narre

:

Type

'ii! Rocess Defnb>n

RnhBse 0-der Rocess 22

Figure 352: Start of the Purchase Order Process ##

b) Choose Start Process . 4. Start the process. a) On the BPM Process Startup: Process screen, choose Start Process. b) On the BPM Process Startup screen, choose Details .

liii

BPM Process Startup: Process ~ A'ocess Purehase Order A'oc ess 22 started with process instenc e IO c f0d5502b371 11 e3b9c f0000006240ee

Detals ... Favorites ~

-

"el8ted l.:ri:s ~ Go To~

SUpport Detais

Figure 353: Details of t he Started Process

c) On the Manage Processes: Process Instances screen, choose View Started Process . 5. In the NetWeaver Admin istrator, display the Universal Work list screen for the user Requestor## and open the Enter Purchase Request## Task. a) Log on to the portal as Requestor## using the fo llowing url: http : I I nwktdcOO . wdf . sap . c o rp : SOO OO/ irj b) Choose the Work tab. c) On the Universal Worklist screen, on the Tasks tab, double-click Enter Purchase Request ##Task. The UI with the table appears.

466



Note: The table that appears here may be empty, because it takes time for the tasks to be processed. Choose the refresh items icon from time to time until the task Enter Purchase Request XX appears in the table.

Universal Worklist

Tasks (1 11) 1•

/

Alerts

Notifications

Show : [Ne\v and In A-ogress Tasks (1 / 1)

'iO

!

Subject

From

1

SAFOffic e Mails

Tracking

·I

• JIAt

I Sent Oete Today

Q!!faullTask

Riority

.,,

Medium

Figure 354: The Task in Purchase Order Process## Process

6. Assign and confirm the following product IDs, names, and product prices to the Enter Purchase Request## Task. Product ID

Quantity

Product Name

Product Price

HT-1000

1

Notebook Basic 15

956 USO

HT-1011

1

Notebook Professional 17

2,229 USO

HT-1030

1

Ergo Screen

230 USO

HT-1040

1

Laser Professional Eco

830 USO

HT-1060

1

Cordless Mouse

9USD

HT-1065

1

Media Keyboard

26USD

HT-1069

1

Notebook LCD Display

800 USO

a) In the displayed table, enter the data from the table. To add a new row, enter ADD.


467


I

liii

Task Application

Please enter the desired products

-

I Add I[ Rem>ve I lib A'oduc I IO r Quantity 8 HT-1000

2

HT-1011

1

HT-1030

1

HT-1 040

1

HT-1 060

-

-

1

nI LJ

El

I eonrnn I ~

Figure 355: Values Entered in t he Table

b) Choose Confirm . c) Close the internet browser window. A notification about the successful execution appears.

liii

Enter Purchase Request 05 Task ~Action has been successfuly executed for Task fb3f71fabeSa11e38b540000006240ee Task Dllta Due at:

Owner: RequestorQS, Ron

, ., ~

Status:

Con'C)leted

Priority: Medium

Attachments :

o

Process:

RJrchas~ Q:def R>ol ~

Notes:

Figure 356: Notification about t he Successful Execution

7. View the email sent to the Supervisor## with the new Enter Purchase Request## information and open the attached file PurchaseRequestForm##.pdf. a) Open Windows Live Mail. b) In the lnbox, choose the inbox of the user Supervisor##, then choose the email. c) Open the attachment. 8. Edit the PurchaseRequestForm##.pdf file and send it back to the user Supervisor## . Use the following data to edit the Adobe form . Seller ID

Regions

1

Americas

12

APJ

26

EMEA

34

APJ

a) On the Adobe form, choose the paperclip icon, and enter the data from the table. b) Choose Submit.

468



c) In the Select Email Client window, choose Desktop Email Application. d) Choose OK. e) On the Windows Live Mail window, in the From drop-down menu, choose supervisor##@training.com (Supervisor##). f) Choose Send.

Note: The Adobe Reader window displaying the Adobe form can now be closed (with or without saving the changes). In the following process step, the purchase request is created using the service SimplifiedPurchaseOrder. To assure that the corresponding business logic was processed, you now check the appropriate log entry on your Java system.

9. Log onto SAP NetWeaver Administrator from the URL http://nwktdc##.wdf.sap.corp: 50000/nwa. The user ID is Administrator ## . a) In your browser, choose the tab with the open NetWeaver Administrator. 10. Open the Log Viewer. a) On the SAP NetWeaver Administrator screen, choose the Troubleshooting tab. b) Choose Logs and Traces. c) Choose Log Viewer. The Log Viewer Opens. 11. Search for and filter log entries that include I Applications/Training. a) On the Log Viewer: Overview screen, in the Input field, enter / Applications / Training. Choose Enter. b) Choose Filter 12. Verify that the SimplifiedPurchaseOrder Web service was processed. a) Check the displayed list. Your entry contains the following entry in the message field: Process order successfully created 13. Log onto the SAP Enterprise Portal as Approver## from the URL http:// nwktdc00.wdf.sap.corp:50000/irj. The user ID is Approver##. a) Open your internet browser. b) In the address bar, enter the URL above. c) On the logon screen, enter your user name and password. 14. Display the Universal Worklist screen for the user Approver## and open the Approve Purchase Request## Task. a) Choose the Work tab.


469


b) On the Universal Worklist screen, on the Tasks tab, choose Approve Purchase Request## Task. 15. Enter an arbitrary comment for the Approve Purchase Request## Task and approve the purchase request. a) In the Comment field, enter the provided text. b) Select the Approved checkbox. c) Choose Confirm . d) Choose OK. 16. Check the successful release of the change using the Log Viewer. a) Return to the NWA. On the SAP NetWeaver Administrator screen, choose the Troubleshooting tab. b) On the Troubleshooting tab, choose the Logs and Traces tab. c) Choose Log Viewer. d) On the Log Viewer: Overview screen, in the Input field directly below the Category column header, enter / Applications / Training. Press Enter on your keyboard. e) Find the appropriate entry. 17. View the confirmation email sent to the Requestor## to see if the change request was approved or rejected. a) Switch to Windows Live Mail. b) In the inbox of Requesto r## , view the appropriate email.

470




•


•



471

Unit 8

Lesson 4 Troubleshooting Running Processes

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to troubleshoot and debug running processes. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

•


•


Log Views SAP NetWeaver Administrator user: Adl'l'llldlra1or I Active Profile: Col't1)1e'.e Ll$t4 I System: C72 on iHW

Ja-\I

Database

Logs and Tr.ces

Proettsff and Tasu.

Log Viewer: Overview

Sho\•t v ;ew ,.

CusfomtZatcn ~

Log Files,

Genoral

Custom View Recenlly Used View

• •

•

SAP Legs (Java) Last 2• Hours (Jav a) Alert (Java)

Oefaul Trace (Java) ~

Set .o.s Oefaul View

Text formatted Trace

Sa·.. e v~.·..

Expert

Save View As •••

Log Arellrres (Java)

Reset Vte\•1 Of..,. v

Change log

• -

uols

Standaione Log VieY1 er Extemal Lcg Files

About Current Vie\•1

~

I~

11 % 11

1

1,. U .,.. 11 • 1

I

I

Figure 357: J2EE Engine Log Viewer (1)

The Log Viewer in NetWeaver Administrator is used to access the runtime logs of Java Applications. The data contained in the logs represents a low-level trace of any application running on AS Java and includes the applications that provide your Web services and the BPM engine itself. To start the Log Viewer, choose Problem Management~ Log and choose the logging source (for example, the default trace).

Traces~

Log Viewer, then

Log Views

472



•

J2EE Engine Log - The J2EE Log viewer allows you to search for exception IDs and time constraint issues.

•

Process Log - The Process Log provides information about execution times, process outcomes, and individual steps. You can display basic or detailed log information .

•

Business Log - The Business Log contains information about BPM processes and tasks and can be used to identify problems. It includes the history of tasks and processes.

•

Connection Log and Tracing - The Connectivity Log and Tracing helps analyze problems with Web services and RFC calls. Log Viewer: Overview Sl>o6'V
U:9 f"11$t"

C...:0111t...Ol'I,,

llJ LoJt 24Ho1.1n CJ~vo)

!JEI

---

•

w

-

~

,-,,1-.1•"1'

,.,.,.1 .• -~

I •...
r'"4tt-111 2GI C'-01 ·li

1$;'2;3-I 01!- a.s! ~!41) (F.•~~ 111 co~rd. wo t~~J~3t"Y...tfOXY"'Mr, SC-l9JJDOl;i tx~11

o;iT.Se;> U \ fS»ef'{ICe..I.

20i~Ol·lt

''~l.a·~1s

Ottfl..IU~;t1tltl\!Ctt

Sy•M«1 •11*~

t

co~wo

t i uo ,•ffl<~ l.

C~lf# t•~,.,t

Mt\'¢fl t .

-:£'.'o:Cfrw;J.; ;A•fll t)l..t:.lSf.>c(fCl:on ASJ ~t,Seil1"Y• ft~~ •.t) ~,..IHl:--..t~y..tlof

Figure 358: J2EE Engine Log Viewer (2)

You can filter and sort of the results of the view you choose. Use the content filter to search for a known exception ID or time constraints. Use the filter row for a direct filter (for example, your application name).

......

Oetalls ol lhe Process Instance
~ACV•nced Oct

s.o 23, 20)9 Stp 2l. 20l9

.....

- - - -vi ......,. ••

·l

Groop OV:( Nooe

5~-~ 1~ S'.S~Jl I I'll

- Corte:xtOttt

•1

fV••ll Proecs.s hied Proeus ~e:. fliec

t

1[ue (Dow• I

l «* tor:

Des
'aied

~llP9J'l9

'aled

TPi1i.r1£Jt«ptir:1n:ftnd-....~1 F"int.httgitnlwi:MFuacini( d•rro '.lip cotnm.ppr.-gdU.S._trf_2Ho .ldi-11Cc_by_ ;uo:wll:c o> !¢fl ...,.. 0) rght }frc~l-1R:lcyTr•B•f>rlnCll', $ (Htlt(grotor Voi:!Exf~ct}--•

..

d~.sap.cor.YNc>"'1i'dMCI:,..t>)l_zeroiJfri:Je..ct _te«rv.allie -:o.-,uq>.;?ic.no~1. cxt'-'lfOn.hp'oAO:\tttion n.il9 nupph~;tradd)Fi)bg IT\l~Abitr::idU o ppns..je:v1~'40}

tt COtt1.$lp.gitll.f"l8C)~1>txtC1.1tot1-~;ttbA.R11rntt.ltl:M r,nll(RUflfletJ8'1a.e t J

it ¢Cltl'I s.tp.o~.nao~t.extruton..~nentJtbl\.Rlr.fltt.irana f~m(Rl.l'U"let ;...a:• t) •I

,,

c~tP~C019AW.rntlo4-.oC•t.ff'lnt~tSTr111••o""'rT_,.1oto>.cct.-Ct'SM•P~•"P•tts:tToltrr.nl~

CO'TlSep ;«.COl~..f\ter1allldaXer.Trans1'Mmtr$Trats •or.m!rTemp1ate)..cces.scr9.t1 p)el'ltoo8t~Snolfm!:rlle1

•• Figure 359: The Process Log

The Process Log is reached through NWA Tasks~

~Operation Management~

Processes and

Manage Processes.


473


-> ,.,.,....,

Busin ess Logs: Log Vie wer

So11c:tt tor:

I .._ 1,.... l too
•

~---~

Bu91ness log conr.gutMJon

Buslnns Log Viewer

list of Business logs 51-. ~oteml""

• I Duri""' lloot71?oy!

·• I

rrne From I To:

1111612012

find by cre.tton nmestaimp on a

II(~16 PM

• I / (1/23/2012

ll!jJ I'4116 PM

•I~

ti .... VI

I

~m-,,.,,. --,,---------0$2 --P-~-a-,-------~s~,_.,.. ---------.,.. -~ -----------..., -_.-,_.,.. ---------;

Figure 360: The Business Log

Connectivity Logging A Tracing: Log Vie wer Favortes,, ReWed Ulk:s,,

/ togvre=J

~0re0e1outw,w

I

~a...

$

tistory..

I

Settch for: I

Go To,, SUpport OetMs.

-

I ~ J

G.I

tog01r

i[@

log Confl;.}11.tor ]

Calls Show: !AI

'tJ ~

Sl'"us

•! kom: ;µ.. oo'.mi\$ '. l• l lEJ Slart rime • lrtertace Name

...........

• I for connectmty. )All Come-Type

Oi'edion

1§112]~

User Name

III"°.,... toun
Figure 361: The Connectivity Log

Process Debugging Process Debugger

Process instance

--

Debugger Log

Figure 362: Process Debugger

The NetWeaver Developer Studio Process Debugger includes the following features :

474

•

Debugging of running process instances at the model level

•

Stepping over, into, and out of a subflow

•

Stopping at breakpoints

•

Resuming process execution

•

Inspecting process context

•

Sending notification of process errors

•

Initiating new processes

•

Attaching new processes started outside of NWDS



1;1- oebug ~

4Y! Servers

C>

-~

D~

ii

I

':'l>

~ ll ~I~

El

'<7

8 !>!> Debug Demo [Process] 13 Process ('Addressl/erification') 13 r/P cOe71774·fefO-l 1de-ccde-0019bbc8afd8 :: 'AddressVerification'.'Review Address'('BEFORE_IM'UTMAPP

(le)• I/ariables ~

Name El U3 00_Ad
/ilf

~ firstName ~ lastName ~ street ~ city ~ reqion ~ country

I

•I

0

e Breal
I Value Address Jeff Gebo 123 Main St. Redding CA USA

.!.J j_J

Figure 363: Debugging BPM Processes

The Process Debugger must be configured to initiate process debugging. Depending on your configuration , either a new process instance is created or the debugger waits for a new process instance to start. Once the target process starts, the debugger attaches to it. To set up a process debug configuration, use the following procedure (as shown in the figure entitled Process Debug Configuration--Main Tab):

1. In the Debug Configuration window, choose the process type, then choose the New button. 2. Enter a name for the new debug configuration. 3. Choose the project and the process you want to debug. 4. Choose the AS Java you want to debug on. ,.j .: Debug Configuration.,

"'-'...l.:

Create, manage, and run conf'9l1rations er·e.t.e a ainflgurbt~ to *"'<:h 6 pr(l(t:ff ,, clebvO mode.

-

2.

x .... -: .

~~==<=<=====-! uamo: Oet>uQc...o ~ "' -~ A<-s)D ~1 El Apoctoe , _..

... .. •

Ecl\>
tj Eclipse Oat• Toolo

1.

El !I !I !i

l2£E...W.W

!!J:

>av.Applet

Gmotic SttV« Generio S«ve<(Exte">OI L...-.ch)

r~..,.

4•

0

Coofl!pe QefMu,

(I' 1Jse def.d """" (
r use ..,.di:_,

' .o

HTTP P,eview

['D lava Appk6tion Jo AJnt

e

~

------

.r. 1.Jnt......., '"' OSGI Framework ~

[er°'."'

Process

001.m.:1:.1.m,41 m

Oebuo Demo· Attach to Process Jl\St411Xes

~ ·-·10v·~ SAP Allc>i«>tiln

3.

JU l ask Context Pb;l--tn Test

'*. . . .

Ju TaskContext Test C-_otlon

Figure 364: Process Debug Configuration--Main Tab

The process debugger can be used to initiate a new process from NWDS or to attach to new processes that are started outside of NWDS. This is configured on the Arguments tab.

1. Choose the radio button Attach to all process instances for the debugger to attach to all process instances started outside of NWDS. 2. Choose the radio button Attach to a new process instance to start a new process instance from NWDS. You must also enter the Web service input values here.


475


'

':&. Main r(X)• ArCJUllll!lltS'\... Cl ~ommon1 r.

~t«h to al process lnstanc~

r

Att«h to a new process instance

, I

--. 1.

"

Configure a start process payload

~

Cl ~ommon l

,,

I Attach to al process Instances

xm1ns:x-"http.l/www.w3 org/2001/XI 11.~ance">
<'/~ess>

Inst :start~

-..,

2. "' - -·

(.' Attach to a new process instance ConfiQure a start process payload

xml 'e. SI(). I O' tine00.19 "UT F-8"1 > I < <=nsl :start xmlns:nsl a"http:flwww.exllmflle.otg/AddressProcf rJ

I

' ~ ~(le)· Arguments '

Jeff Gebo l23 Main St. Redding CA USA

Figure 365: Process Debug Configuration--Argument s Tab

In the debug configuration, choose Debug for the debug configuration you are using. The Debug perspective opens. Depending on the configuration, either a new process instance is created , or the debugger will wait for a new process instance to be started .

fiii

t'ft'teib<.IQ

•

-~ ~Pono !~)

- ..-.. ·-...... ·-

• - cJfw·v~ Sl""' .. ~

n ~ «t:s.o...,.,1

•

'

ii J. ·~ · • .,,.

1!1 1/t~l'~., @- i:(1 m.~oftlS.11~001~ .,~.~14¥~ ·

. ..

•

I

'

.,..,.,,,..

[Boo_~

...... ........

•

"" ._, .... "

123~5t.

'.!]

-o l

' ~ntJOlll X1.

• $

•

'

"

---

~·-

~-

'

4:1Cl lllf6~

• a ..,,.ff>YtltcMn ._Mo;t.,.

- .... ... ·--

t :Hlil-

D ...........

Cll.dr>e tl "!; e&. AtJit~~~ ~

O MN~~

o ...

l~ ~Ob,m,

...,

•

I

!!, ~ o..~ &: ;;. ~

.......... . 0 t--. ,

O tr>J~

.a.._

.

,

U .:.rti«ts

!>-.. ~

D"""'"""

'

.,~....-_

..... 0 ""

... ,, '~?,:_

476

I I

.f,

Figure 366: Start ing t he Debugger (1)



=

(1:> ...... .., ....:;...,

"' •

.

- - ......

OCJ 00-V
ac.- ~~1~1

£ fltf'loc.Hl'Mt._..."*"1

So-" ~~..t.1$.11~1~

~··~

:!·1tc11t~~~~

'~

---

!

---

··-

•

l?ll'Wt\SC

(A

'-= .:!_

a. ~. .~....

•

,.,.

........

"" .... ..... ·."' .........

~i;aoo_A#_

-~

. .;,..... t. -

-

~#

•" rti:.~s

.

'

~~'3'

B.l .l#"'*~

sD ~~.o1~

r;'

El ~Y
') •"'-"'~-" . ~"""-~

....

..__ 0 ""

·: et Ollt•ctn.ctJ

lftie-~

• O w r'°'" . ~,\(I~

. ........ C'" "0 OOC*ioct e--.

1.e-

El ~

0 ...

..

0 ,

St41tf-*

.o-,_

.·

,

-

;:: """'"

__

,

DCJ

I -

I

,r

Figure 367: Start ing t he Debugger (2)


477


478


Unit 8

Exercise 20 Debug a Running Process

Business Example

As the business management process expert, you need to debug a running process. Debugging your process is covered in this exercise. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number your instructor assigned you. 1. Create a debugging configuration. 2. Start debugging the complete process. Note: In this exercise, you switch between the NetWeaver Administrator (in a browser) and the NetWeaver Developer Studio. Depending on the size and resolution of your screen, it might be necessary to scroll and change positions of the objects displayed.

httdl. ..... IJr~~

·

...~-""'"""'~

l;;ij'l -»1* d\1!3

• t-....; n

-o ·O·'.\.· ~

•

JO;" ,.. .• •

>·

·J.·o"Dc:.

,.

~~

"'

•

.. - 0 .... .,,._, '1

._ _ _

~-C:" f'O_at~'IJf•P.-> ,.,,_.~O'dlt l'od«f) Ii .,?fl.v.-l. .lfllelli:tllXXaU.-

=

=~--·!111ft'J1#JMr~

...,_..,....._...,

•

,. ,

'
--"·

-· J -

..... .......

l o--· • "

•

--

.......,__

llJiit-•

::J ~~

~~~ll
a ~....

~...:-

-·

•

Figure 369: Start of the Debugging Process (Pointer waits at the Start Event)


479

Unit 8 Solution 20 Debug a Running Process

Business Example

As the business management process expert. you need to debug a running process. Debugging your process is covered in this exercise. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number your instructor assigned you. 1. Create a debugging configuration. a) Change to the Debug perspective. b) In the Debug perspective, choose the "Scarab" icon in the ICON bar, then choose Debug Configurations from the context menu. c) In the Create, manage and run configurations screen, choose Process. then choose New from the context menu.

·-!pt--'* "'"""·

-;-::~~M=--::::::::::::::::::::::::::====::::::::::::::::::::::::===1! ,,_ "'""'"""'° r _..

• i:;: ,_ • ~======-~

p

•

-~. nfl ,,., ,,,,.,.. - . ....

fj ,,,_ ; - - .

s-__

i>OJOJl~-

1'. -

• .,_0,,..1 11~""* tl ..

,.1:;-:-51.w_ !:t'i _,_..

·.-

...

~

ri»-1......-,....

.,_~

~ w-

l~-"---..__F _=•••;;;;..."'-

- - -- -

w ~1.,..,.i

~·~fl&..........,..,.

l•<;orl.or. >l,q4'I

ldl\.o<___,P<.~OW..... ~J.....- ......oi:w.o...

wo ~ic·

--r.11.11.,..(;lo'fu:

~-

I

~·

I

<)....~."~

~,,, ,_?,.,~

"'°°'""" I=

t.oot

~~C-"'1111(-

<"'

aj. .~OO!lrft-.,.

...~

SI~___,

'ioi(l,-0(~....~ ~llt.t"~

'..,J11- . -1........-~,-

.. I

3

(Md

I

Figure 368: Create, Manage and Run Configurat ions Screen

d) In the Name field, enter PO ## StartConfiguration.

- -

e) Choose the Main tab, then in the Project field choose Browse .

f) In the Project Selection dialog box. choose your project, po_product_##. IRT projects end with .. /pr /pm g) Choose OK. h) Choose Apply. i) Choose the Arguments tab, then choose Apply.

480



In this screen, the payload (that is, the data used in the process) is entered. To simplify the exercise, an empty payload is used at the Start event. j) Choose Debug. k) If requested , log on as Administrator## . 2. Start debugging the complete process. Note: In this exercise, you switch between the NetWeaver Administrator (in a browser) and the NetWeaver Developer Studio. Depending on the size and resolution of your screen, it might be necessary to scroll and change positions of the objects displayed.

.

-

.

..

..

"

.... 'l)l/I

~~ ~

.

.

.

.

.

d' el ')o • Q•q.·

' ~

•

.. ~

•

..

~,J-·"'ir;.

"~:......··

6-«'ro_,.~-..111-1

= 16-·~--GT)

.

I.

IJ ll~l...1111~

-=M-.~1'0til4'~£..~

.J ,,,_"""'-(

•

-· •

~;..,.

tl

PO~!-

~·

--·

'·--· J

I

~N;l)ll>

~,.%!~

£! ~

•-...·~='*'=·

''"

.....

•

Figure 369: Start of the Debugging Process (Pointer waits at the Start Event)

a) In the NetWeaver Administrator, choose Repository.

Configuration~

Process and

Tasks~

Process

b) In the Process Repository, search for your process, PO_Product_## . c) In the Details area, choose the Purchase Order Process## and choose Start Process . d) In the BPM Process Startup: Process screen, choose Start Process. e) Switch back to the NWDS Debugging perspective. After starting the debug session, the pointer waits at the Start event. f) Return to the NWA and process the process as done in the previous exercise. g) After each processing step, go to the Debug perspective to see which variables have been chosen.


481


____ ______ _,,

liii

•rio - .. ~....

r"""'3 '" ·

-·-·--·-:-.

Ile "' •••. , _ . _

' ~-

•

~""'

.._ _ _ :::1

-· ~)

•&s,!;;.. !::-1. . .r

-·

-

·-

(loo•..,.,..,...

·-·

~-o-

L

g~ ,.

~·-~ ·~~

...,.

-· v•--""--· ~. . ,. ,_ ·-· ·-,_ ··--· ··---... I

;-

_. .........

1.er,:-· l•O"'"'-

•

;.~:,::.")

• l'ltl _ _..,_

,.

·~

'·~

---

~:::-~

...

~

I

--·

i..--

- -

--·

-

.....--..~

•!!!"-~-

..,

·-~·"'-

Figure 370: Debugging Screen--Start

The process is started through the Process Repository. The pointer changes when stepping through the process. The variables that have been changed appear in yellow. Also, a Process ID has been created.

liii

£

G> Serl/ice References (

Purchase order Proce

!::!

£

~ PO_Enthllnced_OO [ven

Hancl.t:vents

Purch11se Order Pool 00

Request.or 00

Supervisior 00

ApproverOO

D

St

I

• 0 Add Additlonol P\a'chase Request tlfOfmalion 00

•

Figure 371: Debugging Screen--Ongoing Debugging

h) Navigate through the entire process. You can set breakpoints directly on the graphical symbols (by choosing Toggle Breakpoint in the context menu). i) Test the boundary exception.

482



:, g ... · ~ · "°' ·&:o t. ~~~ ~

I

¢

.

•

~~~ ~~·~~ · ~~~~~~~~~~~~~--"~•._..__~~"""'...._~.:.iF~'~ ·..., ~""""~'

W.UO P0.,$0~~/ltlollli'!'eu'.4J

ellf ,..~~·°'.. ~~

a...> 2«1(11\~lbll~~ ii

3

I

.,._'"'-~ ~Ol1.f,nd'(W~~fw..1

.Jlt 2'nflll<·t&"lbUt~ Fh-i,.....On!.. l'uelfil.'lrcor~~·~~

!"! (5 lttqo - W• @!.'fl Meede•

a

1:1

lil 11 ..

.,_

en i'r«H$lt~
El C()

,~,.o.i,.

!II~ tie~

ti.I

..

Iii )!.,..,

--

.. Figure 372: End of Processing

j) To terminate debug mode, choose the red square (in the icon bar of the Debug tab).


483



484

•


•



Unit 8 Lesson 5 Managing Process Desk Tasks

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to manage process desk tasks. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •


Universal Worklist ~El

f5 Universal Workltst - SAP Nl"tWe.:.ver Portal - Windows IntC'met fxplo.rer

(j~ . ~
14

p.

htll"i-·SOOOOl•l!Po
!'::l' l>1ivel'sal Woi l\list- SAP

NetW•- Putol

•1 •

~ • .!;iJ • i!;l' Pogo •

q. •

j Tools • " logol1

Welcome. Administrltof,

Compeny

Work

TeaT1s

Oocumens

FIA Screen

Universal Worklist , _ (111)

----

--

~

•

==.El •

·J DefeulldmJ

OefaultTask Settt>ole:

Todty

•

Figure 373: Universal Worklist

The Universal Worklist is the access point for tasks that are assigned to your user. It is available in SAP NetWeaver.

Task Management


485


tta:

\'lelcome Jeff Gebo

OetaHed Havtganon

EJ

Universal Worklist

El

Sltow; !New and kl Pro91ess Ta!

!----------'=

I Po:fll!S!af;o I LRi..21t

4

•

Review Address

• UNYersll Wortcltlt

Related Links

•

Pro~ list Vewer

'ti

®El

SUt>IO
Rro;w A9cfrrt1 l!;J

---

Reycw Addren ~

""

Rev.ew Address~ Rev.ew Address§'

,..,~

fhl!t•l'w.

""""Y

.... ,... CA

' 1"3 uw. St llcN

Review Address Sent Date::

Ynterday

Sta1us.:

ti Progress

Figure 37 4: Process Desk

Potential owners can claim tasks, check the status of tasks, and return tasks from the Universal Worklist. Users can also view a task's contributors, notes, and attachments.

·a •

~

Review Address

.. . .. ... l:.i'" Paoe

))

ActGns 4

El

Task Data

n Progress

Due at

Status

Owner

Priority l.ledoum

Gebo,

... ~ Tools •

Jett

Attachments O

Process ~~..,.

llotes

ails

Task Application

Actions - for delegating or putting the task back.

DO_Address

'1!9"'"

1utt1ame·

I

street

Qfillar. Si

frstName

!Jeff

country

iusA

city'.

JReddong

Approve ( Reject

I

View - contributors, notes, and attachments

User Interface Assigned to Task

Figure 375: Task Execution User Interface

When a potential owner puts a task back on the Universal Worklist after claiming it, other potential owners can then claim that task. Shared and Delegated Tasks Delegating a task means that the potential owner assigns one or more additional users to share ownership of the same task. Delegates are able to view and edit the task's entire process and its contributors, notes, and attachments. A delegate can complete a task. You can delegate the task to any user except excluded owners of the task. To delegate a task, use the following procedure:

486



1. In the Task Execution UI, choose Actions/Delegate. 2. Search for the user to delegate the task to. 3. Optionally, you can enter a note that the user being delegated can see. Putting tasks back remove you as the owner and allow potential owners to take action on it. To put tasks back, in the Task Execution UI, choose Actions~ Put Back. Contributors Potential owners can assign contributors, or other users, to help complete a task. Once a contributor is assigned to a task, the task displays in the users Universal Worklist. Contributors are able to view and post notes and attachments to a task. Contributors cannot complete a task. Substitution You can assign substitute owners to a task if a potential owner is unavailable for a period of t ime. For planned absences, owners assign a substitute owner in advance, and the substitute owner's Universal Worklist is updated accordingly. For unplanned absences, substitute owners have to assign themselves as substitute owners before the Universal Worklist is updated. Attachments and Notes Attachments and notes provide an easy way to collaborate with others working on a specific task or the entire process. Attachments include UR Ls and files and notes are simple text files and are posted to the process in the Task Execution UI and the Process List Viewer. Attachments are stored in the ECM Repository.

Process Visualization Process visualization enables you to view a the process workflow as a graphically as a workflow chart. The active task is indicated with a green icon. Tasks assigned to you are marked with on orange icon. Details of each task, including errors and subprocesses, are viewed by clicking on the task.

Process List Viewer The Process List Viewer shows all of the process instances that are relevant to you as an owner, potential owner, delegate, or contributor. Processes are organized by process that you own, processes that you are involved with, and all processes relevant to you. To include the Process List Viewer as a related link, use the following procedure: 1. Log in your portal as a content administrator. 2. Choose the Content Administration tab page. 3. In the portal content catalog, choose Portal Content~ Content Provided by SAP~ End User Content~ Standard Portal Users ~ Pages ~ Univeral Worklist ~ Universal Worklist. 4. In the context menu of the Universal Worklist, choose Open~ Related Links. 5. In the portal content catalog, choose Portal Content~ Content Provided by SAP~ End User Content ~ BPEM/Pages ~ Process List Viewer. 6. In the context menu of the Process List Viewer, choose Add as a Related Link. 7. Confirm the Add Related Link dialog box.


487


8. Save your settings. In your Universal Worklist, under Related Links, the Process List Viewer appears. Attachments and Notes Process collaboration can be achieved by posting notes and/or attachments to the process in the Task Execution UI. These attachements and notes can be visible for an individual task or the entire process. You can also attach files or URLs. To do so, in the Task Execution UI, choose View~ Attachments/Notes. The Process List Viewer allows you to see all process instances relevant to you, including the notes and attachments for these process instances. A'*"9.~ '

A6drestVedic11bon

Jan 11, 2010 .t.·01;'3 PIJ

El Runnna O lb;nnng IJ t:Wnnng

A6dteuVenflcabon

Jan 11 2010 3;,,..,5$ P9J

·-

AddressVerifi:.AboA

Jon 11, 2010 3.21·!2 PU

Gebo, Jett

A6drcssVenfl:abOn

Jen 11,2G102.4S;2-1 PM

Gebo, Jetf

!;I Ru11r1ng

~ret.tVen6cabon

Jan 11, 2010 2:20•37 PM

,,.

IPl'CCHSM I a1n k'lvotved I\

~ $i.tll'I

rre aunan;

....

,I

"""

Show.

,...

,~ PrOQeUet.

Ptouss Fbw I $1:a~On

••

-m~

..

•

Gebo, Jett

I

Gebo, Jett

,

~. Jeff

•

~

Details of process : AddressVerlfleation > A.c~task• " AttKtwnent5 (t)

lD 19

""

sou

AMeo o" Jtt113. 2010 4'S2.'6 PM

•

MdedB)'

Gebo.Hff

'"""" OKS

,..,,..

-·

I

.... ..,. Kotcs • 1)

Jan 13. 2010 4:52;tJ PM . Gebo.Jen ti.mootHotu

Figure 376: Process List Viewer

The ECM Repository is used to store all attachements used in BPM processes. Access to ECM is done with the WebDAV protocol. SAP recommends the use of SAP Portal Drive tool available on SMPM. Other web folder tools can be used as well. SAP_FPINFRACALLER role is required to access the ECM Repository. ECM is delivered with the following SCAs:

488

•

ECMCOREOO_O.SCA

•

ECMAPPSOO_O,SCA


Unit 8

Exercise 21 Visualize a Business Process

Business Example

As the business process management expert, you need to visual a running process. This visualization is used as an enchanced method of debugging. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number your instructor assigned you.

Note: In the previous exercise, the debug mode was used for visualization. The method used in this exercise is applicable when SAP NetWeaver Develop Studio is not available for debugging.

1. Start your process using the Process Repository. 2. Use the Show Process Flow method to visualize the process. 3. Use the Definition Flow method to visualize your process.


489

Unit 8 Solution 21 Visualize a Business Process

Business Example

As the business process management expert. you need to visual a running process. This visualization is used as an enchanced method of debugging. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number your instructor assigned you.

Note: In the previous exercise, the debug mode was used for visualization. The method used in this exercise is applicable when SAP NetWeaver Develop Studio is not available for debugging.

1. Start your process using the Process Repository. a) In your internet browser, enter the following url: http : I I nwktdcOO . wdf . sap . c o rp : 50000 / nwa b) In the SAP NetWeaver Administrator, choose

Configuration~


c) Choose Process Repository. d) In the Process Repository, search for your group number, *##*. e) Select the line that contains PO_product_##- pr- pm (demo . sap. com) f) Choose your process. In the Details of Component area, choose the Purchase Order process##, then choose Start Process . The BPM Process Startup: Process screen appears displaying the starting parameters. In th is case, the Starting Request is empty, so no values are required. g) In the BPM Process Startup: Process screen, Choose Start Process. The process starts through the Process Repository. If you navigate to the Manage Process screen, you will see that the status of the process reads OK.

Note: A visualization of the process can be viewed in two ways (as shown in the figure entitled Process Started, Status OK)--either by choosing the Show Process Flow button, or by choosing the Show Process Definition Flow link in the Process Definition tab.

490



~ 'O"

~

~ ~

e

J U-"' ,_, j /)"~ - ....... J "'"" ~ .,. J ,.. ...,- ..... "'1;t -M.anage Processes - SAP Net Weaver Adnun~tratot - Windows Internet f)l$llorer vg_,

u- --

;

• F ftt?;/jnwltclc00.wdf.sap.co1p SOOOO/wf'bdynpraf1~tcS/s.sp.ccrnJtc...im-..~wtr~dJ~?brl;w~\\.-ndov:!:T Proc~ rlepostory· SllPNetw... I "!a' BeM Process Stat~· SAP Net... I ~ M-¥1• Pfocesses • !APNet •.• X t::J

~

Manage Processes: Process Instances

'

t

CK

h Rogress

Details of the Process lnsrance Purchase Order Process 00 Oetok Tei&:

Proc:itlt Dttlnllioft

A.drrinisv.lor$

thtGry

Cort.ext Clato

BT« og

AttlK~

F\JrcflaseO-der A>OIOO

Oerintm D: ~'J442~1 I SbSe11c39:7eeoosos61bOcleS Version D

11001ec'6C.caac 16S3c8 11De4611dba6

2

J Figure 377: Process Started, Status OK

h) In the BPM Process Startup: Process screen, choose the Details link. i) In the BPM Process Startup: Process screen, choose the View started process link. 2. Use the Show Process Flow method to visualize the process. a) In the Manage Process: Process Instances screen, choose the Show Process Flow button. A new screen appears containing a green/red marker on a graphical symbol, as shown in the figure entitled Visualization of the Process Flow. This screen allows you to follow the process flow. A green light in the indicator means the state of the process is OK. A red light in the indicator means the process contains an error. To actualize the process, use the refresh button on your browser.


491

Unit 8 : Process Start

liii

® • Ii:" l\t,'P:ii'nwl~ckCQ.w.;f.,.)p.wp."'SXIOO(>...o~pfro(d~.m.i~.(c.tl\l\c""::io

.......,..dli...,;.-~liPf xns'~~"l?;"":w;lmtntJJS..o;(HZ~lc. 11tJ• /.

Jcrk-or:ies.s~·SAPNelW... I e;, eF't'!Pl«"""'~·SAPNet...

I '=' ~~~~·SA/.'IM~... 1?7 P1'~S~~«"-'·c.... x LJ

Purchase Order Pool oo

_._

~~00

~rx<1W:'OO

~RP O~

CJ

~

"'1-1

~

..

F\r(bce-~PoclOO

"""""""'

ff..i.ct Pur<:l\He . Aeqtlllst•

l

--

~

Pur.:t\'~ ~.iea W¢111'1~00

~eetefVc.hMe ~:too

l

........,

~ ApPf'O"'li It

D

T•f~

.... y .

f *V1'•5'<~ JI ~d

11 RttoWlnodow

J

l O"' ,

•

•

•

-

"

...

*

"'°"' . • .

•

J.00~

•

.

•

.

1~0')1;

•

Figure 378: Visualizat ion of t he Process Flow

3. Use the Definition Flow method to visualize your process. a) In the Manage Processes: Process Instances screen, in the Details of the Process Instance screen, in the Process Definition tab, choose the Show Process Definition Flow link_ A screen appears displaying a visualization of the process, but no process flow_ This screen is useful for view ing the definition of a BPM process.

rchasc Order Process 00 P..rth•

........,.,

-OI)

A,llllrt ... 00

CJ

I:;:) $~

~·

"

.....

O.eir Pctil 00

h~·

...........

~---

1 1l

............ ................ .,r~OO

...

~

~~

R~:((IO

1 ··· ~a.war. fl"'V~I)')

D

x'y

1..,.:l'OrltOfa

,_.,., .........

...

el

-- - - ' - - - -('>-- ' --''-

Yl lf fi

~;\tt~»e

I Myt'"""'•

11 -.-..nd

I(

fitWWlndvw

I

109'.

__;•_

•_

$O•

___;_ •

~oo•

l~O•

'----'-'- - - - ''- ' -

1

Figure 379: Visualization of t he Process Definition

492

© Copyright . All right s reserved.



•



493


494


Unit 8

Learning Assessment

1.

In order for a process to start, it must have an active version . Which of the following are methods for starting a process?


D D D

A Starting processes from the Process Repository B Starting processes by Web services C Starting processes from the Debugger

2. Why does a start event have to be service enabled?


D D D D

A To accept triggers B To send notifications

c

To handle exceptions

D To start a process from a Web service

3. What is NetWeaver Administrator used for?


D D D D

A Assigning roles B BPM processes

c

Composite Environment projects

D Manage the proces flows


495


4. _ _ __ __ _ is the main overview of deployed processes and software components Choose the correct answer.

D D c D D

A Process Management B Process Repository Process Visualization

D Task Management

5. _ ______ provides detailed information about available processes.


D D Dc D


D Task Management

6. _______ provides detailed information about tasks. Choose the correct answer.

D D c D D


D Task Management

7. The _ _ __ ___ log allows users to search for exception IDs and time constraint issues.


D D D D

496

A Business log B Connection log C J2EE Engine log D Process log



8 . The _ _ _ _ _ _ log provides information about execution times, process outcomes, and individual steps.


D D D D

A Business log B Connection log

c

J2EE Engine log

D Process log

9 . The _ _ _ _ _ _ log contains information about BPM processes and tasks.


D D D D


c

J2EE Engine log

D Process log

10. The _ _ _ _ _ _ log helps analyze problems with Web services and RFC calls.


D D D D


c

J2EE Engine log

D Process log

11. While the NetWeaver Developer Studio Process Debugger includes the debugging of running process instances, you cannot attach new processes started outside of NWDS.


D D

True False


497


12. What does the Universal Worklist provide potential owners?


D D c D D D

A A list of available tasks. B A list of claimed tasks. A list of potential owners. The status of claimed tasks.

13. What does the Process List View show?


D D Dc D D

A All process instances available in a process. B All process instances running in a process.

498

All process instances relevant to you. All process instances that are completed.


Unit 8


1.

In order for a process to start, it must have an active version . Which of the following are methods for starting a process?


0 0 0

A Starting processes from the Process Repository B Starting processes by Web services C Starting processes from the Debugger

2. Why does a start event have to be service enabled?


D D D

0

A To accept triggers B To send notifications

c

To handle exceptions

D To start a process from a Web service

3. What is NetWeaver Administrator used for?


D 0 0 c D

A Assigning roles B BPM processes Composite Environment projects

D Manage the proces flows


499


4. _______ is the main overview of deployed processes and software components Choose the correct answer.

D

A Process Management

~

B Process Repository

D D

c

Process Visualization

D Task Management

5. _______ provides detailed information about available processes.


~

A Process Management

D D D

B Process Repository

c


D Task Management

6. _______ provides detailed information about tasks. Choose the correct answer.

D D D ~

A Process Management B Process Repository

c


D Task Management

7. The _______ log allows users to search for exception IDs and time constraint issues.


500

D D

A Business log

~

C J2EE Engine log

D

D Process log

B Connection log



8 . The _ _ _ _ _ _ log provides information about execution times, process outcomes, and individual steps.


D D D ~


c

J2EE Engine log

D Process log

9 . The _ _ _ _ _ _ log contains information about BPM processes and tasks.


~

A Business log

D D D

B Connection log

c

J2EE Engine log

D Process log

10. The _ _ _ _ _ _ log helps analyze problems with Web services and RFC calls.


D

A Business log

~

B Connection log

D D

c

J2EE Engine log

D Process log

11. While the NetWeaver Developer Studio Process Debugger includes the debugging of running process instances, you cannot attach new processes started outside of NWDS.


D

True

~ False


501


12. What does the Universal Worklist provide potential owners?


0 B A list of claimed tasks. D c A list of potential owners. D D The status of claimed tasks. D A A list of available tasks.

13. What does the Process List View show?


D D 0 c D D

A All process instances available in a process. B All process instances running in a process.

502

All process instances relevant to you. All process instances that are completed.


Process and Task Customization and Extension

Lesson 1 Managing Processes with APls

505

519

Exercise 22: Use Analytics to Check a Process

Lesson 2 Managing the Business Process Management lnbox

524

Exercise 23: Configure and Use the Business Process Management lnbox

531

Exercise 24: Use Business Process Management lnbox Custom Attributes

537

Lesson 3 Extending Processes with an SAPUl5 User Interface

542

Exercise 25: Create an SAPUl5 Start User Interface and Start a Process

543

Lesson 4 Solving Recurring Problems with Enterprise Integration Patterns

565

573

Exercise 26: Implement an Aggregator Pattern

UNIT OBJECTIVES

•

Manage processes with APls

•

Check processes and tasks with Analytics

•

Deliver tasks using the Business Process Management lnbox

•

Manage Business Process Management lnbox attributes

•

Extend processes with an SAPUl5 user interface

•

Implement a conditional start pattern

•

Implement a content enricher pattern

•

Implement an aggregator pattern


503

Unit 9: Process and Task Customization and Extension

•

504

Implement a splitter pattern


Unit 9

Lesson 1 Managing Processes with APls

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to manage processes with APls and check processes and tasks with Analytics. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

•


•


Business Process Management APls Table 6: BPM API Use Cases API Purpose

Functionality

Examples

Technology independent UI

Makes Uls capable of executing tasks

APl-based on WS-HT Standard JSP, .NET, Mobile (Android/ iPhone), RIAs (Silverlight), SOAP/Rest

Customized Task List, Universal Worklist, Uls

Makes it possible to customize Customized Universal Worklist screens and technologyUls and features independent customized Universal Worklist fields

Multiple, simultaneous task completion

Produces a productivity gain

Query functionality

Provides rich task and process Current users outstanding and query capabilities completed tasks and processes

Complete, approve, reject multiple tasks at once

While NetWeaver Administrator and the Universal Worklist enables users to interact directly with the BPM system to manipulate tasks and processes, you can work with and configure tasks and processes at a more technical level. The BPM Process and Task Management UI enables the development of applications that interact with the tasks and processes in the BPM system. By accessing the BPM tasks through AP ls, it is possible to build customized task lists and task execution Uls. In addition, you can also utilize additional UI technologies, for example, building a UI for executing tasks from a mobile device.


505


API Architecture

liii

Client Application Mobil•

11

JI

. Not

SOAP

1

JSP

11

IUAs

Rest Cllont Proxy

H TTP/WS·Pollcy SAP NetWeaver7.3

,-----------------------------·----------------------, Custom SOAP I Rest Web service :

.

:

'

·------------------------- ---------------------------

SAP NetWeaver BPM Process Engine

Figure 380: BPM API Architect ure

The BPM APls are available as Enterprise Java Beans (EBJs) and provide access to the processes and tasks of the BPM system. Custom Web services are required to expose A Pis outside of the engine. The APls are dependent on existing and deployed BPM processes including user interfaces, process context, task input, and output mappings. The APls are executed using the currently logged on user context.

API Factory Class and Methods

fiii

Table 7: API Classes Process Step

Manager Class

Locate process details

Process Definition Manager

Start a process

Process Start Manager

Locate the running process instance details

Process Instance Manager

Retrieve and manipulate task instances

Task Instance Manager

The main entry point to the BPM API is the BPMFactory class. From this point, the following managers, which are responsible for the different objects in the BPM system, can be accessed. Process Definition Manager The ProcessDefini tionManager class is the central access point to find and manage deployed process definition objects and provides access to the Process Definition ID. Process Start Manager The ProcessStartManage r class is the central access point for starting processes. It provides input for the Process Definition ID and returns a Process Instance ID. Process Instance Manager

506


Lesson: Managing Processes with APls

The ProcessinstanceManager class is the central access point for retrieving and handling process instances and provides process details. Task Instance Manager The TaskinstanceManage r class is the central access point for retrieving and manipulating task instances. It provides task information including the task list, details, and complete task functionality. Enhancements in the BPM Task API

•

Release a task again after claiming it

•

Delegate a task to someone else

•

Nominate someone to be the new actual owner of a task

•

Change the priority of a task

•

Traverse process and task hierarchies

•

Paging support for inbox queries

API Examples There are several common use cases that can be accomplished using the different BPM API Managers. Process Definition Manager The Process Definition Manager is used to display available BPM process definitions and their details. Use the code below to list active and deployed BPM processes.

ProcessDefinitionManager pdm = BPMFactory . getProcessDefinitionManager (); Set processDefinitions = pdrn.getActiveProcessDefinitions () for (ProcessDefinition def : processDefinitions) { String pDefID = def . getid() . toStr ing() String pNarne = def.ge t Narne(); }

Using the following code, you can search for specific process definitions by vendor (VD), development component (DC), and process name (PN):

ProcessDefinitionManager pdm = BPMFactory . getProcessDefinitionManager(); String vd - " demo.sap . corn" ; String de= "bprn-73-api-bprn"; String pn = " PMC361 PO Request and Approve Process"; ProcessDefinition def= pdm . getActiveProcessDefinition(vd,dc, pn); String pDefID = def . getid() . toStr ing() When you have the Process Definition ID, the Process Start Manager is able to start the specific process definition. Process Start Manager


507


.I Details of Componentfbpm-73- api- bpm (demo.sap.com) ,and Versio•

I./

Pr•c•11esenclT- H

R.. _._ . , ... _ ,_ _ _ _ _ ____.1

I Process Flow II start Process .. I

L-

Figure 381: Task Definition Attributes

The process start manager is used to create a process instance for a given process definition. The process is started through its start event and defines the interface through which data is provided during the process start.

fiii

-

~

0 Start

Define the output m1pp1ng for tlus tle"I

Gentt1I

Outputs or St•n

Ewnt Trigger Outp•Jt M•pplng

• ~perovtPo

"

_

mApprovalCommcnu

St.rt Condrtion I

[Ill Approvtd ID) Ordtrl>ot• OrderlO ProducUO ·

m m

lD PfoductNamt

-

>-

,,

[8) ProductQuan•;.

'

!II $pC(<' ~

Figure 382: Start Event Data

To create a process instance:

1. Use the Process Definition Manager to locate the process definition ID. 2. Find the Start event process definition specified by the process definition ID. 3. Create input data for the Start event. 4. Start the process. The following code shows how to start a process instance with input data: ProcessStartManager psm = BPMFactory . getProcessStartManager(); URI uri = URI.create(processDefini t ionID); Setpse = psm . getProcessStartEvents(uri); ProcessStartEvent psev = pse .it erat or() .next(); DataOb j ect psdo = psm . createDataObjectForStartEv ent(ps e v ); psdo . setString(psdo . getType() psdo . setString(psdo . getType() psdo . setString(psdo . get Type() psdo . setString(psdo.getType() psdo . setString(psdo . getType()

508

. getProperty( " User I D"), "emp lo y ee"); . getProperty( " Product I D"), "lOOABC); . getProperty( " ProductName "), "Apples " ); . getProperty( " ProductQuantity"), 12 ); . getProperty( " Specialinstructions "),



" Rush ! " ) ; URI proce ssinstance i d

psm . startPro c e ss (ps e v , psdo) ;

Process Instance Manager The Process Instance Manager is used to display information about running process instances. The fo llowing code is used to display the name, start date, and end data of a process instance that is specified by its instance ID.

1

PMC361 - BPM A PI Helper Application

ProceSSe$

Process Instance: Process

t~ame:

Tasks

"

Process Instances

Ibpm:J/bpm.sap.comlproce! [PO Request and Approve!

Process Start Date: [28 Jul 2010 13:0921 Gf•!Jl

i

Process End Date: 1t1 PROGRESS

I

I "

Figure 383: Process Instance Information

Processinstance Manage r p i m = BPMFactory . g e tPro c e ss i n stan c eMa n ager(); Proce sslnstance pi= p i m. g e tProce ss i nstance( p ro c e ss i n stan c eI D) ; Date startDate = pi . g e tStartDate() ; Date e n dDate = pi . g e t EndDate(); String name = pi . g e tSub j e ct ();

Task Instance Manager The Task Instance Manager is used to display and manipulate the running process instances. To get a list of tasks running for the current user, use the g e t My TaskAbstracts method . This method returns a set of TaskAbst r act objects. These objects include the task's basic information (ID, name, and current state).

Approve

.--,.......-.., r .. ••

;§puts of Approv•

•

•• •

y

• • !l3 Tasldnput • • IE •

•• • •

UIRequest

Contl!Xt

• • [I] DO_Order ----·--- · • · --·---·

I

ApprovalComment. Approvod

.................. IE · · ........ ···· ........ ·· ·· w; Orde.rOate

.................. l!i ProductJD .................. C!J ProductName

................. ru s.. ............. J:P

Figure 384: Task Input Data

To read t he data that was provided to the task by the process, use the Tas kDe tai l object, which is available in the Task Instance Manager.

© Copyright. All right s reserved.

509


Use the following code to read the input data for tasks of the current logged on user. TaskinstanceManager t im = BPMFact ory.ge t Taski ns tanceManager(); HashSet status= new HashSe t(); status . add(Status . READY); status . add(Status . IN PROGRESS); Set myTasks = t im . getMyTaskAbstracts(status); Iterator i t er = myTasks .it erat or(); while (iter.hasNext()) { TaskAbstract task= i t er.next (); URI taskID = task . getid(); TaskDe tail td = tim . getTaskDetai l( task I D) ; String name= td . getName(); DataOb j ect ido = t im . getTaskDetai l( ta skID) . get inputDataObject(); DataOb j ect order = ido . getDataObject( " Context ") . getDataObject("DO_ Order"); String productID = order . getString( " Product I D"); }

Note: Viewing tasks in READY or IN_PROGRESS states return the tasks that a user sees in the Universal Worklist.

J

Apptove

<) Approve Oefint tht output mapping fer this element

Gene1al

OutplJts of Approve

loopi1>9

Tosk Input Mapping 10utput Ma'!Pl::
[5 DO_Order • [5 TaskOutput

I 1

~

Ci ExcludedOwners ()I PotentialOwners ~ TaskAttributM

• Ci! UIRe
• Iii DO_Ordtr ID ApprovalCommenu l!!l Approved l!!l OrderOat•

Figure 385: Task Output Data

The T askDetail object is also used to set a task's output data. The following code shows how the output data for a task is defined. TaskinstanceManager tm = BPMFactory . get TaskinstanceManager() ; URI uri = URI.create( taski nstance I D); TaskDetail taskDetail = tm . getTaskDetai l( uri) ; DataOb j ect oObj = taskDetai l. getOutputDataObject() ; String ct = "ApproveComplet eEvent "; DataOb j ect ctx = oObj . createDataObject(oObj . get Type() . getProperty(ct) ); DataOb j ect order = ctx . createDataObject(ctx . getType() . getProperty("DO_ Order"));

510



order . setString(order . getType() . getProperty( "Approva l Corrunents "), "OK")); order.se t Boolean(o r der.ge t Type() . getProperty( "App rov ed"), t rue)); trn.cornplete(uri, oObj); Task Lifecycle States Apart from the data, the status of a task can be changed. The Task instance manager also lets you change the status of a task. The following states are available:

Tab le 8: Task Lifecycle States State

Method

User Action

N/A

A new task is created Status changes to and assigned to a user Ready or group of users.

Ready

Result

Reserved

Claim

The task is claimed by a user and removed from the list.

Executes the Claim method, status changed to Reserved

In Progress

Start

The user starts to work on the task and executes the Start method

Status changes to In Progress

Complete

Complete

The task is updated and the Complete method is executed.

Workflow continues to the next step, status changes to Complete.

A task that was created by the BPM system starts in the state READY. When the task is claimed through the API, the task is assigned to the logged on user and goes into the state RESERVED . To show that a user has already worked with a task the state is changed to IN_PROGRESS. Once the task is completed with the appropriate output data, the task state is changed to COMPLETE. The following code shows how to claim, start, and complete a task:

TaskinstanceManager trn = BPMFactory . get Task instanceManager(); URI uri = URI.c reate( taskID); trn . clairn(uri); II - RESERVED trn . start(uri); II - I N PROGRESS • • • •

trn . cornplete(uri, data );

II - COMPLETE

}

Note: To use a BPM API, it is necessary to set a dependency to the tc/bpem/facade.ear development component. This development component is located in the BPEMFACADE software component.

By the BPM Executable Tasks The following tasks can be executed using BPM AP ls:


511


•

Build your own task worklist

•

Build your own task execution UI

•

Start a process

•

Execute a task using SAP StreamWork as collaboration platform

•

Create substitution rules

•

Create your own administration UI

•

Obtain statistics about processes, tasks and events for business process administrators and business task administrators

•

Enable search for process instances based on the process context data reported in the reporting data sources

Define Analytics Requirements SAP NetWeaver comes with several analytical tools which can be used for analyzing the BPM processes and tasks, including the following: •

Analyzing/reporting of the business data in the processes

•

Analyzing/reporting of the process and tasks

Analyzing/Reporting of Business Data During BPM process modeling, it is possible to add reporting activities based on process context (that is, data objects) to automatically generate the reporting data structure. A reporting activity is used to collect data from the process context that can be analyzed. The reporting activity references a reporting data source and indicates where in the process data is gathered for reporting. An input mapping needs to be defined for the reporting activity to specify which data from the process context is collected by the reporting activity. This can be realized by using the SAP NetWeaver Visual Composer, which provides a modeldriven user interface (UI) development tool for transactional and analytical Uls, including the incorporation of voice and mobile interaction into enterprise applications. Analyzing/Reporting of Processes and Tasks The SAPAnalytics Dashboard is used to analyze and report on processes and tasks.

Analytics Launch The Dashboard

512



( Rettesll

U,_ 30 OJY$

loP T&S.k.S

.. ,,..,

In Progress. 111 COml)itteo

<1

Iii comp1e.1ea

In Error

FaUOO

5&7&i10

TrooblesbooOng

0

Ousintu At-tivity

Tasl\o in Emx

~ l.n J=trooress

Enter Purtl!Me R.equesl OS Tesll

Ot23

0

Open

r.

~

..,

Vif:.'11 Details

11

11u11

" " • • • 2

0

••m

•

.. I

'"'

I\ .J .A

~

I

A

I\

Figure 386: The BPMAnalytics Dashboard

With 7.3 EHP 1, you can use the BPM analytical dashboard for multiple purposes. BPMAnalytics has the following capabilities: •

A dashboard for giving an overview of process and task key figures

•

A direct access to key figures for processes

The BPMAnalytics dashboard allows access to statistics for processes and tasks in graphical charts. These statistics are based on various timeframe filters, which can be set by the user. Additionally, the number of processes and tasks in error state. tasks without owner. and escalated tasks are displayed. Also, it is possible to directly navigate to the selected process and task instances in the Manage Processes and Manage Tasks application. To enable the launch of the BPMAnalytics dashboard, the user must be a business administrator for the process and task or a super user with the DISPLAY_ALL permission. The following rules must also be assigned to the user: •

BPEM End User

•

SAP_BPM_Navigation

•

Every User Cole Role

•

Everyone

Note: Only those processes and task definitions for which the user is the administrator are displayed.

To access the BPMAnalytics dashboard, perform the following steps:


513


1. In your internet browser, log on to http: I / : /bpmanalytics.

Note: The dashboard displays the statistics of top processes and tasks for the current date in a graphical format. The business activity graph displays the processes and tasks that are started or created and completed for the current date. The top processes and tasks in the chart imply that the corresponding process definition and task definition have the maximum number of process and tasks instances

2. To view the graphical chart with top processes and their status for a specific period, choose the appropriate time interval from the Select Duration drop-down under the Top Processes chart. 3. To view the name, count and status of the process instance, select any bar on the Top Processes chart. 4. To view all process instances under each status, choose View Details below the Top Processes chart. In the View Details window, select any cell to navigate to the NWA Manage Processes application to view the complete details of the process instances.

Note: Select the process name cell to open all process instances irrespective of their status. Select the individual cell to display only the process instances in the selected status.

5. To view graphical chart with the top tasks and their status for a specific period, choose the appropriate time interval from the Select Duration drop-down under the Top Tasks chart. 6. To view the name, count, and status of the task instance, select any bar on the Top Tasks chart. 7. To view all tasks under each status, choose View details below the Top Tasks chart. In the View Details window, select any cell to navigate to the NWA Manage Tasks application to view the complete details of task instances. Note: Select the process name to open all tasks instances irrespective of their status. Select the individual cell to display the tasks instances in the selected status.

8. To view the business activity graph of the processes and tasks for a particular period, choose time interval from the Select duration drop-down.

514



Note: The business activity graph shows processes that are started and completed, and the tasks that are created and completed.

9. To view the number of process instances in the error state in the NWA Manage Processes application, choose View details next to Processes in Error under Troubleshooting. 10. To view the task instances in the error state in the NWA Manage Tasks application, choose View details next to Tasks in Error under Troubleshooting 11. To view the task instances without an owner in the NWA Manage Tasks application, choose View details next to Tasks without owner under Troubleshooting. 12. To view the escalated task instances in the NWA Manage Tasks application, choose View details next to Task escalated under Troubleshooting. 13. To display the most recent processes and tasks statistics, choose Refresh . 14. To view the statistics of processes in detail, select the Processes tab. 15. To view statistics of tasks in detail, select the Tasks tab. The Process Tab

•

•

-·

-

..,._.

..

-

--

·------------------

Figure 387: BPM Analytics Processes Tab

To access the BPMAnalytics Processes tab, log on to http: // : /bpmanalytics, then go to the Processes tab.

Note: The processes chart displays the top processes and their status for the current date in the graphical format . The time duration chart displays the maximum, minimum, and average t ime taken by top processes from start to end . The top processes in the chart imply that the corresponding process definition has the maximum number of the process instances. Use the following procedures to view processes and details:


515


•

To view processes in a particular state in the Top Processes chart, choose the appropriate status from the Select Status drop-down list.

•

To view processes for a particular time interval in Top Processes chart, choose the appropriate time interval from the Select Duration drop-down list .

•

To view processes in a particular state in the Time Duration graph, choose the appropriate status from the Select Status drop-down list.

•

To view processes for a particular time interval in the Time Duration graph, choose the appropriate time interval from the Select Duration drop-down list.

•

To view details of all the processes in a new window, choose View details below each chart. In the View Details window, select any cell to navigate to the NWA Manage Process application to view the complete details of process instances.

•

To view the number of processes created and completed in a particular time period in the History graph , choose the appropriate time interval from the Select Duration drop-down list.

To display the most recent statistics of processes, choose Refresh . The Task Tab

DASHBOARD

TASKS

PROCESSES

INBOX

[ Re~em ' ToO Ta.sks

.,

Al

Last 30 Days

.,

Durations

Last 30 oays

..,

Open

.,

DeflltlltTMk

Open

Min

If! In Progress

Ml

Ill Completed Fa!tee

5

D 1

2

l

•

5

6

1

1

~

~

i I

-

. ,

I I

!;:0 s "

.li

e >

r

2

0

~

,...

•

le •

z

lS

Time Fron1e

9

•

10

Duration in Days

8

HlstO
~

A\'~

!!I Max

.

I

' ""

>

-

-

I I I

I\

----

Tam Ooen

-

-

.

--

Task:S comote1eo

Figure 388: The BPMAnalytics Tasks Tab

For the Task tab, the same prerequisites as for the dashboard are valid. To access the Tasks tab, log on to http : I /:
/bpma nalytic s . Go to the Tasks tab.

516



Note: The tasks chart displays the top tasks and their status for the current date in graphical format. The time duration chart displays the maximum, minimum, and average time taken by the top tasks from start to end. The top tasks in the chart imply that the corresponding task definition has the maximum number of tasks instances. Use the following procedures to view tasks: •

To view tasks in a particular state in the Top Tasks chart, choose the appropriate status from the Select Status drop-down list.

•

To view tasks for a particular time period in Top Tasks chart, choose the appropriate time interval from the Select Duration drop-down list.

•

To view tasks in a particular state in the Time Duration graph, choose the appropriate status from the Select Status drop-down list.

•

To view tasks for a particular time interval in the Time Duration graph, choose the appropriate time interval from the Select Duration drop-down list .

•

To view the number of tasks opened and completed for a particular t ime period in the History graph, choose the appropriate time interval from the Select Duration drop-down list.

To display the most recent statistics of tasks, choose Refresh. The Analytics Public API for Business Users It is also possible to use the BPM analytics public API (AnalyticsManager, com.sap.bpm.analytics.api) to obtain analytics information for business process administrators and business task administrators. You can display statistics pertaining to processes, tasks, and events. To be able to use this API, the current user must be a business process administrator or/and a business task administrator for any active instance on the system. The archived instances are not taken into account. The statistics provided by this interface includes only the process instances for which the logged in user is assigned as one of the business process administrators and the task instances for which the logged in user is assigned as one of the business task administrators.


517


518


Unit 9

Exercise 22 Use Analytics to Check a Process

Business Example

As a business management process expert, you need to know about the built-in analytical functionalizes of the BPM . In this exercise you will use the BPM Analytics. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you. 1. Start your BPM process. 2. Call the function /bpmanalytics and use the BPM Analytics Dashboard to view and change details about the display of information. 3. Use the Processes tab.

___ -·...._

·-

•

.......,_

••• I I

,,,

·-

-o..--.

"~

• l• &oot

'

..

--

•'

·7'i.

I. I

I\

/\

' •!------------+----+----+-\---~

l • l - - - - - - - - - - - - t ' C -.... ' --l--' ''\--- - 1 1------------:;~'-~',----7'--T-'-~/' \ I \ / ' -...._


4. Use the Tasks tab.

-

•

·-

--

··-

---·

--

C..-111-

·-----------------·1-------------; ,,,,__ ·''- r - - - - - - - .

_________________ _ ' ;

j:!------------+-'-\------.·

-

••

-

... •a.

--·

$'.

...

.......

\

••

Figure 391: BPM Analytics Tasks Tab


519

Unit 9 Solution 22 Use Analytics to Check a Process

Business Example

As a business management process expert, you need to know about the built-in analytical functionalizes of the BPM . In this exercise you will use the BPM Analytics. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you. 1. Start your BPM process. a) Start your BPM process using the Process Repository. For instructions on performing this step, see the exercise Start a Business Process from the Process Repository. 2. Call the function /bpmanalytics and use the BPM Analytics Dashboard to view and change details about the display of information. a) In your internet browser, enter the following url: http :/ / nwktdcOO. wdf . sap . c o rp : 50000 / bpmanalytics The BPM Analytics screen appears displaying an overview of all processes, tasks, and troubleshooting (as shown in the figure entitled BPM Analytics Dashboard. This screen is realized using U15). w

i.V......- . ....

----

DASHBOARD ""'•~••r•

-••>;•

·-

_................ ... ..

_

I

3

··--

2 0 4 0

u

•

.......

,.__

---

-

t;O:."•

1

2

•

-·

--

' ' __ ,,._·--...i

••

-u

•

.......

:

:$'••$

4 -

•I

'

I

I

I

,I

I

"

\

"

.. - - -- .. .. .. - -. ..fio··-. .. ... .. - - 'I

/X,

--~ ·-~·-

\

\

...... ,"

•

o-

Figure 389: BPM Analyt ics Dashboard

b) In the Dashboard tab, choose the fo llowing areas and change the time-related entries within them as you wish (choose Refresh after changes): •

520

Top Processes



•

Top Tasks

•

Business Activity (lower right-hand corner)

•

Change the values in the View Details links

c) In the Troubleshooting area (lower left-hand corner), choose View Details for one of the four rows. In the browser, a new tab opens--the Manage Tasks: Task Instances screen. 3. Use the Processes tab. OA"-'!l"-..."1:

PROCESSES ,... ~~

..,.,,._...

1...001

-

•

---G:

--

-

.

·-

·-·

.

·-... ....

t

0$

•

:~

1

11

I

1:····· ......

--

Jf

0...-h -

=

-

-·-

, •t - - - - - - - - - - - -.,.------I\ : ·t----------------1+ - - - -f-\ - , . . - - - I \ ~ Jf-------------1--\----+-+---•

/ \ I \ 1· 1 - - - - - - - - - - - l - - - + --+ -\----

- - - .. - .. - - - .. -

-- --

• t----------~~'-~\,.----7/--\-\----,7"'~ \ I \ ............_

..

~

~

.. ..

~


a) Choose the Processes tab. b) Change the entries in the available fields and check the information displayed. Changing the field entries in this tab allows you to tailor the view by various attributes, such as the current state of the process (In Progress , Completed, or In Error). 4 . Use the Tasks tab. ,.

n .. •..n·w:.i

04•-

P11
TASKS

I ·~. ..

___ ·-·-...,

1"11Vx

•

,...II

' I

I

'I

'

.

·-

'

-

··-··--

J_ •

u

•

~-..

••

J

n

•

''

•

-

·

---

. ~.

--

'. ' Cw-loo-. ,...........

., .

-

•1-------------..---------

i:,______________,/.____,,\_______

l •l-----------,.i'~ ' ------• I \ /

\

.t::::::;:::;;;;;;:::;;;:;;;;;;::;;;:;;;;;;:;;;;:;;~ ..=::-=-·~ ·;;;;;;:;;;;:;;;;;;;;:~~~ '= •* »W ... .,. ,,., •+• ..._ •& ...

••

.,.

to»

••

1• s

...

·~·

Uflo

Figure 391: BPM Analytics Tasks Tab

a) Choose the Tasks tab. b) Change the entries in the available fields and check the information displayed. Changing the entries in this tab allows you to tailor the information displayed for the process tasks.


521


c) Check to determine of any of your tasks are in an error state.

522




•


•



523

Unit 9 Lesson 2 Managing the Business Process Management In box

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to manage the attributes of the BPM lnbox and use it to deliver tasks. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson , you will be able to: •


•


Business Process Management lnbox Requirements

OPEN TASKS (8)

1!11 !·-5

.., (2r>en Tasks

, AH Tas"Ks Re

"

T3S.k Thlt

.• • En!« Puttbase ReQuest 05 TaSk • •• En'.er Purmase ReQuesi 05 Tas~ •• En~er Purchase Request OS Task

.•'

•

En:er Purc.hase Reques& OS TaS1<

•' En=er Pvrcnase Requesi 0$ T;i$ ' •;,. E~er Putehale Requesc 05 Ti!s.\(

F

J

Cre-auon Dai.

•

OUe Date

SUUUI

All< 22, 201'

Ready

Ap<7, 2014

Ready

Ape 4, 20t•

Re.;dy

AtJf 4, 2014

ReseNed

"""4. 2014

Rti
"""4, 201d

""'""

~ Ell
Ap<4. 2014

•~

""" 4 2014

Eteef Purcnase ReQutse ~ Ta&\I

o,

.... On Behilirf Ot

Rtady

Rtacy

-----

o.

P11<>111Y

Figure 392: The BPM lnbox

The BPM inbox provides easy, simplified access to the business outcomes of BPM processes. The BPM in box is a central workplace for a business user to view and perform actions on tasks from the BPM system, including the following:

524

•

View a task

•

Claim a task

•

Release the task which is reserved for you


Lesson: Managing the Business Process Management lnbox

•

Complete a task

The BPM inbox is accessed through the following url: http: //:/bpminbox

Business Process Management lnbox Configuration Configuring BPM lnbox Users The BPM lnbox requires additional administration and portal roles, comparable to the roles used in the BPM . The following table lists the administration and portal roles used in BPM lnbox to view and work on the corresponding tasks: Table 9: BPM lnbox Roles Role Category

Role

Description

Comment

Administration UME Role

U nifiedl nboxUserRole

Unified InboxUserRole enables the user to access the tasks and their details within a BPM lnbox application.

Data source: UME database

Portal Role

com.sap.bpem.Endus er

BPEM End User role enables the user to work on the tasks and task execution user interface within a BPM lnbox application.

Data source: portal role

The following procedure is used to configure users for BPM lnbox so they can access and work on the tasks: 1. In your browser, enter the following url: http: I /: /nwa to open SAP NetWeaver Administrator 2. Log on to SAP NetWeaver with administrator credentials. 3. Choose Configuration ---+ Identity Management. 4. Select the search criteria User, then enter the user name (or part of the user name) to which you want to assign the role. 5. Choose Go. 6. Select the user or group from the table and choose the Assigned Roles tab. 7. Choose Modify. Purpose

Search Criteria

User Role

Accesstasksinthelnbox

UME Database

UnifiedlnboxUserRole

Work on tasks

Portal Roles

com.sap.bpem.Enduser

Managing Substitution Rules in the BPM lnbox


525


It is possible to enable substitution in BPM lnbox to either nominate a user to whom you can assign your tasks or to take over tasks from other users in case of planned absence or during an emergency. The planned and unplanned scenarios can be managed by substitution rules. To view all substituted tasks for a user, choose the Tasks Assigned To Me option from the A// Tasks drop-down list. If more than one user has assigned tasks to the user, who checks substitutions, it is possible to select the user who has nominated the substitute by selecting the On Behalf Of drop-down list. As a substitute, the tasks displayed in the inbox are the tasks that are in Ready status in the assignee's inbox. To work on a task, the task is to be selected, then Claim is to be chosen. When a task is claimed , the task moves from the Task Assigned To Me list to the My Tasks list and its status changes to Reserved in your inbox. On refreshing the task list, the task is no longer visible in the in box of the assignee or other substitutes. To assign a task, on that currently the user is working on, to a substitute, the task has to be selected and to be released. As an assignee, when a task is assigned, the status of the task changes from Reserved to Ready. On refreshing the task list, the task is visible in the inbox of your substitutes. Creating Substitution Rules 0

Strosll.'linon ru'.e crea:eo

MY SUBSTllUTES

X

I AM SUBSTITUTING

New; Active

s.nce All' 22, 2014

Approvff05 Apiiro~·e.JOS is currently feteiving

yolJf tasks

Un1i l\llr Tl 20 14

c.a on I

•

Figure 393: Substitution Ru les

To create substitution rules, use the following procedure: 1. From the Settings icon, click the drop-down arrow and select the Manage Substitution Rules option. 2. In the My Substitutes screen, choose New to create a substitution rule. 3. In the Create Substitution Rule screen, enter or choose a user in the Substitute field 4. If you are unavailable due to planned leave, set Automatic Forwarding to On. The substitution rule is displayed in the Inactive section of the I Am Substituting tab of the substitute until the current date. The rule is activated on the current date and the tasks are displayed in the Active section of the substitute's inbox. 5. If you are unavailable due to unexpected absence, create the substitution rule in advance and set Automatic Forwarding to Off. The substitution rule is displayed in the Inactive section of the I Am Substituting tab of your substitute. To receive your tasks in the task list, the substitute must activate the rule by choosing On . Enabling Substitution Rules To enable substitution rules, following the procedure below:

526



1. Choose Manage Substitution Rules . 2. In the My Substitutions tab, view the rules you have created.

Note: The Active section displays the substitution rules that are within the current date range. The Inactive section displays the substitution rules you have created in the past or for a future date. If the rule is created for a later date, the rule moves to the Active section on the start date. If the start date of the rule has exceeded the current date, the rule is no longer active and the status changes to Outdated.

3. To stop your substitute from receiving your tasks, disable the substitution rule by choosing the Off button, 4. To delete a substitution rule, choose the Delete icon. 5. In the I Am Substituting tab, you can view the substitution rules created by other users who have nominated you as a substitute. The Inactive section displays the substitution rules which you have either not accepted or which are not within the current date range . The rule moves to the Active section and you start receiving tasks of your assignee in your inbox. To accept or to take over the rule from the Inactive section, choose On. The rule moves to the Active section and you start receiving the tasks of your assignee in your in box.

Different lnboxes for Task Delivery Operating Tasks You can view the tasks that are assigned to you and perform one of the following operations at a time: •

View at task

•

Claim a task

•

Release the task which is reserved for you

•

Complete a task

To view operating tasks, perform the following steps: 1. Log on to your BPM lnbox at the following url: http: I / : /nwa Your open tasks are displayed in the BPM lnbox by default. To view tasks in other categories such as My Completed Tasks, My Overdue Tasks, or My Escalated Tasks, select the required option from the Task Selection drop-down list 2 . To view the task details, choose the task name from the task list table. 3 . To view a specific number of rows in the task list table, choose Settings from the toolbar and select the appropriate number of rows from the Table Row Settings dialog box.


527


4. To claim a task which is assigned to you (and complete it or release it to another user) choose a task in the task list. The Claim, Open, or Release option is enabled or disabled based on the status of the selected task. The detailed information on each task status and possible actions are explained in the following table: Table 10: Task Status Actions Task Status

Possible Action

Status Change

Ready

You can claim the task

Reserved

Reserved

You can claim the task

Ready

You can complete the task

Completed

Completed

No operations possible

No status change

In Progress

You can release the task

Ready

You can complete the task

Completed

Note: You can also execute actions on multiple tasks that have the same status. To do so, select multiple tasks (Ctrl+Select) and choose the appropriate action button. For example, to complete multiple tasks, select two or more tasks from the task list table and choose Open . The task execution user interface is opened with multiple tasks. You can navigate to a specific task using the previous and next navigation icon and perform required action and complete the tasks. To filter the tasks, choose the Filter option and choose the required criteria.

Managing Tasks with BPM lnbox You can manage tasks in the following ways: •

Share a task with other users who can contribute to its execution. Task sharing allows the owner of the task to invite contributors to work on a particular task instance. Every user can be a contributor, except the owner. If any user is invited for a task contribution, that user will get the task in their task list in the BPM lnbox. If they open the task, they see who the actual owner of the task is and the task description, if any.

528

•

Delegate the task (if you want to completely hand over the task responsibility to another user).

•

Put back the task to the task owner if you are not able to complete it or do not have the resources to complete it.

•

Put back the task to the task owner if you are not able to complete it or do not have the resources to complete it.

•

View task details and process the task.

•

Add and download attachments in the form of documents or URLs.



•

Add notes that are visible on all process levels. Depending on the availability that is set, you can see all previously added notes along with details such as who added the note and on what date and time.

Deleting a Task To delete a task, use the following procedure: 1. In the BPM lnbox, choose the task you want to delegate. 2. In the Task Execution screen, open the Actions menu and choose Delegate . 3. In the Delegate dialog box, enter the name of the user you want to delegate to the individual task. To find a particular user name, enter the first name of the user in the User field and choose Find. In the search results, choose the user and choose Go. The applicable user is automatically entered in the Delegate dialog box. 4 . In the Delegate dialog box, choose OK. Once you have delegated a task, you cannot complete this task. The delegate is now the owner of the task. Only this individual task is delegated to the user nominated as the delegate. Putting Back a Task To put back a task. in the Task Execution screen, open the Actions menu and choose Put Back. The task is put back and the Task Execution screen closes. Managing Attachments To manage attachments, use the following steps: 1. In the Task Execution screen, open the View menu and choose Attachments. 2. From the Attachments area, in the Add menu, choose whether you want to add a file or a url. 3. If you want to attach a f ile, choose Browse and select the file from a file directory. 4. If you want to add a title to the file, specify the title in the Title field. 5. To make the selected file available only for a particular task, select the Only for members of this task option. 6. To make the selected file available for entire process, select the For all involved users of embedding process option. 7. Choose OK. 8. To download an attachment, choose the title link. 9 . To delete an attachment. open the context menu of the icon next to the attachment title and choose Delete . Adding Notes To add notes, use the following steps: 1. In the Task Execution screen, choose the View menu, then choose Notes.


529


2. Choose Add.

Note: You can customize your note by text by using the formatting button. You cannot delete notes.

3. To make the selected file available only for a particular task. select the Only for members of this task option. 4. To make the selected file available for entire process, select the For all involved users of embedding process option.

530


Unit 9

Exercise 23 Configure and Use the Business Process Management lnbox

As a business management process expert, you need to know about the built-in management in box of the BPM as part of the BPMANALYTICS transaction. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number assigned to you by your instructor. 1. Check if Administrator## and Requestor## have the necessary authorizations. In order to access the lnbox tab, authorizations must be extended . First, check if the roles for the users Administrator## and Requestor## include those in the following table. If they do not, include them. Role Category

Role

Description

Comment

Administrator UME Role

UnifiedlnboxUserRole UnifiedlnboxUserRole Data source: UME database enables the user to access the tasks and their details within a BPM lnbox application.

Portal Role

Data source: portal com.sap.bpem.Endus BPEM End User role er enables the user to role work on the tasks and task execution user interface within a BPM lnbox application. BPEM End User role enables the user to create substitution rules and forward tasks only to those users who have BPEM End User role.

2. Use the lnbox tab.


531

Unit 9 Solution 23 Configure and Use the Business Process Management lnbox

As a business management process expert, you need to know about the built-in management inbox of the BPM as part of the BPMANALYTICS transaction. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number assigned to you by your instructor. 1. Check if Administrator## and Requestor## have the necessary authorizations. In order to access the lnbox tab, authorizations must be extended . First, check if the roles for the users Administrator## and Requestor## include those in the following table. If they do not, include them. Role Category

Role

Description

Comment

Administrator UME Role

UnifiedlnboxUserRole UnifiedlnboxUserRole Data source: UME database enables the user to access the tasks and their details within a BPM lnbox application.

Portal Role

Data source: portal com.sap.bpem.Endus BPEM End User role er enables the user to role work on the tasks and task execution user interface within a BPM lnbox application. BPEM End User role enables the user to create substitution rules and forward tasks only to those users who have BPEM End User role.

a) In your internet browser, enter the following url: http : I / nwktdcOO . wdf . sap . c o rp : 50000 / useradmin b) If requested, log on as user Administrator## .

532



c) On the Search screen, in the Search Criteria field, choose User , and in the second field enter Administrator##. Choose Go.

I

welcome System Administrator01

I

Identity ~"nagerrent

~

Z'llJB

l/J

II nport II COnfiguration II Consistency Oleck I

Search Search Criteria: !User

...-1IAI Date Som:es

IAdlllnistrator01I.

~ ~ I Advanced Search I

I Create User II Copy to New User 11 I Delete 11 I Lkllock II Lock II Generate New Password 11 I Export I

Figure 394: Search for the User Administ rator##

d) Double-click the line with the result. The details for the user appear. e) In the Details of User Administrator## area, choose the Assigned Roles tab. Details or user Aelmlnistrator01

I11~lod•t I 11s.ve Ic-.. I Generol i>lonretlon

Account. hfometion

Conte
Addiional nlorn11tion

-

Assigned Roles

Assigned GrOUP
I

Assigned Rotes searc.h Criteria:

R'Tic.,...

Nome

.§)

i'.,} g') g') i'.,}

IA• Data Sources · I

o

surch Re
•

CQ2J

0Mtion

Oeta SOurce

NN....S\EffiACMN

MVA_Sl.fl:RACMN

U\€Dotabese

ped:ponaLcontenL'e-"ery_user1generaYeuJcle

SWid!lrd User Role

~IRoie

J

U\€Dot8bes•

SFM.._Flll_Access_ROLE SA.P_JAVA_WS_AC:MN_B!Z

SA.P_JAVA_WS_ACMN_BIZ

l.t.E Dot8beso

SA.P_fR1..SuperOisplay

Ne1Weaver BR.IA<*mlstra!or Read Only

Lt.E Database

I

Figure 395: Assigned Roles

f) In the Name and Description columns, search by scrolling the two roles above. g) To add the two additional roles, choose Modify. h) In the Availalable Roles area, in the Search Criteria field , choose All Data Sources for the first field. In the second field, enter Unifiedinbo xUs erRo l e. Choose Go.

Note: The entries in this search field are case sensitive.

i) Choose the displayed entry, then choose Add.


533


liii

Available Roles Search Criteria: Al Deta Sources

r

lib

P

Narre

~

UnifiedlnboxUserRole

.i.

.... Unifiedlnbo.xUserRole

Go

Description

Oeta Source

D

ut.E Oetabase

n Figure 396: The Additional Role Unified lnboxUser Role

j) Search for the second role (com.sap.bpem.Enduser) and add it to the assigned roles. k) Choose Save .

liii

Assigned Roles Search Crite ria:

lib

r

IA• Dela Sources · I

P... Narre

~ 11 ~ I~

.i.

I

Description

Go

I El

Dela Source

SAP_Xl_OB/B..OPER_J2EE

ut.E Delabase

uoot_TterN

Ut.E Delabase

SAP_X1_82B_AOlvlNISTR. ..

UtvE Oelabase

~ UnifiedlnboxUserRole

LM: Oelabase

~ pcd:portaJ_conlentlcoms ... BRM End User

R:>rtal Role

0

'~

IRem:ive I Figure 397: The Two Additional Roles Assigned to t he User

I) Repeat steps c through k for the user Requestor##. 2. Use the lnbox tab. a) Switch back to the tab containing BPM Analytics, then choose the lnbox tab. b) If requested , log on as Requester## to see your tasks. SAP

Roo R.ll!-0

Hl't.1 lriOoJ

INBOX OPEN TASKS (1)

T '· 'ti T..alillt

!

~t!'l'l«'-.11t~OClt~•

. .......

-

0.

o.

m" ,. Figure 398: BPM lnbox

c) Choose a task to view details for it.

534



oo..:

~u•itu•~~

Ooo!oer.

fl~I00,119n

51- !11?Joi1•" P••r,,ir, kl!
Alt.cl-: o

Pio~:

l'..n11•i•OfiltlM"PoMOO

~

o-

Ta:lc ApplkMion

'

..

Figure 399: Details of a Task

d) If requested, enter your data and choose Confirm. e) Log off as user Requestor## and repeat the same steps with user Administrator## .

Note: A notification may appear asking you to change the compatibility mode in Internet Explorer. If this occurs, change to a Chrome browser. This can be found under Start~ All Programs~ Google Chrome .


535


Business Process Management lnbox Custom Attributes Depending on the products, custom attributes can be set and delivered/transferred in the business processes and then used in the inbox for additional purposes, like assignment, sort, or display. These attributes are to be assigned in a task and mapped depending on the business data. In the BPM lnbox, these attributes can be used with the Filter button.

Note: Display of the custom attributes requires a release higher than 7.40, SP03

536


Unit 9

Exercise 24 Use Business Process Management lnbox Custom Attributes

Business Example

As the business management process expert, you want to use custom attributes in your BPM inbox in BPMAnalytics. In this exercise you assign custom attributes to your BPM inbox. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you. 1. Set custom attributes for your product, PO_Product_##, according to the following table: Field

Value

Name

started

Label

started at

Type

string (not changeable)

2. Use custom attributes in the BPM lnbox.


537

Unit 9 Solution 24 Use Business Process Management lnbox Custom Attributes

Business Example

As the business management process expert, you want to use custom attributes in your BPM inbox in BPMAnalytics. In this exercise you assign custom attributes to your BPM inbox. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you. 1. Set custom attributes for your product, PO_Product_##, according to the following table: Field

Value

Name

started

Label

started at

Type

string (not changeable)

a) In NetWeaver Developer Studio, in the Composite Designer perspective, choose your product, PO_Product_##. b) Choose Process ~[Local development] pm_product_##/pr/pm Modeling~ Tasks.

~

Process

c) Double-click the task Enter Purchase Request##Task. The Enter Purchase Request## modeling tab opens. d) On the modeling tab, choose the Attributes and Actions tab. e) In the Attributes and Actions tab, in the Custom Attributes area, enter the values shown in the table in step 1. f) Add a new line containing the default parameters by choosing Add.

Note: You can change the default parameters by Name and Label directly in the line by double clicking on the default parameters.

g) Choose Edit to create a new expression.

538



The Expression Editor appears.

liii

Attributes and Aciioos

>/H,lt~

,.,......., .,_ ......... ..,_ ,,....., "•"" ..........

.,,,.,.«t... l:it f'

~'

:.I

~ ~~tkll

.!!!!....

·-

....~

'" I

ilM#MM

J

iii:;.~~

:.I

~

l!Ot 11.l

. I I

I

~lh·

.W•fr1!·~:n-.,l(lJIO}~I~

?

•o,

Figure 400: Add a New Attribute

h) In the Expression Editor, enter (Task.Attributes/activationTime) cast as xsd: string, then choose OK. i) Choose Save. j) From the context menu of PO_Product_##, choose Deploy. In the Product built required dialog box, choose Build and Deploy. The successful deployment can be checked on the Infrastructure Console tab. 2. Use custom attributes in the BPM lnbox. a) Start your process using the Process Repository. The steps for starting a process using the Process Repository were described in a previous . exercise. b) In your internet browser, enter the following url: http: I /nwktdcOO. wdf. sap. corp: 50000 / bpminbox c) Log in with your user name (Requestor##) and password. In the lnbox, your task Enter Purchase Request## Task appears.

SAP

~1t1>u

'"' 01~1"·J~1'T•

!

INBOX OPEHTASl
m= . ....

.. Oan l atb

T ,,

0.

o. ~

...~1111111

~ EfWF\l
Figure 401: The BPM lnbox


539


d) As shown in the figure entitled Custom Settings, choose the Filter View icon (point 1), then choose your task in the Task Type field (point 2). The custom attribute you set is started (point 3).

liii

OPEN TASKS (1)

mlei ...,

,.,nra;m

2

1 8 1~

Zl!ll

v

'

V!le..-tSfl•

...,...,

v

·~

.Cl6. ,.

...

pm

1 g ,,

"'

1

R.t~r.N

Tcdw Lff110.,

TOdtr

liltdl.lm H:g~

"'Pi'rigrt;$

U$11SO;J,.::

M;.CJ$(lflf,l;

L"!))0¥ts

Ne:•300tt*

Ret':\o

\'
3 b

!ask r1111

!:

..... ..

$lMdll

£1D:1P~1t11.-,eP.r11u~~O)·~~ lti14·01·14-t03i·~.s1 ~nt ;o

0.

.,._..,.

•

......

Ne•1~

.....

o.

,1;11 ~·. lo·.~

Figure 402: Custom Settings

Note: Display of the custom attributes requires a release higher than 7.40, SP03 .

540




•


•



541

Unit 9

Lesson 3 Extending Processes with an SAPUIS User Interface

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to create an SAPUl5 Start User Interface and start a process. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson , you will be able to:

•


Process Start User Interface Development Tasks SUPUl5 technology can be used to start BPM processes. In general, a process can be started using a UI created with SAPUl5, or the SAPUl5 functionality uses the OData service. It is possible to consume a WSDL by an Ajax call, but it is recommended that a rest service be used for calling the WSDL. The BPM OData service enables simplified access to BPM task data with a custom user interface based on a modern Web technology like SAPUl5. SAPUl5 supports several data sources, such as XML and OData. The UI controls of a view are connected to a data source with a data binding, so that the controls are updated automatically whenever the application data is changed. A model is provided by SAPUl5 for each supported data source. If OData is the data source, the model instance is called ODataModel. The ODataModel enables the binding of controls to data from OData services. The constructor of the ODataModel has the service URL as a parameter to connect itself to the OData service. Requests to the service to fetch data are created automatically according to the data bindings defined in the UI controls.

542


Unit 9

Exercise 25 Create an SAPUIS Start User Interface and Start a Process

Business Example

As the business process management expert, you need to implement user interfaces (Uls) into your business process. In this exercise, you create a UI using the U15 technology. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number assigned to you by your instructor. Note: In this exercise, you use the PO_Enhanced_## product, used in exercises 6, 9, and 18.

1. Import the service interface Sl_CustomerData as a WSDL file from the Y: \ \ TrainingSetup shared folder using the data in the following table to complete the Service Reference dialog box. Field

Value

Name

SI StartProcess

Description

Start Process

2. Create the process StartProcesswithU15_## . 3. Create a message trigger named Start SI StartPro cess .

- -

4. Implement the data object DO_Data. 5. Assign the pool administrator. 6. Test the process using the Process Repository. 7. Copy the source to PO_Enhanced_## /ui/web . 8. Customize the file class sapbpm.imp.SAPBPMOperations . 9. Change the service call in StartProcess_PO_##.html.


543


Jii

15 28:08 28 01.2014 c~~~ , ;&p~~W:flCl~.VtUP \

V.4111:~ ~~~~

it(tountcyfield.9etV1lue()

~~ u~1

'

~~p.u&. ~...,Lc . V~l~C~ ~~~C . VCl«Ul~ ' ' '

(counec7tielci.prop (•valueState", sap.ui .core.Value.State .trrorj :l

else et.eult) ; ) else (

11

!~ r.d the data to tbe f« ade here

$ .getJSCtl(host_and_port+"I po_e.ntha.."l(:ed_00...ui"i."eb/procesi_00/ sttttt?f irstMarre• "•f ir:t.Na::oeFie Jd .qetValue I)+"' lestffame• ''+la:JUitmtrie ld. //q< t ~a. llboerdOstaADdS
¥a.c d.&3hboardData •( trequestld

:daea.r~ ~tl~,

la.st!l&r!: : data. i&StNarre,tirsttJAllle :
city : dAta.c1ty,eountry : ctata.ct1unc.ry,:ipCod.e: : dat1. z1p(Ode, ered.ltLiru.t : dlta.eredltl.imit,

Figure 415: Changing the Service Call

10. Change the file web.xml to match your project settings. 11. Change the file web-j2ee-engine.xml to match your project settings. 12. Add the external Lib com.google.gson.Gson . 13. Add dependencies 14. Build and deploy. Change to the Composite Designer perspective and build and deploy the product

PO Enhanced ##. 15. Configure the inbound communication on NWA.

_,, r1a1 •.-·-...-..i. .-..-

11~«.?211111101•

....

ll;J

.........

~·*°'"

u '--~~l:U

,, _

l e...i-t~]tJ

y

--

4 "'"""'•~orl

™

r•..,.-.cs;,.... 1

. --·

............ .....

·-··-

...:.i...·.. -t11:~....

._ ...-.... ...........

~

~.-

-· -· .. m

~,,WNJ.T_"'O'U

~~' "'(11'\f

~

::..P_Jlln,U..T_.a'U

"'...-_ --

-ri-~

-

ai....-

.....

-J

Figure 427: Configuring Inbound Communications

16. Create the role Requesto r xx and assign it to the user Requestor_##.

-

Save all changes .

544



17:14;50 28.01.20 14

I

Welcome System AdministratorOO

I t!en"Y •11111!9•"""' II "PM I~Ieon -11g -ur ~a= ,.,., "'"''ll=eons =;,=1enc=y=01=.. =~=-1 search

!Rote

SearehCrlterlo:

mEnter

· l~!A~•llel=•~S..="~"=es~_•,.I_____~ ~

8 $earch. P8"8mefer and choose Go

Details

11 ' ._y l I (S.ve II Cencel I General Information 1

/

I ....,.,_

~ I

~r------------===..

-"'"°""

O..trWon;

u-..

Ass i;ned Ae-tlons

~lf!!gU!!--'-""-~oo~---------~

Non-e< •

°""

Assi;nec1 Gfoop$

I)

Figure 428: Role Requester_## assigned to user Requester_## ( 1)

,, ~' 1.# 280120 14 !W'52~1~ 1 ~·11 '--X
H«•

s... ...,c.i...11: !11:;to

· Jl:.Ut11o!>S.U
~

•1'

-

lo - •I I ~-1 i1JEI ti

~-l'rs-

""' 1 -r l

--·

.. O.otf1*11

m-··.wc.•po:---·-•Cll>

~ 1 c-e1 J

~-~

""'..-.0~

.!....:.~~:I ....

~~

I

"""'~'"~-~'"'

.A•oilliekU.•n

- ................_ -· --- _

....~ll CtilHio:

'b

l tlo

a.....,,_., 6 """'~ a ~"'t(I

~a ~·Ill!»

~

.

Tw

°*"""'••

·~--......

&l«r~b

A$J.1Qn"l

EE

--~-

\ll•••

........ ·-·

SNIUlClbrtiJI I

"

'b. ,.... d

l

__ .-

• l

....

I

~1 .

°"""'~··

U4Qot"'-•

:"-W I

Figure 429: Role Requester_## assigned to user Requester_## (2)

17. Test the website.


545

Unit 9 Solution 25 Create an SAPUIS Start User Interface and Start a Process

Business Example

As the business process management expert, you need to implement user interfaces (Uls) into your business process. In this exercise, you create a UI using the U15 technology. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number assigned to you by your instructor. Note: In this exercise, you use the PO_Enhanced_## product, used in exercises 6, 9, and 18.

1. Import the service interface Sl_CustomerData as a WSDL file from the Y: \ \ TrainingSe t u p shared folder using the data in the following table to complete the Service Reference dialog box. Field

Value

Name

Sl_StartProcess

Description

Start Process

a) Choose PO_Enhanced_##[vendor##.org] ~Process~ [LocalDevelopment]poenhanced_##/pr/pm ~Process Modeling~ Service Interfaces. b) From the context menu, choose Import WSDL . c) In the WSDL Import dialog box, choose Remote location/File system, then choose Next. d) In the WSDL URL Access screen, choose Browse. In the Open dialog box, chose the Y drive. e) Choose TrainingSetup

~

SAPBPM ~ Sl_StartProcess.wsdl, then choose Open.

f) Choose Finish. 2. Create the process StartProcesswithU15_## . a) Choose PO_Enhanced_##[vendor##.org] ~Process~ [LocalDevelopment]poenhanced_##/pr/pm ~Process Modeling~ Processes. From the context menu of Processes, choose New Process. b) In the New Process dialog box, enter the following data:

546


Lesson: Extending Processes with an SAPUIS User Interface

Field

Value/ Action

Name

StartProcesswithUlS ##

Create a pool with the following name and lanes

Select

Name (1st lane)

PoolAdministrator

Name (2nd lane)

LaneAdministrator

Project

[LocalDevelopment]po_enhanced_##/pr/ pm (should be pre-filled)

-

c) Choose Finish. The StartProcesswithU15 modeling area opens d) If the StartProcesswithU15 modeling area is not open, choose PO_Enhanced_## ~Process Modeling~ Processes. Double-click StartProcesswithU15 ##. e) In the process flow, delete the connection between the Start and End elements. To do so, choose Delete Connection from the context menu of the connection. f) Add a timer object named Intermediate Timer ##.

-

g) Choose the Intermediate Timer object, then choose the Properties tab. h) Choose the Timer Configuration view. i) Select Use an offset relative to timer creation time. j) In the Offset+ field , enter 2, and in the second field select Minutes .

I •I

i

"C Properties 0

1:3"

.'.l:S Relations ] 11; Problems} 0

Deploy View Console

l~ Wrastructtrre C011Sole l

J

Intermediate Timer

t:".:'====-1 General

0

Off
Timer Configuration Ev
...::..C.:....'==-'----1

I_

Use "" clfsel relotivo to timer creatiQn timo

0

+

[£

J IMir-..te(•) El

use expression

DefW>e the time alter v.llich ti>< time< ls triOQertd ('n millisecond<) Expres~on:

I

~----------

Figure 403: Configurat ion of the Timer

k) Using the speed buttons, drag a connection between the Intermediate Timer and the end event. The results appear as shown in the figure entitled The New Process.


547


liii I

,-

'

...!Sa I St rt

I~ lntermedbte Tim...

I~

I

End

I:

.:

Figure 404: T he New Process

I) Choose Save . 3. Create a message trigger named Start SI StartPro cess.

- -

a) Choose the !Start event. In the Properties tab, choose Event Trigger. Choose the Messages radio button. From the context menu, choose New Message . b) In the Name field, choose New, then enter Start SI StartProcess .

- -

c) Choose Next. d) In the New Message Trigger dialog box. in the Service field, select the service interface SI StartPro cess.

-

e) Choose Finish. The newly entered information can be reviewed at two different places--at the Start Event, or by choosing the Event Triggers---+ Messages---+ Start_Sl_StartProcess branch in the Composite Explorer. f) Choose Save.

liii

-

•uw:J

,g sv:~....'"1! ~fbCJe

.

~

Ci! (louiDe<1el~om) 1>. wtZ>Jil'.e!> • eui.-l(;(J( •

... ·-

..

,,,_,

.. --

.

odfle QllO!f
El.umd St'Mcff

~.Jft~~lfl'~

Dxl.ft,tlft/IOW

Grm~,

J PO..~,.OO("'l'!fllbOO.o:}

0 """

c;l !W
B

·Zif (l«t.iOeY~ir:ftJ po_~~-®"i\ft Iii ~ CO'l'::M:y

Ef'l~ K:tl'.c:

..............

em ~~

9..-1.'! Pi'Ufl~

--

i ~-

• Setting'

~t~"l

0

http:lf~->;.qm>~~WO~d'X\9~ •:1

o.r.;,,. ~•:Mf\ • J ~ lt(tr'lQ lfl'd ooer
--

z ~~W!S rasi.s

""'"*"'

9'9 E_..-t ~ S:Q> we,~

@} SWt,.st~~ ltO•.t1~

jSJ_st~s l~,,SWtPl~011;1>'!'l.'Sl"'~QIJ:)

e w ~eitJ1Lev..t-e.t.e_1'1iJl'.m

-e st;)!1,.sa_si~n;cc•u •• ..; csca·~ ~ ~t.tq~SGo.rtiH

i& 11,U,Sets ~(S F~W

ID

J2B ~, ty~

{+£!_\ S1rvU

- I

fnt.aif.xes

S 1:11 h;Q:fJ-w,~orco.un

I

-

,

@ OSI~ s Os1_~DM t"1 O si_
Figure 405: Result of t he New Message Trigger Creation

548


Lesson: Extending Processes with an SAPUIS User Interface

4. Implement the data object DO_Data . a) Double-click the newly created process StartProcesswithU15_## in the Composite Explorer under PO_Enhanced_##[vendor##] ~Process~ [LocalDevelopment]po_enhanced_##/pr/ pm~ Process Modeling~ Processes . b) From the Palette, choose Data Object and drag it into the process. Name it DO_Data_## . c) Choose the Properties tab, then choose the Data Type view. d) Assign the date type StartProcess-http: //vendor##. com. 5. Assign the pool administrator. a) Choose the pool. b) Choose the Properties tab, then choose the Administrators view. c) Select Choose one or more UME principals . In the Principals field, choose Choose . d) In the Browse Principals screen , in the Principal Name field , choose User. In the second field, enter Administrator## . Choose Search. e) If requested, log on as Administrator##. f) From the search results, select Administrator##. Choose Add, then choose OK. g) Choose Save . 6. Test the process using the Process Repository. a) Build and deploy the process by choosing PO_Enhanced_## . From the context menu choose Deploy. From the Product build and deploy dialog box, choose Build and Deploy. b) In your internet browers, start the NWA, either by choosing an already open browser tab, or entering the url: http: I /nwktdcOO. wdf . sap . corp: 50000/nwa c) If requested, log in as user Requestor## . d) in the NWA choose Configuration~ Processes and Tasks~ Process Repository. e) Choose your newly deployed process StartProcessWithU15_## (displayed in the Details of Component po_ enhanced_## pr pm area). Choose the newly deployed process. Choose Start Process.


549


liii

14 39 45 28,01 2014

...........

Ul' ...,.,,..,.....,.,....,., • ...,_.,

I I

1"'1•-'"_"_·.."'"" (Vel!OOtOO.C anf

-

...._._.

:20 14" 12'& 10 I 4 I & (kX eC>eve~m

00_..M!r..onc~-C
20 1 ~177tX6..~CIDceDeYcqim

...

po_UllMMCCl_OO~ (¥endcWOO .<~

~140127 1 3060$ (lccelOeveqim

•c...bt>e~~.....-8ft1va"1)rot ie6& •*•o conll

7'4003~1~ 17 0000 (5.

'"' ....

k""bcle~~.,~

7.•00!l 20f~ 1 1«IOO(.S.

It ~ OMcni~ S.-"1t.tn'llll ( $1111>.Coni

7 400J 20130$3Con9170000(&,

U:~or.11er.~--0tf>dd~~rour (s.op.c~

7. 4003 :Z.01~3Sl7 COOO t S

....

(MP CQIT(l

List o fVeNi o n s o f Con1ponent po_end1an ced_OO-pr- p m (vendo100.com)

I""""•• A0e&c1t.-111tA• I tJ : AC.tu• V.•i!>ti

-....... ...........

~

-

A~otbn OomTuil:°*>

D D

20 1~1~1 t 1101 2ttoee()(i11~1'11)

CJ

:0140127 10~3 tbt•~eloipmet'fl)

D D

~140127 104G43(loc •'°*'-•~)

~1

"°'

l.oolr:: /JI De-s!lrol!Oon

211109:6 ooc "'°'""~)

2Q 1 .4Q1~1 1~S 4leiecfl0$v e~"(lll'lt)

......,.

Oetalls of Com ponent po_enthonced_OO-.p,,..pm (vendorOO.com) end Versi on 20140128133:80!

_, .,_.OGe•••o~ THlfl

''

•

I Fhx.s s FbN JI StMI Roces•-1

,.....

__ .. ....

-"'...

..

I

--

Ct.tstotrr.~aln

-

~e.••Ch\JI!.

Figure 406: Process Started with the Process Repository (1)

f) In the BPM Process Startup: Process screen, enter the applicable values in the Values column. Choose Start Process .

fiii

or •I&

l!fl

·:~.f;(l).....,~i:;pA,.'\"Q.\~ 'Cf\

::t ~-~·Wlid'..

'" t' ,,,.,._. ...,.....1'41.,I•

-1fl

fPM~btl.0·'$/i),,'.,. )(I:.· ""*~·Yl'~...

~..... - h l r..o,.i.iJy,(fl;~;:_l!!l~.;.>'4(J

J: !'nn'&~cl'l\:dld, .. I t

BPM Process Startup: Process

~ra:i)n:

~01,.iu11;1,;

-

• Mi_~...

·• !htltme • trtll

~do:. I

:,

====1&w.!!-~-.I

~

"'1

Im~

"' SI?•"*'*•

........ ...

Ioe.~ . OWVWH I ,,l_Stlll=·=·~=·,.I._ _ _ _ _ _ __.

~t-

D D

r

D D D

. .........

D

• Dtbtf

D

~.,.

:~

•

•

••

•

••

~ Y.SO..IR.1 tQU'll'~wtl'MCl'~~~fO))pr.r~IAflri:~'"'~V*r


g) In the BPM Process Startup: Process screen, choose Details, then choose View Started Process. h) In the Manage Processes:Process Instances screen, choose Show Process Flow. i) Return to the new tab where the process is waiting.

550



14:39'20 28.01 .2014

D lrrtermedi ite Tlmer O

-.....

,,~·;,:


j) In the Manage Processes:Process Instances screen choose Refresh until the process is completed 7. Copy the source to PO_Enhanced ## /ui/web. a) Choose the NWDS. In the Composite Explorer, choose PO_Enhanced_##[vendor##.org] ~User Interface. Open the node PO_Enhanced_OO/ui/ web. b) Using copy and paste, replace the nodes Source and Web Content with the source material foundat:Y:\\TrainingSetup\SAPBPM\SAPBPM_lO Solutions\EX25 . c) Select the folders Source and Web Content in the Y file system. From the context menu, choose Copy. d) Switch to the NWDS and select [LocalDevelopment]po_enhanced_##/ui/web. From the Context Menu, choose Paste.


551


liii

D Y:\ JralnflgSetup\ SAPBPM \ SAPBPM _ l 0 _SOLU TJONS \ EXl 4

00

I · WOf'l.SMTro?S • ' ""(\\-t2382)(Y:) • Tr.inngs.tup • 5'>Pel'M • SAP!ll'M_IO_SOlUTIONS • ElC2< .

"=

-fdder

Or90'1ize •

.:.J

JAxxx.jdl

Io.ie modfied

Nome -

log

.;.J

• l{D I S-ch EX24

My..,.,.,

......

_. nwds

p2

I

Type

1/31/ZOI 4 2:22 AM

Fllefoldet

1/31/2014 2:22 AM

Fllefoldet

1/28/ZOl'I 3:51 PM

f )(ecutable Jar File

1~

186KB

p\,o;ns

EOO_O.«a

1/28/2011 5~36 PM

SCAFlo

n••

!j Recycle Bin

O_O.sca

1/28/2011 5:36 PM

SCAFlo

i,731 K8

.SJ SAPEIPr'1_20

8

PO_Emanced_20[verd«20) ~o Portal l!f Q Process 8

I

'

4i11 User lntetface W-ia [LocalOevelopmen ~ [LocalOevelopm Gl 'ib Oeployme

!I

JAX·WS

' 2'fJ pi&j

po_emanc '..20/u/vc (DC) Jpo_effia _20/u;/web riptor: [ IDevelopment) po_

bServlces

4J a\ JRE System Libr"'Y l;l

1.6.0.•3)

a\ Required Oevdo 12;.
$ 12;. def $~ gen 12;. '"'

~ test

'

(2;. Webe
Figure 409: Replacing the Content in t he Nodes

e) In the dialog box that appears, choose Yes to all.

liii

15.0J 51 28 01201' t;l-ia 1'°""'""-loo.~.Ofl/o>l"
e :t1!I ILocabewl°""""" oo.--.l.ooJ\Jlwtb Ii \t;i l~...-J '°-"""""°'·OO!U/w 'j) tJ lAX·WS Web Ser~

_,.De'"'"""

~ SW'C$

~gc~~~o~

€ a\ :RfSy~lbbfY(ldtl.6.0_43) !!! ti; liA~-°"°"""""""'-"""' do

Ii""""

;)!. ""'

ti; "'

~ te~

@J "" WebCont... ~ 1.«~....po_ent:h¥lcedJ»..1,,

lil ..,...,.,. l'9'= Gil (lltetnol Servi"'$

{§) lrh'dtuctu'e

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-' ""'

.c.t laQ>OPTIOr•AL

J PO_Frodu:t_oo [vetlcbOO.com]

Figure 410: Replacing the Content in the Nodes--Overwrite

f) Repeat steps b through e for the Web Content folder.

552



15:08:33 28.01.2014 ~ [localDevelopment] po_enthanced_OO/uilweb W· ~ Deployment Descriptor: [LocalOevelopment] po_entharw:ed_llOlli/web

Iii 8 J/>Y.·WS Web Services 8 fi!) source

e lJI S4P0Pm....p1 ijl [f)

8

[i) C
ill iutilja~_!i

fil sapbpm.servlet 00 {jj SAPBP~rvlet.jovo

ma\ JRE System Llbr.ry [jcl
a\ Required Development Components (3. cfg

l!I

e. def

00 ~ gen 1?7 src 1?7 test 8 WebContent El e;. i111a9..

e.

-[!I. wstomerPic.Pl>Q [!. newRoc1lrd.png f ~. PF png • r ~ sompleMop.png 1

-f!!.i soplogo.png

00 0> META•lr-1' S!Ol> resot>'cos

e e css

hi bodcground.jpg

~ layootPI.css I ~ maln.css 1 8~ WEB·INF 127 lib

,'!) web.x_. ~ web-j2ee-engine .x_.

.5'.l start:Ptocess_PO_OO.ht_.

Figure 411: Replacing the Content in the Nodes--Results

8 . Customize the f ile class sapbpm.imp.SAPBPMOperations. a) Choose PO_Enhanced_##[vendor##.org] ~User Interface~ [Loca/Development]po_enhanced_##/ui/web ~source~ sapbpm.impl. b) Double-click SAPBPMOperat ions . j ava. c) At the top of the class section of the file, change the following variables to your process setting: •

VENDOR

•

DC NAME

•

PROCESS_NAME 15:22:25 28.01.2014 .o import com sa . secur · t . api. I User;

.o ;Q

import ~1!'.t..~.M.:.R~.illl· api . U!!Factory; import S.ll!!!!liai:i.i· sdo. DataObject; public class SAPBPMOperations

(

private static final Str ing VENDOR a "vendorOO . com"; private static final String DC_ llA>IE e "po_enthanced_OO- pr- pm"; private static .final String PROCESS_l/AME a "StartProcesswithUIS_OO"; public String startBPMProcess(Customer customer)
Figure 412: Fixing the Class

To find out the vendor being used, go to the Properties of your Web project:


553


liii

15:24:30 28.01.2014

-

SQ Process 9 ~ l"I

•

Go Into

C
B-W ProcessMod!!l _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _1 1 S ~ Pto=,.S COC>Y a
£ ~

f

1

J,

Pa?_.

st«t, tj

Q3 t aslls

00 f9 Event T"j

Clrl+Y

_X_Delet _ • ____ Delo _ t_• _ _ _ Rehesh Cose Project

1

I'S

Ci>se IJIT
i;!J:I R - f &::,1Jr9o ~~t...

e. .

00 Function> ~ (9 CB oataly RwiovtfromeortteY.t o.rl+M.-+SWlt+Down ~ i!l (.9 5ervlc.e l lf..J',.e n--F" 'P src ,_~ _ -•~ _ •••_ _ _ _ • - - - - A< User lntetf«e

la [loc•l:>ev
8· tSf, [Locatlevelopme f!l. ~ DePovrr.ent ljl

tJ

JAX·WSWeb

!Ir

Voldole

~s Met«jl!ta

RAnAs

~ -'·

• • :rr.

Figure 413: Properties of the Web Project

15:25:1928.01.2014 Resource source Iders 1

>ject References •

I oo l• I

1•

•

Path:

flocalDevelopmentNpo_enthanced_QijNprNpmNVendorOO.com

Type:

Project

y

Location: N: \My Documents\JAxxx, jdi\locak>evelopment\SC_PO_Enthanced_00\vendorOO.com \po enthanced QO\or\pm\ como

Figure 414: Finding the Vendor

d) Choose Save . 9 . Change the service call in StartProcess_PO_##.html. a) Choose PO_Enhanced_##[vendor##.org] ~User Interface~ [Local Development]po_enhanced_##luilweb ~ webContent. b) Double-click StartProcess PO_##.html. c) In the code, find the line starting with $ . ge t J SON (host_and_port+ " I ve ndorOO . com-po ent hance d '' /vendor OO . c om-po_enhan c ed) . d) In this line of code, change the vendor number, the po_enhanced number, and the process number to your process number. e) Choose Save . 15.28.08 28.01 2014 C'.J.lit

i t 1fl\.UW:t ii! lll · pt up\ '' Yl:l.iur!.l""-'-it: • ;,:11j.1. "'' . t:ULC . Ytl.1 lle.)l.Sl.e . VC'l-«1111.I; ~

if (COl!r: ttyfi!ld. gttVll!Je (, •• ""I ( eountryr ield. prop ("valti!Stat!" 1 Mp. ui.co:re. Velu!St.tte . Error I ; } t lst
f

el•• t

11

the date to cbe 1«4de here $ .QetJS((t(host_end_portt"/po_enthel'lced_oo..ui... ~b/process_00/ start ?t iistNarre• l'tt irs~t ield .qttValue I)+"' la:stNaroe•''t last NimeFie ld. ~er.d

I /getD4;bboardtlataAM!SetKod.e i 11: Yilr WhboacdData • ( ( requtstld :data. ctq~! t ld, let!I~ : data. 18StKame,firstJlpe : data . f irstNM.e, city : det•.c1ey,country : dai a.oour.tcy,:ipCode : data. 11pCode, creditLU.lt : d!i~ . creditl.imit,

Figure 415: Changing the Service Call

10. Change the file web.xml to match your project settings.

554



a) Choose PO_Enhanced_##[vendor##.org] ___..User Interface___.. [Local Oevelopment]po_enhanced_##/ui/web ___..web content___.. WEB-INF.

b) Double-click the file web.xml. In the file open web-app with the+ button, and change the following lines: •

Choose display-name and change the process number to your process and vendor number.

•

Open security-role and change RequestorOO to your user.

•

Open security-contraint, then open web-resource-collection and change the entries under web-resource-name and url-pattern .

•

Choose security-contraint, then open web-resource-collection, then open authconstraint, then open role-name, and change the requestor name.

•

Open servlet-mapping and change the process number.

•

Open auth-constraint, open auth-contraint and change the user to your user.

1$:33·$.1 28 01.2014 l ; isc:be!Nll.~t lOU" "h e ep; 11j4 "", 6 i;n• .; <:ell~: eo.y-~.. Loe•Ul l~y-1.'1~>

u

<~

tccc:i;e-rtle- lt:ii:.> ~eleo•~-:t t le,.i.11dex. ttml tndex. r.tlfK/ tale leo.1.e..t 1 le>

!ndex .J,~

1:-t t I•• cte!•tilt . lltml(./11e 1c....o-ti le>

velo.:::01.-.· t l l•>•! • wl t . IU,.M ck!•ul i;.. 111;J <111.. tt-..- tal•-l111t> < l<'-t."'1'~' """

< ..v.r ti-""'-"~ ~"°'d>tOP:11:.:/ l'lut 11-~etincl>

.cne\lr.:.t y-l:olf!> <~e,or1p~1Qn>Cll5~oll'l'!r Rcq:JC~tcc Rcquc~~or_OO

~c~rltv-eoastro~nt>

Do.lsllbo•rdSccur1tvC~D!ltro1nt

c-uz l--S:.$.ttCt-h>/ Sc ai:tProc.H"•- f'O_ oO. bt"ll!l C-/-.b~~.-e

C-A\lt l...,o:q.r_. tr•• QI.> Ft,.q•11t•t.(11'_ Q/O
• . -......>

11,~·-ccr.e1.l'•tt11.>

5APBPft&e.rvlc~~/dlepl$y-~> <::iccvte~-~a:ne>5AP3Pe&e.rvlc~

~crvlct-".o~~tno>

<::icrvlet- 1:.M1C)'S.tJ>ilJ>l!l3eTvlct"-rv let -

curl

>

,.Oltcrn~/proec::i:>_OO/• <(furl ~ttCTIP

Ptoce•-<0 11att•t nt ~/di'l•ll 11.y-n-.e> <••>r41:toi:.1•e•-e. 11.,eu~> <" p:'oe.••_ 00- (••Qllt<;•-n->

/prco;•••_OO/•

Re~~tot"_OO

<1p•c-- M1111e>c:OJ11. :iap. ut.5 . rc:JOu.rce • u:st_Cl.C ta.:/ per- r . -> -tAl:JC

••

Figure 416: Occu rrences for the New Project Settings

c) Choose Save. 11. Change the file web-j2ee-engine.xml to match your project settings. a) Choose PO_Enhanced_20[vendor##.org] ___..User Interface___.. [Local Oevelopment]po_enhanced_##/ui/web ___..web content___.. WEB-INF

b) Double-click web- j 2ee-engine.


555


c) Choose the+ in the file, then open the security-role map. Change the two occurrences of the user Requestor## to match your project settings.

liiii

15:36:43 28.01.2014 -<.veb-J2ee-eng1ne xmlns:xsi= "http:/ / TAN'. v3 . o~g/2001/XMLSchSM-ins tance" xsi: noNaroe~paceSchemaLoce

<5pec-vers1on>2 . 4

Recruestor_OO Req~stor_OO

<109in-module-cont1ourat.1on>I EvaluateTic ketLoqinModule SUff IC IENT <./loq1n-module> BasicPasswordLoginnodule REQUISITE Creat e TickecLoginHodu le

0PTIONAL

Figure 417: Occu rrences for the New Project Settings in web-2jee-engine.xml

d) Choose Save . 12. Add the external Lib com.google.gson.Gson. a) Change to the Development Infrastructure by choosing Perspective~ Development Infrastructure .

Window~

Open

b) Choose LocalDevelopment ~ SC_PO_Enhanced_##[vendor##.org]. From the context menu, choose New~ Development Component. c) On the New Development Component dialog box, choose Composite Application. Choose Next.

d) On the New Development Component dialog box, enter the name po enhanced ## /

-

extlibs. Choose Next.

fiii

·

·-- . f'·--- -·-· ---·

,.~,I_,,,_,

..

....,.......o:r,_J

~

Wf-1

~~ \(l'(O>~:O.,....

- ... -t-.•-.1 ~·-··~ ... .., --!.....-,)

. >;

~

:".

--:i

•

.~-,_,

~=--·!<-

~...::

il.( ........

1)'-10!'10\11\t

~;.wi=z---•

-h

_,,.. ,..,.. •• '">«I:.. 11111:.n1 •'· --~-<;>;.I •• ~ JC;,W. •• .,,..... • "'>.P.'-.1».J(I_....,. ~~x~•~ ~

==~

!.w>Jd."1-->

l.ICI-··-'.-";.";':. . . = • }Ul:_i(I ~~

.•-" '

~,..,,,,,.,,

,.,.>fW! .........

,,,.!"I.__.

Jt.tll'~I!

~)

""""""'...,_...,,.... . f:..--..,-...,,

n., ~, ~

31 ....>i"~

I

-~.....,

•

'

~· O....•ft'.1....., 0)... - . .

.... -"'"'' ... e-. .... ..

.;;;,.itati;;ou

1411(1);

···_,,.,......,""'_ t>-•

•oo ""'-'""" .,~ 1-~·--

. ,,. ?f

-

F=-

•

rj:) 3

3

"

. :J

'I•-«~

'

·,o-·'' . • ' ·fil-·~ ,,•• ·-- '''

•

'

~

IJ

-

......

·-

I

IC:- I

-

I

Figure 418: Adding a Development Component

e) On the CAF projects dialog box, choose Finish . f) Change to the Resource perspective.

556



g) In the Project Explorer, choose your project po enhanced ##/extlibs/dictionary. From the context menu, choose Import.

liii

-

-

,....,.._......,................

16.02.35 28.01.2014 _..,................-/"..,,............,.

.....

~

.. .

S ~ (UIUllOe.~)po_enthanc!d_OO/l:tfscc~

d ti? C...-100....-.ed,.ool-

-a;,.
-

&. .a df!J

!'£ ~ qen

acm 0 ~<

0 ...

IJ,i

•

~-,.

1·= Ill

"""' +V

fi1T

"''"'

~xt

.+~~-

.rf't1{10

Move...

:...§ (t.Qc.~)po_enth4nced_OO/Wf4/'9C

@1 ~.; ri.oc~l oo ~ed

00/rrJpm

"

> i~=·...· '

d:f)por~

l~""""' ,,,..,

'' '

..

FS

• • •

·~.,

""""'"' ProffeAs

• •

'""'

COl'llP¥fJW«h R~ ftOM Locoll Hr;t,ofy• .,

•

o~~

.,,,,,.

•

.

Al+Erter

• """''""

Figure 419: Im port

h) In the Import Select screen, choose General~ File System. Choose Next. i) On the Import, File system dialog box, choose Browse. j) On the Import from dialog box, choose WDFLBMTXXX (or something similar)~ Y-folder (all folders can be reached by choosing the +-symbol) ~ TrainingSetup ~ SAPBPM ~ SAPBPM_lO ~Solutions ~ EX25. Choose OK. k) On the Import File System folder, choose the gson-2.2.4.jar from your work directory. Choose Finish. I) Change to the Development Infrastructure perspective and locate SC_PO_Enthanced_##[vendor##.org]/po_enthanced_##/extlibs/dictionary. l6'1'"'1$t1.M1'

! I., 31..

~· ~ ti~

.... ~ <~C-0.-1 '•

•

"

, Clo!l'.U.:.ru>-1

..............., 00'«»'1 t-•..V u-1 ·~

•.'

.

~

_

....

.

"'"Owl po_M IN!ll(t
....,,,....,.. .... ,,.,_x " !': -~

~,

!_....,

f'1'(«1Mii.) ~

• '

r - • n ._

CNl.llll!C "J>.&.t>l~I

·""~~I

'"''

UQQOP ~µ.Mtw-1 , ,..-~

"

•'

• '

" ""'-- . : ;11. . . .1

-·-~

_ ,___ :1="" 1

~io.-1

I>'

...............) .. .....,

<

PJUl~_jC~IJ i'f-i'~ ...........

.

-;-

.

,

.... i

~.-.,C~-~

i

N~~.SCl-.i

'

~.)Wl...-

l'o\,~...:'IJ!Otl~ ,,..~~

....

_ 1

Iii! tc.."11-~iool)IOC..,..,..._.

•. .........,,._ ... •• •• °"'u. ..... ().. ..,...,.._~~

c.. -..-.~

g,. ..~.._•

-

~.-...~ ,.-~~

•, :. ...~ ~ o. .,,,_~-

-.

•.. u.. ...,_.,.)Ill!_ ....-..- - ti (). * • ~o.

Clo~

"'" ~ "'P•

.- c. ..~

'" I::•.._

• M

11:~.-c.M ·~ ~

,,._.........

..1 -:~-

'

Figure 420: The Extlibs

m) Choose the Public Parts tab. From the context menu, choose Manage Entities to add the gson-2.2.4.jar to the archives.


557


____

--------

liii

16"12 1.5 28 01 2014 _.._..._.

Oef"JMd Pl.ilk Pa.1$

59e
l).bli:: p.!fll

'°' wsoc

·-.......

- Ill!'

j

Aefereni:e (rd~ ~&11.l!M

~

~.,.

Figur e 421: Manage Entit ies for Public Parts (1)

n) In the Manage Entities screen, choose Finish . •' E1>111)' Mfl'llnllilrollon Oil Piiblle Pon l """'-·--~""~.,-~(~ ..-··~- .. - ·· 'old!-~'

'

Figur e 422: Manage Ent ities for Public Parts (2)

13. Add dependencies a) Under the dependencies tab, add BPM-FACADE to SC_PO_Enhanced_## and choose Finish.

. . :1::-...::..

--·~

~·

.. .,.. F ,.

• · 0 · '\ •

... --1 ...--.-••..,. . ___

•

-' .

'

'

.

IU'Ol!l'l"N•

• .J · # ..

.;.·-..-.... '

_ .. ___.. -............... · ...•Uoto>-·._,,...,_

• !oCJl'O.r....__-.,.._.u. .....1

...

~·-~-

--:J to~ . •"II

,e,.-~"I~-

-~

,

•

·-..... ...• -·u. • _,,.,.,. ....... I ,... ~

~

...-~ ,,.._.

_ -------.:..-1 -.---.-.....,

--·------ ....--i

~

_,_

~-

.~-....:

:::::.;::::

---1 -·----

~--

.•• ...• ·-.--1 .. __,...,...

---:oo..-___--.· --· '•. ----.---

•

"-~-1

....

' • ..........__,.,, • --"-.•i-w-i ...~_.._...,_ .... • •

1 c·

558

-~ ·-·-

~

Figur e 423: Dependencies (1)



16:27 10 2ll.01.201A l.t5( of SCs r~r·fJd for t~ts SC

~ ~BuJLDT(s"!>.Com] ~ $F&l-COHTENT [~oom]

BE SRMS-BUILOT(sap.cofl'l]

Bf: .oomJ

~ COt.JIUllDT (~com) ~ OIGFACJ« [wp.
im ESMPJIUllOT (s.ap.o;wn)

~ fWEWORK(up.com] ~ MOlN,JllOlDT (~.cao) Qi St.PJ!IUilOT[u.p.«ICl'I)

~ 5C_PO_(r.t~d_00(ve:tl(

fJI SERViCE
Select SCs to be rele1enced

0 B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n

~

a?: EPEM
•

~ tPEM-FACAOE(s,as>.CM)

d

BPEM-,.,(sop.com]

Select AA

,,.,_., I

~ flAA'IS"ACAO!(s4').comJ

!i aB Ill! ~

~ ~

aB ~

qf?

~(So'JCl.(O'JI) EEAPl (.......) EP_ll.lll.OT (s
.::.I

Figure 424: Dependencies (2)

b) Add tc/bpem/fa9ade/ear to po_enthanced_##/bl/ear and choose Finish.

~ 1=;.~~1

!•

fQM:Cl'lq - 1

I•

~'tl~

"

~Co•-.J

II}

~c-.-t ~<¥! {--!

!\.

l:P'"tXU:W.f•-1

h

It "

~!)l({NI.-)

~,U.l
lo

_,~ft$11C

&..:lo\~~

\I.

...~ . ...-.......-"l."4"QI>

"

"to-.. ~

~.. I I llloQ
.. ..

I- ~ ..~...-

I

€X
(yo>"-"°' ""'°~

jl ir;

-... ,-

me

tt',.N.041-1

;i

I

te~:w...,1

{•

~.-.i'~l

I!

-ti••~

(I

.........::q>~....-.J

tu4'1'1!t.O'(••~

Ii'

...

• ......:i

-~c.o

)ol('lfl'JllW)ll--1 ~ .......-~ "Jt11:.)tbdc:oo;J

ti}

a:

lt: F..

fli0~1>
-0.•;::1.............J

111

rr

fll)JJl•-..:U..Ot,S( I~~ P0~.00.XI_,..~ S#.P...1:11'11_ . , .

l!T I•

I• '

11._...oc.

~.JW~_,.,.l

sc:_>ooJ~:..W-=i It ·:::i..~.-.v

... "(). .,,....,....._OC(lliJ
. ·e. ........-.~~,.,,,...,..

.

D •

&;

§-OOM•rmr--t

.,loult"'.....,.. D

a

S D

IF'QollUIOI C. ..-.J

-.tu:.a«1--1

: agls::r~~i

11; (II!

0

!ii 0 !I! Q /'f' 0 i.1 n

,,.;.,.. I

>hJll1 -1

(lOt1I'

1'4.loCo(.((W.-.)

l;oCool'JolWl l<'f'-i IW,>.11,lll(WI~ ,.,,...""*!~

Wl"ll

,.,.~,,._....l

.:I

c.a..""'~-"°"""~'ldU.

-: "°"""'~--~.\l
. """'

"" ";;)oo.:..-i........~ ii ~I/Oft~

Figure 425: Dependencies (3)

c) Add po_enthanced_##/bl/ear and po_enhanced_##/extlibs to po_enhanced_##/ui/web and choose Finish. Add all parts under ENFACADE to po_enthanced_##/ui/web.


559


liii

16.32.06 2tl 01.2014

.!:r '!)., p o_c n th anced_OOlui/Web ~~~~l~ t>~ts lctr-\iOCs !Pum"s~, ftlders l Q!stomPrcpcrticsl lrpe ;pcdfic:s Req!M'ed OU Sipf!dy tM tst ot OC$ fl!CfkN hr tfib OC

ltl 9

~· I I •...,.., I ' '"""'' ,. I

Choo.so OCs to be refe renced

I rypetexl tofihr(b-»ilo' str1n9. ~,,,.
0

'St..)'O.,.frt.~..oo ["erido!OO.com)

D •o.. oo_etll:M'l(ied_t))Jtll/c.al'/~rwy

•ew P?..entN1iced.,OO,!W«l/eu D •c.. p3~edJIOJl;Vcdfmet&clot6 o •cw po_onltl¥lc•dJXtJWWJpe,..~sions 0

D "Oft po_~J))Jt\fc~/~

D ~ po,..eoltlllrlted..OOJWdtk s •c,, oo_~cd_OOJWc.r

D ~ po..,.riwiced..OOJblf~ o •o..oo_~-~

a -e... po_eolhe,,.ed_oo;w$(~ 0 ~ ........ .,.._.~xtd_ooJ4xtf.»

n ~"" ..~'""'miw,..,.,.,,.

~

Figure 426: Dependencies ( 4)

14. Build and deploy. Change to the Composite Designer perspective and build and deploy the product PO_Enhanced ##. 15. Configure the inbound communication on NWA. _,,,_ r'

,_

\1'9t'W2$111.20l'

t @ii

~

,.

--·----

• -CC•~5Jll'P'. " -

.,

I

~-~""'

- "%::1'"""!!:!2'1

1~1-1:s_ ~.........

.-...-

~-

•, .,_ _

--

1, ::~s

....... . ...

.,;:,,. ..

-·-

~··-·.,..w •• ~.,.,.

~-

.. ~ ~

... ~JiCnJ.·.'lltn.l

_.:a......._t_l"'O'U""'.tA!l'f.l4t.}l'OO\f

__

.."'

........ Rimi@

··~ .,. ........

··-

_,

Figure 427: Configuring Inbound Communications

16. Create the role Requestor xx and assign it to the user Requestor_## .

-

Save all changes.

560



17:14;50 28.01.20 14

I

Welcome System AdministratorOO

I t!en"Y •11111!9•"""' II "PM I~ICOn-f!g-ura=,.,.,'"'11"'"=eons = ;,,=enc~y=01= ..=-~I search

!Rote

Search Criteria:

mEnter

• I~IA•~llel=•~S..=•~"=es-·~I ~---~ ~ ~

Description

--------~

8 $earch. P8"8mefer and choose Go

Details

11 ' ._y l I (S.ve II Cencel I General Information 1

/

I ....,.,_

Ass i;ned Ae-tlons

=1f!!g0!!--",..-~oo~-------~

Non-e< •

°""

Assi;nec1 Gfoop$

~ I

~r_________-==:::::,

-"'"°""

O..trWon;

u-..

I)

Figure 428: Role Requester_## assigned to user Requester_## ( 1)

,, ~' 1.# 280120 14 !W'52~1~ 1 ~·11 '--X
H«•

s... ...,c.i...11: !11:;to

· Jl:.Ut11o!>S.U
~

•1'

-

lo - •I I ~-1 i1JEI ti

~- l'rs-

""' 1 -rl

--·

.. O.otf1*11

m-··.wc.•po:---·-•Cll>

~ 1 c-e1 J

""'..-.0~

~-~

.!....:.~~:I ....

~~

I

"""'~'"~-~'"'

.A •oilliek U.•n

- ................_ -· --- _

....~ll CtilHio:

'b

ltlo

a.....,,_., 6 """'~ a ~"'t(I

.

~a ~·Ill!»

Tw

A$J.1Qn"l

EE

°*"""'••

·~--......

&l«r~b

~

\ll•••

........ ·-·

SNIUlClbrtiJI I

"

--~-

'b. ,.... d

l

__ .-

• l

....

I

~1 .

°"""'~··

U4Qot"'-•

:"-W I

Figure 429: Role Requester_## assigned to user Requester_## (2)

17. Test the website. a) In your internet browser, go to the following url: http : I / nwktdc : 50000 / vendor## . com- po enthanced ## - ui - web/ StartProcess PO ## . html

-

-

- -

b) In the CUSTOMERS screen. choose the symbol on the left.

Jiii I

......

Sou> '11!'!'!.., ....,1~

n

-"""'

~,..~.... ~,,,d

CUSTOMERS ~"''''

._......

<•

..........

Figure 430: CUSTOMERS Screen


561


c) Enter the applicable data in the form, then choose Submit. 17'21'05 28.01.2014

Figure 431: New Customer Record

d) Choose Analytics and assure that the process has started .

fiii

17.3\:12 28.01.201~ ~AS!

f!11M+t.l\U RJIU

DASHBOARD

PROCES>ES

TA>KS

"JBOX

I Tod~

•

T00$7

-

"11 l'IPIODft$$ .i: C:ompl~

_. nem1

02~11111"''f4~8

'

'

'

Figure 432: Analytics

e) Choose View Details . 17:32:1<128.0 1201.4

I

l

I

I

I

•

I

I

I

I

I )(

Vlt\'I OttaUs

Top Processes Chart Data In PTQs111ss

Pr0(.8$~ OP'fimhon

•

Ile~;P~~e~&

Sl311P,ot•sa:"'°llht.-:5

···-

1•

..

I

2

Coff1PleCt6

rn Error

• •

•

•

-·

Figure 433: Details

f) Choose 1 to go to the Manage Process Monitor.

562



11 JJz:s2'01 2014

'!!"SiP~.,._a't.lNd,•

C

+.

11;

~ ~"'~SJ.Pl.I(

) n..~.td:O:I !{(O)l,..,,L.J.1

II w,..~

tif1h~

.... ,

X

1~~FWiw l!s.-11~r... 1'"'t'1 @ij

.,

,

'9't#N>

V'-'.·~~:OJ1.'>b,"4;J tu11/tl.:...../n r.it:...':11·1 ..... ··11\r.!irf: J11~-.J;flo.1Pl«"~V~~~t.W'\lD•1.0tn ~bclt!rn ,J.J

· I 1 ~ 41

0-tll...I,

. .-

(o=-l IE>rnA--a.•ll~io~ ~-'T"...-jtf

·-·

P(OceM k1Mf11tit StllllProceM1.1- \f!UIS_(l8 ""~~t'
~l!Wt

~

l'l'oettt l'l!l«".Ct~ t
~ ~1Srwrfd.cro f!!ft!;tlQH

Figure 434: Manage Process Manager


563



•

564



Unit 9

Lesson 4 Solving Recurring Problems with Enterprise Integration Patterns

LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn how to implement conditional start patterns, content enricher patterns, aggregator patterns, and splitter patterns to solve recurring problems. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

•


•


•


•


Stateless and Stateful Patterns Enterprise Integration Patterns (EIP) help in solving recurring problems faced in the integration of enterprise applications. Most patterns consist of a mix of SAP Pl Integration Flow (iFlow) configurations and SAP BPM process implementations. That is, they rely on the power of SAP Process Orchestration, which combines both of these technologies. The figure entitled Patterns by Category shows all the patterns offered by SAP BPM . •

• • Aggregator

• g

Claim Check

• • Spl1ter (v118P~i)

•

Content Enrlctier (wl8Pt.1)

• • Scatter-OdUler

• • Composed ~.1essa9e Processor

• Request-Reply 0

-

AsynCISync Bndge

o - SyncJAsync Bridge

Figure 435: Patterns by Category

Patterns can be differentiated between stateful and stateless patterns, as shown in the figure entitled Pattern States and Availability.


565


1r.

flrll

•1

..J Aggregator .al Claim Cheek

SAP Ne.Weaver 7.3 EhP1 SPS

d Composed Message Processor

SAP Ne.Weaver 7.3 EhPI SPS

...i Scaner-Galher

SAP Ne.Weaver 7.3 EhP1 SPS

.l Sync/Async Bndge

SAP Netweaver 7,3 EhP 1 SP4

SAP Ne.Weaver 7.3 EhP 1 SPS

~~t

d Content Enncher (w/BPM)

SAP Ne.Weaver 7.3 EhP1 SP4

....J Spfiner (w/BPM)

SAP Ne.Weaver 7.3 EhP1 SP4

.;:; Async/Sync Bridge

SAP Ne.Weaver 7.3 EhP I SP4

.:;. Pure AEX 1mp1ementa~on of these statetess patterns:

SAP Netweaver 7.3 EhPI SP4

• Content Based Router • Recipient LISI • Dynamic Router • Sphner • Message Filler • Content Enncher • Content Filler • Message Translator

Figure 436: Pattern States and Availability

Stateless patterns can be implemented either as Integration Flows on Pl (AEX) or as processes in BPM . As a general guideline, stateless patterns are best implemented as Integration Flows on AEX. This applies especially if the integration process consists of a single pattern only and no additional business logic is executed in the Process Orchestration system (that is, a pure ESB scenario). In such cases, the overhead of starting, executing, and completing a BPM process instance is typically very prohibitive. If the pattern is part of a larger business process involving multiple integration and/or workflow patterns, it could be implemented within SAP BPM, as the overhead costs become less relevant in the overall scenario.

Note: All patterns are described in the help portal at the following url: http: / I scn . sap . com/ community/ process-orchestration/ blog/ 2012 / 09 / 15/ sappro cess-orchestration-integration-patterns

Connectivity Pl and SAP BPM SAP BPM now supports the XI 3.0 protocol for service endpoints (configurable on the service reference). This means that messages can be sent reliably between Pl to BPM.

Pl

JPR

WSRT

BPM

Figure 437: Inbound Communicat ion from SAP Pl to SAP BPM

The message received by Pl will be processed by the Java Proxy Runtime (JPR), which delivers it via the Web Service Runtime (WSRT) to BPM . The message could start new process instances or trigger intermediate message events in BPM. The message will be discarded if it does not match either a process start interface or an intermediate trigger.

566



BPM

WSRT

JPR

Pl

Figure 438: Outbound Communication from SAP BPM to SAP Pl

Outbound communication (automated activity triggering a message) happens in a similar way. Here the sender component name can be specified in the service configuration in BPM.

Conditional Start Patterns A process uses the Conditional Start feature if the same message trigger is used in the start event and in at least one intermediate message event of the process. In BPM, a web service endpoint is represented by a reusable message trigger. The start condition and the correlation condition can be independently defined. Usually, the correlation condition is a more specific variant of the start condition. In the conditional start use case, a new process is started only if there are no running processes that match the correlation condition of the incoming message. The start event is not directly triggered by the message. First, the matching evaluation is done and if there is no runn ing process, the process start for the active version is initiated. That means, all messages that come in at any point in time will then be received by exactly one process instance. For a running instance of a conditional start process, messages with matching correlation criteria will be received by the intermediate message event. If there is no running process instance with matching correlation criteria, the message will be received by the start event-- given the start condition is satisfied-- thereby spawning a new process instance.

Content Enricher Patterns A content enricher pattern is a message transformation pattern. It is a stateless pattern and is available with NetWeaver 7.3, SP4. Enterprise Integration Patterns (EIP) are design patterns that help in solving recurring problems faced in the integration of enterprise applications. One of the message transformation patternsthe Content Enricher-is needed if the target system requires data fields that the originating system cannot supply. In numerous integration scenarios, for instance, System B needs additional data that System A has not provided. Such instances are tailor made for the Content Enricher pattern. It has the ability to look up missing information or compute it from the available data. The Content Enricher allows you to communicate with another system if the message originator does not have all the required data items available. Example 1--Service Technicians As a service technician, Kevin's daily job is to visit customers for servicing and/or repairs of appliances. His supervisor Emil wants a summary of the tasks each of his technicians worked on during the day. For each of his technicians, Emil gets a daily report of customers visited and tasks undertaken. He would like to get better insight into the kinds of service calls conducted by his technicians than what is already provided in the daily report. Emil wants a list of all visited customers (including name, address, phone number, issue/regular service, and service date and time) served by Kevin on that particular day. Emil will input Kevin's employee ID to the process and the requisite details would be retrieved from the system.


567


I

Enriched Message

Message I

Figure 439: Illustration of the Content Enricher Pattern

Example 2--lntegration Scenario The Content Enricher helps gather additional information from a system using the available information. In this example, Kevin enters his direct report's ID into Business System Sl. A generated message in SAP Pl (AEX) is delivered to SAP BPM (Inbound). Web service calls in SAP BPM aid in looking up additional information based on the ID and the enriched message from SAP BPM (Outbound) is relayed through Integration Configuration 2, eventually providing Business System Sl with the requested information.

Business System (Sl)

AEX Web Service Calls

Figure 440: An Integration Scenario for t he Content Enricher Pattern

As shown in the accompanying figure, the following integration scenarios exist:

568

•

Integration Configurationl (ICOl) - A message flow can be triggered in Business System Sl that flows through SAP Pl (AEX) to SAP NetWeaver BPM .

•

Integration Configuration2 (IC02) - To send the enriched content back to SAP Pl (AEX) from SAP BPM and store it as a file in your specified folder using File adapter.



Note: The message flow from Business System Sl could also be simulated by using the Web Services Navigator. Example 3--Process Modeling in SAP BPM For creating the Content Enricher pattern in NetWeaver Developer Studio, the following prerequisites apply: •

The service interfaces to be used in the process model-starting interface and automated activity-should be created first and then imported from the SAP Pl Enterprise Service Repository.

•

For testing the BPM Process from the BPM Process repository, the UME action SAP_BPM_ TR/GGER_EVENT should be assigned to the specific user role.

S\Ab-Process Loop

-19'

IQGet Order Lisi for Emp ID

Start

•

cl

e0et >

St8l1 Event 0

•

I

D

Emp_Oelails

D

Orderlisl

-)

customer Deleils for the order

I

-

•

Encl even o

" '

D

Counter

~ Sendlhe enriched summary

e End

.

D

Order_Details

Figure 441: A Content Enricher Scenario Modeled in SAP BPM

The steps for modeling the process are enumerated as follows: •

The pattern starts with a service interface.

•

An Employee ID is provided as input to the system.

•

A Web service call retrieves the order list (List of Order IDs).

•

The order details are then retrieved for each Order ID using Web service calls.

•

These details are consolidated and a summary (the enriched content) is returned to the sender system.

Note: Use the 'XI' service reference instead of 'WS' in the configuration settings of the automated activity. The sender component also needs to be specified. Use the SAP Pl Integration Flow Designer to create the configuration objects in SAP Pl.


569


Aggregator Patterns The aggregator pattern is a stateful filter that is used to analyze and store input messages until a complete set of (related) messages are received. It can then produce a single refined message from the messages that were received. It is used in cases where subsequent message processing is contingent upon the successful processing of multiple input messages. Dealing with asynchronous messaging systems presents challenges like correlating the messages, particularly since the incoming messages may arrive in any order. While some of the other routing patterns can be stateless, the aggregator needs to store each incoming message until the set of messages is complete for further processing. The aggregation is limited to a completion condition, either time bound or quantity bound. Example 1 One division of the company manufactures stationery supplies like colored pencils and graphite writing pencils. Graphite pencils are manufactured and placed into bins on a conveyor belt so that they can be packed by a machine. Each package contains 10 graphite writing pencils. The company would like to increase throughput without compromising on quality.

Item A

Item B 0

Aggregated 0

Item C

'---..J

Aggregated order

--

Item N

Figure 442: Illustrat ion of the Aggregator Pattern

The aggregation is not dependent on the order of messages received , which means the Aggregator may receive related messages at any time (within a reasonable limit) and in any order. Each time the Aggregator receives a new message, it should check if the message is part of an existing aggregate and create a new aggregate if a related aggregate doesn't exist, and then add the message to the appropriate aggregate. In our example for the graphite writing pencils, we need to aggregate a set of 10 pencils. The pencils are collected into the next bin and once the count reaches 10, the bin is conveyed to the machine that packages them. Example 2--lntegration Scenario

570



Business System (51)

AEX

Figure 443: Integration Scenario for the Aggregator Pattern

This example deals with these three integration configurations: •

Integration Configuration! (ICOl) - A message flow can be triggered in Business System Sl that flows through SAP Pl (AEX) to SAP BPM.

•

Integration Configuration2 (IC02) - For triggering intermediate message(s) that flow to SAP BPM via SAP Pl.

•

Integration Configuration3 (IC03) - For sending the aggregation to SAP Pl (AEX) from SAP BPM using a File Adapter.

Note: The message flow from Business System Sl could also be simulated by using the Web Services Navigator. Example 3--Process Modeling in SAP BPM

>---<1~\----1 Merge

Check ount

Increment

Awalt next Msg

(Q '------M

~

Send Aggregated message

1----------r End

Figure 444: An Aggregator Scenario Modeled in SAP BPM

The steps for modeling the process are enumerated as fo llows: •

The pattern starts with a service interface with the message counter reset to zero.

•

As long as the counter is within defined bounds, incoming message(s) that match the correlation key are collected.

•

The message counter is incremented for each collected message (matched correlation key).


571


•

Once the counter has met the completion condition, all the collected messages are processed (aggregated) and this aggregation is sent to the rece iver.

Note: Use the 'XI' service reference instead of 'WS' in the configuration settings of the automated activity. The sender component also needs to be specified. Use the SAP Pl Integration Flow Designer to create the configuration objects in SAP Pl.

572


Unit 9

Exercise 26 Implement an Aggregator Pattern

Business Example

As the business process management expert, you need to create a new process using an aggregator pattern.

Note: In this exercise, the product PO_Enhanced_##, created in exercises 6, 9, 18, and 25, is used. In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you.

Note: This exercise is based on data found at the following url: h ttp : I I sen . sap . com/ community/process-orchestration/bl og/20 12/ 1 0/ 11 /enterprisepatterns-in-process-orchestration-aggregator

1. In the Product PO_Enhanced_##, create and design a process named Aggregator that contains the following objects: Object

Name

Start

Start

Uncontrolled merge

Merge_##

Exclusive Choice

Check Count_##

Intermediate message event

Await next Message_##

Mapping Activity

Increment Counter ##

Notification Activity

SendMail ##

End

End

-

-

2. Import the service interface Sl_Aggregator into the process. 3. Create two new message triggers named Start_Sl_Aggregator_ Trigger_## and lntermediate_Sl_Aggregator_Trigger_##.


573


4. Configure the start event and the intermediate message event. 5. Create a new data object named OO_Aggregator. 6. Create a data object named OO_Counter. 7. Change the settings of the Start event. 8. Create a mapping from OO_Counter to OO_Counter in the Increment Counter activity. 9. Implement the condition in CheckCount_##. 10. Implement a mapping in the Start event. 11. Implement a mapping in the intermediate message event Await next Message_##. 12. Configure the mail activity SendMail_## . 13. Assign Administrato r## as pool administrator. 14. Configure inbound communication. 15. Build and deploy the process. 16. Run the process and check the results.

574


Unit 9 Solution 26 Implement an Aggregator Pattern

Business Example As the business process management expert, you need to create a new process using an aggregator pattern.

Note: In this exercise, the product PO_Enhanced_##, created in exercises 6, 9, 18, and 25, is used.

In this exercise, when values include##, replace the characters with the number that your instructor assigned to you.

Note: This exercise is based on data found at the following url: h ttp : I I sen . sap . com/

community/process-orchestration/bl og/20 12/ 1 0/ 11 /enterprisepatterns-in-process-orchestration-aggregator

1. In the Product PO_Enhanced_##, create and design a process named Aggregator that contains the following objects: Object

Name

Start

Start

Uncontrolled merge

Merge_##

Exclusive Choice

Check Count_##

Intermediate message event

Await next Message_##

Mapping Activity

Increment Counter ##

Notification Activity

SendMail ##

End

End

-

-

a) In the Composite Designer perspective, in the product PO_Enhanced_##, create a new process named Aggregator ## with PoolAdministrator and one lane called LaneAdministrator by choosing New Process from the context menu of Processes .

-


575


b) In your process, add the objects as described in the previous table. In the exclusive choice name alternative 1 more messages needed, and name alternative 2 enough messages. 15:11:01 24.01 20 14

0

PootAdrninittntor

x >----------..

0

Aw&t

A'H ..,

End

I

•

Figure 445: The Process

c) From the context menu of Pool, choose Format Pool. d) Choose Save. 2. Import the service interface Sl_Aggregator into the process. a) From the context menu of Service Interface, choose Import WSDL to import the service interface Sl_Aggregator from your folder into the process. b) In the WSDL Import dialog box, choose Remote Location/File System, then choose Next. c) In the WSDL URL Access screen, choose Browse. In the Open dialog box, choose the folder, then choose TrainingSetup ~ SAPBPM ~ SAPBPM_lO_solution ~ EX26 .

Y:

I

d) Choose the SI_Aggregator. wsdl, then choose Open. e) Choose Finish. f) Assure that your service appears under PO_Enhanced_OO[vendor##.org] ~Process~ [LocalDevelopment]po_enhanced_##/pr/ pm ~ Connectivity. g) Double-click Service References, then choose the+ in front of Customer~ http:// www. vendor##. com.

576



•

I 1i) P_test2 [test2.orgJ f PO_Enthanced_OO (vendofOO.com] m Pata!

!\i>

Lti.ol. U1

El

0

B-Q Process El !;;> (Locak>evelopment) po_enthanced_Q( ~ ~ U>nnec.tivly

~t=tVl\..t:

ttt=I t=(t:J I\.~

Ei Customer

13-S l

http:l/www.vendorOO.tom 9 SI CustomerD<>t• . Q Sl=Awegator

al {[p 5ervieo Group<

'& 5erviee References

13 l:>l:> Process Modelrlg 13 ~ Processes

i

'

I

•

Aggregator CustomMapph;functlon

Figure 446: Check t hat t he Service is Listed

3. Create two new message triggers named Start_Sl_Aggregator_ Trigger_## and Intermediate_ Sl_Aggregator_Trigger_##. a) Choose Event Triggers, then choose New Message from the context menu. b) In the New Message Trigger screen, in the Name field , enter Start SI Aggregator Trigger ## .

- -

-

-

c) Choose Next. d) In the Service field, enter SI Aggregator using the F4-Help.

-

e) Choose Finish. f) Repeat steps a through e to create a second message trigger named Intermediate SI Aggregator Trigger ## with the service interface Sl_Aggregator.

- -

-

-

4. Configure the start event and the intermediate message event. a) Return to the process, either by choosing the modeling tab or double-clicking the process in the tree structure. b) Choose the Start event. c) In the Properties tab, in the Event Trigger view, in the Trigger field, enter Start SI Aggregator Trigger.

- -

-

d) Choose the activity Await next Message. e) In the Properties tab, in the Event Trigger view, choose Start_Sl_Aggregator_Trigger. This reflects the conditional start pattern .


577


liii PoolAdinllntmllor

D

D ,------< X

""" 9$0c_Trigger 'tw!!Da~_Tr~·

t') Await next l\1essage

.

0

0

El

"""'''

""""EY~nt Tttqg~r

'Select a tr1Q9e1" fo1this e'l\Vt T1W r Typt:

0

~

0

rlfl\(lll'

0

Etro•

0

Estailltoo

0

Kone

[start_Sl_Aggi-~1_t1i99@1

Cortelatlon condition

Figure 447: Settings for Await Next Message Object

5. Create a new data object named DO_Aggregator. a) From the Palette, drag a data object and drop it next to your process, and name it DO Aggrega tor .

-

b) In the Properties tab, in the Data Type view, in the Data Type field , select DT Aggregator - http ://www.vendor##.com.

-

c) Choose Save . 6. Create a data object named DO_Counter. a) From the Palette, drag a data object, drag it next to your process, and name it DO Counter.

-

b) In the Properties tab, in the Data Type view, in the Data Type field , assign a simple integer type (for example, Integer-http:/ /w3.org/2001/XMLSchema). c) Choose Save. 7. Change the settings of the Start event. a) Choose the Start event. b) Choose the Properties , then choose the Output Mapping view and double-click DO_Counter on the right side of the screen . c) In the Expression Editor, enter a 1 and choose OK.

578



09. 12.~

"1 · 1/b ·"" -"' "

~ l!!J J
27.01.201'

· ·

I ~d>W

· ·

{Q ~totri

!YJPO~hrct11.c»C~~.-1

~. ·~~ u ...____~

.

0

0 " ~---
0

'"'" lit)IOO (OUllt~

._,._, .,,.,.

-

l:j ' ----~-

t6I

f~ll
!!'".-e CO'te>l

I!. -'8 ~11'd'~

'915 00.Jw""• i:...m ~

~·~-------''. l"""'

rr:3l 1 i -

11J'Do-

bird¢ f\Rt

Figure 448: Settings for the Start Object

8 . Create a mapping from DO_Counter to DO_ Counter in the Increment Counter activity. a) Choose the Increment Counter_## activity. b) Choose the Properties tab, then choose the Mapping view. c) Create a mapping from DO_ Counter in the left pane to DO_Counter in the right pane. d) Double-click the DO_Counter on the right side. In the editor, the standard function numeric-add(DO_Counter,l) must be added. Choose OK, then choose Save .

!iii

C92252101-2~1l

[
!~ '"'~· ,.11 ·.s\t.

~~~-.:.....;:

~1$'\1

;j,I

. ..,_Ull.ol

¥0~ - ·

_.,...,_,.., ,-----
r~

•

•

__ ,,,

.

~ ~..{

'

--

-"•-

I ~' "

.!.I IS! t :

a.. --~~l........._.__J~ .....

r:.--

"

-~lei\".~··

·-. --

1-<~ ··'l •i }

-cil!(-~-- _.,..,....
··-

~-...

....... , ~-~"""'

...-~..Ml:O""""

~-""·r~
~-

.r

-

~ s ---... 1-w.

(9' N -· Nli)iVNw

r

~.

I

Figure 449: Settings for the Increment Counter

9 . Implement the condition in CheckCount_##. a) Choose the CheckCount_## object. b) Choose the Properties tab, choose Condition Evaluation view. c) In the Name field of the first row, enter More Messages Needed. d) Choose Edit. In the Condition field, enter numeric-less-equal (DO Counter , 5) .

-

e) Choose OK. f) In the second row, enter Enough Messages in the Name field and select the Default Gate check box.


579


liii

"" ', "

.. D

D

_,,,_

'

CO,.Cb.lnr ,.......,.«~

•

.

J

,x O:·

·~-

-~ .we~.w,Je' ~

...... ...... a

r~ ~I

""

'

'I ~M !.1'.. ~~

'' ~ lft 111.:tillrff! 0' °"'1*'fb~~,,;_· :N°r.utruat.n('µwde

Cheict' (l(l\a'it

Gencrd

3

J°"'"'

tM

<6tdt.IOl'!~ilfte.'*' fCI iM-...., . ~fo. det...t OfilA "- net .-flAJitl.rd. I ~WI

--

Odff I I~

CMdllutlf¥11~

1

•

I

_..,.....,..MMed

l otM~

tl-.ir~,..Cb.tl!llr_.~

0 511

'""

..__

.~·;;;

Figure 450: Settings for t he Check Count Object

10. Implement a mapping in the Start event. a) Choose the Start object. b) Choose the Properties tab, then choose the Output Mapping view. c) Open MT_Aggregator on the left side and DO_Aggregator on the right side. With the left mouse button depressed, implement a mapping between the nodes Header and Items from MT_Aggregator to OO_Aggregator. d) Choose Save. 11. Implement a mapping in the intermediate message event Await next Message_##. a) Choose the object Await next Message_## . b) Choose the Properties tab, then choose the Output Mapping view. c) Open MT_Aggregator on the left side and DO_Aggregator on the right side. With the left mouse button depressed, implement the nodes Header and Items from MT_Aggregator to OO_Aggregator. d) Choose the mapping line Items~ Items . From the context menu choose Assignment~ Append to aggregate the messages.

cy

•

•

·~

--

x

i ......_

-----

· "'·-C-

__. ....."' ,,..,, G~

.

-~---:.J

,

~

'11."w
"'!;,,,_ ,,_ ;:, !JI ~

--

.. ,,,___, l:ll'lool ~

-·-

Ill ~·.··

Figure 451: New Settings for Await Next Message Object

e) Choose Save.

580



12. Configure the mail activity SendMail_## . a) Choose the activity SendMail_##. b) Choose the Properties tab, then choose the To view. c) In the Principals field select Choose. In the Principals screen, select User and in the search field enter Requestor## , then choose Search. Select the user Requestor## from the results list, then choose Add, then choose OK. d) Choose the Mail view. e) Choose Add. In the Name field, enter NoOfMessages . Choose Edit. In the Expression Editor, enter the expression (DO Counter) cast as xsd : string

-

f) Choose OK. Choose Save . • '

......

.._....

--

-

--..--

X>---

•

.

___ ,

--

....

'

'

...

o.r.........- ... - ··-- · ...- - .,.- · ..·"'""'

....'

1..~,......

I

a

1

toiu1

I

.... ~-·

Figure 452: Settings for the Send Mail Activity (1)

g) In the Parameterized Texts area, enter the following information: Field

Value

Subject

{NoOfMessages} successful processed

Message

Hello Requestor , {NoOfMessages} • successful processed. Have a nice day, your BPM process.

h) Choose Save .


581


liii

6

•l

C

Awai

nlxt Mes...

!;;!'- ~Relations l It. Problems) 0 Deploy View C01Y..olei ·~ Infrastructure Console

Properties

~ SendMall

• Vari.ables

General

To

Oeftle the variables you want to use to pa.-arnetetlze the U!:er texts beJov.i

Mail

Variables: Name

I T~I!!!

NoOfMessaQOS

!

string

.!.I

~

0

• Parameterited Texts

Oeme the texts that ..a be shown in the""''" iroox. Use braces({}) to reference tile variables demed'

>ui>Ject: ~ssage:

j jNoOfMesmes} S
••

Figure 453: Settings for t he Send Mail Activity (2)

r~

13. Assign Administrator## as pool administrator. a) Choose the pool header. b) Choose Properties~ Administrators. c) Select Choose one or more UME principals, then select Choose . d) In the search dialog box, choose User. In the search field enter Administrator##. Select Choose . e) Choose the Administrator on the left side, choose Add, then choose OK. 14. Configure inbound communication. a) Open the NetWeaver Administrator (NWA) and log on as user Administrator##. b) Choose the SOA tab, choose Application and Scenario Communication, then choose the Application Communication link. c) In the NWA, configure the inbound communicator for Start_Sl_Aggregator_ Trigger as a service provider.

___

fiii

...

__

Commun~rton: Configuration __ ,

( Appllcatlon ._

-.

-·-

·---

.

11:r..--~1i

·---

.

..........

I

~

•• --~

""" ' ,_

. . .. . , ... j

I

r;;:

-w.... · -4>

.

-

--··-_.....

-

......

~

-

~.

..,.,..,m-....1,M'U

r-

-pl/~ i..J.J)Olo;A.•.~

~-· ........ •b-

·-

Figure 454: The Process in the NetWeaver Adm inist rator

15. Build and deploy the process. a) In the Composite Explorer view, in the PO_Enchanced_## context menu, choose Deploy.

582



b) In the Product Build Required dialog box, choose Build and Deploy. c) When the build and deploy process finishes, choose the Infrastructure Console tab and verify that the process has completed successfully. d) If required, log on with the user Administrator##. 16. Run the process and check the results. a) Start the WSnavigator with the following url: http: I / nwktdcO O. wdf . sap . corp: 50000 / WSNavigato r b) Start your process and send a message. c) Open a new tab in your browser and enter the following url:http : / / nwktdcOO . wdf . sap. c orp : SOOO / nwa . d) In the NetWeaver Administrator, choose Processes .

Operation~

Processes and

Tasks~

Manage

e) Check the Manage Process Monitor for results. The results should appear as shown in the following figures: (ii5 crp.,"- "!~1~ ..K ~

"~"'·' ' , •• ' .,._ ..,_ I

......

t '

'"'"

~~Ml '"'

.uw:::..~1

-~

1

1!'!9's.l °"""'--6Jif:""·T--~I

Strol
l"Pucr-a ••m••·~

~ '"*1~~r;J

~-

I

tmP"°°

I

j

u;;;;;J ·

J wr~ P~

- .:J ' -l lt ~.

-:;.; .,.. ,.. u• ..l i ~f-.

.l

~· · I

:J ~·

,,,, fl,

,,P.

u ,.pr

;ioi..

/ ,

Figure 455: The Start Settings for t he Process

The process starts, The DO_Counter reads 1 and the start message is processed .


583

Unit 9: Process and Task Cust om ization and Extension

liii

Manage Processes: Process Instances SllOW:E [ Rl.lnrJng R Ol:. ., .,_ ___. ... j = j ~&IM FM R-ocest bstant".

. I I 9iaw ProcKS Fbw I SbaM ~* Tub I I oo I

Art.'*°-

ff!por! ~oces' OK.Ii I~

1

AecOll.er

.""

0.l3il5of lht Proct$$ lnsuince Aggregator Fl'o:MS O!linUc>n

~

"

..... ..

AJ:ltrinis!)'~

I'

oo_~

1

Figure 456 : The First Results

The first message appears as shown in the following figure:

liii

--

'
"""' ' se- 'l•Mb·Z·!fl!l

!'tot~,~

'

..

~

,,,..,. •

'

I

MllOIY ~-C0-.111 ~

-I

'

,.

~"

·~~ ·I

'

13 f 69.1 '--s..e...,,,.._1 IOftd] C>..o
,_

IX>_.4wi~!:ir

. .-fl·

...

-b

'

. . .,...,

'

·---

'

.

~-

Figure 457: The First Message

The process waits at the intermediate message event Await next Message.

D

D

x'>E---------

00_AggregatOf

Me ge

enouQh me$S4Qes

x

~------·~ .

Check Counl

more Messaoos neeced A

~I

-...

...

Await nex Message

Iner~

Counltr

Figure 458: Process Flow--Waiting at the Await Next Message Object

584

© Copyrig ht . A ll right s reserved.


f) Send the next message. Note that the DO Counter is 2.

Ootail.s of tho PrOC4M l11$An«1 Aggf8t)a~Of ~ l l'f'oc_HS Dltlntbn .fi(lf'MitlrKQl1

sr. 1'W·'·¥'

....

!•l

"*'lOf't

~ (.eclMlt Olla

'I

fl l'O l

-'!tMb'l'el'llS

@CSMAtd-n~ ~

Figure 459: The Next Results

There are now two items in the object DO_Aggregator. O.tolltot di• Ptoo..M lnSUonc• Aggr•g;.tof

~'oer~

oei•

'

~,.~

ill

'"":«r ,_ come~'19U

J-

i:w1,

--

... - ... -- ........~

~ ~

.

..

~

!ii!

...__.,

~

Figure 460: Final Results


585


Splitter Patterns A splitter pattern is a message routing pattern. It is stateless and available with SAP NetWeaver 7.3 SP04. One common requirement in Enterprise Integration is to break down a single large message into multiple logical smaller messages. The splitter pattern helps in cases where each smaller message might need to be handled in a different way and thus avoids a need to send the larger message to all the destinations. The splitter pattern allows a message to be processed if it contains multiple elements, each of which may have to be processed in a different way. Example 1 To illustrate the splitter pattern, we consider a company that deals with servicing and repairs of laptops. The servicing department receives an order to repair multiple laptops from a customer. The customer has sent for service, a number of laptops manufactured by some of the top manufacturers of personal computers in the world. The service provider has allocated different groups in the service department that takes care of service and repairs of computers manufactured by different vendors. The service request can be routed to a specific group in the service department using the splitter pattern.

liii

• •

Service Request Group2

Figure 461: Illustrat ion of t he Aggregator Pattern

In this example, the service request from the customer triggers the Business System Sl to send a message to SAP Pl (AEX), which is delivered to SAP BPM (Inbound). The large message is split in SAP BPM (Outbound) for different targets (groups in the service provider). SAP BPM sends a confirmation to the original sender Business System Sl once the split has occurred. Example 2--lntegration Scenario

liii

Business Syste m (51)

AEX

Figure 462: Splitter Pattern Integrat ion Scenario using SAP Process Orchestration (1)

This example deals with two integration configurations:

586



•

Integration Configurationl (ICOl) - A message flow can be triggered using a SOAP adapter from Business System Sl that flows through SAP Pl (AEX) to SAP NetWeaver BPM.

•

Integration Configuration2 (IC02) - To send the enriched content back to SAP Pl (AEX) from SAP BPM and store it as a file in your specified folder using File adapter.

Note: The message flow from Business System Sl could also be simulated by using the Web Services Navigator.

@- ;a Start

Ordercount

r--...i!Q

-= Split

Increment

I-~

X >---t 10outbOuncl cal

Check loop

0

...,_.,

End

Figure 463: Splitter Pattern Integration Scenario using SAP Process Orchestration (2)

The steps for modeling the process are enumerated as fo llows: •

The splitter pattern starts with a service interface with count initialized to zero.

•

Count the total number of order items in the order list.

•

Get the current order item from the order list and send the order item to the receiver.

•

Increment the count on the loop. Repeat until there are no more order items.

•

Complete the split process outbound call with type order data on end of loop.

Note: Use the 'XI' service reference instead of 'WS' in the configuration settings of the automated activity. The Sender Component also needs to be specified. Use the SAP Pl Integration Flow Designer to create the configuration objects in SAP Pl.


587



588

•


•


•


•



Unit 9

Learning Assessment

1. What do APls enable you to do with tasks and processes?


D D D D

A Configure tasks and processes at a technical level. B Create business processes at a technical level. C Develop applications that interact with tasks and processes. D Monitor individual task and process status by user

2. The BPMAnalytics dashboard allows access to statistics for processes and tasks in graphical charts. The statistics displayed are based on various t imeframe filters, which can be set by the user. Which of the following can be displayed using the BPMAnalytics dashboard?


D D D D

A Tasks without owner. B Process modeling options. C Escalated tasks. D The number of processes and tasks in error state.

3. The BPM lnbox requires additional administration and portal ro les, comparable to the roles used in the BPM.


D D

True False


589


4. Depending on the products, custom attributes can be set and delivered/transferred in the business processes and then used in the inbox for additional purposes, like assignment, sort, or display.


D D

True False

5. SAPUl5 supports several data sources, such as XML and OData.


D D

True False

6. A process will use the Conditional Start feature, requiring only that a message trigger is used in the start event.


D

True

D

False

7. Enterprise Integration Patterns (EIP) are design patterns that help in solving recurring problems faced in the integration of enterprise applications.


D D

True False

8. The aggregator pattern is a stateful filter that is used in cases where subsequent message processing is contingent upon the successful processing of multiple input messages.


D D

590

True False



9. The splitter pattern does not allow a message to be processed if it contains multiple elements.


D D

True False


591

Unit 9


1.

What do APls enable you to do with tasks and processes?


[Kl

D D D

A Configure tasks and processes at a technical level. B Create business processes at a technical level. C Develop applications that interact with tasks and processes. D Monitor individual task and process status by user

2. The BPMAnalytics dashboard allows access to statistics for processes and tasks in graphical charts. The statistics displayed are based on various timeframe filters, which can be set by the user. Which of the following can be displayed using the BPMAnalytics dashboard?


[Kl

A Tasks without owner.

D

B Process modeling options.

[Kl c [Kl D

Escalated tasks. The number of processes and tasks in error state.

3. The BPM lnbox requires additional administration and portal roles , comparable to the roles used in the BPM.


592

[Kl

True

D

False



4. Depending on the products, custom attributes can be set and delivered/transferred in the business processes and then used in the inbox for additional purposes, like assignment, sort, or display.


0

True

D

False

5. SAPUl5 supports several data sources, such as XML and OData.


0 True D False 6. A process will use the Conditional Start feature, requiring only that a message trigger is used in the start event.


D 0

True False

7. Enterprise Integration Patterns (EIP) are design patterns that help in solving recurring problems faced in the integration of enterprise applications.


0 True D False 8 . The aggregator pattern is a stateful filter that is used in cases where subsequent message processing is contingent upon the successful processing of multiple input messages.


0 True D False


593


9 . The splitter pattern does not allow a message to be processed if it contains multiple elements.


D

True

~ False

594


SAPBPM col10

Recommend Documents